Mitsubishi Electric FX-232ADP, FX-485ADP, FX1N-485-BD User Manual

 N:N Network
 Parallel Link
 Computer Link
 Inverter Communication
 Non-Protocol Communication
 Programming Communication
 Remote Maintenance
FX SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS
USER'S MANUAL
Data Communication Edition
RS-232C Interface
FX3U-232-BD
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
FX3G-232-BD
FX2N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP
FX1N-232-BD
FX0N-232ADP
FX-232ADP
FX2N-232IF
RS-485 Interface
FX3U-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
FX2N-485-BD
FX2NC-485ADP
FX1N-485-BD
FX0N-485ADP
FX-485ADP
RS-485/232C Converter
FX-485PC-IF
RS-422 Interface
FX3U-422-BD
FX3G-422-BD
USB Interface
FX3U-USB-BD
Ethernet
FX3U-ENET-ADP
FX2N-422-BD
FX1N-422-BD
Safety Precaution
(Read these precautions before use.)
Before installation, operation, maintenance or inspection of this product, thoroughly read through and understand
this manual and all of the associated manuals. Also, take care to handle the module properly and safely.
This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories:
and
.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in
death or severe injury.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in
medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.
Depending on the circumstances, procedures indicated by
may also cause severe injury.
It is important to follow all precautions for personal safety.
Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be taken out and read whenever necessary. Always forward it
to the end user.
1. DESIGN PRECAUTIONS
• Make sure to have the following safety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during
external power supply problems or PLC failure.
Otherwise, malfunctions may cause serious accidents.
1) Most importantly, have the following: an emergency stop circuit, a protection circuit, an interlock circuit for
opposite movements (such as normal vs. reverse rotation), and an interlock circuit (to prevent damage to the
equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits).
2) Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error, such as a watchdog timer error, during self-diagnosis, all
outputs are turned off. Also, when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input/output
control block, output control may be disabled.
External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.
3) Note that the output current of the service power supply for sensors varies depending on the model and the
absence/presence of extension blocks. If an overload occurs, the voltage automatically drops, inputs in the
PLC are disabled, and all outputs are turned off.
External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.
4) Note that when an error occurs in a relay, triac or transistor output device, the output could be held either on or off.
For output signals that may lead to serious accidents, external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to
ensure safe machinery operation in such a case.
• To maintain the safety of the programmable controller system against unauthorized access from external devices
via the network, take appropriate measures. To maintain the safety against unauthorized access via the Internet,
take measures such as installing a firewall.
• Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line. As a guideline, lay the
control line at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or power line.
Noise may cause malfunctions.
• Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to the built-in programming port, power connectors, I/O
connectors, communication connectors, or communication cables.
Failure to do so may result in wire damage/breakage or PLC failure.
(1)
Safety Precaution
(Read these precautions before use.)
2. WIRING PRECAUTIONS
• Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
• Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating operation
after installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
• Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents due
to abnormal data written to the PLC under the influence of noise:
1) Do not bundle the main circuit line together with or lay it close to the main circuit, high-voltage line or load line.
Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line
at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or high-voltage lines.
2) Ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable at one point on the PLC. However, do not use common
grounding with heavy electrical systems.
• Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Tighten the screws using a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2 (shaft diameter 6mm (0.24") or less). Make sure that
the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block.
• Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.
3. STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
• Do not touch any terminal while the PLC's power is on.
Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions.
• Before cleaning or retightening terminals, cut off all phases of the power supply externally.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
• Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC, carefully read through this manual
and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation.
An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents.
• Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time.
(i.e. from a programming tool and a GOT)
Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program.
• Do not disassemble or modify the PLC.
Doing so may cause fire, equipment failures, or malfunctions.
For repair, contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
• Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
• Turn of the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the peripheral devices, expansion boards, special
adapters, and expansion memory cassette.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
(2)
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
FX Series Programmable Controllers
User's Manual [Data Communication Edition]
Manual number
JY997D16901
Manual revision
P
Date
11/2017
Foreword
This manual explains the "serial communication" provided for MELSEC-F FX Series Programmable
Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
© 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
1
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Outline Precautions
• This manual provides information for the use of the FX Series Programmable Controllers. The manual has
been written to be used by trained and competent personnel. The definition of such a person or persons is
as follows:
1) Any engineer who is responsible for the planning, design and construction of automatic equipment
using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature, trained and qualified
to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role. These engineers should be fully aware of
all aspects of safety aspects regarding to automated equipment.
2) Any commissioning or maintenance engineer must be of a competent nature, trained and qualified to
the local and national standards required to fulfill the job. These engineers should also be trained in
the use and maintenance of the completed product. This includes being familiar with all associated
manuals and documentation for the product. All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with
established safety practices.
3) All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and
coordinated manner in compliance with established safety practices. The operators should also be
familiar with documentation that is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment.
Note:
The term 'completed equipment' refers to a third party constructed device that contains or uses the
product associated with this manual
• This product has been manufactured as a general-purpose part for general industries, and has not been
designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life.
• Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power, aerospace, medicine
or passenger movement vehicles, consult with Mitsubishi Electric.
• This product has been manufactured under strict quality control. However when installing the product
where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails, install appropriate backup or failsafe
functions into the system.
• When combining this product with other products, please confirm the standards and codes of regulation to
which the user should follow. Moreover, please confirm the compatibility of this product with the system,
machines, and apparatuses to be used.
• If there is doubt at any stage during installation of the product, always consult a professional electrical
engineer who is qualified and trained in the local and national standards. If there is doubt about the
operation or use, please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
• Since the examples within this manual, technical bulletin, catalog, etc. are used as reference; please use it
after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system. Mitsubishi Electric will not accept
responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples.
• The content, specification etc. of this manual may be changed for improvement without notice.
• The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, if you
notice any doubtful point, error, etc., please contact your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.
Registration
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• MODBUS is the registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA.
• Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
• PC-9800 is the registered trademark of NEC Corporation.
• Anywire and ANYWIREASLINK is a trademark of Anywire Corporation.
• LONWORKS is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
• DeviceNet is a trademark of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vender Association, Inc.).
• Phillips is a registered trademark of Phillips Screw Company.
• Short Mail are trademarks or registered trademarks of NTT DOCOMO, INC.
• The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or
trademarks of each company.
2
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................. (1)
A.Common Items
1. Introduction
A-1
1.1 Communication Types .................................................................................................................A-1
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types...........................................................................A-3
1.2.1 CC-Link Network ..........................................................................................................................A-3
1.2.2 Ethernet communication...............................................................................................................A-6
1.2.3 N:N Network .................................................................................................................................A-7
1.2.4 Parallel Link ..................................................................................................................................A-8
1.2.5 Computer Link ..............................................................................................................................A-9
1.2.6 Inverter Communication .............................................................................................................A-10
1.2.7 Non-protocol Communication .....................................................................................................A-11
1.2.8 MODBUS Communication..........................................................................................................A-12
1.2.9 Programming Communication ....................................................................................................A-13
1.2.10 Remote Maintenance ...............................................................................................................A-16
1.2.11 CC-Link/LT Network .................................................................................................................A-17
1.2.12 AnyWireASLINK .......................................................................................................................A-18
1.2.13 AS-i system ..............................................................................................................................A-19
1.2.14 Internet Mail Sending................................................................................................................A-20
1.2.15 Short Mail Sending ...................................................................................................................A-21
2. Communication Types and Communication Equipment
A-23
2.1 Relationship between Equipment and Communication Types...................................................A-23
2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map ............................................................................A-24
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
FX3U and FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) PLCs........................................................................................A-24
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLCs .........................................................................................................A-28
FX3G and FX3GC PLCs..............................................................................................................A-30
FX3S PLC ...................................................................................................................................A-32
FX2N and FX2NC PLCs ..............................................................................................................A-34
FX1S, FX1N, and FX1NC PLCs...................................................................................................A-36
FX0N PLCs .................................................................................................................................A-38
FX1, FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0 and FX0S PLCs (reference)..............................................................A-38
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram) ....................................................A-40
2.3.1 How to look at combination pages..............................................................................................A-40
2.3.2 For FX3U Series .........................................................................................................................A-41
2.3.3 For FX3UC(D, DS, DSS) Series..................................................................................................A-43
2.3.4 For FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) ............................................................................................................A-45
2.3.5 For FX3G Series .........................................................................................................................A-47
2.3.6 For FX3GC Series.......................................................................................................................A-50
2.3.7 For FX3S Series .........................................................................................................................A-52
2.3.8 For FX2N Series .........................................................................................................................A-53
2.3.9 For FX2NC Series .......................................................................................................................A-55
2.3.10 For FX1N Series .......................................................................................................................A-57
2.3.11 For FX1NC Series .....................................................................................................................A-59
2.3.12 For FX1S Series .......................................................................................................................A-61
2.3.13 For FX0N Series .......................................................................................................................A-62
2.3.14 For FX2(FX) and FX2C Series (reference) ...............................................................................A-64
3
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
3. Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series
A-65
3.1 Setting Method ...........................................................................................................................A-65
3.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2) ...............................................A-67
3.2.1 Operating procedure...................................................................................................................A-67
3.2.2 Correspondence between parameter setting and each communication type.............................A-68
3.3 Communication Setting in Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN) ......................................................A-69
3.3.1 Operating procedure...................................................................................................................A-69
3.3.2 Correspondence between parameter setting and each communication type.............................A-71
3.4 Extension of Ports (For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC) ..............................................................A-72
3.4.1 Extension of Port (For FX3G, FX3GC PLC) ................................................................................A-72
3.4.2 Extension of Port (For FX3U, FX3UC PLC).................................................................................A-74
3.4.3 Limitation when ch1 and ch2 are used at the same time ...........................................................A-75
4. Version Number
A-76
4.1 Manufacturer's serial number check method .............................................................................A-76
4.1.1 Checking the nameplate.............................................................................................................A-76
4.1.2 Checking the front of the product ...............................................................................................A-77
4.2 Version check.............................................................................................................................A-77
5. Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and Acquisition Method)
A-78
5.1 Rank and Use Method of This Manual.......................................................................................A-78
5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals ................................................................................................A-79
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
Manual for communication types in FX PLCs.............................................................................A-79
Manuals related to FX PLCs.......................................................................................................A-79
Communication equipment (option)............................................................................................A-82
Related options for communication ............................................................................................A-84
6. Abbreviations, Generic Names and Terms Used in This Manual
4
A-85
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
B. N:N Network
1. Outline
B-3
1.1 Outline of System.........................................................................................................................B-3
1.2 Procedures Before Operation ......................................................................................................B-4
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC ...................................................................................B-5
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
Applicable versions.......................................................................................................................B-5
Version check ...............................................................................................................................B-5
How to look at the manufacturer's serial number .........................................................................B-5
Products whose production was stopped .....................................................................................B-5
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability....................................................................................................B-6
1.4.1 For applicable versions.................................................................................................................B-6
1.4.2 For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model) ..........................................................B-8
2. Specifications
B-9
2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference) .................................................................................B-9
2.2 Link Specifications .....................................................................................................................B-10
2.2.1 Link patterns and number of link points in each FX Series ........................................................B-10
2.2.2 Link time .....................................................................................................................................B-11
3. System Configuration and Equipment Selection
B-12
3.1 System Configuration.................................................................................................................B-12
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment..................................................................B-13
4. Wiring
B-18
4.1 Wiring Procedure .......................................................................................................................B-18
4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors ..................................................................................B-19
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
Twisted pair cable.......................................................................................................................B-19
10BASE-T cable .........................................................................................................................B-19
Connecting cables ......................................................................................................................B-20
Connecting terminal resistors .....................................................................................................B-22
4.3 Connection Diagram ..................................................................................................................B-23
4.4 Grounding ..................................................................................................................................B-25
5. Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller
B-26
5.1 Check Procedure .......................................................................................................................B-26
5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2) ...............................................B-27
5.2.1 Operating procedure...................................................................................................................B-27
5.3 Communication Settings Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN) ..............................................B-28
5.3.1 Operating procedure...................................................................................................................B-28
6. Test Run (Communication Test)
B-29
6.1 Test Procedure...........................................................................................................................B-29
6.2 Creating Programs for the Communication Testing ...................................................................B-31
6.2.1 Creating a program for the master station..................................................................................B-31
6.2.2 Creating a program for each slave station..................................................................................B-32
5
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
7. Creating Programs
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
B-33
Checking Contents of Related Devices......................................................................................B-33
Creating Programs for Master Station (Station No. 0) ...............................................................B-35
Creating Programs for Slave Station (Station No. "n")...............................................................B-38
Cautions on Program Creation...................................................................................................B-40
8. Practical Program Examples
B-41
8.1 Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2) .................................................................................................B-41
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.5
8.1.6
System configuration example ...................................................................................................B-41
Contents of operations and corresponding program numbers ...................................................B-41
Setting contents..........................................................................................................................B-42
Setting program for master station .............................................................................................B-42
Setting program for slave station (No. 1)....................................................................................B-44
Setting program for slave station (No. 2)....................................................................................B-46
9. Troubleshooting
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
B-48
Checking FX PLC Version Applicability .....................................................................................B-48
Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication ......................................................B-48
Checking Installation and Wiring................................................................................................B-48
Checking Sequence Program ....................................................................................................B-48
Checking Setting Contents and Errors.......................................................................................B-50
Checking Absence/Presence of Data Transfer Errors ...............................................................B-50
9.6.1 Check while data transfer sequence is being executed .............................................................B-50
9.6.2 Checking data transfer sequence errors ....................................................................................B-51
9.6.3 Checking error codes .................................................................................................................B-51
10. Related Data
B-54
10.1 Related Device List ..................................................................................................................B-54
10.1.1 For FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs....................B-54
10.1.2 For FX0N and FX1S PLCs ........................................................................................................B-58
10.2 Details of Related Devices .......................................................................................................B-60
10.2.1 Parameter setting [M8038] .......................................................................................................B-60
10.2.2 Channel setting [M8179]...........................................................................................................B-60
10.2.3 Serial communication error [M8063 and M8438]......................................................................B-60
10.2.4 Data transfer sequence error [M8138 to M8190] [M504 to M511]............................................B-61
10.2.5 Data transfer sequence ON [M8191] [M503]............................................................................B-61
10.2.6 Serial communication error code [D8063 and D8438]..............................................................B-61
10.2.7 Corresponding station number settings status [D8173]............................................................B-62
10.2.8 Slave station quantity setting status [D8174]............................................................................B-62
10.2.9 Refresh range setting status [D8175] .......................................................................................B-62
10.2.10 Station number settings [D8176] ............................................................................................B-62
10.2.11 Slave station quantity setting [D8177] ....................................................................................B-63
10.2.12 Refresh range setting [D8178]................................................................................................B-63
10.2.13 Number of retries [D8179] ......................................................................................................B-64
10.2.14 Monitoring time setting [D8180]..............................................................................................B-64
10.2.15 Present link scan time [D8201] [D201] ...................................................................................B-64
10.2.16 Maximum link scan time [D8202] [D202] ................................................................................B-65
10.2.17 Data transfer sequence error count [D8203 to D8210] [D203 to D210] .................................B-65
10.2.18 Data transfer error code [D8211 to D8218] [D211 to D218] ...................................................B-66
10.2.19 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439] .........................................................................B-67
6
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
C. Parallel Link
1. Outline
C-3
1.1 Outline of System........................................................................................................................ C-3
1.2 Procedures Before Operation ..................................................................................................... C-4
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC .................................................................................. C-5
1.3.1 Applicable versions...................................................................................................................... C-5
1.3.2 Version check .............................................................................................................................. C-5
1.3.3 Products whose production was stopped .................................................................................... C-5
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability................................................................................................... C-6
1.4.1 For applicable versions................................................................................................................ C-6
1.4.2 For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model) ......................................................... C-8
2. Specifications
C-9
2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference) ................................................................................ C-9
2.2 Link Specifications .................................................................................................................... C-10
2.2.1 PLC communication type applicability status ............................................................................ C-10
2.2.2 Link time .................................................................................................................................... C-10
2.3 Link Device Numbers and Number of Points ............................................................................ C-11
2.3.1 For FX0N, FX1S and FX3S Series ............................................................................................. C-11
2.3.2 For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC Series.... C-12
3. System Configuration and Selection
C-13
3.1 System Configuration................................................................................................................ C-13
3.1.1 Rule for connection.................................................................................................................... C-13
3.2 Configuration of Each Group..................................................................................................... C-14
3.3 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment................................................................. C-18
4. Wiring
C-24
4.1 Wiring Procedure ...................................................................................................................... C-24
4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors ................................................................................. C-25
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
Twisted pair cable...................................................................................................................... C-25
10BASE-T cable ........................................................................................................................ C-25
Connecting cables ..................................................................................................................... C-26
Optical fiber cable...................................................................................................................... C-27
Connecting terminal resistors .................................................................................................... C-28
4.3 Connection Diagram ................................................................................................................. C-29
4.3.1 For FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs .................................................................... C-29
4.3.2 For FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N and FX2NC PLCs .................................................................... C-30
4.3.3 For FX2(FX) and FX2C PLCs .................................................................................................... C-31
4.4 Grounding ................................................................................................................................. C-31
5. Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller
C-32
5.1 Check Procedure ...................................................................................................................... C-32
5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2) .............................................. C-33
5.2.1 Operating procedure.................................................................................................................. C-33
5.3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)............................................... C-34
5.3.1 Operating procedure.................................................................................................................. C-34
7
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
6. Test Run (Communication Test)
C-35
6.1 Test Procedure.......................................................................................................................... C-35
6.2 Creating Programs for the Communication Test....................................................................... C-36
6.2.1 For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC Series....... C-36
6.2.2 For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series ................................................................................................ C-37
7. Creating Programs
C-38
7.1 Regular Parallel Link Mode ....................................................................................................... C-38
7.1.1 Checking contents of related devices........................................................................................ C-38
7.1.2 Creating programs for master station ........................................................................................ C-40
7.1.3 Creating programs for slave station........................................................................................... C-41
7.2 High Speed Parallel Link Mode................................................................................................. C-42
7.2.1 Checking contents of related devices........................................................................................ C-42
7.2.2 Creating programs for master station ........................................................................................ C-44
7.2.3 Creating programs for slave station........................................................................................... C-45
7.3 Cautions on Program Creation.................................................................................................. C-46
8. Practical Program Examples
C-47
8.1 Practical Example 1 (Regular Parallel Link Mode).................................................................... C-47
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
System configuration example .................................................................................................. C-47
Setting contents......................................................................................................................... C-47
Program for master station ........................................................................................................ C-48
Program for slave station........................................................................................................... C-48
9. Troubleshooting
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
C-49
Checking FX PLC Version Applicability .................................................................................... C-49
Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication ..................................................... C-49
Checking Installation and Wiring............................................................................................... C-49
Checking Sequence Program ................................................................................................... C-49
Checking Absence/Presence of Errors ..................................................................................... C-51
10. Related Data
C-52
10.1 Related Device List ................................................................................................................. C-52
10.2 Details of Related Devices ...................................................................................................... C-53
10.2.1 Parallel link master station declare [M8070]............................................................................ C-53
10.2.2 Channel setting [M8178].......................................................................................................... C-53
10.2.3 Parallel link slave station declare [M8071] .............................................................................. C-53
10.2.4 High-speed parallel link mode [M8162] ................................................................................... C-53
10.2.5 Parallel link ON [M8072].......................................................................................................... C-54
10.2.6 Parallel link setting error [M8073] ............................................................................................ C-54
10.2.7 Serial communication error [M8063 and M8438]..................................................................... C-54
10.2.8 Error judgement time setting [D8070]...................................................................................... C-54
10.2.9 Serial communication error code [D8063 and D8438]............................................................. C-55
10.2.10 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439] ........................................................................ C-55
8
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
D. Computer Link
1. Outline
D-3
1.1 Outline of System........................................................................................................................ D-3
1.2 Procedures Before Operation ..................................................................................................... D-4
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC .................................................................................. D-5
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
Applicable versions...................................................................................................................... D-5
Version check .............................................................................................................................. D-5
How to look at the manufacturer's serial number ........................................................................ D-5
Products whose production was stopped .................................................................................... D-5
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability................................................................................................... D-6
1.4.1 For applicable versions................................................................................................................ D-6
1.4.2 For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model) ......................................................... D-8
2. Specifications
D-9
2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference) ................................................................................ D-9
2.2 Link Specifications .................................................................................................................... D-10
2.2.1 Applicable commands and number of device points ................................................................. D-10
2.2.2 Applicable device ranges........................................................................................................... D-11
2.2.3 Link time .................................................................................................................................... D-13
3. System Configuration and Equipment Selection
D-14
3.1 System Configuration................................................................................................................ D-14
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment................................................................. D-15
3.2.1 For communication in accordance with RS-232C ..................................................................... D-15
3.2.2 For communication in accordance with RS-485 ........................................................................ D-21
4. Wiring
D-27
4.1 Wiring Procedure ...................................................................................................................... D-28
4.2 Selecting Connection Method ................................................................................................... D-29
4.2.1 For communication in accordance with RS-232C (1-to-1 connection) ...................................... D-29
4.2.2 For communication in accordance with RS-485 (RS-422) (1-to-N connection)......................... D-29
4.3 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors (RS-485).................................................................. D-30
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
Twisted pair cable...................................................................................................................... D-30
10BASE-T cable ........................................................................................................................ D-30
Connecting cables ..................................................................................................................... D-31
Connecting terminal resistors .................................................................................................... D-33
4.4 Connection Diagram for RS-232C ............................................................................................ D-34
4.4.1 Connection diagram between FX PLC and personal computer ................................................ D-34
4.4.2 Connection diagram between FX-485PC-IF and personal computer........................................ D-34
4.5 Connection Diagram for RS-485 and RS-422........................................................................... D-35
4.5.1 One-pair wiring .......................................................................................................................... D-35
4.5.2 Two-pair wiring .......................................................................................................................... D-37
4.5.3 Switching of 1 pair / 2 paired wiring (FX3G-485-BD-RJ) ........................................................... D-39
4.6 Grounding ................................................................................................................................ D-39
9
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
5. Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller
D-40
5.1 Communication Setting Methods .............................................................................................. D-40
5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2) .............................................. D-41
5.2.1 Operating procedure.................................................................................................................. D-41
5.3 Communication Settings Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN) ............................................. D-43
5.3.1 Operating procedure.................................................................................................................. D-43
6. Control Procedures and Setting Methods
D-45
6.1 Data Flow by Link...................................................................................................................... D-45
6.2 Important Points in Computer Link............................................................................................ D-46
6.2.1 Operations of PLC caused by data transfer .............................................................................. D-46
6.3 How to Understand Control Procedure ..................................................................................... D-47
6.4 Basic Formats of Dedicated Protocol........................................................................................ D-47
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
Control procedure format 1........................................................................................................ D-48
Control procedure format 4........................................................................................................ D-49
Contents of set items in each control procedure (protocol) ....................................................... D-50
Time-out time setting ................................................................................................................. D-53
6.5 Transfer Sequence Time Chart and Communication Time....................................................... D-54
6.5.1 When computer reads data from PLC ....................................................................................... D-54
6.5.2 When computer writes data to PLC........................................................................................... D-54
6.5.3 Transfer time in transfer sequence............................................................................................ D-55
6.6 Transfer Data in Character Area ............................................................................................... D-56
6.6.1 When bit device memory is read or written ............................................................................... D-56
6.6.2 When word device memory is read or written ........................................................................... D-57
7. Commands
D-58
7.1 BR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Bit Units]............................................................... D-59
7.2 WR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Word Units] ......................................................... D-60
7.3 QR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Word Units] .......................................................... D-62
7.4 BW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Bit Units] .............................................................. D-64
7.5 WW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Word Units]......................................................... D-65
7.6 QW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Word Units] ......................................................... D-67
7.7 BT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Bit Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)] ............................. D-69
7.8 WT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Word Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)]........................ D-70
7.9 QT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Word Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)] ........................ D-72
7.10 RR/RS Command [Remotely Sets PLC to RUN/STOP Mode] ............................................... D-73
7.10.1 Contents of remote control to set RUN or STOP mode........................................................... D-73
7.10.2 Condition validating remote control to set RUN or STOP mode.............................................. D-73
7.10.3 Remote control specification method and specification examples .......................................... D-74
7.11 PC Command [Reads PLC Model Name]............................................................................... D-75
7.11.1 PLC model name (CPU) and read contents ............................................................................ D-75
7.11.2 Control procedure specification method and specification example........................................ D-75
7.12 GW Command [Offers Global Function] ................................................................................. D-77
7.12.1 Contents of control .................................................................................................................. D-77
7.12.2 Global function control procedure specification method and specification example ............... D-77
7.13 On-demand Function .............................................................................................................. D-78
7.13.1 Special data registers and special auxiliary relays used in on-demand function..................... D-78
7.13.2 Control procedures in on-demand function ............................................................................. D-80
7.13.3 On-demand function specification method and specification examples .................................. D-82
7.14 TT Command [Loop-back Test] .............................................................................................. D-85
10
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
8. Troubleshooting
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
D-86
Checking FX PLC Version Applicability .................................................................................... D-86
Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication ..................................................... D-86
Checking Installation and Wiring............................................................................................... D-86
Checking Sequence Program ................................................................................................... D-86
Checking Error Codes............................................................................................................... D-88
8.5.1 Error codes when NAK is sent................................................................................................... D-88
8.5.2 Error codes in PLC .................................................................................................................... D-89
9. Related Data
D-90
9.1 Related Device List ................................................................................................................... D-90
9.2 Details of Related Devices ........................................................................................................ D-92
9.2.1 Serial communication error [M8063 and M8438]....................................................................... D-92
9.2.2 Communication setting keep [M8120] ....................................................................................... D-92
9.2.3 Global function ON [M8126 and M8426] ................................................................................... D-92
9.2.4 On-demand send processing [M8127 and M8427] ................................................................... D-92
9.2.5 On-demand error flag [M8128 and M8428] ............................................................................... D-93
9.2.6 On-demand data word/byte changeover [M8129 and M8429] .................................................. D-93
9.2.7 Serial communication error code [D8063 and D8438]............................................................... D-93
9.2.8 Communication format setting [D8120 and D8420]................................................................... D-94
9.2.9 Station number settings [D8121 and D8421]............................................................................. D-95
9.2.10 On-demand data head device number specification [D8127 and D8427] ............................... D-96
9.2.11 On-demand data quantity specification [D8128 and D8428] ................................................... D-96
9.2.12 Time-out time setting [D8129 and D8429]............................................................................... D-97
9.2.13 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439] .......................................................................... D-97
9.3 Communication Setting Method Using Sequence Program...................................................... D-98
9.3.1 Setting procedure ...................................................................................................................... D-98
9.3.2 Caution on communication setting using sequence program.................................................... D-98
9.4 ASCII Code Table ..................................................................................................................... D-99
11
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
E. Inverter Communication
1. Outline
E-3
1.1 Outline of System.........................................................................................................................E-3
1.2 Procedures Before Operation ......................................................................................................E-4
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC ...................................................................................E-5
1.3.1 For applicable versions.................................................................................................................E-5
1.3.2 Version check ...............................................................................................................................E-5
1.3.3 How to look at the manufacturer's serial number .........................................................................E-5
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability....................................................................................................E-6
1.4.1 For applicable versions.................................................................................................................E-6
1.4.2 For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model) ..........................................................E-7
2. Specifications
E-8
2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference) .................................................................................E-8
2.2 Connectable Mitsubishi Electric General-purpose Inverters ........................................................E-8
2.3 Link Specifications .......................................................................................................................E-9
2.3.1 When monitoring inverter operations (PLC  inverter)................................................................E-9
2.3.2 When controlling inverter operations (PLC  inverter) ................................................................E-9
2.3.3 Parameters (PLC  inverter).......................................................................................................E-9
2.4 Execution Times in Inverter Communication Instructions ..........................................................E-10
2.4.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................E-10
2.4.2 Calculation method.....................................................................................................................E-12
2.4.3 Calculation example ...................................................................................................................E-14
3. System Configuration and Selection
E-16
3.1 System Configuration.................................................................................................................E-16
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment..................................................................E-18
4. Wiring
E-23
4.1 Wiring Procedure .......................................................................................................................E-24
4.2 Selecting Cables and Connection Devices ................................................................................E-25
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
S500, E500, A500, F500, V500, D700 and E700 Series (PU connector) ..................................E-25
A500, F500 and V500 Series (FR-A5NR) ..................................................................................E-26
F800, A800, F700 and A700 Series (built-in RS-485 terminal) ..................................................E-27
E700 Series (FR-E7TR) .............................................................................................................E-28
4.3 Connection Cables.....................................................................................................................E-29
4.3.1 10BASE-T cable .........................................................................................................................E-29
4.3.2 Twisted pair cable (recommended) ............................................................................................E-29
4.3.3 Connecting cables ......................................................................................................................E-30
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
Connection Devices (RJ45 Connector and Distributor) .............................................................E-31
Connecting Terminal Resistors ..................................................................................................E-32
Wiring a Shielding Wire (Class-D grounding).............................................................................E-33
Connector in Inverter..................................................................................................................E-34
Connection Diagram ..................................................................................................................E-36
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.8.3
4.8.4
4.8.5
4.8.6
For S500, E500, A500, F500 , V500 and D700 Series (PU connector) .....................................E-36
For A500, F500 and V500 Series (FR-A5NR) ...........................................................................E-38
For E700 Series (PU connector) ................................................................................................E-39
For E700 Series (FR-E7TR) .......................................................................................................E-43
For F800, A800, F700 and A700 Series (built-in RS-485 terminal)............................................E-46
Switching of 1 pair / 2 paired wiring (FX3G-485-BD-RJ) ............................................................E-47
4.9 Grounding ..................................................................................................................................E-47
12
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
5. Communication Setting in Inverter
E-48
5.1 Communication Port and Applicable Parameters ......................................................................E-48
5.2 S500 Series (When Connected to RS-485 Port)........................................................................E-50
5.2.1 Contents of parameter setting ....................................................................................................E-50
5.2.2 Parameter setting method (reference)........................................................................................E-51
5.3 E500 Series (When Connected to PU Port)...............................................................................E-53
5.3.1 Contents of parameter setting ....................................................................................................E-53
5.3.2 Parameter setting method (reference)........................................................................................E-54
5.4 V500, F500 and A500 Series (Connection to PU Port)..............................................................E-56
5.4.1 Contents of parameter setting ....................................................................................................E-56
5.4.2 Parameter setting method (reference)........................................................................................E-57
5.5 V500, F500 and A500 Series (Connection to FR-A5NR)...........................................................E-59
5.5.1 Contents of parameter setting ....................................................................................................E-59
5.5.2 Parameter setting method (reference)........................................................................................E-59
5.6 E700, D700 Series (when PU port, FR-E7TR is connected) .....................................................E-60
5.6.1 Contents of parameter setting ....................................................................................................E-60
5.6.2 Parameter setting method (reference)........................................................................................E-62
5.7 F700 and A700 Series (when built-in RS-485 terminal is connected)........................................E-64
5.7.1 Contents of parameter setting ....................................................................................................E-64
5.7.2 Parameter setting method (reference)........................................................................................E-65
5.8 F800 and A800 Series (when built-in RS-485 terminal is connected)........................................E-67
5.8.1 Contents of parameter setting ....................................................................................................E-67
5.8.2 Parameter setting method (reference)........................................................................................E-68
5.9 Cautions on Setting....................................................................................................................E-69
6. Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller
E-70
6.1 Parameter Assigning Method.....................................................................................................E-70
6.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2) ...............................................E-71
6.2.1 Operating procedure...................................................................................................................E-71
6.3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)................................................E-73
6.3.1 Operating procedure...................................................................................................................E-73
7. Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)
E-75
7.1 Checking Contents of Related Devices......................................................................................E-75
7.2 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions ............................................................E-76
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
Inverter communication types (EXTR K10 to K13).....................................................................E-76
Function and operation...............................................................................................................E-76
Instruction completion and error flag operation ..........................................................................E-78
Cautions on programming ..........................................................................................................E-80
7.3 Inverter Operation Monitoring Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K10].....................................E-81
7.3.1 Function and operation...............................................................................................................E-81
7.3.2 Inverter instruction codes ...........................................................................................................E-81
7.4 Inverter Operation Control Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K11]..........................................E-82
7.4.1 Function and operation...............................................................................................................E-82
7.4.2 Inverter instruction codes ...........................................................................................................E-82
7.5 Inverter Parameter Reading Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K12] .......................................E-83
7.5.1 Function and operation...............................................................................................................E-83
7.5.2 Inverter parameter number.........................................................................................................E-83
7.5.3 Program example of "second parameter specification code" .....................................................E-83
7.6 Inverter Parameter Writing Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K13] .........................................E-84
7.6.1 Function and operation...............................................................................................................E-84
7.6.2 Inverter parameter number.........................................................................................................E-84
7.6.3 Program example of "second parameter specification code" .....................................................E-84
13
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
7.7 Second Parameter Specification Codes ....................................................................................E-85
7.7.1 S500 Series ................................................................................................................................E-85
7.7.2 E500 Series ................................................................................................................................E-85
7.7.3 A500 Series ................................................................................................................................E-86
8. Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)
E-87
8.1 Practical Example 1 ...................................................................................................................E-87
8.1.1 System configuration example ...................................................................................................E-87
8.1.2 Contents of operation .................................................................................................................E-87
8.1.3 Program example .......................................................................................................................E-88
8.2 Practical Example 2 ...................................................................................................................E-91
8.2.1 System configuration example ...................................................................................................E-91
8.2.2 Contents of operation .................................................................................................................E-91
8.2.3 Program example .......................................................................................................................E-92
9. Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
E-96
9.1 Differences between FX2N, FX2NC and FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC ...........................E-96
9.2 Contents of Related Devices......................................................................................................E-97
9.3 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions ............................................................E-98
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
Inverter communication types (IVCK to IVMC)...........................................................................E-98
Function and operation...............................................................................................................E-98
Instruction completion and error flag operation ........................................................................E-100
Cautions on programming ........................................................................................................E-102
9.4 Inverter Operation Monitoring Instruction (PLCInverter) [FNC270 / IVCK]...........................E-104
9.4.1 Function and operation.............................................................................................................E-104
9.4.2 Inverter instruction codes .........................................................................................................E-104
9.5 Inverter Operation Control Instruction (PLCInverter) [FNC271 / IVDR]................................E-105
9.5.1 Function and operation.............................................................................................................E-105
9.5.2 Inverter instruction codes .........................................................................................................E-105
9.6 Inverter Parameter Reading (PLCInverter) [FNC272 / IVRD]...............................................E-106
9.6.1 Function and operation.............................................................................................................E-106
9.6.2 Inverter instruction codes .........................................................................................................E-106
9.6.3 Program example of "second parameter specification code" ...................................................E-106
9.7 Inverter Parameter Writing (PLCInverter) [FNC273 / IVWR] ................................................E-108
9.7.1 Function and operation.............................................................................................................E-108
9.7.2 Inverter instruction codes .........................................................................................................E-108
9.7.3 Program example of "second parameter specification code" ...................................................E-108
9.8 Inverter Parameter Batch Writing (PLCInverter) [FNC274 / IVBWR] ...................................E-109
9.8.1 Function and operation.............................................................................................................E-109
9.9 Controls Operations and Monitors Operations of an Inverter with a Single
Command(PLCInverter)[FNC275 / IVMC]............................................................................E-110
9.9.1 Function and operation.............................................................................................................E-110
9.9.2 Applicable inverters ..................................................................................................................E-111
9.9.3 Applicable programming tool ....................................................................................................E-111
9.10 Second Parameter Specification Codes ................................................................................E-112
9.10.1 S500 Series ............................................................................................................................E-112
9.10.2 E500 Series ............................................................................................................................E-112
9.10.3 A500 Series ............................................................................................................................E-113
9.10.4 F500 Series ............................................................................................................................E-114
9.10.5 V500 Series ............................................................................................................................E-114
9.10.6 F700 Series ............................................................................................................................E-114
9.10.7 A700 Series ............................................................................................................................E-115
9.10.8 E700 and D700 Series ...........................................................................................................E-116
9.10.9 F800 Series ............................................................................................................................E-117
9.10.10 A800 Series ..........................................................................................................................E-118
14
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
10. Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
E-119
10.1 Practical Example 1 ...............................................................................................................E-119
10.1.1 System configuration example ...............................................................................................E-119
10.1.2 Contents of operation .............................................................................................................E-119
10.1.3 Program example ...................................................................................................................E-120
10.2 Practical Example 2 ...............................................................................................................E-125
10.2.1 System configuration example ...............................................................................................E-125
10.2.2 Contents of operation .............................................................................................................E-125
10.2.3 Program example ...................................................................................................................E-126
11. Troubleshooting
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
E-134
Checking FX PLC Version Applicability (FX2N and FX2NC Series) .......................................E-134
Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication ..................................................E-134
Checking Installation ..............................................................................................................E-134
Checking Sequence Program ................................................................................................E-134
11.4.1 Checking inverter operation status .........................................................................................E-135
11.5 Checking Absence/Presence of Errors ..................................................................................E-136
11.6 Error Codes............................................................................................................................E-136
12. Related Data
E-139
12.1 Related Device List (FX2N, FX2NC) .......................................................................................E-139
12.2 Details of Related Devices (FX2N, FX2NC)............................................................................E-140
12.2.1 Instruction execution complete [M8029] .................................................................................E-140
12.2.2 Extension ROM cassette check [M8104]................................................................................E-140
12.2.3 Communication port busy [M8155].........................................................................................E-140
12.2.4 Communication error or parameter error [M8156]..................................................................E-140
12.2.5 Communication error latch [M8157] .......................................................................................E-141
12.2.6 Extension ROM cassette type code [D8104]..........................................................................E-141
12.2.7 Extension ROM cassette version [D8105]..............................................................................E-141
12.2.8 Inverter response waiting time [D8154] ..................................................................................E-141
12.2.9 Step number of instruction using communication port [D8155] ..............................................E-141
12.2.10 Error code [D8156] ...............................................................................................................E-142
12.2.11 Error occurrence step number latch [D8157]........................................................................E-143
12.3 Related Device List (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC) ....................................................E-144
12.4 Details of Related Devices (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC) .........................................E-145
12.4.1 Instruction execution complete [M8029] .................................................................................E-145
12.4.2 Serial communication error [M8063 and M8438]....................................................................E-145
12.4.3 Inverter communication ON [M8151 and M8156]...................................................................E-145
12.4.4 Inverter communication error [M8152, M8153, M8157 and M8158].......................................E-146
12.4.5 IVBWR instruction error [M8154 and M8159] (only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs) ....................E-146
12.4.6 Serial communication error code [D8063 and D8438]............................................................E-146
12.4.7 Inverter response waiting time [D8150 and D8155] ...............................................................E-146
12.4.8 Step number of instruction using communication port [D8151 and D8156] ...........................E-147
12.4.9 Inverter communication error code [D8152 and D8157].........................................................E-147
12.4.10 Inverter communication error occurrence step [D8153 and D8158].....................................E-150
12.4.11 IVBWR instruction error parameter number [D8154 and D8159]
(only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)...........................................................................................E-150
12.4.12 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439] .......................................................................E-150
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List ........................................................................................E-151
12.5.1
12.5.2
12.5.3
12.5.4
Parameters in V500, F500, A500, E500, and S500 Series ....................................................E-151
Parameters in F700, A700, E700 and D700 Series ...............................................................E-173
Parameters in F800 and A800 Series ....................................................................................E-190
Communication parameters ...................................................................................................E-208
15
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
F.Non-Protocol Communication (RS/RS2 Instruction)
1. Outline
F-3
1.1 Outline of System.........................................................................................................................F-3
1.2 Procedures Before Operation ......................................................................................................F-7
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC ...................................................................................F-8
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
Applicable versions.......................................................................................................................F-8
Version check ...............................................................................................................................F-8
How to look at the manufacturer's serial number .........................................................................F-8
Products whose production was stopped .....................................................................................F-8
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability....................................................................................................F-9
1.4.1 For applicable versions.................................................................................................................F-9
1.4.2 For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model) ........................................................F-11
2. Specifications
F-12
2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference) ...............................................................................F-12
2.2 Data Communication Specifications ..........................................................................................F-13
2.2.1 Communication type applicability in PLC ...................................................................................F-13
2.3 Number of Transfer Data ...........................................................................................................F-14
3. System Configuration and Selection
F-15
3.1 System Configuration.................................................................................................................F-15
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment..................................................................F-16
3.2.1 For communication in accordance with RS-232C ......................................................................F-16
3.2.2 For communication in accordance with RS-485 .........................................................................F-22
4. Wiring
F-27
4.1 Wiring Procedure .......................................................................................................................F-27
4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors ..................................................................................F-28
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
When using ch0 in FX3G, FX3GC PLC .......................................................................................F-28
Twisted pair cable.......................................................................................................................F-28
10BASE-T cable .........................................................................................................................F-29
Connecting cables ......................................................................................................................F-30
Connecting terminal resistors .....................................................................................................F-32
4.3 Connection Diagram ..................................................................................................................F-33
4.3.1 Connector pin arrangement in communication equipment operating in accordance
with RS-232C .............................................................................................................................F-33
4.3.2 Wiring for communication in accordance with RS-232C ............................................................F-33
4.3.3 Wiring for communication in accordance with RS-485 ...............................................................F-35
4.4 Grounding ..................................................................................................................................F-39
5. Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller
F-40
5.1 Communication Setting Method Mechanism..............................................................................F-40
5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2) ...............................................F-41
5.2.1 Operating procedure...................................................................................................................F-41
5.3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)................................................F-43
5.3.1 Operating procedure...................................................................................................................F-43
16
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
6. Creating Programs (RS Instruction)
F-45
6.1 Checking Contents of Related Devices......................................................................................F-45
6.2 How to Use RS Instruction .........................................................................................................F-46
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
Applicable frames .......................................................................................................................F-46
Function and operation...............................................................................................................F-47
Send/receive data and amount of data.......................................................................................F-48
Operation when data is sent.......................................................................................................F-50
Operation when data is received ................................................................................................F-50
6.3 Operation of Control Line ...........................................................................................................F-52
6.3.1 FX2N (before Ver. 2.00), FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs .......................F-52
6.3.2 FX2N (Ver. 2.00 or later), FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs......................F-54
6.4 Important Points in Creating Programs ......................................................................................F-56
6.5 Communication Error .................................................................................................................F-56
7. Practical Program Example (RS Instruction)
F-57
7.1 Example of Printing Using RS Instruction (Using RS-232C Connection)...................................F-57
8. Creating Programs (RS2 Instruction)
F-59
8.1 Checking Contents of Related Devices......................................................................................F-59
8.2 How to Use RS2 Instruction .......................................................................................................F-62
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
Applicable frames .......................................................................................................................F-63
Function and operation...............................................................................................................F-65
Send/receive data and amount of data.......................................................................................F-66
Operation when data is sent.......................................................................................................F-68
Operation when data is received ................................................................................................F-68
Sum check code .........................................................................................................................F-71
8.3 Operation of Control Line ...........................................................................................................F-72
8.4 Important Points in Creating Programs ......................................................................................F-75
8.5 Communication Error .................................................................................................................F-75
9. Practical Program Example (RS2 Instruction)
F-76
9.1 Example of Printing Using RS2 Instruction (Using RS-232C Connection).................................F-76
10. When Combined with Another Communication
F-78
10.1 Other Communication Type Used Together ............................................................................F-78
10.2 When Combined with Programming Communication ..............................................................F-79
10.2.1 For FX2N and FX2NC PLCs......................................................................................................F-79
10.2.2 For FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs ...................................................................F-80
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
When Combined with Computer Link Communication.............................................................F-81
When Combined with Programming Communication ..............................................................F-82
Using RS2 Instruction and Computer Link Communication Together......................................F-83
Communication Setting Method Using Sequence Program.....................................................F-84
10.6.1 Communication setting for RS instruction ................................................................................F-84
10.6.2 Communication setting for RS2 instruction ..............................................................................F-86
17
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
11. Troubleshooting
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
F-87
Checking FX PLC Version Applicability ...................................................................................F-87
Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication ....................................................F-87
Checking Installation ................................................................................................................F-87
Checking Sequence Program ..................................................................................................F-88
11.4.1 Checking communication port settings (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)......F-89
11.5 Checking the Absence/Presence of Errors ..............................................................................F-89
12. Related Data
F-90
12.1 Related Device List (RS Instruction) ........................................................................................F-90
12.2 Details of related devices (RS instruction) ...............................................................................F-91
12.2.1 Serial communication error [M8063].........................................................................................F-91
12.2.2 Communication setting keep [M8120] ......................................................................................F-91
12.2.3 Sending wait flag [M8121] ........................................................................................................F-91
12.2.4 Sending request [M8122] .........................................................................................................F-91
12.2.5 Receiving complete flag [M8123] .............................................................................................F-92
12.2.6 Carrier detection flag [M8124] ..................................................................................................F-92
12.2.7 Time-out check flag [M8129] ....................................................................................................F-92
12.2.8 Serial communication error code [D8063] ................................................................................F-93
12.2.9 Communication format setting [D8120] ....................................................................................F-94
12.2.10 Remaining amount of data to be sent [D8122] .......................................................................F-94
12.2.11 Amount of data already received [D8123] ..............................................................................F-95
12.2.12 Header [D8124] ......................................................................................................................F-95
12.2.13 Terminator [D8125].................................................................................................................F-95
12.2.14 Time-out time setting time [D8129].........................................................................................F-95
12.2.15 Communication parameter display [D8405] ...........................................................................F-95
12.2.16 Operation mode display [D8419] ............................................................................................F-96
12.3 Related Devices (RS2 Instruction) ...........................................................................................F-96
12.4 Details of Related Devices (RS2 Instruction) ...........................................................................F-97
12.4.1 Serial communication error [M8062, M8063 and M8438].........................................................F-97
12.4.2 Sending wait flag [M8371, M8401 and M8421] ........................................................................F-98
12.4.3 Sending request [M8372, M8402 and M8422] .........................................................................F-98
12.4.4 Receiving complete flag [M8373, M8403 and M8423] .............................................................F-98
12.4.5 Carrier detection flag [M8404 and M8424] ...............................................................................F-99
12.4.6 Data set ready (DSR) flag [M8405 and M8425] .......................................................................F-99
12.4.7 Time-out check flag [M8379, M8409 and M8429] ....................................................................F-99
12.4.8 Serial communication error code [D8062, D8063 and D8438] ...............................................F-100
12.4.9 Communication format setting [D8370, D8400 and D8420] ...................................................F-101
12.4.10 Amount of remaining send data [D8372, D8402 and D8422]...............................................F-102
12.4.11 Amount of data already received [D8373, D8403 and D8423] .............................................F-102
12.4.12 Communication parameter display [D8405 and D8425].......................................................F-102
12.4.13 Time-out time setting [D8379, D8409 and D8429] ...............................................................F-102
12.4.14 Header [D8380, D8381, D8410, D8411, D8430 and D8431] ...............................................F-103
12.4.15 Terminator [D8382, D8383, D8412, D8413, D8432 and D8433]..........................................F-103
12.4.16 Receiving sum (receive data) [D8384, D8414 and D8434] ..................................................F-104
12.4.17 Receiving sum (calculation result) [D8385, D8415 and D8435] ...........................................F-104
12.4.18 Sending sum [D8386, D8416 and D8436]............................................................................F-104
12.4.19 Operation mode display [D8389, D8419 and D8439]...........................................................F-105
12.5 ASCII Code Table ..................................................................................................................F-106
18
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
G.Non-Protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)
1. Outline
G-3
1.1 Features ...................................................................................................................................... G-3
1.2 Procedures Before Operation ..................................................................................................... G-4
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC .................................................................................. G-5
1.3.1 Applicable versions...................................................................................................................... G-5
1.3.2 Products whose production was stopped .................................................................................... G-5
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability................................................................................................... G-6
1.4.1 For applicable versions................................................................................................................ G-6
1.4.2 For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model) ......................................................... G-7
2. Specification
G-8
2.1 Communication Specifications .................................................................................................... G-8
3. System Configuration and Selection
G-9
3.1 System Configuration.................................................................................................................. G-9
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment................................................................... G-9
3.3 Connection to PLC .................................................................................................................... G-10
4. Wiring
G-12
4.1 Pin Arrangement ....................................................................................................................... G-12
4.2 Connection to External Equipment with Terminal Specifications (without Control Line)........... G-12
4.3 Connection to External Equipment with Terminal Specifications (with Control Line)................ G-13
4.3.1 Standard RS-232C mode .......................................................................................................... G-13
4.3.2 Interlink connection mode.......................................................................................................... G-13
4.4 Connection to External Equipment with Modem Specifications ................................................ G-13
19
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
5. Creating Programs
G-14
5.1 Outline of Communication between FX PLC and 232IF ........................................................... G-14
5.1.1 For FROM and TO instructions ................................................................................................. G-14
5.1.2 For direct specification of buffer memory (U\G) .................................................................. G-14
5.2 FROM and TO Instructions ....................................................................................................... G-15
5.2.1 FROM instruction....................................................................................................................... G-15
5.2.2 TO instruction ............................................................................................................................ G-16
5.3 Direct Specification of Buffer Memory (U\G)....................................................................... G-17
5.4 Buffer Memory (BFM)................................................................................................................ G-18
5.4.1 Buffer memory list...................................................................................................................... G-18
5.4.2 Communication format <BFM #0>............................................................................................. G-20
5.4.3 Command <BFM #1> ................................................................................................................ G-24
5.4.4 Maximum number of receivable bytes <BFM #2> ..................................................................... G-25
5.4.5 Receiving timeout time <BFM #3> ............................................................................................ G-25
5.4.6 Sending header <BFM #5 (highest-order 2 bytes) and BFM #4 (lowest-order 2 bytes)>.......... G-25
5.4.7 Sending terminator <BFM #7 (highest-order 2 bytes) and BFM #6 (lowest-order 2 bytes)>..... G-25
5.4.8 Receiving header <BFM #9 (highest-order 2 bytes) and BFM #8 (lowest-order 2 bytes)> ....... G-25
5.4.9 Receiving terminator <BFM #11 (highest-order 2 bytes) and BFM #10 (lowest-order 2 bytes)>... G-26
5.4.10 Receiving suspension waiting time <BFM #12>...................................................................... G-26
5.4.11 Amount of remaining send data <BFM #13>........................................................................... G-26
5.4.12 Amount of received data buffers <BFM #14>.......................................................................... G-26
5.4.13 Sending sum result <BFM #15> .............................................................................................. G-27
5.4.14 Receiving sum result <BFM #16> ........................................................................................... G-27
5.4.15 Time from CS ON to sending start <BFM #20>....................................................................... G-27
5.4.16 Time from actual sending completion to RS OFF <BFM #21>................................................ G-27
5.4.17 Status <BFM #28>................................................................................................................... G-28
5.4.18 Error code <BFM #29> ............................................................................................................ G-29
5.4.19 Model code <BFM #30> .......................................................................................................... G-29
5.4.20 Number of bytes to be sent <BFM #1000>.............................................................................. G-29
5.4.21 Send data buffer <BFM #1001 to 1256> ................................................................................. G-29
5.4.22 Number of received bytes <BFM #2000>................................................................................ G-29
5.4.23 Receive data buffer <BFM #2001 to 2256>............................................................................. G-29
5.4.24 Preliminary receive data buffer for interlink connection mode <BFM #2257 to 2271> ............ G-29
5.5 Operation of Control Line .......................................................................................................... G-30
5.5.1 When control line is not provided [BFM #0, (b9, b8) = (0, 0)].................................................... G-30
5.5.2 When control line is in standard RS-232C mode [BFM #0, (b9, b8) = (0, 1)] ............................ G-31
5.5.3 When control line is in RS-232C interlink mode [BFM #0, (b9, b8) = (1, 1)].............................. G-32
6. Practical Program Examples
G-33
6.1 Example of Sending/Receiving 16-Bit Buffer Length Data........................................................ G-33
6.2 Sending/Receiving 8-Bit Buffer Length Data............................................................................. G-37
7. Troubleshooting
G-41
7.1 Check Items .............................................................................................................................. G-41
7.2 Error Codes............................................................................................................................... G-41
20
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
H.Programming Communication
1. Outline
H-3
1.1 Outline of System........................................................................................................................ H-3
1.2 Procedures Before Operation ..................................................................................................... H-4
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC .................................................................................. H-5
1.3.1 Applicable PLC ............................................................................................................................ H-5
1.3.2 Products whose production was stopped .................................................................................... H-5
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability................................................................................................... H-6
1.4.1 For applicable versions................................................................................................................ H-6
1.4.2 For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model) ......................................................... H-8
2. System Configuration and Selection
H-9
2.1 System Configuration.................................................................................................................. H-9
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
For communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-422 ........................................ H-9
For communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-232C.................................... H-10
For communication equipment operating in accordance with USB ........................................... H-10
For Ethernet adapter ................................................................................................................. H-11
2.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment................................................................. H-12
2.3 Caution on Selection ................................................................................................................. H-23
2.3.1 When using 422BD.................................................................................................................... H-23
2.3.2 When using 232BD or 232ADP ................................................................................................. H-24
2.3.3 Other cautions ........................................................................................................................... H-24
3. Selecting Connection Cables
H-25
3.1 Connection Procedure .............................................................................................................. H-25
3.2 Connector Shape in Each Product............................................................................................ H-26
3.3 Combinations of Connection Cables......................................................................................... H-27
3.3.1 Handy programming panel ........................................................................................................ H-27
3.3.2 Personal computer .................................................................................................................... H-28
4. Connection Cables and Interfaces
H-32
4.1 Simplified Tables....................................................................................................................... H-32
4.1.1 Cable connector shape correspondence table .......................................................................... H-32
4.1.2 Cable combination simplified table ............................................................................................ H-33
4.2 Cable Connection Diagrams ..................................................................................................... H-35
4.2.1 Personal computer connection cable - No. A ............................................................................ H-35
4.2.2 Connector conversion cable (commercial product) - No. B ....................................................... H-37
4.2.3 FX-10P/FX-20P/FX-30P connection cable - No. C.................................................................... H-37
5. Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller
H-38
5.1 Check Procedure ...................................................................................................................... H-38
5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2) .............................................. H-39
5.2.1 Operating procedure.................................................................................................................. H-39
5.3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)............................................... H-40
5.3.1 Operating procedure.................................................................................................................. H-40
21
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
6. Connection Setting for Personal Computer
H-41
6.1 Connection Setting (GX Works2) .............................................................................................. H-41
6.1.1 Setting RS-232C or USB, communication port, and transmission speed.................................. H-42
6.1.2 Setting for using GOT transparent function ............................................................................... H-44
6.1.3 Setting communication time check and number of retries......................................................... H-45
6.2 Connection Setting (FXGP/WIN)............................................................................................... H-46
6.2.1 Setting communication port and transmission speed ................................................................ H-46
6.3 Communication Test (GX Works2) ........................................................................................... H-47
7. Troubleshooting
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
22
H-48
Checking PLC Version Applicability .......................................................................................... H-48
Checking Programming Tool Applicability................................................................................. H-48
Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication ..................................................... H-48
Checking Installation ................................................................................................................. H-48
Checking Parameters in PLC.................................................................................................... H-48
Checking Sequence Program ................................................................................................... H-48
Checking Programming Tool Setting ........................................................................................ H-50
Checking Absence/Presence of Errors ..................................................................................... H-50
Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439] (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC) ................ H-51
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
I.Remote Maintenance
1. Outline
I-3
1.1 Outline of System.......................................................................................................................... I-3
1.1.1 Maintenance for programs in PLC................................................................................................. I-3
1.1.2 File transfer between personal computers (supported only by FXGP/WIN).................................. I-4
1.2 Procedures Before Operation ....................................................................................................... I-5
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC .................................................................................... I-6
1.3.1 Applicable versions........................................................................................................................ I-6
1.3.2 Version check ................................................................................................................................ I-6
1.3.3 Products whose production was stopped ...................................................................................... I-6
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability..................................................................................................... I-7
1.4.1 Programming tool for setting modem connected to PLC............................................................... I-7
1.4.2 Programming software for remote maintenance ......................................................................... I-11
1.4.3 Cautions on using FXGP/WIN ..................................................................................................... I-12
2. Specifications
I-13
2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference) ................................................................................ I-13
3. System Configuration and Selection
I-14
3.1 System Configuration.................................................................................................................. I-14
3.2 Setting Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment....................................................... I-15
3.3 Selecting Modem ........................................................................................................................ I-20
3.3.1 List of modems whose operations are confirmed ........................................................................ I-21
4. Wiring
I-23
4.1 Wiring Procedure ........................................................................................................................ I-23
4.2 Connection Diagram ................................................................................................................... I-24
5. How to Setup Modems on the PLC Side
I-25
5.1 Setting Using GX Works2 ........................................................................................................... I-25
5.1.1 Setting communication by way of RS-232C port ......................................................................... I-25
5.1.2 Modem initialization setting using parameter method ................................................................. I-27
5.1.3 Setting AT command for unregistered modem............................................................................ I-29
5.2 Setting Using FXGP/WIN ............................................................................................................ I-33
5.2.1 Setting communication by way of RS-232C port ......................................................................... I-33
5.2.2 Modem initialization setting using parameter method ................................................................. I-34
5.2.3 Setting AT command for unregistered modem............................................................................ I-35
5.3 Cautions on Use.......................................................................................................................... I-37
6. How to Setup Modems on the PC Side for Remote Access
I-38
6.1 Setting Using GX Works2 ........................................................................................................... I-38
6.1.1 Registering AT command for connected modem ........................................................................ I-38
6.1.2 Creating telephone directory (if necessary)................................................................................. I-40
6.2 Setting Using FXGP/WIN ............................................................................................................ I-42
6.2.1 Registering AT command for connected modem ........................................................................ I-42
6.2.2 Registering line connection destination ....................................................................................... I-45
23
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Table of Contents
7. Connecting Line
I-46
7.1 Preparing for Connection of PLC ................................................................................................ I-46
7.2 Line Connection Procedure......................................................................................................... I-47
7.2.1 For GX Works2............................................................................................................................ I-47
7.2.2 For FXGP/WIN ............................................................................................................................ I-51
8. Troubleshooting
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
I-54
Checking FX PLC Applicability.................................................................................................... I-54
Checking Programming Tool Applicability................................................................................... I-54
Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication ....................................................... I-54
Checking Installation ................................................................................................................... I-54
Checking Modem Specifications ................................................................................................. I-55
Checking Setting in PLC ............................................................................................................. I-55
8.6.1 Checking parameters in PLC....................................................................................................... I-55
8.6.2 Checking AT command setting.................................................................................................... I-56
8.6.3 Checking sequence program....................................................................................................... I-57
8.7 Checking Programming Tool Setting .......................................................................................... I-58
8.8 Checking Absence/Presence of Errors ....................................................................................... I-58
8.9 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439] (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC) .................. I-59
9. Related Information
I-60
9.1 ASCII Code Table ....................................................................................................................... I-60
Appendix A: Discontinued models
24
Apx.-1
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
1 Introduction
1.1 Communication Types
A
Common Items
1.
Introduction
1.1
Communication Types
C
Reference
subsection
Function
Application
N:N Network
Computer link
MODBUS
communication
Application
Function
Application
Function
Application
Data acquisition and centralized control.
Communicates with and controls Mitsubishi Electric inverter FREQROL.
Operation monitoring, writing of control values, referencing and
changing parameters, etc.
Enables MODBUS communication with MODBUS-compatible
equipment in accordance with RS-232C or RS-485.
Line control in the decentralized or centralized method.
Application
Function
Application
Receives and sends data from/to various pieces of equipment with an
RS-232C or RS-485 interface in non-protocol procedures.
Data reception and sending from/to a personal computer, bar code
reader, printer and other various measuring instruments.
Application
Application
1.2.7
Adds RS-232C, RS-422, USB and Ethernet ports in addition to the
provided RS-422 port in PLCs.
Simultaneously connection of two display units, programming tools, etc.
1.2.9
Connects with a PLC located in a remote location through a modem
and telephone line to enable program transfer and remote monitoring
access.
Maintenance of sequence programs in FX PLCs.
1.2.10
H
I
Apx.A
A-1
Discontinued
models
Function
Reference
subsection
G
Remote
Maintenance
Remote
maintenance
Function
1.2.2
Reference
subsection
Sequence program
Programming
communication
1.2.8
Programming
Communication
Connects the FX PLC to a high-order system such as personal
computer or workstation via Ethernet (100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T)
using TCP/IP or UDP/IP communication protocol.
Line control in the decentralized or centralized method and information
transfer from/to the host network.
General-purpose serial communication
Non-protocol
communication
1.2.6
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Ethernet
1.2.5
Reference
subsection
Ethernet communication
Function
1.2.4
E
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Inverter
communication
Function
1.2.3
D
Inverter
Communication
Parallel link
Function
Application
Function
Application
Line control in the decentralized or centralized method and information
transfer from/to the host network.
Easily enables data link between FX PLCs.
Line control in the decentralized or centralized method.
Easily enables data link between FX PLCs.
Line control in the decentralized or centralized method.
Connects a personal computer or another computer as the master
station, and connects FX PLCs as slave stations.
Protocols in a computer support computer link protocol formats 1 and 4.
1.2.1
Computer Link
CC-Link
• Connects FX PLCs as remote device stations to the CC-Link system
whose master station is a MELSEC A/QnA PLC.
• Connects FX PLCs as remote device stations and intelligent device
stations to the CC-Link system whose master station is a MELSEC
Q PLC.
• Constructs a CC-Link system whose master station is an FX PLC.
Parallel Link
The table below shows the communication types supported by the FX Series.
Link
B
N:N Network
This manual explains the communication types supported by FX PLCs.
This chapter explains the serial communication (in accordance with RS-232C, RS-485/RS-422), various link
communication types, etc. and states the applicable FX PLCs.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
1 Introduction
1.1 Communication Types
Reference
subsection
I/O link
CC-Link/LT
(built in
FX3UC-32MTLT(-2))
AnyWireASLINK
Function
Constructs a CC-Link/LT system whose master station is an FX PLC.
Application
Wire-conserving network inside control panel and unit.
Function
Application
AS-i system
Function
Application
MELSEC I/O link
Function
Application
Constructs an AnyWireASLINK system whose master station is an FX
PLC.
Wire-conserving network inside control panel and unit.
Constructs an AS-i (Actuator Sensor Interface) system whose master
block is an FX PLC.
Wire-conserving network inside control panel and unit.
Installs remote I/O units near I/O equipment in remote locations to
conserve wiring.
ON/OFF control of I/O equipment in a remote location.
Internet mail
Application
Short mail
A-2
Function
Application
1.2.12
1.2.13
—
Reference
subsection
Electronic mail sending
Function
1.2.11
Sends internet mail to personal computers and cellular phones using
the RS-232C communication in PLCs.
Monitoring of unmanned facilities, facilities located in remote locations
and facilities inside factories.
Sends short mails to cellular phones in the NTT DoCoMo network.
Notice of material shortage, error contents, operating time, etc.
1.2.14
1.2.15
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
A
Outline and Features of Communication Types
Common Items
1.2
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
This section outlines the communication types supported by FX PLCs.
1.2.1
CC-Link Network
B
1. Outline
C
Parallel Link
1) When the master station is an A/QnA PLC
ACPU,
QnACPU
Master
station
D
Terminal resistor
Computer Link
Terminal resistor
FXCPU
Remote
device
station
Remote I/O
for CC-Link
Inverter,
AC servo, etc.
Sensor, solenoid valve,
etc.
E
Inverter
Communication
•
•
Number of connectable units : 64 maximum
Total extension distance
: 1200 m (3937' 0")
2) When the master station is a Q PLC
F
Master
station
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
QCPU
Terminal resistor
G
Terminal resistor
Intelligent
device
station
FXCPU
Remote I/O
for CC-Link
Inverter,
AC servo, etc.
Sensor, solenoid valve,
etc.
H
Number of connectable units : 64 maximum
Total extension distance
: 1200 m (3937' 0")
Programming
Communication
•
•
Remote
device
station
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FXCPU
N:N Network
For details, refer to the FX2N-16CCL-M USER’S MANUAL.
For details, refer to the FX3U-16CCL-M USER’S MANUAL.
For details, refer to the FX2N-32CCL USER’S MANUAL.
For details, refer to the FX3U-64CCL USER’S MANUAL.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-3
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
3) When the master station is an FX2N-16CCL-M
Master station
FX2N-16CCL-M
FXCPU
Terminal resistor
Remote
device
station
FXCPU
Terminal resistor
Sensor, solenoid valve,
etc.
Inverter,
AC servo, etc.
Remote I/O
for CC-Link
Number of connectable units : Remote I/O station
: Remote device station
• Total extension distance
: 1200 m (3937' 0")
•
7 maximum
8 maximum
4) When the master station is an FX3U-16CCL-M
Master station
FX3U-16CCL-M
FXCPU
Terminal resistor
Terminal resistor
Intelligent
device
station
FXCPU
FXCPU
Remote
device
station
Remote I/O
for CC-Link
Inverter,
AC servo, etc.
Sensor, solenoid valve,
etc.
• Number of connectable units : Remote I/O station
: Remote device station + Intelligent device station* 1
• Total extension distance
: 1200 m (3937' 0")
*1.
8 maximum
8 maximum
Local stations can not be connected.
2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—:Not applicable
FX2(FX),
FX0N FX1S
FX2C
PLC
FX1NC
FX2N,
FX2NC
FX3S
FX3G,
FX3GC
FX3U,
FX3UC
FX2N16CCL-M
—
—
—

(Ver. 1.10
or later)


(Ver. 2.20
or later)
—


FX3U16CCL-M
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*2
*2
(Ver. 2.20
or later)
FX Series
FX2Nremote device station
32CCL
connectivity
—

—



—


FX Series
intelligent device
station connectivity
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
FX Series
master station
connectivity
*2.
*3.
FX3U64CCL

*3
*3
(Ver. 2.20
or later)
FX3G and FX3GC PLCs Ver. 2.00 or later, or FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Ver. 3.10 or later support the
access function to other FX Series PLC main units connected to FX3U-64CCL.
The table below shows versions of GX Works2 and GX Developer that support the access function to
other FX Series PLC main units via CC-Link.
PLC connected
through
A-4
FX1N
GX Developer
QCPU(Q mode)
QCPU(Q mode)
GX Works2
FXCPU*2 +
FX3U-16CCL-M
PLC main unit accessed
FX3G
FX3GC
FX3U
Ver. 8.78G or later
—
Ver. 8.72A or later
Ver. 1.08J or later Ver. 1.77F or later Ver. 1.08J or later
FX3UC
Ver. 8.72A or later
Ver. 1.08J or later
Ver. 1.87R or later Ver. 1.87R or later Ver. 1.73B or later
Ver. 1.73B or later
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
1 Introduction
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
A
Equipment operating in accordance with the CC-Link standard
4. Function
5. Applications
Decentralized or centralized control of the line, reception and sending of information from/to the host network,
etc.
6. Detailed information on CC-Link
C
Parallel Link
For details on CC-Link and connectable equipment, refer to the CC-Link Partner Association's homepage or
catalogues (issued by the CC-Link Partner Association).
CC-Link Partner Association's homepage: http://www.cc-link.org/
B
N:N Network
Master station allows connection of remote device station, remote I/O station (inverters, AC servos, sensors,
solenoid valves, etc.) supporting the CC-Link network to achieve data link.
FX PLCs are classified as master stations, remote device stations or intelligent device stations.
Common Items
3. Communication targets
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-5
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
1.2.2
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
Ethernet communication
For details, refer to FX3U-ENET-ADP User’s Manual.
1. Outline
Network Range (Only within LAN)
Router
Hub
SNTP server
FX3U-ENET-ADP
Local
station
External device
External device
GX Works2
2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—:Not applicable
PLC
FX2(FX),FX2C
FX0N
FX1S,FX1N,FX1NC
FX2N,FX2NC
FX3S
Communication
applicability
—
—
—
—
*1
*1.
FX3G, FX3GC FX3U, FX3UC

(Ver. 2.00 or
later)

(Ver. 3.10 or
later)
The FX3U-ENET-ADP Ver. 1.20 or later is applicable to the FX3S PLC.
3. Applicable software
Use the following version when setting the FX3U-ENET-ADP or connecting using MELSOFT:
Product name
GX Works2
*2.
Model name
SWDNC-GXW2-E
Applicability
Ver. 1.73B or later*2
Ver. 1.492N or later supports the FX3S PLC.
Ver. 1.87R or later supports the FX3G, FX3GC PLCs.
Caution
Setting and others are disabled when using nonapplicable versions.
4. Communication targets
Ethernet-compatible equipment
5. Function
The FX3U-ENET-ADP can connect FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC Series PLCs to a high-order system
such as personal computer via Ethernet (100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T) using TCP/IP or UDP communication
protocol.
6. Applications
1) Collects and changes the PLC data.
(Communication using the MELSEC communication protocol)
2) Reads, writes and verifies programs, and monitors and tests device values in the main unit remotely.
(Communicates with GX Works2 via Ethernet through MELSOFT connection.)
3) Executes monitoring remotely using a web browser.
(The data monitoring function enables monitoring the information and device values in the main unit and
FX3U-ENET-ADP using a web browser.)
A-6
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
A
N:N Network
Refer to the "N:N Network" section.
1. Outline

B
FX CPU
Station
No. 7
Terminal
resistor
N:N Network
FX CPU
Station
No. 1
RS-485
RS-485
RS-485
Terminal
resistor
FX CPU
Station
No. 0
 Number of connectable FX PLCs : 8 maximum (station Nos. 0 to 7)
 Total extension distance
: 500 m (1640' 5") [50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is connected]
C
M1448 to M1511
D70 to D77
Station No. 7
M1000 to M1063
D0 to D7
M1064 to M1127
D10 to D17
D


Computer Link

Station No. 1
M1000 to M1063
D0 to D7
M1064 to M1127
D10 to D17
Parallel Link
For FX3U PLC (pattern 2)
Station No. 0
M1000 to M1063
D0 to D7
M1064 to M1127
D10 to D17
M1448 to M1511
D70 to D77
Common Items
1.2.3
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
M1448 to M1511
D70 to D77
E
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—:Not applicable
FX2(FX),FX2C
FX0N
FX1S,FX1N,
FX1NC
FX2N
FX2NC
FX3S
FX3G,
FX3GC
FX3U,
FX3UC
Communication
applicability
—

(Ver. 2.00 or
later)


(Ver. 2.00 or
later)




3. Communication targets
Between FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC Series PLCs
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
PLC
Inverter
Communication
2. Applicable PLCs
G
4. Function
5. Applications
H
Programming
Communication
By this network, data link can be achieved in a small-scale system, and the machine information can be
transferred between machines.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
This network allows up to eight connected FX PLCs to automatically transfer data among the connected
PLCs.
In the network, data can be transferred among PLCs for devices determined in the refresh range, and those
devices can be monitored by every PLC.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-7
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
1.2.4
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
Parallel Link
Refer to the "Parallel Link" section.
1. Outline
RS-485
RS-485
Terminal
resistor
FX CPU
Master
station
FX CPU
Slave
station
Terminal
resistor
Slave station
M800 to M899
D490 to D499
M900 to M999
D500 to D509
Master station
M800 to M899
D490 to D499
M900 to M999
D500 to D509
100 bit devices (M) and 10 word devices (D)
 Number of connectable FX PLCs: 2
 Total extension distance: 500 m (1640' 5") [50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is connected]*1
*1.
The distance is different for the FX2-40AW/AP.
2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—:Not applicable
PLC
FX2(FX),FX2C
FX0N
FX1S,FX1N,
FX1NC
FX2N
FX2NC
FX3S
FX3G,
FX3GC
FX3U,
FX3UC
Communication
applicability


(Ver. 1.20 or
later)


(Ver. 1.04 or
later)




3. Communication targets
Between FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC
Series PLCs
4. Function
This network automatically transfers data for 100 bit devices (M) and 10 data registers (D) between two PLCs
of the same series.
Between PLCs in the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series, data can be transferred for 50 bit devices (M) and 10 data
registers (D).
5. Applications
Information can be transferred between two FX PLCs.
(It is recommended to use the N:N Network when connecting two PLCs of the same series among the FX1S,
FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC Series. N:N Network functionality supports
linking of up to eight FX PLC units, therefore it offers excellent future expandability options.)
A-8
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
A
Computer Link
Refer to the "Computer Link" section.
1. Outline
1) 1-to-N connection (RS-485)

FXCPU
ACPU
RS-485
FXCPU
RS-485
RS-485
Terminal
RS-232C resistor
Terminal
resistor
RS-485
Personal computer
B
N:N Network
A computer link
Common Items
1.2.5
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
C
FX-485PC-IF
2) 1-to-1 connection (RS-232C)
Parallel Link
 Number of connectable FX/A PLCs : 16 maximum
 Total extension distance
: 500 m (1640' 5") [50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is connected]
D
Computer Link
RS-232C
FXCPU
Personal computer
E
2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—:Not applicable
FX2(FX),FX2C
FX0N
FX1S,FX1N,
FX1NC
FX2N
FX2NC
FX3S
FX3G,
FX3GC
FX3U,
FX3UC
Communication
applicability

(Ver. 3.30 or
later)

(Ver. 1.20 or
later)


(Ver. 1.06 or
later)




F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
PLC
Inverter
Communication
 Number of connectable FX PLCs : 1
 Total extension distance
: 15 m (49' 2")
G
3. Communication targets
4. Function
This link allows connection of up to sixteen FX or A (including A1FX CPU) PLCs to a personal computer for
data transfer when the personal computer directly specifies devices in the connected PLCs.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Between FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC Series
PLCs, A Series PLCs and personal computers
H
Programming
Communication
5. Applications
By this link, production, inventory, etc. can be controlled.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-9
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
1.2.6
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
Inverter Communication
Refer to the "Inverter Communication" section.
1. Outline
RS-485
FXCPU

Terminal
resistor
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Terminal
resistor
 Number of connectable inverters : 8 maximum
 Total extension distance
: 500 m (1640' 5") [50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is connected]
2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable
—:Not applicable
PLC
Communication
applicability
FX2(FX),FX2C
FX0N
FX1S,FX1N,FX1NC
FX2N,
FX2NC
FX3S
FX3G,
FX3GC
FX3U,
FX3UC
—
—
—




3. Communication targets
1) For FX2N or FX2NC PLC
FREQROL Series (S500, E500 and A500) inverters
2) For FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC PLC
FREQROL Series (S500, E500, A500, F500, V500, D700, E700, A700, F700, A800 and F800) inverters
The table below shows PLC versions applicable to each inverter.
PLC
FREQROL-S500/
E500/A500
FX2N,
FX2NC
Ver. 3.00 or later
FREQROL-F500/
V500
FREQROL-F700/
A700
FREQROL-D700/
E700
FREQROL-A800/
F800
—
FX3S
Ver. 1.00 or later
Ver.1.10 or later
FX3G
Ver. 1.10 or later
Ver.2.22 or later
Ver. 1.40 or later
FX3GC
FX3U
FX3UC
Ver. 2.20 or later
Ver. 1.00 or later
Ver. 2.20 or later
Ver.2.22 or later
Ver. 2.32 or later
Ver.3.11 or later
Ver. 2.32 or later
Ver.3.11 or later
4. Function
This communication allows the connection of inverters (computer link) in accordance with RS-485 to control
operations and change parameters.
5. Applications
Operations with up to eight inverters can be controlled from a PLC.
A-10
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
A
Non-protocol Communication
Refer to the "Non-protocol Communication (RS/RS2 instruction)" section.
Refer to the "Non-protocol Communication (FX2N-232IF)" section.
1. Outline
C
15 m (49' 2")
maximum
Printer
FXCPU
Parallel Link
Bar code
reader
Printer
N:N Network
Bar code
reader
500 m (1640' 5")
maximum
[50 m (164' 0") when
485BD is connected]
RS-232C
Personal computer
B
RS-422/
RS-485
Personal computer
FXCPU
D
15m (49' 2")
maximum
Printer
*1
FXCPU
FX-422CAB0
Standard built-in port
(RS-422)
Available only in FX3G, FX3GC PLC.
2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—:Not applicable
PLC
FX2(FX),FX2C
FX0N
FX1S,FX1N,FX1NC
FX2N
FX2NC
FX3S
FX3G,
FX3GC
FX3U,
FX3UC
Communication
applicability

(Ver. 3.00
or later)

(Ver. 1.20
or later)


(Ver. 1.06
or later)




PLC
FX2(FX),FX2C
FX0N
Communication
applicability
—
—
FX1S,FX1N,FX1NC FX2N,FX2NC
—
—
FX3G,
FX3GC
FX3U,
FX3UC



FX3S
FX3G,
FX3GC
FX3U,
FX3UC
—
—

3) Non-protocol communication (FX2N-232IF)
PLC
FX2(FX),FX2C
FX0N
Communication
applicability
—
—
FX1S,FX1N,FX1NC FX2N,FX2NC
—

Bar code readers, printers, personal computers (micro computer boards), measuring instruments, etc.
4. Function
This communication allows non-protocol serial communication between equipment with an RS-232C or RS422/RS-485 interface.
Communication with a bar code reader, printer, personal computer (micro computer board), measuring
instrument, etc.
A-11
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
5. Applications
I
Remote
Maintenance
3. Communication targets
H
Programming
Communication
FX3S
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
2) Non-protocol communication (RS2 instruction)
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
1) Non-protocol communication (RS instruction)
E
Inverter
Communication
*1.
Bar code
reader
FX-232AWC-H
FX-232AWC
FX-232AW
Computer Link
RS-232C RS-422
Converter
Personal computer
Common Items
1.2.7
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
1.2.8
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
MODBUS Communication
For details, refer to FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC User's Manual
- MODBUS Serial Communication Edition.
1. Outline
1) In the case of the RS-485
FXCPU
slave
No.1
•••••••••••••••
RS-485
RS-485
RS-485
Terminal
resistor
FXCPU
master
FXCPU
slave
No.32
Terminal resistor
• Number of connectable units: Master 1
: Slave 32 maximum
• Total extension distance
: 500 m (1640’5”) maximum
2) In the case of the RS-232C
RS-232C
RS-232C
FXCPU
master
FXCPU
slave
• Number of connectable units: Master 1
: Slave 1
• Total extension distance
: 15 m (49’2”) maximum
2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—:Not applicable
PLC
FX2(FX),FX2C
FX0N
FX1S,FX1N,FX1NC
FX2N,FX2NC
FX3S
FX3G
FX3GC
FX3U,
FX3UC
Communication
applicability
—
—
—
—


(Ver. 1.30
or later)


(Ver. 2.40
or later)
3. Communication targets
MODBUS-compatible equipment
4. Function
This function enables MODBUS communication with MODBUS-compatible equipment in accordance with
RS-232C or RS-485.
5. Applications
Line control in the decentralized or centralized method.
A-12
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
A
Programming Communication
Refer to the "Programming Communication" section.
1. Outline
B
1) Standard built-in port in accordance with RS422 (programming tool or personal computer)
N:N Network
Programming tool
Cable
RS-422
C
FX-10P(-E)/FX-20P(-E)/FX-30P, etc.
Cable
RS-232C
FX-232AWC-H
FX-232AWC
FX-232AW
RS-232CRS-422
converter
FXCPU
Cable
D
Standard built-in port
(RS-422)
Computer Link
Personal
computer
Parallel Link
Programming
tool
FX-USB-AW
USB
Cable
USBRS-422
converter
Programming tool
F
Cable
RS-422
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX-10P(-E)/FX-20P(-E)/FX-30P, etc.
Cable
RS-232CRS-422
converter
Personal
computer
Cable
FXCPU
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
RS-232C
FX-232AWC-H
FX-232AWC
FX-232AW
RS-422
Programming
tool
FX-USB-AW
USB
Cable
H
Programming
Communication
USBRS-422
converter
3) Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-232C (personal computer)
Programming tool
I
FXCPU
Remote
Maintenance
RS-232C
RS-232C
Cable
Personal computer
4) Standard built-in port in accordance with USB (personal computer)
Programming tool
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
FXCPU
USB
E
Inverter
Communication
2) Communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-422 (programming tool or personal
computer)
Personal
computer
Common Items
1.2.9
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
Cable
USB Standard built-in port
A-13
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
5) Communication equipment operating in accordance with USB (personal computer)
Programming tool
USB
FXCPU
Cable
USB
Personal computer
6) Ethernet adapter (personal computer)
Cable
FXCPU
FXCPU
Cable
Ethernet
adapter
Ethernet
Cable
Ethernet
adapter
Programming tool
Hub
Personal computer
A-14
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
A
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—:Not applicable
PLC
Standard built-in port in
accordance with RS-422






Communication equipment
operating in accordance with
RS-422(-BD)
—
—

—

—
(-BD)
—
—

—

—
(ADP)
—
—




Standard built-in port in
accordance with USB
—
—
—
—
—
—
Communication equipment
operating in accordance with
USB(-BD)*1
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ethernet adapter
—
—
—
—
—
—
FX3S
FX3G
FX3GC
FX3U
FX3UC
(D, DS, DSS)
FX3UC
(LT, LT-2)
Standard built-in port in
accordance with RS-422






Communication equipment
operating in accordance with
RS-422(-BD)


—

—

(-BD)


—

—

(ADP)









—
—
—
—
—
—

—

*2

(Ver. 2.00
or later)

(Ver. 3.10 or
later)

(Ver. 3.10 or
later)
Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-232C
PLC
Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-232C
Standard built-in port in
accordance with USB
Communication equipment
operating in accordance with
USB(-BD)*1
Ethernet adapter
*1.
When using USB communication with a model that does not support USB communication equipment
(-BD), use the FX-USB-AW.
However, FX2(FX) and FX2C PLCs do not support the FX-USB-AW. Use the standard built-in port in
accordance with USB in the FX3S, FX3G and FX3GC PLCs.
C
D
E
F
G
H
Programming
Communication
*2.


(Ver. 2.00 or (Ver. 3.10
later)
or later)
B
Computer Link
FX2NC
Parallel Link
FX2N
N:N Network
FX1NC
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX1S, FX1N
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX0N
Inverter
Communication
FX2(FX), FX2C
Common Items
2. Applicable PLCs
The FX3U-ENET-ADP Ver. 1.20 or later is applicable to the FX3S PLC.
3. Communication targets
Personal computer and programming tool
4. Function
5. Applications
1) Programs can be changed and monitored using a personal computer or programming tool.
2) A personal computer (for changing programs) can be directly connected in accordance with RS-232C.
A-15
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
3) While the standard programming connector built in an FX PLC is used for connecting a display unit, a
personal computer or programming tool can be connected at the same time for monitoring and
transferring data.
I
Remote
Maintenance
This communication allows connection of a personal computer or programming tool to a standard port built in
a PLC or optional connector to execute sequence programs.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
1.2.10 Remote Maintenance
Refer to the "Remote Maintenance" section.
1. Outline
1) Remote access (GX Works2, GX Developer or FXGP/WIN)
Programming tool
RS-232C
Line
(such as general subscriber's
telephone line)

Modem
Personal computer
FXCPU
Modem
2) File transfer (FXGP/WIN)
Programming tool
Programming
tool
Line
(such as general subscriber's
telephone line)

Modem
Personal computer
Modem
Personal computer
2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—:Not applicable
PLC
FX2(FX),FX2C
FX0N
FX1S,FX1N,FX1NC
FX2N,
FX2NC
FX3S
FX3G,
FX3GC
FX3U,
FX3UC
Communication applicability
—
—





3. Communication target
Personal computer (GX Works2, GX Developer or FXGP/WIN)
4. Function
This communication allows connection between a modem on the PLC side and a modem on the personal
computer side through a line (cellular phone or general subscriber’s telephone line) for PLC monitoring or
transferring from the personal computer.
The FXGP/WIN allows transfer of file data between personal computers.
5. Applications
By this communication, programs in a PLC located in a remote location can be changed and maintained.
A-16
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
A
For FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) built-in CC-Link/LT master, refer to FX3UC Hardware Edition.
For the FX2N-64CL-M, refer to FX2N-64CL-M USER’S MANUAL (Detailed Volume).
1. Outline
B
Master
N:N Network
Main line length
FXCPU
Terminal resistor
Terminal
resistor
Remote
I/O
Remote
I/O
Remote
I/O
Remote
I/O
C
Parallel Link
Remote
I/O
Common Items
1.2.11 CC-Link/LT Network
Branch line
length
Remote
I/O
D
Computer Link
 Number of connectable units : 64 (stations)
 Total extension length
: 500 m (1640' 5") (main line length)
2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—:Not applicable
FX2(FX),FX2C
FX0N
FX1S
FX1N,FX1NC
Communication applicability
—
—
—

FX2N,
FX3S
FX2NC

—
FX3G,
FX3GC
FX3U,
FX3UC


3. Communication target
Inverter
Communication
PLC
E
F
Equipment operating in accordance with the CC-Link/LT network standard
This network allows remote control of I/O information for sensors, lamps, etc.
Input (X) numbers and output (Y) numbers can be handled, and I/O points can be assigned continuously even
if 2-point or 4-point type remote I/O units are being used.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
4. Function
G
5. Applications
6. Detailed information on CC-Link/LT
For product information on CC-Link, refer to the CC-Link Partner Association's homepage or catalogues
(issued by the CC-Link Partner Association).
CC-Link Partner Association's homepage: http://www.cc-link.org/
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Wire conservation for inputs and outputs.
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-17
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
1.2.12 AnyWireASLINK
For details, refer to the FX3U-128ASL-M User's Manual.
1. Outline
Terminating
unit
FXCPU AnyWireASLINK
master
Slave
module
Slave
module
Slave
module
Slave
module
Number of connectable units : 128 maximum
Total extension distance : 200 m (656′ 2″)
The FX3U-128ASL-M AnyWireASLINK master block is jointly developed and manufactured by Mitsubishi
Electric and Anywire Corporation.
2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—:Not applicable
PLC
FX2(FX),
FX2C
FX0N
FX1S
FX1N,
FX1NC
FX2N,
FX2NC
FX3S
FX3G,
FX3GC
FX3U,
FX3UC
Communication
applicability
—
—
—
—
—
—


(Ver. 2.20 or later)
3. Communication targets
Slave modules for AnyWireASLINK
4. Function
This network allows remote control of I/O information for sensors and LED.
5. Applications
Wire conservation for inputs and outputs.
A-18
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
A
For details, refer to the FX2N-32ASI-M User's Manual.
1. Outline
B
AS-i flat cable
N:N Network
AS-i
master
FXCPU
Slave
Repeater
Slave
AS-i power
supply
Slave
C
Slave
Parallel Link
AS-i power
supply
 Number of connectable units : 31 slave units
 Total extension distance
: 100 m (328' 1")
[300 m (984' 3") maximum when two repeaters are connected]
 Terminal resistors are not required.
D
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—:Not applicable
FX2(FX),FX2C
FX0N
FX1S
Communication applicability
—

—
FX1N,FX1NC FX2N FX2NC FX3S


*1
—
FX3G, FX3U,
FX3GC FX3UC
—

FX2NC-MT-D/UL and FX2NC-M-DSS(-T-DS) PLCs are not applicable.
E
Inverter
Communication
PLC
Computer Link
2. Applicable PLCs
*1.
Common Items
1.2.13 AS-i system
F
3. Communication targets
4. Function
This network allows remote control of I/O information for sensors and actuators (slave units). The automatic
address assignment function enables easy replacement of a slave unit when it has failed.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Slave units (sensors and actuators) for AS-i
G
5. Applications
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Wire conservation for inputs and outputs.
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-19
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
1.2.14 Internet Mail Sending
For the detains, refer to the FX-232DOPA USERS MANUAL.
(Only Japanese manual is available for this product.)
1. Outline
FX-232DOPA
RS-232C
DoPa Mobile Ark
9601D
FXCPU
Antenna
Provider
In accordance with DoPa
Internet
Cellular phone
Personal computer
2. Applicable PLCs
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—:Not applicable
PLC
FX2(FX),FX2C
FX0N
FX1S
FX1N,FX1NC
FX2N,
FX2NC
FX3S
FX3G,
FX3GC
FX3U,
FX3UC
Communication applicability
—
—



—
—

3. Communication targets
Personal computer and cellular phone which can receive internet mails
4. Function
This setting sends an electronic mail from a PLC to notify the facility operation status, etc. to a personal
computer or cellular phone which can receive electronic mails.
This function is applicable through dial-up connection to a mail server using a combination of FX-232DOPA
and DoPa Mobile Ark9601D by NTT DoCoMo.
5. Applications
Monitoring of unmanned facilities, monitoring of facilities located in distant places, monitoring of facilities
inside factories and distribution of logging data
A-20
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Introduction
Common Items
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
A
For details, refer to the FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX1NC/FX2NC PLC PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
(Only the Japanese Manual is available.)
1. Outline
B
N:N Network
RS-232C
Line
(such as general subscriber's NTT DoCoMo
telephone line)
Short Mail Center
FXCPU
Common Items
1.2.15 Short Mail Sending
Modem
C
Parallel Link
Cellular phone
2. Applicable PLCs
PLC
Communication
applicability
FX2(FX),
FX1N,
FX0N FX1S
FX2C
FX1NC
—
—
—
—
FX2N
FX2NC
FX3S

(Ver. 3.00 or later)

(Ver. 3.00 or later)
—
FX3G, FX3U,
FX3GC FX3UC
—
—
D
Computer Link
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—:Not applicable
E
Cellular phones by NTT DoCoMo with a contract for i-mode or short mail
4. Function
This function sends a short mail from a PLC to notify the facility operation status, etc. to a cellular phone by
NTT DoCoMo which can receive short mails.
This function is applicable through connection in a line to a Short Mail Center of NTT DoCoMo.
Monitoring of unmanned facilities, monitoring of facilities located in distant places and monitoring of facilities
in factories
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
5. Applications
Inverter
Communication
3. Communication targets
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-21
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
1.2 Outline and Features of Communication Types
MEMO
A-22
1 Introduction
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
2.1 Relationship between Equipment and Communication Types
A
Communication Types and Communication Equipment
2.1
Relationship between Equipment and Communication Types
C
Built-in port
Parallel Link
The figure below shows the relationship between communication equipment and communication types:
Communication adapter
B
N:N Network
This chapter explains which communication types are supported by serial ports of communication equipment
and connectors of networks.
For the communication equipment required in the system configuration, refer to a description later.
Refer to "2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)".
Common Items
2.
I/O link
Link
 N:N Network
 Parallel link
 Computer link
 Inverter communication
 MODBUS communication
Ethernet communication
 Ethernet
General-purpose serial communication
 Non-protocol communication
(RS/RS2 instruction)
Sequence program
 Programming communication
D
Computer Link
 CC-Link/LT
(built in for FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2))
General-purpose serial communication
 Non-protocol communication
(RS2 instruction)
E
Sequence program
Inverter
Communication
 Programming communication
 Remote maintenance
Electronic mail sending
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
 Internet mail
 Short mail
Communication types
G
Expansion board
Link
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX PLC main unit
Special function equipment
H




N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Inverter communication
General-purpose serial communication
Sequence program
 Programming communication
 Remote maintenance
Electronic mail sending
 Non-protocol communication
(FX2N-232IF)
I
I/O link


●

●

CC-Link/LT
AnyWireASLINK
AS-i system
MELSEC I/O LINK
Electronic mail sending
Apx.A

● Internet mail
Discontinued
models
 Internet mail
 Short mail
 CC-Link
General-purpose serial communication
Remote
Maintenance
 Non-protocol communication
(RS/RS2 instruction)
Programming
Communication
Link
A-23
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.2
2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map
Communication Equipment Applicability Map
The table below shows the communication types applicable in each FX Series and includes the supporting
communication equipment. The communication types can be used when a built-in port or piece of
communication equipment is connected, but some of them may not be applicable at the same time.
2.2.1
PLC
FX3U and FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) PLCs
Communication
equipment
Communication
specifications
Manual name (Obtain manuals if necessary.) 
FX3U-USB-BD
Data Link
CC-Link
Product
manual
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
—
—
—
RS-232C
—
—
—
—
*5
FX2N-232IF
FX3U-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)*1
FX3U-422-BD
FX3U
PLC
Standard built-in port
RS-485
RS-422
FX2N-16CCL-M
*2
FX3U-16CCL-M
*3*4
FX2N-32CCL
FX3U-128ASL-M
—
FX3U-ENET-ADP*1
—
*6.
*7.
*8.
*9.
A-24
—

—
—

—
*6
—
—
—
*5


—
*5
*5


*6
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*5.
—
—
FX2N-16LNK-M
*3.
*4.
—

—
FX2N-32ASI-M
*1.
*2.
—

FX3U-64CCL
FX2N-64CL-M
MODBUS
Communication
Edition
This manual
USB
FX3U-232-BD
*1
N:N
Parallel Computer
Inverter
MODBUS
Network
link
link
communication communication
The expansion board is required to connect the FX3U PLC.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M, FX3U-128ASL-M and/
or FX2N-32ASI-M.
The FX3U-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M and/or FX2N-32ASI-M.
The FX3U-16CCL-M can be used at the same time with the FX3U-128ASL-M when CC-Link parameters
are set using network parameters.
Two channels cannot be set at the same time in N:N Network and parallel link.
N:N Network and parallel link cannot be used together.
Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.
The FX3U-128ASL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M and/or FX2N-32ASI-M.
The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M, FX3U-128ASL-M and/
or FX2N-16CCL-M.
Two channels cannot be set at the same time in remote maintenance.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map
A
Common Items
B
Non-protocol
communication
Product manual
This manual
CC-Link/
LT
AnyWire
ASLINK
AS-i
system
Sequence program
Mail
sending
MELSECRemote
Internet mail
Programming
I/O LINK
maintenance
sending
Product manual
FX-232DOPA
User's Manual
This manual
—

—
—
*9





*9


—
—


—
—
—

—
—
—
—

—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
*4*7
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—


—
—
—
—

*8
E
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
—
Inverter
Communication
—
D
Computer Link

C
Parallel Link
Ethernet
Wire-reducing network
N:N Network
Ethernet
General-purpose
communication communication
—
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-25
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
PLC
2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map
Communication
equipment
Communication
specifications
Manual name (Obtain manuals if necessary.) 
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
FX2N-232IF*1
RS-485
Standard built-in port
RS-422
FX2N-16CCL-M*1
FX2N-32ASI-M
Product
manual
*8.
*9.

—
*6
—
—
—
—
—


*6
—
—
—
*5

*5
—


—
—
—
—
—
*6.
*7.
—
*3*4
FX3U-ENET-ADP
*5.
—
—
—
*3.
*4.
MODBUS
Communication
Edition
This manual

FX2N-16LNK-M*1
*1.
*2.
A-26
*1
N:N
Parallel Computer
Inverter
MODBUS
Network
link
link
communication communication
*2
FX3UC FX3U-16CCL-M*1
(D,DS,
*1
DSS) FX2N-32CCL
PLC
FX3U-64CCL*1
FX3U-128ASL-M*1
CC-Link
RS-232C
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
FX2N-64CL-M*1
Data Link
The FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is required to connect to the FX3UC PLC.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M, FX3U-128ASL-M and/
or FX2N-32ASI-M.
The FX3U-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M and/or FX2N-32ASI-M.
The FX3U-16CCL-M can be used at the same time with the FX3U-128ASL-M when CC-Link parameters
are set using network parameters.
Two channels cannot be set at the same time in N:N Network and parallel link.
N:N Network and parallel link cannot be used together.
Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.
The FX3U-128ASL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M and/or FX2N-32ASI-M.
The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M, FX3U-128ASL-M and/
or FX2N-16CCL-M.
Two channels cannot be set at the same time in remote maintenance.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map
A
Ethernet
Non-protocol
communication
Product manual
This manual
Wire-reducing network
CC-Link/
LT
AnyWire
ASLINK
AS-i
system
Sequence program
Mail
sending
MELSECRemote
Internet mail
Programming
I/O LINK
maintenance
sending
Product manual


*9


—
—


—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
*4*7
—
—

*8
—
—
—

—
—
—
—


—
—
—
—
D
Computer Link
—
C
Parallel Link
—
B
N:N Network
FX-232DOPA
User's Manual
This manual
Common Items
Ethernet
General-purpose
communication communication
—
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-27
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.2.2
PLC
2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLCs
Communication
equipment
Communication
specifications
Manual name (Obtain manuals if necessary.) 
FX3U-USB-BD
Data Link
CC-Link
Product
manual
USB
FX3U-232-BD
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)*1
RS-232C
FX2N-232IF*2
FX3U-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)*1
FX3U-422-BD
Standard built-in port
FX3UC32MT- FX2N-16CCL-M*2
LT(-2)
FX3U-16CCL-M*2
PLC
FX2N-32CCL*2
FX3U-64CCL
RS-485
RS-422
MODBUS
Communication
Edition
This manual
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—

—
*7
—
—
—
—
—
*6
*6


—
*6
*6


*7
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*3
*4*5

*2
FX2N-64CL-M*2
N:N
Parallel Computer
Inverter
MODBUS
Network
link
link
communication communication

—
—
Built-in type CC-Link/
LT master
—
FX3U-128ASL-M*2
—
FX2N-32ASI-M*2
—
FX3U-ENET-ADP*1
—
*1.
The expansion board is required to connect the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.
*2.
The FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-IPS-5V is required to connect the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC.
*3.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M, FX3U-128ASL-M and/
or FX2N-32ASI-M.
*4.
The FX3U-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M and/or FX2N-32ASI-M.
*5.
The FX3U-16CCL-M can be used at the same time with the FX3U-128ASL-M when CC-Link parameters
are set using network parameters.
*6.
Two channels cannot be set at the same time in N:N Network and parallel link.
N:N Network and parallel link cannot be used together.
*7.
Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.
*8.
For the FX2N-64CL-M, refer to FX2N-64CL-M User's Manual.
For FX3UC built-in CC-Link/LT master, refer to FX3UC Hardware Edition.
*9.
The FX3U-128ASL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M and/or FX2N-32ASI-M.
*10. The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M, FX3U-128ASL-M and/
or FX2N-16CCL-M.
*11. Two channels cannot be set at the same time in remote maintenance.
A-28
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map
A
Non-protocol
communication
Product manual
This manual
CC-Link/
LT
AnyWire
ASLINK
AS-i
system
Sequence program
Mail
sending
MELSECRemote
Internet mail
Programming
I/OLINK
maintenance
sending
Product manual
FX-232DOPA
User's Manual
This manual

—
—


*11




*11


—
—


—
—
—

—
—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
*8
—
—
—
—
—
*5*9
—
—
—
—

—
—

—
—
F
—
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
—
*10
E
Inverter
Communication
—
*8
D
Computer Link
—
C
Parallel Link
—
B
N:N Network
Ethernet
Wire-reducing network
Common Items
Ethernet
General-purpose
communication communication
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-29
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.2.3
PLC
2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map
FX3G and FX3GC PLCs
Communication
equipment
Communication
specifications
Manual name (Obtain manuals if necessary.) 
Standard built-in port
FX3G-232-BD
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)*1
Data Link
CC-Link
Product
manual
USB
RS-232C
FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
RS-485
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)*1
FX3G
PLC
FX3G-422-BD
Standard built-in port
RS-422
FX2N-16CCL-M

FX2N-32CCL
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—

—
*6
*5
*5


—
*5
*5


—
*5
*5


* 6
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*2

—

FX2N-64CL-M
—
FX3U-128ASL-M
—
FX3U-ENET-ADP*1
—
Standard built-in port
USB
—
—
—
—
—
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
RS-232C
—
—

—
* 6
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
RS-485
*5
*5


* 6
Standard built-in port
RS-422
—
—
—
—
—
FX2N-16CCL-M*10
*2
FX3GC
FX3U-16CCL-M*10
PLC
FX2N-32CCL*10
FX3U-64CCL*10
*3*4

—

FX2N-64CL-M*10
—
FX3U-128ASL-M*10
—
FX3U-ENET-ADP
—
*1.
The FX3G-CNV-ADP is required to connect the FX3G PLC.
*2.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M and/or FX3U-128ASL-M.
*3.
The FX3U-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M.
*4.
The FX3U-16CCL-M can be used at the same time with the FX3U-128ASL-M when CC-Link parameters
are set using network parameters.
*5.
Two channels cannot be set at the same time in N:N Network and parallel link.
N:N Network and parallel link cannot be used together.
*6.
Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.
*7.
Only the RS2 instruction is supported.
*8.
The FX3U-128ASL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M.
*9.
Two channels cannot be set at the same time in remote maintenance.
*10. The FX2NC-CNV-IF or FX3UC-1PS-5V is required to connect the FX3GC PLC.
A-30
MODBUS
Communication
Edition
This manual
*3*4
FX3U-16CCL-M
FX3U-64CCL
N:N
Parallel Computer
Inverter
MODBUS
Network
link
link
communication communication
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map
A
Non-protocol
communication
Product manual
This manual
CC-Link/
LT
AnyWire
ASLINK
AS-i
system
Sequence program
Mail
sending
MELSECRemote
Internet mail
Programming
I/O LINK
maintenance
sending
Product manual
FX-232DOPA
User's Manual
This manual
—

—
—

—


*9
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
*7

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
*4*8
—
—
—
—
—
—

E

—
—


*9
—

—
—
—

—
—

*7
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
*4*8
—
—

—
—
—
—
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
—
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
—
Inverter
Communication
—
D
Computer Link

—
C
Parallel Link

*9
B
N:N Network
Ethernet
Wire-reducing network
Common Items
Ethernet
General-purpose
communication communication
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-31
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.2.4
PLC
2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map
FX3S PLC
Communication
equipment
Communication
specifications
Manual name (Obtain manuals if necessary.) 
Standard built-in port
FX3G-232-BD
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)*1
FX3S
PLC
CC-Link
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
USB
RS-232C
RS-485
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)*1
Standard built-in port
FX3U-ENET-ADP*1
RS-422
—
N:N
Parallel Computer
Inverter
MODBUS
Network
link
link
communication communication
Product
manual
FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-422-BD
A-32
Data Link
MODBUS
Communication
Edition
This manual
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—

—
* 2




—




—




* 2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*1.
The FX3S-CNV-ADP is required to connect the FX3S PLC.
*2.
Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map
A
Non-protocol
communication
Product manual
This manual
Mail sending
MELSEC-I/O
Remote
Internet mail
Programming
LINK
maintenance
sending
Product manual
FX-232DOPA
User's Manual
This manual
—

—
—



—



—

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—
C
D
Computer Link
—
B
Parallel Link

CC-Link/LT AS-i system
Sequence program
N:N Network
Ethernet
Wire-reducing network
Common Items
Ethernet
General-purpose
communication communication
—
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-33
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.2.5
PLC
2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map
FX2N and FX2NC PLCs
Communication
equipment
Communication
specifications
Manual name (Obtain manuals if necessary.) 
Link
CC-Link
Product
manual
Computer
link
Inverter
communication
This manual
—
—

—
FX2NC-232ADP*1
—
—

—
—
—
*3
—
—
—
—
—
RS-232C
FX2N-232IF
FX2N-485-BD
FX2NC-485ADP*1
RS-485








FX0N-485ADP*1




FX2N-422-BD
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Standard built-in port
RS-422
FX2N-16CCL-M
*2
FX2N-32CCL
FX2N-64CL-M

—
—
FX2N-32ASI-M
—
FX2N-16LNK-M
—
FX2NC-232ADP
FX0N-232ADP
RS-232C
FX2N-232IF*4
FX2NC-485ADP
FX0N-485ADP
FX2NC Standard built-in port
PLC
FX2N-16CCL-M*4
RS-485
RS-422
FX2N-64CL-M*4
—
—

—
—
—
*3
—
—
—
—
—








—
—
—
—
*2
FX2N-32CCL*4
A-34
Parallel
link
FX2N-232-BD
FX0N-232ADP*1
FX2N
PLC
N:N
Network

—
—
FX2N-32ASI-M*4
—
FX2N-16LNK-M*4
—
*1.
The FX2N-CNV-BD is required to connect the FX2N PLC.
*2.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-32ASI-M.
*3.
It is recommended to use a connector or thin type FX2NC-232ADP (9-pin D-Sub).
*4.
The FX2NC-CNV-IF is required to connect the FX2NC PLC.
*5.
The FX2NC-MT-D/UL and FX2NC-M-DSS(-T-DS) does not support this connection.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map
A
Non-protocol
communication
I/O link
CC-Link/
LT
Mail sending
MELSEC-I/O
Remote
Internet mail
Programming
LINK
maintenance
sending
Product manual
This manual
Short mail
sending
FX-232DOPA
User's Manual
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N,
FX1NC, FX2NC
Programming
Manual









*3
*3
*3
*3
*3
—
—

—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
*2
—
—
—

E


*3

*3

*3

*3


—
—

—

—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
*2*5
—
—
—

F
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
—

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
*3

Inverter
Communication
—
D
Computer Link


C
Parallel Link

B
N:N Network
This manual
AS-i
system
Sequence program
Common Items
General-purpose
communication
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-35
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.2.6
PLC
2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map
FX1S, FX1N, and FX1NC PLCs
Communication
equipment
Communication
specifications
Manual name (Obtain manuals if necessary.) 
Link
CC-Link
Inverter
communication
This manual
—
—

—
FX2NC-232ADP*1
—
—

—
—
—
*2
—
RS-232C
FX1N-485-BD



—
FX2NC-485ADP*1



—



—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
FX1N-232-BD
—
—

—
FX2NC-232ADP*1
—
—

—
FX0N-232ADP*1
—
—
*2
—
FX1N-485-BD



—



—



—
FX1N-422-BD
Standard built-in port
FX2NC-485ADP*1
RS-485
RS-422
RS-232C
RS-485
FX0N-485ADP*1
FX1N-422-BD
Standard built-in port
RS-422
FX2N-32CCL
FX2N-64CL-M
—
—
—
FX2NC-485ADP
FX0N-485ADP
Standard built-in port
FX1NC
PLC
FX2N-16CCL-M*4
RS-232C
RS-485
RS-422
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—



*2

—


—
—
—
—
—
—
FX2N-16LNK-M*4
—
—


FX2N-32ASI-M*4
—
—
*3
FX2N-32CCL*4
FX2N-64CL-M*4
—
—
—
FX2N-16LNK-M
FX0N-232ADP
—
—

FX2N-32ASI-M
FX2NC-232ADP
—
*3
FX2N-16CCL-M
A-36
Computer
link
FX1N-232-BD
FX0N-485ADP*1
FX1N
PLC
Parallel
link
Product
manual
FX0N-232ADP*1
FX1S
PLC
N:N
Network
*1.
The FX1N-CNV-BD is required to connect the FX1S or FX1N PLC.
*2.
It is recommended to use a connector or thin type FX2NC-232ADP (9-pin D-Sub).
*3.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-32ASI-M.
*4.
The FX2NC-CNV-IF is required to connect the FX1NC PLC.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map
A
CC-Link/LT
This manual
AS-i system
Sequence program
MELSEC-I/O
LINK
Programming
Product manual
Remote
maintenance
Mail sending
Internet mail
sending
B
FX-232DOPA
User's Manual
This manual









*2

*2

*2

—
—
—

—
—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—










*2

*2

*2
—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
*3
—
—
—



*2

*2


*2


—
—
—

—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
*3
—

—
—
H
Programming
Communication
—
G
*2
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
—
—
E
Inverter
Communication

—
D
Computer Link
—
—
Parallel Link
—

*2
C
*2

N:N Network
Non-protocol
communication
I/O link
Common Items
General-purpose
communication
—

I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-37
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.2.7
PLC
2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map
FX0N PLCs
Communication
equipment
Communication
specifications
Manual name (Obtain manuals if necessary.) 
FX2NC-232ADP
FX0N-232ADP
FX2NC-485ADP
FX0N-485ADP
FX0N
PLC
Standard built-in port
PLC
Parallel
link
RS-422
FX2N-16CCL-M
—

Computer
link
Inverter
communication
This manual
—
RS-485
—
N:N
Network
Product
manual
RS-232C
—

*1
—
—
—



—



—
—
—
—
—

—
—
FX2N-32ASI-M
—
FX2N-16LNK-M
—
*1.
It is recommended to use a connector or thin type FX2NC-232ADP (9-pin D-Sub).
*2.
Only Japanese manual is available for this product.
FX1, FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0 and FX0S PLCs (reference)
Communication
equipment
Communication
specifications
Manual name (Obtain manuals if necessary.) 
FX1
PLC
CC-Link
FX2N-32CCL
FX2N-64CL-M
2.2.8
Link
Standard built-in port
FX-232ADP
FX2(FX) FX-485ADP
PLC
FX-40AW
FX2C
FX-40AP
PLC
Link
CC-Link
N:N
Network
Parallel
link
Product
manual
Computer
link
Inverter
communication
This manual
RS-422
—
—
—
—
RS-232C
—
—

—
RS-485
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
Optical
communication
—

—
—
Standard built-in port
RS-422
—
—
—
—
FX0
PLC
Standard built-in port
RS-422
—
—
—
—
FX0S
PLC
Standard built-in port
RS-422
—
—
—
—
*1.
A-38
Only Japanese manual is available for this product.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.2 Communication Equipment Applicability Map
A
CC-Link/LT
This manual
AS-i system
Sequence program
MELSEC-I/O
LINK
Programming
Product manual
Remote
maintenance
Mail sending
Internet mail
sending
B
FX-232DOPA
User's Manual*2
This manual
—
—
—
*1
—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

D
Computer Link
—
C
Parallel Link

N:N Network
Non-protocol
communication
I/O link
Common Items
General-purpose
communication
E
Inverter
Communication
Non-protocol
communication
This manual
I/O link
CC-Link/LT
AS-i system
Sequence program
MELSEC-I/O
LINK
Programming
Product manual
Remote
maintenance
Mail sending
Internet mail
sending
FX-232DOPA
User's Manual*1
This manual
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
General-purpose
communication
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
H
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
Programming
Communication

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
G
—
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-39
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
2.3
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
The block diagram below shows combinations of optional communication equipment applicable in each FX Series.
2.3.1
How to look at combination pages
FX Series name
Communication equipment connection type
Applicable communication type
FX1N Series
A
B
FX PLC main
unit mounting
position
For special function units/blocks C , refer to the next page.
C
A , B and C indicate the mounting position.
B
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the
respective communication equipment manual.)
RS-485
European
terminal block
FX1N-485-BD
B
N:N Network
A
Parallel link
Selection
example
European
terminal block
FX1N-CNV-BD
FX2NC-485ADP
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
A
M3 terminal
block
FX0N-485ADP
B
RS-422
One line can be selected.
Connection
condition
8-pin MINI-DIN,
female
Programming
communication
FX1N-422-BD
B
A
European
terminal block
FX1N-CNV-BD
FX2NC-485ADP
Non-protocol
communication
A
M3 terminal
block
FX0N-485ADP
B
RS-232C
9-pin D-Sub,
male
FX1N-232-BD
B
Computer link
A
Non-protocol
communication
9-pin D-Sub,
male
FX1N-CNV-BD
FX2NC-232ADP
Remote
maintenance
A
25-pin
D-Sub,
female
FX0N-232ADP
A-40
Programming
communication
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
A
For FX3U Series
Common Items
2.3.2
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
FX3U Series
A
For special function units/blocks C refer to the next page.
C
B
B
N:N Network
A , B , and C indicate the mounting position. (For the mounting procedure, refer to the
respective communication equipment manual.)
Either FX3UB
ch1
232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
or FX3U-ENET-ADP
can be selected.
European terminal
 N:N Network
block
 Parallel link
A
ch2
 Computer link
FX3U-485-BD
European terminal
 Non-protocol
block
communication
B
A
ch1
 Inverter
communication
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
European terminal
 MODBUS *1
block
communication
RDA
RS-485
RD
RDB
SDA
SD
SDB
SG
B
Parallel Link
FX3U-CNV-BD
C
D
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
RS-422
8-pin MINI-DIN,
female
Computer Link
ch1
 Programming
communication
FX3U-422-BD
E
ch1
B
Inverter
Communication
RDA
RD
RDB
SDA
SD
SDB
SG
A
ch2
FX3U-485-BD
B
A
European terminal
block
ch1
B
RS-232C
communication
F
European terminal
block
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
ch1
G
RD
A
ch2
FX3U-232-BD
B
communication
9-pin D-Sub, male
A
ch1
USB
communication*1
communication
 Remote
maintenance
H
Programming
Communication
9-pin D-Sub, male
FX3U-232-BD
 MODBUS
 Programming
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
B
 Computer link
 Non-protocol
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
9-pin D-Sub, male
SD
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
ch1
USB Mini-B connector
 Programming
I
Modular jack
 Ethernet
 Programming
Apx.A
RD
SD
B
A
A
ch2
ch1
Ethernet
FX3U-ENET-ADP
communication
Discontinued
models
FX3U-ENET-ADP
FX3U-CNV-BD
communication
Remote
Maintenance
FX3U-USB-BD
*1.
 Non-protocol
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
FX3U-CNV-BD
European terminal
block
Modular jack
Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.
A-41
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
FX3U Series
A
B
C
A , B , and C indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
For special adapters with communication type A and communication
expansion boards B , refer to the previous page.
For master station
FX 2N-16CCL-M
CC-Link
E
R
R
O
R
M3/M3.5
terminal block*4
FX 3U -16CCL-M*1*2 FX 2N -16CCL-M *3
For remote device station
M3 terminal block
 CC-Link
FX2N-32CCL
For intelligent device station
M3 terminal block
Up to 8 units can be selected.
FX3U-64CCL*2
POW
ER
SD
RD
9-pin D-Sub, male
 Non-protocol
communication
FX2N-232IF
Dedicated connector
 CC-Link/LT
FX2N-64CL-M
European
terminal block
 AnyWireASLINK
FX 3U-128ASL-M*2*5
U
ASI
ASI
ACTIVE
POWE
R
ADDRESS/
ERROR
FX2N-32ASI-M
MOD
E
SE
T
M3 terminal block
 AS-i system
M3 terminal block

PRJ
MODE
PRG
ENABLE
FROM/
TO
CONFIG
ERR
FX2N-32ASI-M*6
MELSEC-I/O LINK
FX2N-16LNK-M
*1.
*2.
*3.
The FX3U-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M and/or the FX2N-32ASI-M.
Only one unit can be connected to the main unit.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M, FX3U-128ASL-M and/or
the FX2N-32ASI-M.
*4. The terminal screw size is "M3" in the FX3U-16CCL-M.
The terminal screw size is "M3.5" in the FX2N-16CCL-M.
*5. The FX3U-128ASL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M and/or FX2N-32ASI-M.
*6. The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M, FX3U-128ASL-M and/or the
FX2N-16CCL-M.
Only one station can be used for the whole system.
Limitation in the number of connectable units
Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Therefore, the total current consumption larger than the plc current capacity reduces the number of
connectable units.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.
A-42
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
A
For FX3UC(D, DS, DSS) Series
Common Items
2.3.3
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
FX3UC(D, DS, DSS) Series
A
For special function units/blocks B , refer to the next page.
B
ch2
European
terminal block
FX3U-485ADP
(-MB)
FX3U-485ADP
(-MB)
A
ch1
N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
 Inverter
communication
 MODBUS
communication*1
Inverter
Communication
ch2
European
terminal block
FX3U-485ADP
(-MB)
D
E
European
terminal block
A
C
Computer Link
RS-422




Parallel Link
A
N:N Network
RS-485
B
A and B indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
Either FX3U232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
or
FX3U-ENET-ADP
A
ch1
can be selected.
European
terminal block
 Non-protocol
communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX3U-485ADP
(-MB)
G
A
ch1
9-pin D-Sub,
male
ch2
9-pin D-Sub,
male
FX3U-232ADP
(-MB)
communication
 MODBUS *1
communication
 Programming
communication
 Remote
maintenance
FX3U-232ADP
(-MB)
A
I
Remote
Maintenance
A
ch2
ch1
Modular jack
 Ethernet
 Programming
Ethernet
FX3U-ENET-ADP
communication
FX3U-ENET-ADP
*1.
Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.
A-43
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
Modular jack
H
Programming
Communication
A
 Computer link
 Non-protocol
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
RS-232C
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
FX3UC(D, DS, DSS) Series
A and B indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
A
B
For special adapters with communication type A , refer to the previous
page.
For master
station
FX 2N -16CCL-M
M3/M3.5
terminal
block*4
CC-Link
E
R
R
O
R
FX2NC-CNV-IF
FX3U-16CCL-M*1*2 FX 2N -16CCL-M*3
For remote
device
station
FX3UC-1PS-5V
M3 terminal block
 CC-Link
FX2N-32CCL
For intelligent
device
station
M3 terminal block
Up to 8 units can be selected.
FX3U-64CCL*2
POWER
SD
RD
9-pin D-Sub,
male
 Non-protocol
communication
FX2N-232IF
Dedicated
connector
 CC-Link/LT
FX2N-64CL-M
European
terminal block
 AnyWireASLINK
FX 3U-128ASL-M*2*5
U
ASI
ASI
ACTIVE
POWE
R
ADDRESS/
ERROR
FX2N-32ASI-M
MOD
E
SE
T
M3 terminal block
 AS-i system
M3 terminal block

PRJ
MODE
PRG
ENABLE
FROM/
TO
CONFIG
ERR
FX2N-32ASI-M*6
MELSEC-I/O LINK
FX2N-16LNK-M
*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.
*6.
The FX3U-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M and/or the FX2N-32ASI-M.
Only one unit can be connected to the main unit.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M, FX3U-128ASL-M and/or
the FX2N-32ASI-M.
The terminal screw size is "M3" in the FX3U-16CCL-M.
The terminal screw size is "M3.5" in the FX2N-16CCL-M.
The FX3U-128ASL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M and/or FX2N-32ASI-M.
The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M, FX3U-128ASL-M and/or
the FX2N-16CCL-M.
Only one station can be used for the whole system.
Limitation in the number of connectable units
Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Accordingly, when the total current consumption is larger than the current capacity of the PLC, it is necessary
to add the power block FX3UC-1PS-5V.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.
A-44
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
A
For FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
Common Items
2.3.4
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
A
For special function units/blocks C , refer to the next page.
C
B
B
A , B and C indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
RDA
RS-485
RD
RDB
SDA
SD
SDB
SG
A
FX3U-485-BD
A
European
terminal block
ch1
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
FX3U-CNV-BD
N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
 Inverter
communication
 MODBUS *1
communication
D
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
ch1
RS-422
8-pin MINI-DIN,
female
 Programming
communication
FX3U-422-BD
B
E
ch1
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
A
ch2
FX3U-485-BD
B
European
terminal block
A
European
terminal block
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
ch1
RD
SD
A
B
A
USB
9-pin D-Sub,
male
 MODBUS
communication
 Programming
communication
9-pin D-Sub,
male
 Remote
maintenance
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
ch1
 Programming
I
B
A
Modular jack
 Ethernet
 Programming
Apx.A
ch2
ch1
Ethernet
FX3U-ENET-ADP
communication
Modular jack
Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.
A-45
Discontinued
models
FX3U-ENET-ADP
FX3U-CNV-BD
communication
Remote
Maintenance
A
FX3U-USB-BD
H
USB Mini-B connector
RD
SD
*1.
communication*1
G
Programming
Communication
B
 Computer link
 Non-protocol
ch1
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
FX3U-CNV-BD
9-pin D-Sub,
male
ch2
FX3U-232-BD
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
RS-232C
communication
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
B
 Non-protocol
ch1
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
FX3U-CNV-BD
European
terminal block
Inverter
Communication
RDA
RD
SD
C
Computer Link
B
European
terminal block




Parallel Link
B
ch2
European
terminal block
N:N Network
Either FX3U232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
or FX3U-ENET-ADP
can be selected.
ch1
B
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
A
B
C
A , B and C indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
For special adapters with communication type A and communication
expansion boards B , refer to the previous page.
FX 2N -16CCL-M
For master
station
M3/M3.5
terminal
block* 4
CC-Link
E
R
R
O
R
FX2NC-CNV-IF
3
1 2
FX3U -16CCL-M* * FX 2N-16CCL-M*
For remote
device
station
FX3UC-1PS-5V
M3 terminal block
 CC-Link
FX2N-32CCL
Up to 7 units can be selected.
For intelligent
device
station
M3 terminal block
*2
FX3U-64CCL
POWER
SD
RD
9-pin D-Sub,
male
For FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
built-in.
FX2N-232IF
 Non-protocol
communication
Dedicated
connector
Dedicated
connector
 CC-Link/LT
FX2N-64CL-M
European
terminal block
 AnyWireASLINK
FX 3U-128ASL-M*2*5
U
ASI
ASI
ACTIVE
POWE
R
ADDRESS/
ERROR
FX2N-32ASI-M
MOD
E
SE
T
M3 terminal block
 AS-i system
PRJ
MODE
PRG
ENABLE
FROM/
TO
CONFIG
ERR
FX2N-32ASI-M*6
*1.
*2.
*3.
The FX3U-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M and/or the FX2N-32ASI-M.
Only one unit can be connected to the main unit.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M, FX3U-128ASL-M and/or
the FX2N-32ASI-M.
*4. The terminal screw size is "M3" in the FX3U-16CCL-M.
The terminal screw size is "M3.5" in the FX2N-16CCL-M.
*5. The FX3U-128ASL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M and/or FX2N-32ASI-M.
*6. The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M, FX3U-128ASL-M and/or
the FX2N-16CCL-M.
Only one station can be used for the whole system.
Limitation in the number of connectable units
Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Accordingly, when the total current consumption is larger than the current capacity of the PLC, it is necessary
to add the power block FX3UC-1PS-5V.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.
A-46
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
A
For FX3G Series
Common Items
2.3.5
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
1. FX3G Series (14-point, 24-point type)
A
B
B
For special function units/blocks C , refer to the this section 3.
C
N:N Network
A , B and C indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
B
ch1
RS-485
European
terminal block
B
● Parallel link
● Computer link
ch1
RJ45 connector
A
ch1
B
● MODBUS
communication*1
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
ch1
RS-422
● Programming
communication
FX3G-422-BD
B
ch1
European
terminal block
● Non-protocol
communication
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
B
A
G
ch1
B
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
● Computer link
ch1
RS-232C
FX3G-232-BD
B
● MODBUS
communication*1
A
ch1
9-pin D-sub,
male
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
B
A
ch1
Ethernet
*1.
● Remote
maintenance
● Ethernet
Modular jack
FX3U-ENET-ADP
● Programming
communication
● Programming
communication
H
I
Remote
Maintenance
FX3G-CNV-ADP
FX3G-CNV-ADP
● Non-protocol
communication
Programming
Communication
9-pin D-sub,
male
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
European
terminal block
FX3G-CNV-ADP
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
ch1
RJ45 connector
E
F
FX3G-485-BD
B
D
Inverter
Communication
8-pin MINI-DIN,
female
C
Computer Link
European
terminal block
FX3G-CNV-ADP
● Non-protocol
communication
● Inverter
communication
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
B
● N:N Network
Parallel Link
FX3G-485-BD
Apx.A
Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.
Discontinued
models
A-47
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
2. FX3G Series (40-point, 60-point type)
B
A
C
For special function units/blocks
D
D,
refer to the this section 3.
A , B , C and indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
B
Only either A or
C can be used
as ch2.
ch1
RS-485
European
terminal block
FX3G-485-BD
B
ch1
C
ch2
European
terminal block
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
A
ch2
C
A
ch1
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
B
ch1
FX3G-422-BD
B
Either FX3U232ADP(-MB) or
FX3U-485ADP
(-MB) can be
selected.
ch1
FX3G-485-BD
B
B
ch2
A
FX3G-422-BD
ch1
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
A-48
 Non-protocol
communication
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
A
ch1
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
A
ch1
A
ch2
*1
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
A
ch2
*1
Ethernet
FX3G-CNV-ADP
communication
European
terminal block
ch2
FX3G-232-BD
B
 Programming
European
terminal block
European
terminal block
C
FX3G-CNV-ADP
8-pin MINI-DIN,
female
ch2
ch1
B
communication*2
European
terminal block
8-pin MINI-DIN,
female
*1
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
FX3G-CNV-ADP
 MODBUS
RJ45
connector
A
RS-232C
C
ch1
B
 Non-protocol
European
terminal block
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
RS-422
 Computer link
communication
RJ45
connector
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
 Parallel link
 Inverter
ch2
*1
 N:N Network
communication
FX3G-485-BD
B
FX3G-CNV-ADP
RJ45
connector
FX3U-ENET-ADP
FX3U-ENET-ADP
FX3G-232-BD
9-pin D-Sub,
male
 Computer link
 MODBUS
communication*2
9-pin D-Sub,
male
 Non-protocol
9-pin D-Sub,
male
 Programming
9-pin D-Sub,
male
 Remote
Modular
jack
Modular
jack
communication
communication
maintenance
 Ethernet
 Programming
communication
*1.
Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or FX3G-2EYT-BD is used.
*2.
Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
A
, , and indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.
For special adapters with communication type
and
communication expansion board , , refer to this section 1,2.
CC-Link
E
R
R
O
R
B
N:N Network
FX2N-16CCL-M
For master station
M3/M3.5
terminal block*4
C
Parallel Link
FX3U-16CCL-M*1*2 FX2N-16CCL-M *3
For remote device station
Up to 8 units can be selected
Common Items
3. FX3G Series (Special unit/special block diagram)
M3 terminal block
● CC-Link
D
Computer Link
FX2N-32CCL
For intelligent device station
M3 terminal block
E
*2
Dedicated connector
Inverter
Communication
FX3U-64CCL
● CC-Link/LT
F
European
terminal block
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX2N-64CL-M
 AnyWireASLINK
G
FX 3U-128ASL-M*2*5
The FX3U-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M.
*2.
Only one unit can be connected to the main unit.
*3.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M and/or FX3U-128ASL-M.
*4.
The terminal screw size is "M3" in the FX3U-16CCL-M.
The terminal screw size is "M3.5" in the FX2N-16CCL-M.
*5.
The FX3U-128ASL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
*1.
H
Programming
Communication
Limitation in the number of connectable units
Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Accordingly, the number of connectable units depends on the system configuration.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-49
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.3.6
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
For FX3GC Series
FX3GC Series
A
For special function units/blocks B , refer to the next page.
B
A and B indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
Either FX3U232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
A
ch1
or FX3U-ENET-ADP
 N:N Network
RS-485
European
can be selected.
 Parallel link
terminal block
 Computer link
A
 Non-protocol
ch2
communication
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
European
 Inverter
terminal block
communication
 MODBUS *1
communication
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
A
ch1
RS-422
European
terminal block
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
A
ch2
 Non-protocol
communication
European
terminal block
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
A
 Computer link
 Non-protocol
ch1
communication
RS-232C
9-pin D-Sub,
male
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
A
ch2
9-pin D-Sub,
male
 MODBUS
communication*1
 Programming
communication
 Remote
maintenance
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
A
ch2
Modular jack
A
ch1
FX3U-ENET-ADP
Ethernet
Modular jack
● Ethernet
● Programming
communication
FX3U-ENET-ADP
*1.
A-50
Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
A
A
Common Items
FX3GC Series
A and B indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
B
B
For special adapters with communication type A , refer to the previous
page.
B
FX2N-16CCL-M
CC-Link
FX2NC-CNV-IF
FX3U-16CCL-M*1*2
B
B
For master station
M3/M3.5
terminal block*4
C
FX2N-16CCL-M *3
For remote
device
station
Parallel Link
M3 terminal block
 CC-Link
D
Computer Link
Up to 8 units can be selected.
E
R
R
O
R
FX3UC-1PS-5V
N:N Network
B
FX2N-32CCL
B
For intelligent
device
station
M3 terminal block
E
FX3U-64CCL
B
Dedicated
connector
 CC-Link/LT
B
European
terminal block
 AnyWireASLINK
G
FX 3U-128ASL-M*2*5
The FX3U-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M.
*2.
Only one unit can be connected to the main unit.
*3.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX3U-16CCL-M and/or FX3U-128ASL-M.
*4.
The terminal screw size is "M3" in the FX3U-16CCL-M.
The terminal screw size is "M3.5" in the FX2N-16CCL-M.
*5.
The FX3U-128ASL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
*1.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX2N-64CL-M
Inverter
Communication
*2
H
Programming
Communication
Limitation in the number of connectable units
Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Accordingly, when the total current consumption is larger than the current capacity of the PLC, it is necessary
to add the power block FX3UC-1PS-5V.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-51
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
2.3.7
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
For FX3S Series
FX3S Series
A
C
B
For special function units/blocks C are not connectable.
A , B and C indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
B
RS-485
European
terminal block
FX3G-485-BD
B
RJ45 connector
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
B
A




N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
 Inverter
communication
 MODBUS *1
communication
European
terminal block
FX3S-CNV-ADP
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
B
RS-422
8-pin MINI-DIN,
female
● Programming
communication
FX3G-422-BD
B
European
terminal block
FX3G-485-BD
B
RJ45 connector
 Non-protocol
communication
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
B
A
European
terminal block
FX3S-CNV-ADP
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
B
RS-232C
9-pin D-Sub,male
communication*1
A
 Programming
9-pin D-Sub,male
FX3S-CNV-ADP
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
B
A
Ethernet
*1.
A-52
communication
 Remote
maintenance
● Ethernet
Modular jack
FX3S-CNV-ADP
communication
 MODBUS
FX3G-232-BD
B
 Computer link
 Non-protocol
● Programming
communication
FX3U-ENET-ADP
Only the FX3U-485ADP-MB and FX3U-232ADP-MB support MODBUS communication.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
A
For FX2N Series
Common Items
FX2N Series
A
B
D
B
For special function units/blocks C , refer to the next page.
C
B
RS-485
European
terminal block
B
A
European
terminal block
FX2N-CNV-BD
FX2NC-485ADP
A
●
●
●
●
N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
● Inverter
communication
D
FX0N-485ADP
Essential when inverter
communication is used.
B
FX2N-ROM-E1
RS-422
● Programming
communication
FX2N-422-BD
B
F
European
terminal block
● Non-protocol
A
communication
European
terminal block
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
A
FX2N-CNV-BD
FX2NC-485ADP
M3 terminal
block
B
H
FX0N-485ADP
RS-232C
FX2N-232-BD
● Computer link
● Non-protocol
A
communication
A
FX2N-CNV-BD
FX2NC-232ADP
communication
● Programming
● Remote
25-pin
D-Sub,
female
maintenance
● Short mail
sending
Apx.A
D
Discontinued
models
FX0N-232ADP
FX2N-ROM-E1
I
Remote
Maintenance
9-pin D-Sub, male
Programming
Communication
9-pin D-Sub, male
B
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX2N-485-BD
B
E
Inverter
Communication
8-pin MINI-DIN,
female
D
Computer Link
M3 terminal
block
C
Parallel Link
FX2N-485-BD
N:N Network
A , B , C and D indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
One line can be selected.
2.3.8
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
Essential when the short mail
sending is used
A-53
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
FX2N Series
A
B
D
A , B , C and D indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
C
For special adapters with communication type A , communication
expansion board B and function extension memory
cassettes D , refer to the previous page.
C
For master station
FX2N-16CCL-M
M3.5 terminal block
CC-Link
E
R
R
O
R
FX2N-16CCL-M*1
CC-Link
C
For remote device station
M3 terminal block
FX2N-32CCL
Up to 8 units can be selected.
C
POWER
SD
RD
9-pin D-Sub, male
Non-protocol
communication
FX2N-232IF
C
Dedicated connector
CC-Link/LT
M3 terminal block
AS-i system
M3 terminal block
MELSEC-I/O LINK
FX2N-64CL-M
C
U
ASI
ASI
ACTIVE
POWE
R
ADDRESS/
ERROR
FX2N -32ASI-M
MOD
E
SE
T
PRJ
MODE
PRG
ENABLE
FROM/
TO
CONFIG
ERR
FX2N-32ASI-M*2
C
FX2N-16LNK-M
*1.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-32ASI-M.
*2.
The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M.
Limitation in the number of connectable units
Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Therefore, the total current consumption larger than the PLC current capacity reduces the number of
connectable units.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.
A-54
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
A
For FX2NC Series
Common Items
FX2NC Series
A
D
For special function units/blocks C , refer to the next page.
C
B
A
RS-485
European terminal block
C
M3 terminal block
D
Essential when inverter communication is used
D
Computer Link
FX0N-485ADP
N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
Inverter
communication
Parallel Link
FX2NC-485ADP
A
N:N Network
A , C and D indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
E
Inverter
Communication
FX2NC-ROM-CE1
A
RS-422
European terminal block
FX2NC-485ADP
F
Non-protocol
communication
A
M3 terminal block
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX0N-485ADP
A
RS-232C
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
One line can be selected.
2.3.9
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
9-pin D-Sub, male
H
A
25-pin D-Sub, male
D
Essential when the short mail sending is used
I
Remote
Maintenance
FX0N-232ADP
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
Programming
communication
Short mail
sending
Programming
Communication
FX2NC-232ADP
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
FX2NC-ROM-CE1
A-55
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
FX2NC Series
A
D
A , C and D indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
C
For special adapters with communication type A and function
extension memory boards D , refer to the previous page.
C
C
For master
station
FX2N-16CCL-M
CC-Link
M3.5 terminal block
E
R
R
O
R
FX2NC-CNV-IF
FX2N-16CCL-M*1
C
CC-Link
For remote
device
station
M3 terminal block
FX2N-32CCL
Up to 4 units can be selected.
C
POWER
SD
RD
9-pin D-Sub, male
Non-protocol
communication
FX2N-232IF
C
Dedicated connector
CC-Link/LT
M3 terminal block
AS-i system
M3 terminal block
MELSEC-I/O LINK
FX2N-64CL-M
C
U
ASI
ASI
ACTIVE
POWE
R
ADDRESS/
ERROR
FX 2N-32ASI-M
MOD
E
SE
T
PRJ
MODE
PRG
ENABLE
FROM/
TO
CONFIG
ERR
FX2N-32ASI-M*2*3
C
FX2N-16LNK-M
*1.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-32ASI-M.
*2.
The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M.
*3.
The FX2NC-MT-D/UL and FX2NC-M-DSS(-T-DS) are not supported.
Limitation in the number of connectable units
Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Therefore, the total current consumption larger than the plc current capacity reduces the number of
connectable units.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.
A-56
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
A
Common Items
2.3.10 For FX1N Series
FX1N Series
A
B
For special function units/blocks C , refer to the next page.
C
B
N:N Network
A , B and C indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
B
RS-485
European
terminal block
B
A
European
terminal block
FX2NC-485ADP
N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
D
A
M3 terminal
block
B
● Programming
communication
FX1N-422-BD
F
European
terminal block
FX1N-485-BD
B
A
● Non-protocol
FX1N-CNV-BD
FX2NC-485ADP
communication
A
M3 terminal
block
H
Programming
Communication
B
FX0N-485ADP
RS-232C
9-pin D-Sub, male
FX1N-232-BD
● Computer link
● Non-protocol
A
communication
9-pin D-Sub, male
● Programming
communication
FX1N-CNV-BD
FX2NC-232ADP
I
Remote
Maintenance
B
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
European
terminal block
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
One line can be selected.
B
E
Inverter
Communication
FX0N-485ADP
8-pin MINI-DIN,
female
RS-422
C
Computer Link
FX1N-CNV-BD
●
●
●
●
Parallel Link
FX1N-485-BD
● Remote
A
maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
25-pin
D-Sub,
female
FX0N-232ADP
A-57
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
FX1N Series
A
B
C
A , B and C indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
For special adapters with communication type A and communication
expansion boards B , refer to the previous page.
C
For master station
FX2N-16CCL-M
CC-Link
M3.5 terminal block
E
R
R
O
R
FX2N-16CCL-M*1
CC-Link
C
Up to 8 units can be selected.
For remote device station
M3 terminal block
FX2N-32CCL
C
Dedicated connector
CC-Link/LT
M3 terminal block
AS-i system
M3 terminal block
MELSEC-I/O LINK
FX2N-64CL-M
C
U
ASI
ASI
ACTIVE
POWE
R
ADDRESS/
ERROR
FX2N -32ASI-M
MOD
E
SE
T
PRJ
MODE
PRG
ENABLE
FROM/
TO
CONFIG
ERR
FX2N-32ASI-M*2
C
FX2N-16LNK-M
*1.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-32ASI-M.
*2.
The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M.
Limitation in the number of connectable units
Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Accordingly, the number of connectable units depends on the system configuration.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.
A-58
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
A
Common Items
2.3.11 For FX1NC Series
FX1NC Series
A
B
For special function units/blocks C , refer to the next page.
C
A
RS-485
European terminal block
FX2NC-485ADP
A
M3 terminal block
D
Computer Link
FX0N-485ADP
European terminal block
FX2NC-485ADP
E
Non-protocol
communication
A
M3 terminal block
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX0N-485ADP
A
RS-232C
9-pin D-Sub, male
A
25-pin D-Sub, female
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
Programming
communication
Remote
maintenance
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX2NC-232ADP
Inverter
Communication
One line can be selected.
A
RS-422
C
Parallel Link
N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
N:N Network
A and C indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
H
Programming
Communication
FX0N-232ADP
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-59
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
FX1NC Series
A
A and C indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
C
For special adapters with communication type A , refer to the
previous page.
C
C
For master
station
FX2N-16CCL-M
CC-Link
M3.5 terminal block
E
R
R
O
R
FX2NC-CNV-IF
FX2N-16CCL-M*1
CC-Link
C
Up to 2 units can be selected.
For remote
device station
M3 terminal block
FX2N-32CCL
C
Dedicated connector
CC-Link/LT
M3 terminal block
AS-i system
M3 terminal block
MELSEC-I/O LINK
FX2N-64CL-M
C
U
ASI
ASI
ACTIVE
POWE
R
ADDRESS/
ERROR
FX2N-32ASI-M
MOD
E
SE
T
PRJ
MODE
PRG
ENABLE
FROM/
TO
CONFIG
ERR
FX2N-32ASI-M*2
C
FX2N-16LNK-M
*1.
The FX2N-16CCL-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-32ASI-M.
*2.
The FX2N-32ASI-M cannot be used at the same time with the FX2N-16CCL-M.
Limitation in the number of connectable units
Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Accordingly, the number of connectable units depends on the system configuration.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.
A-60
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
Common Items
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
A
Common Items
2.3.12 For FX1S Series
FX1S Series
A
B
C special units/blocks are not connectable.
C
B
N:N Network
A , B and C indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
B
RS-485
European
terminal block
B
A
European
terminal block
FX2NC-485ADP
N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
D
A
M3 terminal
block
B
● Programming
communication
FX1N-422-BD
F
European
terminal block
FX1N-485-BD
B
A
● Non-protocol
FX1N-CNV-BD
FX2NC-485ADP
communication
A
M3 terminal
block
B
H
Programming
Communication
FX0N-485ADP
RS-232C
9-pin D-Sub, male
FX1N-232-BD
● Computer link
● Non-protocol
A
communication
9-pin D-Sub, male
communication
● Remote
A
FX1N-CNV-BD
● Programming
I
Remote
Maintenance
B
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
European
terminal block
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
One line can be selected.
B
E
Inverter
Communication
FX0N-485ADP
8-pin MINI-DIN,
female
RS-422
C
Computer Link
FX1N-CNV-BD
●
●
●
●
Parallel Link
FX1N-485-BD
maintenance
FX2NC-232ADP
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
25-pin
D-Sub,
female
FX0N-232ADP
A-61
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
2.3.13 For FX0N Series
FX0N Series
A
For special function units/blocks C , refer to the next page.
C
A and C indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
A
RS-485
European terminal block
N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
FX2NC-485ADP
A
M3 terminal block
FX0N-485ADP
One line can be selected.
A
RS-422
European terminal block
FX2NC-485ADP
Non-protocol
communication
A
M3 terminal block
FX0N-485ADP
A
RS-232C
9-pin D-Sub, male
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
FX2NC-232ADP
A
25-pin D-Sub, female
FX0N-232ADP
A-62
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
A
A
C
A and C indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
B
N:N Network
For special adapters with communication type A , refer to the
previous page.
C
M3 terminal block
CC-Link
C
AS-i system
D
MELSEC-I/O LINK
E
Parallel Link
FX2N-32CCL
C
U
ASI
ASI
ACTIVE
POWE
R
ADDRESS/
ERROR
M3 terminal block
FX 2N -32ASI-M
MOD
E
SE
T
PRJ
MODE
PRG
ENABLE
FROM/
TO
CONFIG
ERR
Computer Link
Up to 4 units can be selected.
For remote device station
Common Items
FX0N Series
FX2N-32ASI-M
C
M3 terminal block
Inverter
Communication
FX2N-16LNK-M
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Limitation in the number of connectable units
Connected special function units/blocks operate using the 24V DC or 5V DC power supply of the PLC.
Therefore, the total current consumption larger than the plc current capacity reduces the number of
connectable units.
For details, refer to the respective FX PLC manual.
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-63
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
2 Communication Types and Communication Equipment
2.3 Combination of Communication Equipment (Block Diagram)
2.3.14 For FX2(FX) and FX2C Series (reference)
FX2(FX),FX2C Series
A indicate the mounting position.
(For the mounting procedure, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.)
A
A
RS-485
M3.5 terminal block
Computer link
25-pin D-Sub, female
Computer link
Non-protocol
communication
FX-485ADP
One line can be selected.
A
RS-232C
FX-232ADP
A
Dedicated
M3.5 terminal block
Parallel link
Connector for
optical fiber
Parallel link
FX2-40AW
A
Dedicated
FX2-40AP
A-64
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series
Common Items
3.1 Setting Method
A
Common Items
3.
Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series
• Computer link
• Inverter communication
B
N:N Network
This chapter describes which communication parameters can be changed for the following communication
types, and provides methods on how to change them.
• Non-protocol communication (RS/RS2 instruction)
C
• Internet mail sending
Setting Method
The following two communication setting methods are available for FX PLCs. Either method can be used, but
the method using parameters is recommended.
1) Specify the settings using parameters in the programming tool
Register the settings in parameters, transfer it to the PLC and turn the PLC's power OFF and then ON.
(This method is not available in FX2(FX), FX2C, and FX0N PLCs.)
(This method is not available for ch0 in FX3G, FX3GC PLCs.)
Caution
Regardless of the method chosen above, a PLC operates the same way. If both methods are selected,
priority is given to the method using parameters.
FX Series
FX2(FX),FX2C FX0N FX1S FX1N,FX1NC FX2N,FX2NC
FX3S
FX3G,FX3GC
FX3U,FX3UC


Parameter method
—
—




*1
Program method







*1.
Only ch1 and ch2 are available.
PLC memory
Parameter area
Program area
[MOV H D8120] Written by
program
[MOV K D8121]
[MOV K D8129]
In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U and FX3UC
Program
method
[MOV H D8370]
[MOV K D8379]
[MOV H D8400]
[MOV K D8409]
[MOV H D8420]
[MOV K D8421]
[MOV K D8429]
Written by
program
Written by
program
Written by
program
H
In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U and FX3UC
ch0 RS2 instruction
D8370 Communication format
D8379 Time-out time setting
ch1 RS2 instruction
D8400 Communication format
D8409 Time-out time setting
Ch0 is available only
in the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.
The setting method
using parameter cannot
be used for ch0.
Only ch1 is available
in the FX3S PLC.
ch2 Computer link
RS instruction
Inverter communication
Programming communication
D8420 Communication format
D8421 Station number settings
D8429 Time-out time setting
I
Remote
Maintenance
Sequence
program for
set values
ch1 Computer link
RS instruction
Inverter communication
Programming communication
D8120 Communication format
D8121 Station number settings
D8129 Time-out time setting
Programming
Communication
Parameter
method
Transferred
when power
is turned ON
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
3. Setting flow
Setting window
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
2. Communication setting method availability in each FX PLC
E
Inverter
Communication
2) Directly specify the settings in a sequence program
Prepare a sequence program which sets the communication format, station number and time-out time
setting, and then transfer the program to the PLC.
D
Computer Link
1. Setting methods
Parallel Link
3.1
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
When both methods are selected at the same time, priority is given to
the contents set using the parameter method.
A-65
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series
3.1 Setting Method
4. Time at which the settings become valid
1) Specifying the settings using parameters in the programming tool:
When the PLC power is turned ON, the contents of the parameters are automatically transferred to the
PLC.
As soon as the parameters are transferred to the PLC, the settings become valid.
2) Directly specifying the settings in a sequence program:
To enable the settings, write data after turning the PLC mode to RUN from STOP, and then reboot the
PLC's power.
A-66
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
3.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)
A
Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)
3.2.1
Operating procedure
With GX Works2 open, follow the steps in this section for activating the serial communication setting method.
Opening the parameter setting window
In the project view area of the navigation window, double-click [Parameter]  [PLC Parameter].
If the navigation window is not displayed, select [View]  [Docking Window]  [Navigation] from
the menu bar.
C
Parallel Link
1
B
N:N Network
Communication settings may be changed by the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with GX Works2.
For details on FXGP/WIN operating procedure, refer to section 3.3.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.
Common Items
3.2
3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
2
Setting the serial communication (parameters)
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Click the [PLC System(2)] tab on the dialog box.
When using programming communication, parallel link, N:N Network or remote maintenance, do
not check the "Operate Communication Setting" box.
When using computer link, inverter communication or non-protocol communication (RS/RS2
instruction) function, check the "Operate Communication Setting" box, and then set each item.
Click [End].
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
3
Writing parameters to the PLC
A-67
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
Select [Online]  [Write to PLC] from the menu bar, click [Parameter + Program], and then click
[Execute].
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series
Common Items
3.2.2
3.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)
Correspondence between parameter setting and each communication type
Even
 

—
1-bit
 


 

 

 

 

*1
19200
9600
4800
2400
1200
600
300
 

 —

 —

 —

—
—
—

—
—
—
—
 —

— —

— —

— —

 —

RS-485
 

—
Invalid
— —
—
—
Sum check
Invalid/valid
 — — 
—
Transmission control
procedure
Format 1
 — — 
—
Header
Invalid/valid
Terminator
Invalid/valid
Control cable
Invalid/valid
Hardware type
Regular/
RS-232C
Control mode
—
—

—

Format 4
 — — 
—
Station number
settings
00 to 0F
 —
—
—
Time-out time setting
1 to 255
 —

—
— — — B C D E
F
Reference page
*1.
Only available for FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
Remote maintenance
—
This communication is not executed in this setting.


Programming communication

 
AS-i system
 
Odd
This communication is not executed in this setting.
None
This communication is not executed in this setting.

AnyWireASLINK
—

This communication is not executed in this setting.

 
This communication is not executed in this setting.
 
This communication is not executed in this setting.
7-bit
8-bit
CC-Link/LT network
—
This communication is not executed in this setting.
—
This communication is not executed in this setting.
Internet mail sending
Short mail sending
Non-protocol communication (FX2N-232IF)
Non-protocol communication
(RS/RS2 instruction)
RS
RS2
Inverter communication
Computer link
 —
38400
A-68
Parallel link
Dedicated
protocol
2-bit
Transmission speed
(bps)
N:N Network

This communication is not executed in this setting.
Stop bit

This communication is not executed in this setting.
Parity
— 
This communication is not executed in this setting.
Data length
Non-protocol
communication
This communication is not executed in this setting.
Protocol
Ethernet communication
Contents
CC-Link network
Set item
MODBUS communication
The table below shows the communication types and set items which can be set using parameters:
G — — — — — H
Remarks
Not
selectable
I
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
3.3 Communication Setting in Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)
A
Communication Setting in Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)
3.3.1
Operating procedure
1
Adjusting serial setting (parameter)
Select [Option]  [Serial setting (parameter)] from the toolbar.
The following dialog appears according to absence/presence of parameter settings.
C
Parallel Link
This subsection explains the serial communication setting method. Suppose that FXGP/WIN is already
started up.
B
N:N Network
Communication settings may be changed by the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with FXGP/WIN.
Ch0 and Ch 2 cannot be set using FXGP/WIN.
 For details on GX Works2 operating procedure, refer to section 3.2.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.
Common Items
3.3
3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series
D
E
Inverter
Communication
There is no communication setting.
When using the programming communication, parallel link, N:N Network or remote maintenance, click the
[No] button.
When using computer link, inverter communication, or non-protocol communication (RS instruction) function,
click the [Yes] button.
Computer Link
1. When there are no parameter settings
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-69
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series
3.3 Communication Setting in Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)
2. When there are already parameter settings
There is communication setting. Confirm the setting contents.
When using programming communication, parallel link, N:N Network or remote maintenance, click the [Clear]
button.
A-70
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series
Common Items
A
Correspondence between parameter setting and each communication type
Common Items
9600
4800
2400
1200
300
Header
Invalid/valid
Terminator
Invalid/valid
Control cable
Invalid/valid
RS-485
  
 — 
 — 
 — 
 — 
— — 
— — 
— — 
 — 
  

—
—
—
—
—
—

—

—
Invalid
— — —
—
Sum check
Invalid/valid
 — —
—
Transmission control
procedure
Format 1
 — —
—
Format 4
 — —
—
Station number settings
00 to 0F
 — —
—
Time-out time setting
1 to 255
 — 
—
Reference page
Remote maintenance
Programming communication
AS-i system
AnyWireASLINK
— — — B C D E F G — — — — — H
H
Not
selectable
I
Remote
Maintenance
Control mode
G
Programming
Communication
Regular/RS-232C
  
—
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
600
  
—
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
19200
  

This communication is not executed in this setting.
—
This communication is not executed in this setting.
  
  
This communication is not executed in this setting.
—
E
This communication is not executed in this setting.

  
CC-Link/LT network
Internet mail sending
  
Odd
This communication is not executed in this setting.
None
This communication is not executed in this setting.

This communication is not executed in this setting.
Short mail sending
Non-protocol communication (FX2N-232IF)
Non-protocol communication (RS instruction)
Inverter communication
Computer link
—
  
2-bit
Hardware type
Parallel link
  
8-bit
Even
Baud rate (bps)
N:N Network
7-bit
This communication is not executed in this setting.
—
This communication is not executed in this setting.
 — —
1-bit
Stop bit
Ethernet communication
Dedicated protocol
This communication is not executed in this setting.

D
Inverter
Communication
Parity
—  
This communication is not executed in this setting.
Data length
Non-protocol
communication
C
Computer Link
Protocol
Remarks
Parallel Link
CC-Link network
Contents
B
N:N Network
Set item
MODBUS communication
The table below shows the communication types and items which can be set using parameters:
This communication is not executed in this setting.
3.3.2
3.3 Communication Setting in Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)
I
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-71
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
3.4
3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series
3.4 Extension of Ports (For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Extension of Ports (For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, up to two communication port channels can be connected using a
communication expansion board and communication special adapter.
Point
• Only one channel can be connected to the FX3G PLC (14-point and 24-point type).
• The standard built-in port (RS-422) can be used as ch0 when the non-protocol communication function
(RS2 instruction) is used in the FX3G, FX3GC PLC.
Refer to the "Non-protocol Communication (RS/RS2 instruction)" section.
• When a CF card special adapter is connected to the PLC, it is handled in the same way as a
communication special adapter, and occupies one communication port channel.
For details, refer to FX3U-CF-ADP User’s Manual.
• When a FX3U-8AV-BD, FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or FX3G-2EYT-BD is connected to the PLC, it is
handled in the same way as a communication expansion board, and occupies one communication port
channel.
• When the FX3U-ENET-ADP is used, one communication port is occupied. Only one FX3U-ENET-ADP unit
can be connected at the last stage (left end) of the main unit and special adapters.
For details, refer to FX3U-ENET-ADP User’s Manual.
3.4.1
Extension of Port (For FX3G, FX3GC PLC)
1. For FX3G PLC (40-point, 60-point type)
The communication expansion board connected to the option connector 1 or the first communication special
adapter works as ch1, and the communication expansion board connected to the option connector 2 or the
second communication special adapter works as ch2.
 When using two communication special
adapters
• When using a communication expansion board
and a communication special adapter together
Communication Communication
special adapter special adapter
(ch2) *1
(ch1)
Communication
Communication
special adapter
expansion board
(ch1)
FX3G-CNV-ADP
(ch2)
Analog special Standard built-in port (RS-422)
adapter
(ch0)
*1.
FX3G-CNV-ADP
Analog special Standard built-in port (RS-422)
(ch0)
adapter
Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or FX3G-2EYT-BD is used.
• When using one communication expansion board
Communication
expansion board
(ch2)
Communication
expansion board
(ch1)
Standard built-in port (RS-422)
(ch0)
A-72
Standard built-in port (RS-422)
(ch0)
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series
3.4 Extension of Ports (For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
A
Common Items
• When using two communication expansion board
Communication Communication
expansion board expansion board
(ch2)
(ch1)
B
N:N Network
Standard built-in port (RS-422)
(ch0)
2. For FX3G PLC (14-point, 24-point type)
Communication
special adapter
FX3G-CNV-ADP
(ch1)
Communication
expansion board
(ch1)
C
Parallel Link
One communication port channel can be connected to the FX3G PLC main unit (14-point and 24-point type).
It is not allowed to connect two communication special adapters.
D
Computer Link
E
Standard built-in port (RS-422)
(ch0)
Standard built-in port (RS-422)
(ch0)
Inverter
Communication
Analog special
adapter
3. For FX3GC PLC
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Communication Communication
special adapter special adapter
(ch1)
(ch2)
Standard built-in port (RS-422)
(ch0)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Analog special
adapter
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-73
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series
Common Items
3.4.2
3.4 Extension of Ports (For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Extension of Port (For FX3U, FX3UC PLC)
When a communication expansion board and communication special adapter are used, the board is handled
as ch 1 and the adapter is handled as ch 2.
When connecting two communication special adapters using the FX3U-CNV-BD*1, the one closer to the main
unit is handled as ch 1 and the farther one is handled as ch 2.
When a FX3U-8AV-BD or CF card special adapter is used, however, it occupies one communication port
channel.
*1. When using the FX3UC(D, DS, DSS) PLC, the FX3U-CNV-BD is not required.
1. For FX3U PLC
• When using a communication expansion board
and a communication special adapter together
Communication
Communication
special adapter
expansion board
(ch2)
(ch1)
FX 3U -4AD-ADP
P O WE R
FX 3U -4AD-ADP FX 3 U -4AD-ADP FX 3U -4AD-ADP
P O WE R
P O WE R
 When using two communication special
adapters
FX 3U -4AD-ADP
P O WE R
Communication
special adapter
(ch1)
Communication
special adapter
(ch2)
FX 3U -4AD-ADP FX 3U -4AD-ADP
P O WE R
P O WE R
FX3U-CNV-BD
FX 3U -4AD-ADP
P O WE R
P O WE R
RDA
RD
RDB
SDA
SD
SDB
SG
Analog special
adapter
*2.
High speed input/output
special adapter*2
High speed input/output
special adapter*2
Analog special
adapter
When using high speed special input/output adapters, make sure to connect them to the PLC main
unit first before connecting communication special adapters, CF card special adapter and analog
special adapters.
2. For FX3UC(D,DS,DSS) PLC
Communication
special adapter
(ch2)
FX3U-4AD-ADP
Analog
special
adapter
FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP
POWER
POWER
POWER
Communication
special adapter
(ch1)
FX3U-4AD-ADP
POWER
3. For FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC
• When using a communication expansion board
and a communication special adapter together
Communication
special adapter
Analog
(ch2)
special
adapter
FX3U-4AD-ADP
POWER
FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP
POWER
POWER
Communication
special adapter
(ch2)
FX3U-4AD-ADP
POWER
POWER
RDA
RD
RDB
SDA
SD
SDB
SG
A-74
Communication
expansion board
(ch1)
 When using two communication special
adapters
Analog
special
adapter
FX3U-4AD-ADP FX3U-4AD-ADP
POWER
POWER
Communication
special adapter
(ch1)
FX3U-CNV-BD
FX3U-4AD-ADP
POWER
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 Outline of Communication Setting in the FX Series
Common Items
A
Limitation when ch1 and ch2 are used at the same time
Communication
channel: ch2
C
Communication channel: ch1
Parallel Link
RD A
RD
RD B
SD A
SD
SD B
SG
Communication
special adapter
Expansion
board
Expansion
board
FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLC
: Applicable, : Not applicable
Communication setting for ch1

N:N Network


Parallel link

Computer link
E






















F









Inverter
communication
Non-protocol
communication *1
(RS instruction)
Non-protocol
communication
(RS2 instruction)



























Programming
communication









Remote
*2
maintenance









(Example 1) (Example 2)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Communication setting for ch2

Non-protocol
Non-protocol
Inverter
Programming
Remote
communication communication communication communication maintenance
(RS instruction) (RS2 instruction)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
MODBUS
communication
Computer
link
Inverter
Communication
MODBUS
communication N:N Network Parallel link
D
Computer Link
Communication
special adapter
B
N:N Network
When using ch1 and ch2 at the same time, available communication type combinations are limited. For
details, refer to the table below.
When a CF card special adapter, FX3U-8AV-BD, FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD, FX3G-2EYT-BD or the FX3UENET-ADP is used, one communication port (1ch) is occupied. However, the occupied communication port
does not apply any restrictions to the combination of communication functions when ch1 and ch2 are used at
the same time.
Common Items
3.4.3
3.4 Extension of Ports (For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
H
Ch2 cannot be set for non-protocol communication (RS instruction).
*2.
When using remote maintenance on ch2, use GX Works2 or GX Developer.
For applicable versions of GX Works2 and GX Developer,
refer to I. Remote Maintenance Subsection 1.4.1 or 1.4.2.
Example 1:
When "parallel link" is set for ch1, the "N:N Network" cannot be set for ch2.
Example 2:
When "computer link" is set for ch1, the "N:N Network" can be set for ch2.
Programming
Communication
*1.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-75
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Version Number
Common Items
4.
4.1
4.1 Manufacturer's serial number check method
Version Number
Manufacturer's serial number check method
The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked on the nameplate, and "LOT"
indicated on the front of the product.
4.1.1
Checking the nameplate
The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked from the manufacturer's serial
number "S/N" indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product.
Example nameplate (manufacture's serial number : 1010001)
Right side
* Actual product nameplate differs
from the example shown above.
<Product during December, 2009 or earlier>
9
Z
0
0
0
<Product from January, 2010>
1
Control number
Month (Example: Dec.):
1 to 9 = January to September,
X = October, Y = November, Z = December
Year (Example: 2009): Last digit of year
A-76
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
Control number
Month (Example: Jan.):
1 to 9 = January to September,
X = October, Y = November, Z = December
Year (Example: 2010): Last two digit of year
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Version Number
Common Items
A
Checking the front of the product
The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked from the manufacturer's serial
number "LOT" on the front (at the bottom) of the product.
The "LOT" indication is provided only with the following PLC main units.
Main unit
"LOT" indication adoption time
March 2013 and later (From first product)
FX3G Series PLC
October 2008 and later
FX3GC Series PLC
January 2012 and later (From first product)
FX3U Series PLC
January 2009 and later
FX3UC Series PLC
January 2009 and later
B
N:N Network
FX3S Series PLC
Common Items
4.1.2
4.2 Version check
C
Parallel Link
Example: FX3U-48MR/ES
D
Computer Link
<Product during December, 2009 or earlier>
9
<Product from January, 2010>
Z
1
Month (Example: Jan.):
1 to 9 = January to September,
X = October, Y = November, Z = December
Year (Example: 2010): Last two digit of year
Version check
The PLC version can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001.
D8001
4
2
5
G
1
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
PLC type and
version
2
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
4.2
E
1
Inverter
Communication
Month (Example: Dec.):
1 to 9 = January to September,
X = October, Y = November, Z = December
Year (Example: 2009): Last digit of year
0
Version information (Example: Ver. 2.51)
PLC type (Example: 24 = FX2N, FX2NC, FX3U or FX3UC Series)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-77
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and Acquisition Method)
Common Items
5.
5.1 Rank and Use Method of This Manual
Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and
Acquisition Method)
This chapter specifies the manuals related to PLC main units for each communication type.
5.1
Rank and Use Method of This Manual
When communication equipment is connected, an FX PLC can offer various communication options.
PLC
Wiring and installation of PLC
• HARDWARE MANUAL, HANDY MANUAL
(which is supplied with each product)
Supplied with
• User's Manual
Separate manual
(for FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
Sequence program
• PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Separate manual
Communication equipment
Installation and name of each part
• INSTALLATION MANUAL
(which is supplied with each product)
Supplied with
Manuals supplied with each communication equipment are shown at the section 5.2.
This information is provided for convenience to offer the terminal layout, external
dimensions, etc., and may not be up-to-date.
Communication types
N:N Network
Parallel link
Computer link
Non-protocol
Inverter
Other
communication communication communication
How to use each communication type
This
• User's Manual manual
Communication Control Edition
Separate manual
This manual specifies the setting method, cable connection, program examples and
troubleshooting for each communication type.
A-78
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and Acquisition Method)
Common Items
A
Introduction of Related Manuals
This section shows major manuals required to use the communication types in this manual.
Manuals for PLC main units and manuals for communication equipment are classified separately.
"Separate manual" shown in the "Included/separate manual" column indicates that the manual is supplied
separately. "Included" indicates that the manual is included with each product.
Manual for communication types in FX PLCs
Included/separate
document
Contents
JY997D16901
Separate manual
(this manual)
Describes the contents of communication types
supported by FX Series PLCs.
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
Series User's Manual
JY997D26201
- MODBUS Serial
Communication Edition
Separate manual
Explains the MODBUS serial communication
network in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
Manual name
Manual number
C
Manuals for data communication
Manuals related to FX PLCs
For instructions used in sequence programs, refer to the PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
For hardware specifications and wiring of the PLC, refer to the HANDY MANUAL or USERS MANUAL.
Manual number
Included/separate
document
Contents
Manuals for PLC main unit
 FX3U Series
For detailed explanation, refer to the FX3U Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
JY997D50301
Included
FX3U Series
User's Manual - Hardware
Edition
JY997D16501
Separate manual
I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the
PLC main unit FX3U extracted from the FX3U
Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
Details about the hardware including I/O
specifications, wiring, installation and
maintenance of the FX3U PLC main unit.
 FX3UC Series
For detailed explanation, refer to the FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
JY997D50501
I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the
PLC main unit FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 extracted from
the FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware
Edition.
FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 Series
Hardware Manual
JY997D31601
Included
FX3UC Series
User's Manual - Hardware
Edition
JY997D28701
Separate manual
Details about the hardware including I/O
specifications, wiring, installation and
maintenance of the FX3UC PLC main unit.
 FX3G Series
I
For detailed explanation, refer to the FX3G Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
JY997D46001
Included
FX3G Series
User's Manual - Hardware
Edition
JY997D31301
Separate manual
I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the
PLC main unit FX3G extracted from the FX3G
Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
Details about the hardware including I/O
specifications, wiring, installation and
maintenance of the FX3G PLC main unit.
Remote
Maintenance
FX3G Series
Hardware Manual
H
Programming
Communication
Included
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX3UC(D, DS, DSS) Series
Hardware Manual
I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the
PLC main unit FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) extracted
from the FX3UC Series User's Manual - Hardware
Edition.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX3U Series
Hardware Manual
E
Inverter
Communication
Manual name
D
Computer Link
5.2.2
Parallel Link
FX Series User’s Manual Data Communication Edition
B
N:N Network
5.2.1
Common Items
5.2
5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-79
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and Acquisition Method)
Common Items
Manual name
5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals
Manual number
Included/separate
document
Contents
 FX3GC Series
For detailed explanation, refer to the FX3GC Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
FX3GC Series
Hardware Manual
JY997D45201
Included
FX3GC Series
User's Manual - Hardware
Edition
JY997D45401
Separate manual
I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the
PLC main unit FX3GC extracted from the FX3GC
Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
Details about the hardware including I/O
specifications, wiring, installation and
maintenance of the FX3GC PLC main unit.
 FX3S Series
For detailed explanation, refer to the FX3S Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
FX3S Series
Hardware Manual
JY997D48301
Included
I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the
PLC main unit FX3S extracted from the FX3S
Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
I/O specifications, built-in analog specifications,
wiring and installation of the PLC main unit
FX3S-30M/E-2AD extracted from the FX3S
Series User's Manual - Hardware Edition.
FX3S-30M/E-2AD
Hardware Manual
JY997D51701
Included
FX3S Series
User's Manual - Hardware
Edition
JY997D48601
Separate manual
JY992D66301
Included
Describes the contents of the FX2N PLC
hardware including the specifications, wiring and
installation procedure.
FX2NC (DSS, DS) Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
JY992D76401
Included
Describes the contents of the FX2NC(DSS, DS)
PLC hardware including the specifications, wiring
and installation procedure.
FX2NC (D/UL) Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
JY992D87201
Included
Describes the contents of the FX2NC(D/UL) PLC
hardware including the specifications, wiring and
installation procedure.
JY992D89301
Included
Describes the contents of the FX1N PLC
hardware including the specifications, wiring and
installation procedure.
JY992D92101
Included
Describes the contents of the FX1NC PLC
hardware including the specifications, wiring and
installation procedure.
JY992D83901
Included
Describes the contents of the FX1S PLC
hardware including the specifications, wiring and
installation procedure.
JY992D47501
Included
Describes the contents of the FX0N PLC
hardware including the specifications, wiring and
installation procedure.
JY992D47401
Included
Describes the contents of the FX PLC hardware
including the specifications, wiring and installation
procedure.
JY992D59001
Included
Describes the contents of the FX2C PLC
hardware including the specifications, wiring and
installation procedure.
Details about the hardware including I/O
specifications, wiring, installation and
maintenance of the FX3S PLC main unit.
 FX2N Series
FX2N Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
 FX2NC Series
 FX1N Series
FX1N Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
 FX1NC Series*1
FX1NC Series
HANDY MANUAL
 FX1S Series
FX1S Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
 FX0N Series
FX0N Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
 FX2(FX) Series
FX Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
 FX2C Series*2
FX2C Series
HANDY MANUAL
*1. FX1NC Series PLC Manual is available only in Japanese.
*2. FX2C Series PLC Manual is available only in Japanese.
A-80
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and Acquisition Method)
Common Items
5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals
A
Manual number
Included/separate
document
Contents
Manuals for programming
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC,
FX2NC
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
JY992D88101
Separate manual
Explains instructions applicable in the FX1S,
FX1N, FX2N, FX1NC and FX2NC PLCs.
FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FX2, FX2C
JY992D48301
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Separate manual
Explains instructions available in the FX0, FX0S,
FX0N, FX1, FX2, FX2C PLCs.
MELSEC-Q/L/F Structured
Programming Manual
(Fundamentals)
SH080782
Separate manual
Programming methods, specifications, functions,
etc. required to create structured programs
FXCPU Structured
Programming Manual
[Device & Common]
JY997D26001
Separate manual
Devices, parameters, etc. provided in structured
projects of GX Works2
FXCPU Structured
Programming Manual
[Basic & Applied Instruction]
JY997D34701
Separate manual
Sequence instructions provided in structured
projects of GX Works2
FXCPU Structured
Programming Manual
[Application Functions]
JY997D34801
Separate manual
Application functions provided in structured
projects of GX Works2
B
C
D
Computer Link
Explains basic instructions and applied
instructions available in the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/
FX3U/FX3UC PLC.
Parallel Link
Separate manual
N:N Network
FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
Programming Manual - Basic & JY997D16601
Applied Instruction Edition
Common Items
Manual name
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-81
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and Acquisition Method)
Common Items
5.2.3
5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals
Communication equipment (option)
The table below specifies the manuals for communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-232C,
RS-422, RS-485 or USB and for the Ethernet adapter.
Manual name
Manual number
Included/separate
document
Contents
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-232C
communication expansion board, FX3U-232-BD
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-232C
communication expansion board, FX3G-232-BD
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-232C
communication expansion board, FX2N-232-BD
hardware including the specifications and installation
procedure.
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-232C
communication expansion board, FX1N-232-BD
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-232C
communication special adapter, FX3U-232ADP
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-232C
communication special adapter, FX3U-232ADP-MB
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-232C
communication special adapter, FX2NC-232ADP
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-232C
communication special adapter, FX0N-232ADP
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-232C
communication special adapter, FX-232ADP
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-232C
communication special extension block, FX2N232IF hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.
For communication in accordance with RS-232C
FX3U-232-BD
INSTALLATION MANUAL
FX3G-232-BD
INSTALLATION MANUAL
FX2N-232-BD
USER'S GUIDE
FX1N-232-BD
USER'S GUIDE
FX3U-232ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL
FX3U-232ADP-MB
INSTALLATION MANUAL
FX2NC-232ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL
FX0N-232ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL
FX-232ADP
USER'S GUIDE
FX2N-232IF
HARDWARE MANUAL
JY997D12901
JY997D32001
JY992D63201
JY992D84401
JY997D13701
JY997D26401
JY997D01101
JY992D51201
JY992D48801
JY992D73501
For communication in accordance with RS-422
FX3U-422-BD
INSTALLATION MANUAL
JY997D13101
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-422 communication
expansion board, FX3U-422-BD hardware including the
specifications and installation procedure.
FX3G-422-BD
INSTALLATION MANUAL
JY997D32101
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-422 communication
expansion board, FX3G-422-BD hardware including
the specifications and installation procedure.
FX2N-422-BD
USER'S GUIDE
JY992D66101
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-422 communication
expansion board, FX2N-422-BD hardware including the
specifications and installation procedure.
A-82
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and Acquisition Method)
Common Items
5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals
A
FX1N-422-BD
USER'S MANUAL
Manual number
JY992D84101
Included/separate
document
Contents
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-422 communication
expansion board, FX1N-422-BD hardware including the
specifications and installation procedure.
For communication in accordance with RS-485(422)
JY997D13001
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication
special expansion board, FX3U-485-BD hardware
including the specifications and installation procedure.
FX3G-485-BD
INSTALLATION MANUAL
JY997D32201
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication
special expansion board, FX3G-485-BD hardware
including the specifications and installation procedure.
JY997D51501
Included
FX2N-485-BD
HARDWARE MANUAL
JY992D73401
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication
expansion board, FX2N-485-BD including the
specifications and installation procedure.
JY992D84201
Included
FX3U-485ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL
JY997D13801
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication
special adapter, FX3U-485ADP hardware including the
specifications and installation procedure.
FX2NC-485ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL
JY997D01201
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication
special adapter, FX2NC-485ADP hardware including
the specifications and installation procedure.
Included
Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication
special adapter, FX0N-485ADP hardware including the
specifications and installation procedure.
Included
Describes the contents of the USB
communication expansion board, FX3U-USB-BD
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.
Describes the contents of the Ethernet
communication special adapter, FX3U-ENET-ADP
hardware including the specifications and
installation procedure.
FX0N-485ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL
JY992D53101
For communication in accordance with USB
FX3U-USB-BD
USER'S MANUAL
JY997D13501
For communication in accordance with Ethernet
JY997D47401
Included
FX3U-ENET-ADP
USER'S MANUAL
JY997D45801
Separate manual
G
H
Programming
Communication
FX3U-ENET-ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Included
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
JY997D26301
E
Inverter
Communication
FX3U-485ADP-MB
INSTALLATION MANUAL
Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication
special adapter, FX3U-485ADP-MB hardware including
the specifications and installation procedure.
D
Computer Link
FX1N-485-BD
USER'S GUIDE
Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication
expansion board, FX1N-485-BD hardware including the
specifications and installation procedure.
C
Parallel Link
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
INSTALLATION MANUAL
Describes the contents of the RS-485 communication
special expansion board, FX3G-485-BD-RJ hardware
including the specifications and installation procedure.
B
N:N Network
FX3U-485-BD
INSTALLATION MANUAL
Common Items
Manual name
Describes FX3U-ENET-ADP Ethernet
communication special adapter details.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-83
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Introduction of Manuals (Type, Reading Method and Acquisition Method)
Common Items
5.2.4
5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals
Related options for communication
The table below specifies the manuals for products required to use communication equipment (options)
above in the system configuration.
Manual name
Manual number
Included/separate
document
Contents
Connector conversion board
FX3U-CNV-BD
INSTALLATION MANUAL
JY997D13601
Included
Describes the contents of the FX3U-CNV-BD
special adapter connection board hardware
including the installation procedure.
FX2N-CNV-BD
JY992D63601
Included
Describes the contents of the FX2N-CNV-BD
special adapter connection board hardware
including the installation procedure.
FX1N-CNV-BD
JY992D84701
Included
Describes the contents of the FX1N-CNV-BD
special adapter connection board hardware
including the installation procedure.
FX3G-CNV-ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL
JY997D32301
Included
Describes the contents of the FX3G-CNV-ADP
special adapter connection conversion adapter
hardware including the installation procedure
FX3S-CNV-ADP
INSTALLATION MANUAL
JY997D48801
Included
Describes the contents of the FX3S-CNV-ADP
special adapter connection conversion adapter
hardware including the installation procedure
Connector conversion adapter
RS-485/RS-232C converter for computer link communication
FX-485-PC-IF-SET
HARDWARE MANUAL
JY992D81801
Included
Describes the contents of the FX-485-PC-IF-SET
interface
unit
hardware
including
the
specifications and installation procedure.
JY997D34201
Included
Describes the contents of the FX-30P Handy
Programming Panel hardware including the
specifications and installation procedure.
Separate manual
Describes the contents of the FX-30P Handy
Programming Panel hardware including the
specifications and installation procedure as well
as programming operations.
FX-30P
FX-30P
INSTALLATION MANUAL
FX-30P
OPERATION MANUAL
A-84
JY997D34401
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Abbreviations, Generic Names and Terms Used in This Manual
Common Items
5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals
A
Abbreviations, Generic Names and Terms Used in This
Manual
1. Programmable controllers
Name
C
FX PLC or FX CPU
Generic name of FX1, FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,
FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC Series PLCs
FX3U Series
Generic name of FX3U Series PLCs
FX3UC Series
Generic name of FX3U Series PLC main units
D
Generic name of FX3UC Series PLCs
Computer Link
FX3UC PLC or main unit Generic name of FX3UC Series PLC main units
FX3G Series
FX3G PLC or main unit
FX3GC Series
Generic name of FX3G Series PLCs
Generic name of FX3G Series PLC main units
Generic name of FX3GC Series PLCs
E
FX3GC PLC or main unit Generic name of FX3GC Series PLC main units
FX3S PLC or main unit
FX2N Series
FX2N PLC or main unit
FX2NC Series
Generic name of FX3S Series PLCs
Inverter
Communication
FX3S Series
Generic name of FX3S Series PLC main units
Generic name of FX2N Series PLCs
Generic name of FX2N Series PLC main units
Generic name of FX2NC Series PLCs
FX2NC-M(-T)
PLC
FX2NC-16MR-T, FX2NC-16MT, FX2NC-32MT, FX2NC-64MT, and FX2NC-96MT
FX2NC-MT-D/UL
PLC
FX2NC-16MT-D/UL, FX2NC-32MT-D/UL, FX2NC-64MT-D/UL, and FX2NC-96MT-D/UL
FX2NC-M-DSS
(-T-DS) PLC
FX2NC-16MR-T-DS, FX2NC-16MT-DSS, FX2NC-32MT-DSS, FX2NC-64MT-DSS, and
FX2NC-96MT-DSS
FX1N PLC or main unit
FX1NC Series
FX1NC PLC or main unit
FX1S PLC or main unit
FX0N Series
FX0N PLC or main unit
FX0 Series
FX0S PLC or main unit
FX2(FX) Series
FX2C Series
FX2C PLC or main unit
Generic name of FX1S Series PLCs
Generic name of FX1S Series PLC main units
Generic name of FX0N Series PLCs
Generic name of FX0N Series PLC main units
I
Generic name of FX0 Series PLCs
Generic name of FX0 Series PLC main units
Generic name of FX0S Series PLCs
Generic name of FX0S Series PLC main units
Generic name of FX2(FX) Series PLCs
Apx.A
Generic name of FX2(FX) Series PLC main units
Discontinued
models
FX2(FX) PLC or main
unit
H
Generic name of FX1NC Series PLC main units
Only Japanese manual is available for this product.
Remote
Maintenance
FX0 PLC or main unit
FX0S Series
Generic name of FX1N Series PLC main units
Generic name of FX1NC Series PLCs
G
Programming
Communication
FX1S Series
Generic name of FX1N Series PLCs
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Generic name of FX2NC-M(-T), FX2NC-MT-D/UL, and FX2NC-M-DSS(-T-DS)
Series PLC main units
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX2NC PLC or main unit
FX1N Series
Parallel Link
Programmable controllers
FX3U PLC or main unit
B
N:N Network
The table below shows abbreviations, generic names and terms used in this manual.
Abbreviation/
generic name
Common Items
6.
Generic name of FX2C Series PLCs
Generic name of FX2C Series PLC main units
A-85
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Abbreviations, Generic Names and Terms Used in This Manual
Common Items
5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals
Abbreviation/
generic name
FX1 Series
FX1 PLC or main unit
Q PLC
Name
Generic name of FX1 Series PLCs
Generic name of FX1 Series PLC main units
Only Japanese manual is available for this product.
Generic name of CPU units QCPU (Q mode) and QCPU (A mode)
QCPU (Q mode)
Generic name of CPU units Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU,
Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU, and Q25HCPU
QCPU (A mode)
Generic name of CPU units Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, and Q06HCPU-A
QnA PLC
Generic name of CPU units QnACPU (large type) and QnACPU (small type)
QnACPU (large type)
Generic name of CPU units Q2ACPU, Q2ACPU-S1, Q3ACPU, Q4ACPU, and
Q4ARCPU
QnACPU (small type)
Generic name of CPU units Q2ASCPU, Q2ASCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU, and Q2ASHCPU-S1
A PLC
Generic name of CPU units ACPU (large type), ACPU (small type), and A1FXCPU
ACPU (large type)
Generic name of CPU units AnUCPU, AnACPU, AnNCPU, and A0J2(H)CPU
ACPU (small type)
Generic name of CPU units A2US(H)CPU, AnS(H)CPU, and A1SJ(H)CPU
A1FXCPU
Generic name of CPU unit A1FXCPU
2. Expansion boards and special adapters
Abbreviation/
generic name
Name
Expansion board
Expansion board
Generic name of input/output expansion board, communication expansion boards,
special adapter connection boards, analog expansion boards and analog potentiometer
expansion boards
Input/output expansion
board
Generic name of input/output expansion board
4EX-BD
FX3G-4EX-BD
2EYT-BD
FX3G-2EYT-BD
Communication expansion
board or communication
board
Generic name of communication expansion boards
232BD
FX3U-232-BD, FX3G-232-BD, FX2N-232-BD, and FX1N-232-BD
422BD
FX3U-422-BD, FX3G-422-BD, FX2N-422-BD, and FX1N-422-BD
485BD
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, and FX1N-485-BD
USBBD
FX3U-USB-BD
Analog expansion board
Generic name of analog expansion board
2AD-BD
FX3G-2AD-BD
1DA-BD
FX3G-1DA-BD
Analog potentiometer
expansion board
8AV-BD
Generic name of analog potentiometer expansion board
FX3U-8AV-BD, FX3G-8AV-BD
Special adapter connection
board or connector
Generic name of CNVBD
conversion board
CNVBD
FX3U-CNV-BD, FX2N-CNV-BD, and FX1N-CNV-BD
Special adapters
A-86
Special adapter
Generic name of high speed input/output special adapters, CF card special adapter,
communication special adapters and analog special adapters
High speed input/output
special adapter
Generic name of high speed input special adapters and high speed output special
adapters
2HSY-ADP
FX3U-2HSY-ADP
4HSX-ADP
FX3U-4HSX-ADP
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Abbreviations, Generic Names and Terms Used in This Manual
Common Items
5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals
A
CF card special adapter
CF-ADP
Name
Generic name of CF card special adapter
FX3U-CF-ADP
B
Generic name of communication special adapters
232ADP
FX3U-232ADP(-MB), FX2NC-232ADP, FX0N-232ADP, and FX-232ADP
485ADP
FX3U-485ADP(-MB), FX2NC-485ADP, FX0N-485ADP, and FX-485ADP
ENET-ADP
FX3U-ENET-ADP
N:N Network
Communication special
adapter or communication
adapter
Common Items
Abbreviation/
generic name
C
Special adapters
CNVADP
Parallel Link
Special adapter connection
conversion adapter or
Generic name of CNVADP
connection conversion
adapter
FX3G-CNV-ADP, FX3S-CNV-ADP
D
3. Extension equipment
Name
Extension equipment
Extension equipment
Special function unit
232IF
Generic name of special function units
Generic name of special function block
Generic name of FX2N-232IF
4. Networks
Abbreviation/
generic name
F
Name
Generic name of CC-Link master station and CC-Link remote device stations and
CC-Link intelligent device stations
CC-Link master (station)
Generic name of CC-Link master station with model name FX2N-16CCL-M or
FX3U-16CCL-M
CC-Link remote station
Generic name of remote I/O stations and remote device stations
G
Generic name of CC-Link/LT master station, CC-Link/LT remote I/O stations, power
supply adapters, and dedicated power supplies
Generic name of built-in type CC-Link/LT master and (additional) CC-Link/LT master
Built-in type CC-Link/LT
master
Generic name of built-in type CC-Link/LT master built in to the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
(Additional) CC-Link/LT
master
Generic name of CC-Link/LT master station with model name FX2N-64CL-M
Power supply adapter
Generic name of units connecting the power supply to the CC-Link/LT system
Dedicated power supply
Generic name of power supplies connected to the CC-Link/LT system
I
Generic name of AnyWireASLINK master station with model name FX3U-128ASL-M
AS-i system
AS-i master
Generic name of AS-i system master station with model name FX2N-32ASI-M
MESEC I/O LINK
MELSEC I/O LINK master
Generic name of MELSEC I/O LINK master station with model name FX2N-16LNK-M
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
Ethernet
Ethernet adapter
Remote
Maintenance
AnyWire
AnyWireASLINK master
H
Programming
Communication
CC-Link/LT master
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
CC-Link intelligent device
Generic name of CC-Link intelligent device station with model name FX3U-64CCL
station
CC-Link/LT equipment
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Open field networks CC-Link and CC-Link/LT
CC-Link equipment
E
Inverter
Communication
Special function block
Generic name of extension blocks, powered extension units, special function blocks
and special function units
Computer Link
Abbreviation/
generic name
Generic name of Ethernet communication special adapter with model name
FX3U-ENET-ADP
A-87
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Abbreviations, Generic Names and Terms Used in This Manual
Common Items
5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals
5. Peripheral equipment
Abbreviation/
generic name
Name
Peripheral equipment
Peripheral equipment
Generic name of programming software, handy programming panels, and display
units
Programming tools
Programming tool
Generic name of programming software and handy programming panels
Programming software
Generic name of programming software
GX Works2
Generic name of programming software packages SWDNC-GXW2-J and
SWDNC-GXW2-E
GX Developer
Generic name of programming software packages SWD5C-GPPW-J and
SWD5C-GPPW-E
FXGP/WIN
Generic name of programming software packages FX-PCS/WIN and FX-PCS/WIN-E
Handy programming panel
(HPP)
Generic name of FX-30P, FX-20P(-E)-SET0, FX-20P(-E), FX-10P-SET0 and
FX-10P(-E)
Display units
GOT1000 Series
Generic name of GT16, GT15, GT14, GT11 and GT10
GOT-900 Series
Generic name of GOT-A900 and GOT-F900 Series
GOT-A900 Series
Generic name of GOT-A900 Series
GOT-F900 Series
Generic name of GOT-F900 Series
Internet mail sending tools
Mail sending units
FX-232DOPA
Generic name of FX-232DOPA mail sending units
FX-232DOPA mail sending main units
Only Japanese manual is available for this product.
These products can only be used in Japan.
6. Others
Abbreviation/
generic name
Name
Inverters
FREQROL inverter
Generic name of Mitsubishi Electric F800, A800, F700, A700, E700, D700, V500,
F500, A500, E500, and S500 Series inverters
Communication
Communication equipment
Generic name of communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-232C,
communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-422, communication
equipment operating in accordance with RS-485, communication equipment operating
in accordance with USB, and communication equipment operating in accordance with
Ethernet
Communication
equipment operating in
accordance with RS232C
Generic name of 232BD, 232ADP, and 232IF
Communication
equipment operating in
accordance with RS-422
Generic name of 422BD
Communication
equipment operating in
accordance with RS-485
Generic name of 485BD and 485ADP
Communication
equipment operating in
accordance with USB
Generic name of USB BD
Communication
equipment operating in
Generic name of special adapter connectable to the Ethernet
accordance with Ethernet
A-88
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Abbreviations, Generic Names and Terms Used in This Manual
Common Items
5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals
A
Name
Personal computers
Personal computer
Personal computers supporting Windows in which GX Works2, GX Developer or
FXGP/WIN is installed
Refer to the manual for each software product for supported Windows versions.
Windows 95
Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows 95
Windows 98
Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows 98
Windows Me
Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition
Windows NT4.0
Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows NT4.0 Workstation
Windows 2000
Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
Windows XP
Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows XP Professional and Microsoft Windows
XP Home Edition
Windows Vista
Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate Operating System
Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System
Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System
Windows 7
Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows7 Enterprise Operating System
Microsoft Windows7 Ultimate Operating System
Microsoft Windows7 Professional Operating System
Microsoft Windows7 Home Premium Operating System
Microsoft Windows7 Starter Operating System
Windows 8
Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows 8 Operating System
Microsoft Windows 8 Pro Operating System
Microsoft Windows 8 Enterprise Operating System
Windows 8.1
Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows 8.1 Operating System
Microsoft Windows 8.1 Pro Operating System
Microsoft Windows 8.1 Enterprise Operating System
Windows 10
Microsoft Windows 10 Home Operating System
Microsoft Windows 10 Pro Operating System
Microsoft Windows 10 Enterprise Operating System
Microsoft Windows 10 Education Operating System
B
N:N Network
Windows
Generic name of Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1
and Windows 10
Common Items
Abbreviation/
generic name
C
Parallel Link
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
A-89
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Common Items
5.2 Introduction of Related Manuals
MEMO
A-90
6 Abbreviations, Generic Names and Terms Used in This Manual
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
A
Common Items
B
N:N Network
FX Series Programmable Controllers
C
Parallel Link
User's Manual [Data Communication Edition]
B. N:N Network
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
Foreword
I
© 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
B-1
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
Remote
Maintenance
This manual explains the "N:N Network" provided for the MELSEC-F FX Series Programmable Controllers
and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
B-2
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
N:N Network
1.1 Outline of System
A
Common Items
1.
Outline
B
This chapter explains the N:N Network.
N:N Network
Outline of System
The N:N Network allows connection of up to eight FX PLCs via mutually linked devices through
communication in accordance with RS-485.
2) Data link is automatically updated among a maximum of eight FX PLCs.
3) The available total extension distance is 500 m (1640' 5") maximum (when only the 485ADP is used in
the configuration).
8 units
500 m (1640' 5") [50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is included]
FX PLC
Slave station No. 1
For the specifications,
refer to Chapter 2.
FX PLC
Slave station No. 2
.......
+
+
To check applicable PLC
models, refer to Section 1.3.
+
Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-485
Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with .......
RS-485
F
For selection,
refer to Chapter 3.
For wiring,
....... refer to Chapter 4.
D70 to D77
....... The number of linked devices
can be selected among three
patterns.
For details, refer to Chapter 2.
...
Bit devices
M1000 to M1063
M1064 to M1127
M1128 to M1191
M1448 to M1511
Word devices
D0 to D7
D10 to D17
D20 to D27
The link information can be
monitored in the master
station and all slave stations.
...
...
M1448 to M1511
Word devices
D0 to D7
D10 to D17
D20 to D27
Transfer
direction
G
H
Programming
Communication
D70 to D77
Bit devices
M1000 to M1063
M1064 to M1127
M1128 to M1191
...
...
M1448 to M1511
Word devices
D0 to D7
D10 to D17
D20 to D27
Transfer
direction
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Bit devices
M1000 to M1063
M1064 to M1127
M1128 to M1191
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-485
E
Inverter
Communication
FX PLC
Master station
....... Number of linked units
....... Total extension distance
D
Computer Link
Important points and reference
chapter/section
System
C
Parallel Link
1) One of three patterns can be selected according to the number of devices to be linked (except FX0N and
FX1S PLCs).
...
1.1
D70 to D77
The figure above shows the maximum number of linked devices. There are differences in the specifications and
limitations depending on the selected link pattern and FX Series.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-3
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
1.2
1 Outline
1.2 Procedures Before Operation
Procedures Before Operation
The flow chart below shows the N:N Network setting procedures up until data link:
N:N Network
Refer to Chapter 1.
Outline
Refer to Chapter 2.
Check communication specifications.
Refer to Chapter 3.
Determine system configuration and selection.
Outline of system
• Applicable PLC versions
• Applicable programming tools
Communication specifications
• Number of link points and time
• Number of system devices
System configuration
• Select communication equipment.
Refer to Chapter 4.
Perform wiring.
Wiring procedure
• One-pair wiring using twisted cables
• Wiring example
Programming tool
Connect PLC.*1
Refer to Chapter 5.
Perform PLC communication setting
(initialization).
Turn ON power.
Refer to Chapter 6.
Perform test run (communication test and
judgement method).
Serial communication setting in PLC
• Communication setting is not required.
(Check only unset items.)
Communication test
• Create test programs.
Refer to Chapter 7.
Create programs.
Based on SD/RD lamp lighting status and
contents of error check devices, verify that
communication is normally executed.
Communication parameter setting
programs
• Basic program
• Error indication program example
• Detailed explanation of setting devices
If there is abnormality, refer to the troubleshooting
(Chapter 9).
Refer to Chapter 8.
Practical program examples
Program examples of pattern 2 are shown.
*1 For the method to connect a programming tool to a PLC, refer to the "Programming Communication" section in this
manual or the respective programming tool manual.
For details on operating procedures, refer to the respective programming tool manual.
B-4
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
N:N Network
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC
Communication Type Applicability in PLC
1.3.1
Applicable versions
Common Items
1.3
A
PLC

FX3U Series

FX3GC Series

Parallel Link


FX2NC Series

FX2N Series
 (Ver. 2.00 or later)*1
FX1NC Series

FX1N Series

FX1S Series

D
The link device range is limited.
*1
The link device range is limited.
FX0S Series
—
N:N Network option is not provided.
FX0 Series
—
N:N Network option is not provided.
—
N:N Network option is not provided.
FX2(FX) Series
—
N:N Network option is not provided.
FX1 Series
—
N:N Network option is not provided.
E
Applicable in products manufactured in October, 1997 and later (manufacturer’s serial No.: 7X**** and
later).
The PLC version can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001.
For a detailed description of the version check, refer to A. Common Items Section 4.2.
How to look at the manufacturer's serial number
The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked on the nameplate, and "LOT"
indicated on the front of the product.
For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer's serial number,
refer to A. Common Items Section 4.1.
Products whose production was stopped
Production was stopped for some models of MELSEC-F Series PLCs and programming tools described in
this manual. For models whose production was stopped, refer to Appendix A.
To see the latest available products, refer to the general catalog.
H
Programming
Communication
1.3.4
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
1.3.3
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Version check
Inverter
Communication
FX2C Series
*1.
Computer Link
FX3G Series
 (Ver. 2.00 or later)
Remarks
C
FX3S Series
FX0N Series
1.3.2
Applicability (applicable version)
FX3UC Series
B
N:N Network
The communication type is applicable in the following versions.
:Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—:Not applicable
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-5
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
N:N Network
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability
1.4
Programming Tool Applicability
1.4.1
For applicable versions
The programming tool is applicable for each FX Series from the following version:
1. English versions
Product name
Model name
Applicable version
Remarks
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
Ver. 1.08J or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-E
Ver. 8.18U or later
FX-30P
-
Ver. 1.00 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX3G PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
Ver. 1.08J or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-E
Ver. 8.72A or later
FX-30P
-
Ver. 1.00 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX3GC PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
FX-30P
Ver. 1.77F or later
Ver. 1.30 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
-
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX3S PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
FX-30P
GOT1000 Series display units
Ver. 1.492N or later
-
Ver. 1.50 or later
-
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX2N and FX2NC PLCs
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
Ver. 1.08J or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-E
SW2 A or later
FX-PCS/WIN-E
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E
Ver. 1.00 or later
FX-30P
Ver. 1.00 or later
FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC-E
Ver. 3.00 or later
FX-10P-E
Ver. 3.00 or later
GOT-F900 Series display units
F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E
GOT1000 Series display units
-
F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs
B-6
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-E
FX-PCS/WIN-E
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E
Ver. 1.08J or later
SW5 A or later
Ver. 3.00 or later
FX-30P
Ver. 1.00 or later
FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD-E
Ver. 4.00 or later
FX-10P-E
Ver. 4.00 or later
-
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
N:N Network
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability
A
Model name
Remarks
F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
2. Japanese versions
Product name
Model name
Applicable version
Remarks
C
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
SWDNC-GXW2-J
Ver. 1.07H or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-J
Ver. 8.13P or later
FX-30P
Parallel Link
GX Works2
-
Ver. 1.00 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
SWDNC-GXW2-J
Ver. 1.07H or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-J
Ver. 8.72A or later
FX-30P
-
Ver. 1.00 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
SWDNC-GXW2-J
FX-30P
Ver. 1.77F or later
Ver. 1.30 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
-
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
SWDNC-GXW2-J
FX-30P
Ver. 1.492N or later
Ver. 1.50 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
-
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-J
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX-PCS/WIN
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN
Ver. 2.00 or later
FX-PCS-KIT/98
SW1PC-FXGP/98(-3,-5)
Ver. 4.00 or later
FX-PCS/98-3
SW1PC-FXGP/98-3
Ver. 4.00 or later
FX-PCS-KIT/V-3
SW1PC-FXGP/V3
Ver. 2.00 or later
FX-A7PHP-KIT
Ver. 1.07H or later
SW1RX-GPPFX
Ver. 3.00 or later
SW2 A or later
FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC
Ver. 4.00 or later
FX-10P(-SET0)
Ver. 3.00 or later
GOT-F900 Series display units
F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH
I
F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Apx.A
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
B-7
Discontinued
models
GOT1000 Series display units
-
Remote
Maintenance
Ver. 1.00 or later
H
Programming
Communication
FX-30P
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX2N and FX2NC PLCs
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX3S PLC
GX Works2
E
Inverter
Communication
FX3GC PLC
GX Works2
D
Computer Link
FX3G PLC
GX Works2
B
N:N Network
GOT1000 Series display units
Applicable version
Common Items
Product name
GOT-F900 Series display units
F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
N:N Network
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability
Product name
Model name
Applicable version
Remarks
FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-J
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX-PCS/WIN
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN
Ver. 4.00 or later
FX-PCS/98-3
SW1PC-FXGP/98-3
Ver. 5.00 or later
SW5 A or later
FX-30P
Ver. 1.00 or later
FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD
Ver. 5.00 or later
FX-10P(-SET0)
Ver. 4.00 or later
GOT-F900 Series display units
F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH
-
F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
GOT1000 Series display units
1.4.2
Ver. 1.07H or later
For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model)
Even programming tool not applicable to a PLC can create programs when an alternative model is set.
In this case, however, programming is enabled only in the function ranges provided for the alternative PLC
model such as instructions and program size.
Model to be
programmed
Priority: High  Low
Model to be set
FX3UC Series
FX3UC

FX2N

FX2(FX)
FX3U Series
FX3UC, FX3U

FX2N

FX2(FX)
FX3GC Series
FX3G, FX3GC

FX1N
*1

FX2N*1
FX3G Series
FX3G

FX1N*1

FX2N*1
FX3S Series
FX3S

FX3G

FX1N*1
FX2NC, FX2N

FX2(FX)
FX2N

FX2(FX)
FX1NC Series
FX1NC, FX1N

FX2N

FX2(FX)
FX1N Series
FX1N

FX2N

FX2(FX)
FX1S Series
FX1S

FX2(FX)
FX0N Series
FX0N

FX2(FX)
FX0S Series
FX0S

FX2(FX)
FX0 Series
FX0

FX2(FX)
FX2C Series
FX2C, FX2(FX)

FX2(FX)
FX2NC Series
FX2N
Series
FX2(FX) Series
FX1 Series
*1.
FX2(FX)
FX1
"FX2N" is selected when the FX-10P(-E) is used.
Point
In the FX3S PLC, set the memory capacity for PLC parameters to 4,000 steps or less.
B-8
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
N:N Network
2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference)
A
Common Items
2.
Specifications
B
This chapter explains the communication specifications and performance.
N:N Network
2.1
Communication Specifications (Reference)
Communication is executed according to the (fixed) specifications shown in the table below. Specification
items such as baud rate cannot be changed.
Number of connectable units
Transmission standard
Maximum total extension
distance
Control procedure
Communication method
Baud rate
Remarks
8 maximum
RS-485 standard
500 m (1640' 5") or less
[50 m (164' 0") or less when 485BD
is included in system]
Distance varies depending on
communication equipment type.
N:N Network
—
Half-duplex,
bidirectional communication
E
38400 bps
Inverter
Communication
Start bit
Character Data bit
format
Parity bit
Fixed
Stop bit
Header
F
Fixed
Control line
—
Sum check
Fixed
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Terminator
D
Computer Link
Protocol type
Specifications
Parallel Link
Item
C
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-9
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
N:N Network
2.2 Link Specifications
2.2
Link Specifications
2.2.1
Link patterns and number of link points in each FX Series
The number of occupied link points varies depending on the number of slave stations used.
For example, when three slave stations are connected in "Pattern 1", M1000 to M1223 and D0 to D33 are
occupied, and unoccupied devices can be used as general devices for control.
(Link devices for unconnected slave stations can be used as general devices for control, but it is
recommended to leave them in the unoccupied status if slave stations may be added in the future.)
: Applicable
—: Not applicable
Pattern 0
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
FX3U, FX3UC Series
PLC Series



FX3G, FX3GC Series



FX3S Series



FX2N, FX2NC Series



FX1N, FX1NC Series



FX1S Series

—
—
FX0N Series

—
—
Pattern 0
Slave
stations
B-10
Pattern 2
Word
device (D)
Bit
device (M)
Word
device (D)
Bit
device (M)
Word
device (D)
0
4 in each
station
32 in each
station
4 in each
station
64 in each
station
8 in each
station
Station
No. 0
—
D 0 to D 3
M1000 to M1031
D 0 to D 3
M1000 to M1063
D 0 to D 7
Station
No. 1
—
D10 to D13 M1064 to M1095 D10 to D13 M1064 to M1127 D10 to D17
Station
No. 2
—
D20 to D23 M1128 to M1159 D20 to D23 M1128 to M1191 D20 to D27
Station
No. 3
—
D30 to D33 M1192 to M1223 D30 to D33 M1192 to M1255 D30 to D37
Station
No. 4
—
D40 to D43 M1256 to M1287 D40 to D43 M1256 to M1319 D40 to D47
Station
No. 5
—
D50 to D53 M1320 to M1351 D50 to D53 M1320 to M1383 D50 to D57
Station
No. 6
—
D60 to D63 M1384 to M1415 D60 to D63 M1384 to M1447 D60 to D67
Station
No. 7
—
D70 to D73 M1448 to M1479 D70 to D73 M1448 to M1511 D70 to D77
Station No.
Master
station
Pattern 1
Bit
device (M)
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
N:N Network
A
Link time
The link time indicates the cycle time in which link devices are updated.
The link time varies depending on the number of linked units (master station and slave stations) and the
number of linked devices as shown in the table below.
Unit: ms
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
32 bit-devices
4 word-devices
64 bit-devices
8 word-devices
2
18
22
34
3
26
32
50
4
33
42
66
5
41
52
83
6
49
62
99
7
57
72
115
8
65
82
131
C
Parallel Link
Pattern 0
0 bit-devices
4 word-devices
B
N:N Network
Number of
linked
stations
Common Items
2.2.2
2.2 Link Specifications
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-11
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
N:N Network
3.
3.1 System Configuration
System Configuration and Equipment Selection
This chapter explains the configuration of the communication equipment operating in accordance with RS485 and the system selection required by FX PLCs.
3.1
System Configuration
This section outlines the system configuration required to use the N:N Network.
Connect (optional) equipment operating in accordance with RS-485 to the FX PLC main unit.
1 , 2 , 3 and 4 indicate the communication equipment combination patterns.
Important point in selection
Total extension
distance
+
This is the communication board built
into the PLC, reducing the installation
area.
50 m
(164' 0")
+
Attach the special adapter connection
board to the main unit, and then
attach the communication adapter to
the left side of the main unit.
500 m
(1640' 5")
+
Attach the connector conversion
adapter to the main unit, and then
attach the communication adapter to
the left side of the main unit.
500 m
(1640' 5")
+
Attach the communication adapter to
the left side of the main unit.
500 m
(1640' 5")
Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485
FX PLC
1
Communication
board
2
+
Communication Special adapter
connection
adapter
board
3
+
Communication
adapter
Connector
conversion
adapter
4
Communication
adapter
For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next page.
B-12
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
N:N Network
A
Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
FX Series
Total extension
distance
Communication equipment (option)
Check
C
Parallel Link
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX0N
FX2NC-485ADP
FX0N-485ADP
(European terminal block)
D
(Terminal block)
Computer Link
50 m
(164' 0")
FX1N-485-BD
E
(European terminal block)
FX1N-CNV-BD
+
FX2NC-485ADP
FX1N-CNV-BD
500 m
(1640' 5")
F
FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
(European terminal block)
Inverter
Communication
+
FX1S
50 m
(164' 0")
G
FX1N-485-BD
+
FX2NC-485ADP
(European terminal block)
FX1N-CNV-BD
500 m
(1640' 5")
H
Programming
Communication
FX1N-CNV-BD
+
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
(European terminal block)
FX1N
FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)
I
500 m
(1640' 5")
Apx.A
Remote
Maintenance
50 m
(164' 0")
FX2N-485-BD
+
FX2N
FX2NC-485ADP
(European terminal block)
+
Discontinued
models
FX2N-CNV-BD
B
N:N Network
Select a (optional) communication equipment combination, and put a check mark in the "Check" column.
During selection, pay attention to the following:
- In the table below, only the external dimensions are different between the units shown in "FX2NC-485ADP/
FX0N-485ADP". Select either one.
- In the table below, only the cable is different between the units shown in "FX3G-485-BD/FX3G-485-BDRJ". Select either one.
- N:N Network is not provided for the FX1, FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0 and FX0S PLCs.
Common Items
3.2
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
FX2N-CNV-BD FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)
B-13
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
N:N Network
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
FX Series
Communication equipment (option)
Total extension
distance
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)
+
FX3S
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3S-CNV-ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)
FX3G
(14-point, 24-point
type)
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
ch1
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)
The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to
the option connector 1.
FX3G
(40-point, 60-point
type)
ch1
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP
B-14
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
Check
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
N:N Network
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
A
Communication equipment (option)
Total extension
distance
Check
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch2
ch2
B
N:N Network
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)
C
The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to
the option connector 2.
ch2
FX3U-ADP(-MB)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(Where  represents (European terminal block)
232 and 485).
D
500 m
(1640' 5")
Computer Link
FX3G-CNV-ADP
Parallel Link
ch1
FX3G
(40-point, 60-point
type)
Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or
FX3G-2EYT-BD is connected to the option connector 2.
E
Inverter
Communication
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
RD A
50 m
(164' 0")
RD
RD B
SD A
SD
SD B
SG
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX3U-485-BD
(European terminal block)
ch1
FX3U
G
500 m
(1640' 5")
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
+
FX3U-CNV-BD
Common Items
FX Series
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-15
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
N:N Network
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
FX Series
Total extension
distance
Communication equipment (option)
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1
ch2
+
RD
SD
FX3U--BD
(Where  represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
ch1
ch2
FX3U
+
+
FX3U-CNV-BD
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
500 m
(1640' 5")
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX1NC
FX2NC-485ADP
(European terminal block)
FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX2NC
FX2NC-485ADP
(European terminal block)
FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1
FX3GC
+
FX3U-ADP(-MB)
(Where  represents
232 and 485).
B-16
ch2
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
Check
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
N:N Network
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
A
Total extension
distance
Communication equipment (option)
Check
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
Common Items
FX Series
B
N:N Network
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
C
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1
FX3UC
(D, DS, DSS)
Parallel Link
ch2
+
500 m
(1640' 5")
D
Computer Link
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
E
ch1
Inverter
Communication
RD A
50 m
(164' 0")
RD
RD B
SD A
SD
SD B
SG
FX3U-485-BD
F
(European terminal block)
+
FX3U-CNV-BD
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
ch1
500 m
(1640' 5")
G
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
(European terminal block)
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1
+
RD
SD
FX3U--BD
(Where  represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).
H
500 m
(1640' 5")
Programming
Communication
FX3UC-32MT-LT
(-2)
ch2
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
+
I
ch2
+
Remote
Maintenance
ch1
500 m
(1640' 5")
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
FX3U-CNV-BD FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
B-17
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
N:N Network
4.
4.1 Wiring Procedure
Wiring
This chapter explains the wiring.
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
• Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
• Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating
operation after installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
• Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents
due to abnormal data written to the PLC under the influence of noise:
1) Do not bundle the main circuit line together with or lay it close to the main circuit, high-voltage line or load line.
Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line
at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or high-voltage lines.
2) Ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable at one point on the PLC. However, do not use common
grounding with heavy electrical systems.
• Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Tighten the screws using a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2 (shaft diameter 6mm (0.24") or less). Make sure
that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block.
• Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.
4.1
1
Wiring Procedure
Preparing for wiring
Prepare cables and terminal resistors required for wiring.
2
3
4
For details, refer to Section 4.2.
Turning OFF the power to the PLC
Before starting any wiring work, make sure that the PLC power is OFF.
Connecting the power supply (FX0N-485ADP only)
Connect the power supply to the 24V DC power terminal.
Wiring communication equipment
Connect communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-485.
For details, refer to Section 4.3.
B-18
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors
A
Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors
Common Items
4.2
4 Wiring
Select cables using the procedure described below.
4.2.1
Twisted pair cable
B
1. Recommended cables
Manufacturer
Model name
Showa Holdings Co., Ltd.
The Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd.
Three-pair cable of 0.2 mm2
SPEV(SB)-0.5-2P
Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2
KMPEV-SB CWS-178 0.2SQ  2P
Two-pair cable of 0.2 mm2
KMPEV-SB CWS-178 0.5SQ  2P
Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2
DPEV SB 0.3  3P
Three-pair cable of 0.3 mm2
DPEV SB 0.5  3P
Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2
D-KPEV-SB 0.2  3P
Three-pair cable of 0.2 mm2
D-KPEV-SB 0.5  3P
Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2
IPEV-SB 2P  0.3 mm2
Two-pair cable of 0.3 mm2
IPEV-SB 2P  0.5 mm2
Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2
D
E
Inverter
Communication
Fujikura Ltd.
SPEV(SB)-MPC-0.2  3P
Computer Link
Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.
Two-pair cable of 0.2 mm2
Parallel Link
Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
C
Remarks
SPEV(SB)-0.2-2P
N:N Network
Use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting communication equipment operating in accordance with RS485.
The table below shows recommended model names and manufacturers of cables used for wiring.
2. Cable structural drawing (reference)
F
Pair
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Shield
G
4.2.2
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Two-pair cable structural
drawing example
Three-pair cable structural
drawing example
10BASE-T cable
1. Selection procedure when purchasing
1) Cable type
: 10BASE-T cable (Category 3 or higher)
2) Connection specifications : Straight type
3) Connector
H
Programming
Communication
10BASE-T cables used in LAN wiring for a personal computer can be connected to FX3G-485-BD-RJ.
I
: RJ45 connector (Connector with metal frame is used)
Pay attention to the following point when purchasing commercial cables.
• Use shielded cables. Make sure to connect the shield to the metal frame of the connector, and perform
class D grounding.
Remote
Maintenance
2. Cautions on using commercial cables
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-19
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
N:N Network
4.2.3
4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors
Connecting cables
1. European type terminal block
The FX3G-485-BD-RJ terminal block is used for grounding.
The other options use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting communication equipment operating in
accordance with RS-485.
The table below shows applicable cables and tightening torques.
Cable size when Cable size when
one cable is
two cables are
connected
connected
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP
(-MB)
AWG22 to
AWG20
AWG22
Bar terminal with
Insulating sleeve
(cable size)
Tightening
torque
Applicable
0.22 to 0.25
(AWG22 to AWG20)
N·m
Tool size
A
B
0.4 (0.01")
2.5 (0.09")
FX3G-485-BDRJ
AWG20 to AWG16
Not applicable
0.5 to 0.6
N·m
0.6 (0.03")
3.5 (0.14")
FX2N-485-BD
FX1N-485-BD
AWG26 to AWG16
Not applicable
0.5 to 0.6
N·m
0.6 (0.03")
3.5 (0.14")
Not applicable
0.4 to 0.5
N·m
0.6 (0.03")
3.5 (0.14")
FX2NC-485ADP
AWG26 to
AWG16
AWG26 to
AWG20
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
With regard to the cable end treatment, use a stranded cable or solid cable as it is, or use a bar terminal with
insulating sleeve.
FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD and FX2NC-485ADP cannot use a bar terminal with insulating
sleeve.
• When using a stranded cable or solid cable as it is
- Twist the end of a stranded cable so that wires do not get barbed.
- Do not plate the end of the cable.
FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD,
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
FX3G-485-BD-RJ,
FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD
Approx. 9 mm
(0.35")
Approx. 6 mm
(0.23")
FX2NC-485ADP
• When using a bar terminal with insulating sleeve
Because it is difficult to insert a cable into an insulating sleeve
depending on the thickness of the cable sheath, select the proper cable
according to the outline drawing.
<Reference>
Manufacturer
Model name
Caulking tool
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
AI 0.5-8WH
CRIMPFOX 6*1
(or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2)
*1.
*2.
B-20
Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3
Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6
Approx. 8 mm
(0.31")
Insulating sleeve
Contact area
(Crimp area)
8 mm (0.31")
2.6 mm
(0.1")
14 mm
(0.55")
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
N:N Network
4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors
A
Select a
screwdriver
with a
straight tip.
A
If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not
be able to be achieved. To achieve the appropriate tightening torque
shown in the previous page, use the following screwdriver or an
appropriate replacement (grip diameter: approximately 25mm (0.98")).
For size A and size B,
refer to the table above.
B
B
N:N Network
Note
<Reference>
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
C
Model name
Parallel Link
Manufacturer
SZS 0.4  2.5
FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD, FX2NC-485ADP
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
Model name
D
SZF 1-0.6  3.5
Computer Link
2. Terminal block
In the FX0N-485ADP and FX-485ADP, the terminal screw size is "M3".
Make sure to use a crimp-style terminal with the following sizes.
Make sure that the tightening torque is 0.5 to 0.8 N·m.
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
E
Inverter
Communication
• When wiring one cable to one terminal
6.2mm(0.24")
or less
Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
6.2mm(0.24")
or less
3.2(0.13")
3.2(0.13")
Terminal
G
6.3mm(0.25")
or more
Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal
H
3.2(0.13")
Programming
Communication
6.2mm(0.24")
or less
3.2(0.13")
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
• When wiring two cables to one terminal
6.2mm(0.24")
or less
Common Items
• Tool
When tightening a terminal on the European terminal block, use a small
commercial straight shape screwdriver whose tip is shown in the figure to
the right.
Terminal
6.3mm(0.25")
or more
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-21
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
4.2.4
4 Wiring
4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors
Connecting terminal resistors
Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line.
In the case of one-pair wiring, connect a terminal resistor to the RDA-RDB signal
terminal of the communication equipment.
Brown
1. Terminal resistor type
Use two terminal resistors of 110 , 1/2 W.
Among the terminal resistors supplied with the communication equipment, select
ones with the color codes shown to the right.
Precision
1 1 1
=110 
(101)
2. When using the FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ or FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
The FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ and FX3U-485ADP(-MB) have built-in terminal resistors.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly.
• FX3U-485-BD
• FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
Terminal
resistor
selector
switch
330 
OPEN
110 
Terminal
resistor selector
switch
• FX3G-485-BD
Remove the upper terminal block before changing over the switch in the FX3G-485-BD.
Removal: Loosen the terminal block mounting screws, and remove the terminal block.
Installation: Attach the terminal block, and tighten the terminal block mounting screws.
Tightening torque: 0.4 to 0.5 N•m
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range. Failure to do
so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
For installation and removal of the terminal block, use the
recommended tool shown below or a tool having straight tip (such as
screwdriver) as shown in the right figure.
<Reference>
Manufacturer
Model name
SZS 0.4  2.5
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
Terminal resistor
selector switch
Terminal block mounting screws
• FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Terminal resistor
selector switch
B-22
Select a
screwdriver
with a
straight tip.
0.4mm
(0.01")
2.5mm
(0.09")
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
N:N Network
A
Connection Diagram
Common Items
4.3
4.3 Connection Diagram
Use one-pair wiring for an N:N Network.
Terminal
resistor:
110 
B
FX2NC-485ADP
SDA
(TXD+)
SDA
(TXD+)
SDA
(TXD+)
SDA
(TXD+)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
SG
LINK
SG
SG

*3
D
SG
Class-D grounding
(resistance: 100  or less)*1
C
Computer Link
FG*2
Terminal
resistor:
110 
Parallel Link
*3
FX0N-485ADP
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX2N-485-BD
FX1N-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
N:N Network
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX2N-485-BD
FX1N-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
Class-D grounding
(resistance: 100  or less)*1
*1 Make sure to perform Class-D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to the FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD,
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX2NC-485ADP or FX3U-485ADP(-MB).
E
Inverter
Communication
*2 Make sure to connect the FG terminal to the
(grounding) terminal in the PLC requiring Class-D grounding.
If the grounding terminal is not provided in the PLC, perform Class-D grounding directly.
*3 Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line.
 The FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD and FX3U-485ADP(-MB) have a built-in terminal resistor. Set the terminal resistor selector
switch accordingly.
 The FX0N-485ADP, FX2NC-485ADP, FX2N-485-BD and FX1N-485-BD are supplied together with terminal resistors.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-23
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
N:N Network
4.3 Connection Diagram
• FX3G-485-BD-RJ
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
5
4
3
6
1
2
Terminal
7
resistor
*2
8
Connector metal frame
Distributor (BMJ-8)
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
*1
Connector metal frame
SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
Connector metal frame
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(Terminal resistor selector switch: Open)
*1
5
RDA
4
RDB
3
SDA
6
SDB
1
SG
2
Terminal
7
resistor
*2
8
Connector metal frame
Class-D
grounding
*1
*1
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
(Terminal resistor
selector switch:
110Ω)*2
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
Class-D Class-D
grounding grounding
Class-D
grounding
*1.
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
*1
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Distributor (BMJ-8)
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
Class-D
grounding (Terminal resistor
selector switch:
110Ω)*2
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(Terminal resistor selector switch: Open)
Use shielded cables, and make sure to perform class D grounding on the shield.
When using the terminal block to connect ground, wire the ground wire only to either one of two
poles of the terminal block.
*2.
Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line. Set the terminal resistor selector
switch accordingly.
Prepare the following devices if necessary.
Product name
Model name
TM11AP-88P
Distributor
BMJ-8
BMJ-8-28N (No internal connection of the No. 2 and 8 pin) HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
(Do not use a plug with terminal resistor)
The FX3G-485-BD-RJ has a built-in wiring circuit switch.
Set the wiring circuit switch to 1 pair.
Wiring circuit
switch
B-24
Manufacturer
RJ45 connector
HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
N:N Network
A
Grounding
Common Items
4.4
4.4 Grounding
Grounding should be performed as stated below.
• The grounding resistance should be 100 or less.
PLC
Other
equipment
Other
equipment
Shared grounding
Good condition
PLC
Other
equipment
C
Common grounding
Not allowed
Parallel Link
Independent grounding
Best condition
PLC
B
N:N Network
• Independent grounding should be performed for best results.
When independent grounding can not be performed, perform "shared grounding" as shown in the following
figure.
For details, refer to the Hardware Edition of each series.
• The grounding wire size should be AWG 14 (2 mm2) or larger.
• The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-25
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller
N:N Network
5.
5.1 Check Procedure
Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX
Programmable Controller
The communication setting is not required in FX PLCs for the N:N network.
Using the following procedure, verify that the communication setting is not specified for another
communication type and verify that the setting is correct.
When using this communication function in ch1 in an FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC PLC, check D8120
and D8400 using the following procedure.
When using this communication function in ch2 in an FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC PLC, check D8420 using
the following procedure.
In other PLCs, use D8120 for verification.
5.1
1
Check Procedure
Monitoring D8120 (D8400, D8420)
Turn ON the power to the PLC while it is in STOP mode, and monitor D8120 (D8400, D8420).
1. When the value of D8120 (D8400, D8420) is "0"
The communication setting is not provided.
2. When the value of D8120 (D8400, D8420) is any value other than "0"
The communication setting is provided.
2
Checking absence/presence of parameter setting
Check for the absence/presence using the GX Works2, GX Developer, FXGP/WIN or FX-30P.
1) GX Works2 operating procedure (For details, refer to Section 5.2.)
2) FXGP/WIN operating procedure (For details, refer to Section 5.3.)
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.
3
Checking absence/presence of sequence program setting
Check whether or not a write instruction is programmed for D8120 (D8400, D8420).
1. When such an instruction is programmed
Program example: (for D8120)
Change the program as shown below, and then change the PLC mode from STOP to RUN.
M8002
Initial pulse
FNC 12
MOV
H23F6
D8120
Program example
The value varies depending on
the communication setting.
M8002
Initial pulse
FNC 12
MOV
H0000
D8120
Changed program
2. When such an instruction is not programmed
Proceed to the next step.
4
B-26
Monitoring D8120 (D8400, D8420) again, and confirming that its value is "0"
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)
A
Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)
5.2.1
Operating procedure
C
This subsection explains the serial communication setting method.
Suppose that GX Works2 is already started up.
Opening the parameter setting window
In the project view area of the navigation window, double-click [Parameter]  [PLC Parameter].
If the navigation window is not displayed, select [View]  [Docking Window]  [Navigation] from
the menu bar.
Parallel Link
1
B
N:N Network
Communication setting may be changed using the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with GX Works2.
For details on FXGP/WIN operating procedure, refer to section 5.3.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.
Common Items
5.2
5 Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Setting the serial communication (parameters)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
2
Select a channel to be used, and click the [PLC System(2)] tab on the dialog box.
Make sure that the "Operate Communication Setting" check box is clear.
If a check mark is there, clear it.
Click [End].
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
3
Writing parameters and program to the PLC
Apx.A
B-27
Discontinued
models
Select [Online]  [Write to PLC] from the menu bar, click [Parameter + Program], and then click
[Execute].
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
5.3
5 Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller
5.3 Communication Settings Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)
Communication Settings Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)
Communication setting may be changed using the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with FXGP/WIN.
Ch2 cannot be set using FXGP/WIN.
For details on GX Works2 operating procedure, refer to section 5.2.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.
5.3.1
Operating procedure
This subsection explains the serial communication setting method. Suppose that FXGP/WIN is already
started up.
1
Adjusting serial setting (parameter)
Double-click [Option]  [Serial setting (parameter)] from the toolbar.
The following dialog box appears according to absence/presence of parameter settings.
1. When there are no parameter settings
The dialog box shown below appears to indicate that there are no communication settings.
Click the [No] button.
In this case, the next step is not required.
2. When there are already parameter settings
The dialog box shown below appears to indicate that there are communication settings.
Click the [Clear] button to delete the communication settings from parameters.
Transfer parameters to the PLC using the following step.
2
Writing a sequence program (parameters) to the PLC
Select [PLC]  [Transfers]  [Write] from the toolbar, and click [OK] button.
B-28
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Test Run (Communication Test)
N:N Network
6.1 Test Procedure
A
Common Items
6.
Test Run (Communication Test)
6.1
C
Parallel Link
1
Test Procedure
B
N:N Network
This chapter explains the communication test procedures for the N:N Network.
It is recommended to first wire the master station and slave stations, initialize communication settings in the
FX PLCs, and then execute the communication test using the following procedure to confirm proper
operation.
Creating programs for the communication test
Create new programs for the communication test for the master station and slave stations.
For program examples, refer to Section 6.2.
Computer Link
2
Transferring the program to each PLC
Turn ON the power to each PLC, and transfer the program.
3
Validating the communication setting
E
When the PLC is in RUN mode, set it to STOP mode once, and then set it to RUN mode again.
Or turn OFF the power of the master station and all slave stations in communication, and then turn
ON the power of these stations at the same time.
Inverter
Communication
4
Confirming flashing of the communication status indicator lamps (SD and RD)
F
Confirming the link of the master station
Set the inputs X000 to
X003 to ON or OFF.
Slave station No. 1
Slave station No. 2
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Set the PLC inputs (X000 to X003) to ON or OFF in the master station, and confirm that the outputs
(Y000 to Y003) turn ON or OFF in each slave station.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Confirm that the built-in SD and RD lamps of the communication equipment are flashing.
If they are off, take proper action while referring to the troubleshooting procedures described later.
5
D
H
Confirm that the inputs in the
master station turn ON or OFF
according to the outputs Y000
to Y003.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Confirm that the inputs in the
master station turn ON or OFF
according to the outputs Y000
to Y003.
Programming
Communication
Master station
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-29
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Test Run (Communication Test)
N:N Network
6
6.1 Test Procedure
Confirming the link of slave stations
Set the PLC inputs (X000 to X003) to ON or OFF in each slave station, and confirm that the outputs
(Y004 to Y007, Y010 to Y013, Y014 to Y017... Y030 to Y033) turn ON or OFF in each slave station.
Set the inputs X000 to
X003 to ON or OFF.
Master station

Confirm that the inputs (X000 to
X003) in the slave station No. 1
turn ON or OFF according to the
outputs (Y004 to Y007)
respectively.

Confirm that the inputs (X000 to
X003) in the slave station No. 2
turn ON or OFF according to the
outputs (Y010 to Y013)
respectively.
Set the inputs X000 to
X003 to ON or OFF.
Slave station No. 1
Slave station No. 2

Confirm that the inputs (X000 to
X003) in the slave station No. 2
turn ON or OFF according to the
outputs (Y010 to Y013)
respectively.

Confirm that the inputs (X000 to
X003) in the slave station No. 1
turn ON or OFF according to the
outputs (Y004 to Y007)
respectively.
If unable to establish link, refer to "Chapter 9. Troubleshooting".
Assignment of inputs and outputs (link devices)
The table below shows devices used in the test programs shown later:
Station No.
B-30
Input (X)
Link device
Output (Y)
0
Master station
X000 to X003
D0
Y000 to Y003
1
Slave station No. 1
X000 to X003
D10
Y004 to Y007
2
Slave station No. 2
X000 to X003
D20
Y010 to Y013
3
Slave station No. 3
X000 to X003
D30
Y014 to Y017
4
Slave station No. 4
X000 to X003
D40
Y020 to Y023
5
Slave station No. 5
X000 to X003
D50
Y024 to Y027
6
Slave station No. 6
X000 to X003
D60
Y030 to Y033
7
Slave station No. 7
X000 to X003
D70
Y034 to Y037
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
6.2 Creating Programs for the Communication Testing
A
Creating Programs for the Communication Testing
Common Items
6.2
6 Test Run (Communication Test)
Create the programs shown below for the master station and each slave station.
(In the communication test, set the refresh range to pattern 0.)
6.2.1
B
Creating a program for the master station
M8038
0
FNC 12
MOV
K0
D8176
C
FNC 12
MOV
K0
D8178
FNC 12
MOV
K3
D8179
FNC 12
MOV
K5
D8180
M8000
34
K1X000
D0
FNC 12
MOV
D10
K1Y004
FNC 12
MOV
D20
K1Y010
D70
K1Y034
Step for writing information from the master station (master
station → slave station)
The contents of X000 to X003 in the master station are
transferred to outputs (Y) in this slave station.
Steps for reading information from a slave station (slave
station → master station)
By using link devices, read information from all slave
stations.
The table below shows the link devices to be used:
Slave station No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Link device
D10
D20
D30
D40
D50
D60
D70
Output (Y)
Y004 to Y007
Y010 to Y013
Y014 to Y017
Y020 to Y023
Y024 to Y027
Y030 to Y033
Y034 to Y037
Specify device numbers for the
connected slave stations.
F
G
H
Programming
Communication
FNC 12
MOV
When using ch1, this step is not required.
When using ch2, program "OUT M8179".
(Only in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FNC 12
MOV
E
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
28
D
Computer Link
D8177
Parallel Link
K2
Set the number of slave stations to D8177.
The setting range is from K1 to K7.
Inverter
Communication
FNC 12
MOV
M8179
M8000
N:N Network
Create the program shown below for the communication test. (This program is not required during actual
operation.)
I
Remote
Maintenance
END
Caution
2) In the circuit from step 34, create a program for link devices (MOV instruction) for all connected slave
stations.
B-31
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
1) When using a PLC (such as an FX1S and FX3S Series PLC) with a small number of outputs, transfer
information from slave stations to auxiliary relays (M), etc., and then monitor the auxiliary relays using a
programming tool. (Example: Change "K1Y004" to "K1M4".)
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Test Run (Communication Test)
N:N Network
6.2.2
6.2 Creating Programs for the Communication Testing
Creating a program for each slave station
Create the program shown below for the communication test. (This program is not required during actual
operation.)
Determine the station number of each slave station, and then transfer a program corresponding to the station
number to each slave station.
Assign station numbers from "1" in the ascending order. (Use one station number only once. Do not skip
station numbers.)
M8038
0
M8000
8
FNC 12
MOV
FNC 12
MOV
K1
D8176
Set the slave station number to D8176.
The setting range is from K1 to K7.
M8179
When using ch1, this step is not required.
When using ch2, program "OUT M8179".
(Only in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
K1X000
D10
Specify the link device
number for this slave
station.
M8000
14
FNC 12
MOV
D0
K1Y000
FNC 12
MOV
D20
K1Y010
FNC 12
MOV
D30
K1Y014
FNC 12
MOV
D70
K1Y034
Step for writing information from a slave station (slave
station → master station)
Transfer the contents of X000 to X003 in this slave station
to a link device. The link device varies depending on the
station number.
The table below shows the link devices to be used:
Slave station No.
Link device
Output (Y)
1
D10
Y004 to Y007
2
D20
Y010 to Y013
3
D30
Y014 to Y017
4
D40
Y020 to Y023
5
D50
Y024 to Y027
6
D60
Y030 to Y033
7
D70
Y034 to Y037
Step for reading information from the master station (master
station → slave station)
The contents of X000 to X003 in the master station are
transferred to outputs (Y) in this slave station.
Steps for reading information from another slave station
(another slave stations → this slave station)
By using link devices, read information from all other slave
stations.
The table below shows the link devices to be used:
Slave station No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Link device
D10
D20
D30
D40
D50
D60
D70
Output (Y)
Y004 to Y007
Y010 to Y013
Y014 to Y017
Y020 to Y023
Y024 to Y027
Y030 to Y033
Y034 to Y037
Specify link device numbers for
other slave stations. (Do not specify
the device number (D10) for this
slave station.)
END
Caution
1) When using a PLC (such as an FX1S and FX3S Series PLC) with a small number of outputs, transfer
information from slave stations to auxiliary relays (M), etc., and then monitor the auxiliary relays using a
programming tool. (Example: Change "K1Y004" to "K1M4".)
2) In the circuit from step 14, specify link devices for other slave stations.
B-32
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Creating Programs
N:N Network
7.1 Checking Contents of Related Devices
A
Common Items
7.
Creating Programs
7.1
Checking Contents of Related Devices
C
1. Devices for setting the N:N Network
These devices are used for setting the N:N Network. Setting these devices is essential for using N:N Network.
Name
Description
Set value
Parallel Link
The tables below show the devices used by the N:N Network.
Device
B
N:N Network
This chapter explains how to set the N:N Network and how to create programs.
In N:N Network, pattern 0, 1 or 2 can be set according to the refresh range value. The number of used
devices varies depending on the pattern.
In N:N Network using (including) the FX0N or FX1S Series, only pattern 0 is applicable.
D
This device is a flag for setting communication parameters, and is used to
check for absence/presence of N:N Network program also.
Do not set this device to ON in the sequence program.
M8179
Channel setting
Set the channel of the communication port to be used (in the FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U and FX3UC).
When "OUT M8179" program does not exist: ch 1
When "OUT M8179" program exists: ch 2
D8176
Station number
settings
Set the station number used in the N:N Network.
Master station: 0, slave station: 1 to 7
[Initial value: 0]
0 to 7
Slave station
quantity setting
Set the total number of slave stations.
This setting is not required in PLCs working as slave stations.
[Initial value: 7]
Inverter
Communication
D8177
1 to 7
F
D8178
Refresh range
setting
Select the desired pattern of device points used for communication.
This setting is not required in PLCs working as slave stations.
[Initial value: 0]
Only pattern 0 is applicable when a FX0N or FX1S Series is included.
0 to 2
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
D8179
Number of
retries
When a response is not given even after communication is repeated the
specified number of times, it is regarded as an error.
Errors in other stations can be checked.
This setting is not required in PLCs working as slave stations.
[Initial value: 3]
0 to 10
D8180
Monitoring time
Set the time (50 to 2550 ms) for communication error in 10 ms units.
This setting is not required in PLCs working as slave stations.
[Initial value: 5]
5 to 255
Computer Link
Parameter
setting
M8038
E
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-33
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Creating Programs
N:N Network
7.1 Checking Contents of Related Devices
2. Devices for determining errors in the N:N Network
These devices are used for determining errors in the N:N Network. Use them to output link errors to the
outside and interlock sequence programs.
Different devices are used between the FX0N/FX1S Series and the FX1N/FX1NC/FX2N/FX2NC/FX3S/FX3G/
FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC Series. Use devices according to the PLCs used.
Device
FX0N,
FX1S
FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC,
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX3UC
M504
M8183
M505 to M511*1
M8184 to M8190*2
M503
M8191
Name
Description
Master station data
This device turns ON when a data transfer
transfer sequence
sequence error occurs in the master station.
error
Slave station data
transfer sequence
error
This device turns ON when a data transfer
sequence error occurs in a slave station.
Data transfer
sequence ON
This device remains ON while the N:N
Network is operating.
*1.
Station No. 1: M505, Station No. 2: M506, Station No. 3: M507... Station No. 7: M511
*2.
Station No. 1: M8184, Station No. 2: M8185, Station No. 3: M8186... Station No. 7: M8190
3. Link devices
These devices are used for sending and receiving information among the PLCs. The device numbers used
and number of devices vary depending on the station number set in D8176 (station number settings) and the
pattern set in D8178 (refresh range setting).
1) In the case of pattern 0
0 (master
station)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
D0 to D3
D10 to
D13
D20 to
D23
D30 to
D33
D40 to
D43
D50 to
D53
D60 to
D63
D70 to
D73
0 (master
station)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bit devices
(32 points for
each station)
M1000 to
M1031
M1064 to
M1095
M1128 to
M1159
M1192 to
M1223
M1256 to
M1287
M1320 to
M1351
M1384 to
M1415
M1448 to
M1479
Word device
(4 points for
each station)
D0 to D3
D10 to
D13
D20 to
D23
D30 to
D33
D40 to
D43
D50 to
D53
D60 to
D63
D70 to
D73
0 (master
station)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bit devices
(64 points for
each station)
M1000 to
M1063
M1064 to
M1127
M1128 to
M1191
M1192 to
M1255
M1256 to
M1319
M1320 to
M1383
M1384 to
M1447
M1448 to
M1511
Word device
(8 points for
each station)
D0 to D7
D10 to
D17
D20 to
D27
D30 to
D37
D40 to
D47
D50 to
D57
D60 to
D67
D70 to
D77
Station No.
Word device
(4 points for
each station)
2) In the case of pattern 1
Station No.
3) In the case of pattern 2
Station No.
Caution
When creating a program, do not change the information in devices used by other stations. If such
information is changed, other stations will not operate normally.
B-34
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Creating Programs
N:N Network
A
Creating Programs for Master Station (Station No. 0)
Common Items
7.2
7.2 Creating Programs for Master Station (Station No. 0)
Create programs for the master station.
Arbitrarily create programs for reading and writing link devices.
Program for setting the N:N Network
FNC 12
MOV
K2
D8177
FNC 12
MOV
K1
D8178
FNC 12
MOV
K3
D8179
K5
D8180
Channel
setting
D
Number of retries: 3 (3 times)
Set the number of retrying communication after a link
error is detected.
[Setting range: 0 to 10]
E
Monitoring time: 5 (50 ms)
Set the time by which communication error is determined.
[Setting range: 5 to 255]
Set the communication port to be used.
When using ch1, this step is not required.
When using ch2, program "OUT M8179".
(in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
M8179
Refresh range setting: 1 (pattern 1)
Set the pattern of devices used in communication.
[Setting range: 0 to 2]
(Only pattern 0 is applicable in the FX0N or FX1S
Series.)
Cautions on setting up the N:N Network
• When setting up the N:N Network in a program using Structured Ladder or FBD programming, connect the
ENO output to the EN input for the MOV instruction.
<Program example>
H
Parameter setting
K5
EN
s
MOV
ENO
d
D8180
K2
D8177
K1
MOV
EN
ENO
s
d
D8178
K3
MOV
EN
ENO
s
d
D8179
I
• When setting up the N:N Network in a program using ST programming, use the MOV instruction as shown
in the following program example.
<Program example>
MOV(MOV(MOV(MOV(MOV(M8038, K0, D8176), K2, D8177), K1, D8178), K3, D8179), K5, D8180);
Remote
Maintenance
D8176
MOV
EN
ENO
s
d
Programming
Communication
K0
MOV
EN
ENO
s
d
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Note the following cautions when creating a program using Structured Ladder, FBD or ST programming in the
FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N or FX2NC PLC.
M8038
Inverter
Communication
FNC 12
MOV
C
Slave station quantity setting: 2 (2 slave stations)
Set the number of connected slave stations.
[Setting range: 1 to 7]
Computer Link
D8176
Parallel Link
K0
B
N:N Network
0
Parameter setting
M8038
FNC 12
MOV
Make sure to start the program for setting the N:N Network
from step 0.
Station number setting: 0 (master station)
Station number "0" indicates the master station.
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-35
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
7 Creating Programs
7.2 Creating Programs for Master Station (Station No. 0)
Program for indicating link errors
Station No. 1
Data transfer sequence error
M8184
This program is required to indicate the N:N Network status.
Y000
When a link error occurs in the station No. 1, Y000 is
set to ON.
Y001
When a link error occurs in the station No. 2, Y001 is set
to ON.
• Create this step for each connected slave station.
Note that the devices to be used are different
depending on the PLC Series.
For FX0N and FX1S Series:
M505 to M511 (station No. 1 to station No. 7)
For any series other than FX0N and FX1S Series:
M8184 to M8190 (station No. 1 to station No. 7)
Y010
While the N:N Network is executed, Y010 remains ON.
• Note that the devices to be used are different
depending on the PLC Series.
For FX0N and FX1S Series: M503
For any series other than FX0N and FX1S Series: M8191
Station No. 2
Data transfer sequence error
M8185
Data transfer sequence ON
M8191
Program for writing link devices
(master station → slave station)
M1000
This program is required to write information from the
master station to each slave station.
The information from X000 is written to M1000 (link device).
M1001
The information from X002 is written to M1001 (link device).
M1002
The information from M10 is written to M1002 (link device).
X000
X002
M10
M8000
Station No. 1
Data transfer
sequence error
M8184
FNC 12
MOV
K4M100
K4M1010
FNC 12
MOV
D100
D0
The information from M100 to M115 is written to M1010 to
M1025 (link devices).
The information from D100 is written to D0 (link device).
* In pattern 0, bit devices are not applicable.
Use word devices only.
Program for reading link devices
(master station ← slave station)
M1064
M0
This program is required to read information from each
slave station to the master station.
Monitor link errors in each slave station, and read them.
The information from M1064 (link device) is read to M0.
M1065
Y011
The information from M1065 (link device) is read to Y011.
M15
The information from M1066 (link device) is read to M15.
M1066
B-36
FNC 12
MOV
K4M1070
K4Y020
The information from M1070 to M1085 (link devices) is
read to Y020 to Y037.
FNC 12
MOV
D10
D110
The information from D10 (link device) is read to D110.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
7 Creating Programs
7.2 Creating Programs for Master Station (Station No. 0)
A
Common Items
Station No. 2
Data transfer
sequence error
M8185
M1128
M1
B
Y012
The information from M1129 (link device) is read to Y012.
M18
The information from M1130 (link device) is read to M18.
M1130
K4M1140
K4M20
The information from M1140 to M1155 (link devices) is
read to M20 to M35.
FNC 12
MOV
D20
D200
The information from D20 (link device) is read to D200.
C
Parallel Link
FNC 12
MOV
N:N Network
M1129
The information from M1128 (link device) is read to M1.
D
Computer Link
For details on link devices, refer to Section 7.1.
For cautions on program creation, refer to Section 7.4.
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-37
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
7.3
7 Creating Programs
7.3 Creating Programs for Slave Station (Station No. "n")
Creating Programs for Slave Station (Station No. "n")
Create programs for the slave stations.
Arbitrarily create programs for reading and writing link devices.
Program for setting the N:N Network
0
Make sure to start the program for setting the N:N Network
from step 0.
Parameter setting
M8038
FNC 12
MOV
K1
D8176
Station number setting: 1 (slave station)
Set the station number of each slave station.
Only set the station number for the slave station;
Other settings are not required.
Channel
setting
M8179
Set the communication port to be used (in the FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U and FX3UC).
When using ch1, this step is not required.
When using ch2, program "OUT M8179".
Program for indicating link errors
Station No. 0
Data transfer sequence error
M8183
This program is required to indicate the N:N Network status.
Y000
When a link error occurs in station No. 0, Y000 is set to ON.
Y001
When a link error occurs in station No. 2, Y001 is set to ON.
• Create this step for each connected slave station.
Note that the devices to be used are different depending
on the PLC Series.
For FX0N and FX1S Series:
M504 to M511 (station No. 0 to station No. 7)
For any series other than FX 0N and FX1S Series:
M8183 to M8190 (station No. 0 to station No. 7)
Station No. 2
Data transfer sequence error
M8185
Data transfer sequence ON
M8191
Y010
While the N:N Network is executed, Y010 remains ON.
• Note that the devices to be used are different
depending on the PLC Series.
For FX0N and FX1S Series: M503
For any series other than FX 0N and FX1S Series: M8191
Program for writing link devices
(slave station → master or slave station)
This program is required to write information from a slave
station to the master station or another slave station.
X000
M1064
The information from X000 is written to M1064 (link device).
M1065
The information from X002 is written to M1065 (link device).
M1066
The information from M10 is written to M1066 (link device).
X002
M10
M8000
FNC 12
MOV
K4M100
K4M1070
The information from M100 to M115 is written to M1070 to
M1085 (link devices).
FNC 12
MOV
D100
D10
The information from D100 is written to D10 (link device).
* In pattern 0, bit devices are not available.
Use word devices only.
B-38
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
7 Creating Programs
7.3 Creating Programs for Slave Station (Station No. "n")
A
M1000
M0
The information from M1000 (link device) is read to M0.
M1001
The information from M1001 (link device) is read to Y011.
M15
The information from M1002 (link device) is read to M15.
M1002
K4Y020
The information from M1010 to M1025 (link devices) is
read to Y020 to Y037.
FNC 12
MOV
D0
D110
The information from D0 (link device) is read to D110.
D
Computer Link
K4M1010
E
M1128
M1
M1129
The information from D1128 (link device) is read to M1.
The information from D1129 (link device) is read to Y012.
M18
The information from D1130 (link device) is read to M18.
M1130
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Y012
Inverter
Communication
Station No. 2
Data transfer
sequence error
M8185
FNC 12
MOV
C
Parallel Link
Y011
B
N:N Network
Station No. 0
Data transfer
sequence error
M8183
This program is required to read information from the
master station or another slave station to a slave station.
Monitor link errors in each slave station, and read them.
Common Items
Program for reading link devices
(slave station  master or slave station)
FNC 12
MOV
K4M1140
K4M20
The information from M1140 to M1155 (link devices) is
read to M20 to M35.
G
FNC 12
MOV
D20
D200
The information from D20 (link device) is read to D200.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
For details on link devices, refer to Section 7.1.
For cautions on program creation, refer to Section 7.4.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-39
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
7.4
7 Creating Programs
7.4 Cautions on Program Creation
Cautions on Program Creation
1. Effect on the operation cycle
When the N:N Network is used, the operation cycle in each PLC becomes longer by about 10% regardless of
the number of linked stations and adopted communication patterns.
2. Program for setting the N:N Network
1) Make sure to create a program for setting the N:N Network from step 0 using M8038 (drive contact).
Otherwise, the N:N Network is disabled.
2) Do not set M8038 to ON using a program or programming tool.
3) Set station numbers consecutively. If a station number that is used twice or more is skipped, link will not
be achieved normally.
4) Pay close attention when setting up the N:N Network for the master station in a program using Structured
Ladder, FBD or ST programming in the FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N or FX2NC PLC.
For details, refer to Section 7.2.
3. Program for reading link devices
Do not change the contents of link devices at other stations.
1) When a link error (data transfer sequence error) occurs, the link device information is held in the status
just before occurrence of the link error.
Create a fail-safe program which does not cause abnormality even if a link error occurs.
4. Cautions on using FX0N/FX1S PLCs
1) Link pattern when FX0N/FX1S PLCs are used or included
When FX0N/FX1S PLCs are included in the system, make sure to set pattern 0 in D8178 (refresh range
setting).
If any other pattern is set, data transfer error occurs in all FX0N/FX1S PLCs included in the system, and
the link time becomes longer.
2) When user devices are occupied as system devices
In FX0N/FX1S PLCs, M503 to M511 and D201 to D255 are handled as devices dedicated to the N:N
Network, and cannot be handled as general devices any more. Do not set these devices to ON or OFF
using a user program, display unit or programming tool.
If these devices are set to ON or OFF, the N:N Network may malfunction.
5. Cautions on using FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
1) Only ch 1 or ch 2 can be set in the N:N Network.
2) Do not use the N:N Network and parallel link at the same time.
(For example, it is not allowed to use ch1 for the N:N Network and use ch2 for parallel link.)
6. Link device update timing
Link device update in N:N network is executed in the interrupt processing.
Because the interrupt processing is generated asynchronously from operations of the sequence program, it
may be performed during ladder operation.
B-40
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
8 Practical Program Examples
N:N Network
8.1 Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2)
A
Common Items
8.
Practical Program Examples
B
This chapter shows practical programs.
N:N Network
8.1
Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2)
This program example adopts pattern 2 which uses the maximum number of link devices.
When an FX0N or FX1S PLC is included, however, only pattern 0 is applicable.
Parallel Link
8.1.1
C
System configuration example
The example below shows a system configuration in which three FX PLCs are linked.
FX2N PLC
FX2N PLC
FX2N PLC
D
FX2N-485-BD
Computer Link
FX2N-485-BD
FX2N-485-BD
E
Station No. 1 (slave station)
Inverter
Communication
Station No. 0 (master station)
Station No. 2 (slave station)
- Refresh range: 64-bit devices and 8 word devices (pattern 2)
- Number of retries: 5
- Monitoring time: 70 ms
Contents of operations and corresponding program numbers
The program examples shown later execute the data processing shown in the table below.
The operation No. corresponds to the operation [1] (for example) indicated in the programs shown later.
Operation
No.
Data source
Data change destination and contents
Master station
Inputs X000 to X003
(M1000 to M1003)
Slave station No. 1 Outputs Y010 to Y013
[2]
Slave station No. 1
Inputs X000 to X003
(M1064 to M1067)
Master station
[3]
Slave station No. 2
Inputs X000 to X003
(M1128 to M1131)
Master station
Data register D1
Slave station No. 1 Set value of counter C1
Slave station No. 2 Outputs Y010 to Y013
Outputs Y014 to Y017
H
Slave station No. 2 Outputs Y014 to Y017
Programming
Communication
Outputs Y020 to Y023
Slave station No. 1 Outputs Y020 to Y023
Word device link
[4]
[6]
[7]
Master station
Data register D2
I
Output Y005
Slave station No. 2 Set value of counter C2
Slave station No. 2 Contact of counter C2 (M1140) Master station
Output Y006
Slave station No. 1 Data register D10
Master station
Slave station No. 1 (D10) + Slave
station No. 2 (D20) is stored to D3.
Slave station No. 1
Master station (D0) + Slave station
No. 2 (D20) is stored to D11.
Slave station No. 2
Master station (D0) + Slave station
No. 1 (D10) is stored to D21.
Slave station No. 2 Data register D20
Master station
Data register D0
Slave station No. 2 Data register D20
Master station
Data register D0
Slave station No. 1 Data register D10
B-41
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
[8]
Slave station No. 1 Contact of counter C1 (M1070) Master station
Remote
Maintenance
[5]
Master station
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Bit device link
[1]
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
8.1.2
F
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
8 Practical Program Examples
N:N Network
8.1.3
8.1 Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2)
Setting contents
The program examples shown later adopt the following communication parameters:
8.1.4
System device
Master station
Station No. 1
Station No. 2
D8176
K0
K1
K2
Station number settings
Contents
D8177
K2
—
—
Total number of slave stations: 2
D8178
K2
—
—
Refresh range: Pattern 2
D8179
K5
—
—
Number of retries: 5
D8180
K7
—
—
Monitoring time: 70 ms
Setting program for master station
For the master station setting program, refer to the program shown below.
The program shown below consists of three blocks, "parameter setting program", "error indication program"
and "operation program".
1. Parameter setting program
Make sure to start from step 0.
0
Parameter setting
M8038
FNC 12
MOV
K 0
D8176
Station number settings: 0 (master station)
FNC 12
MOV
K 2
D8177
Slave station quantity setting: 2 (2 slave stations)
FNC 12
MOV
K 2
D8178
Refresh range setting: 2 (pattern 2)
FNC 12
MOV
K 5
D8179
Number of retries setting: 5 (5 times)
FNC 12
MOV
K 7
D8180
Monitoring time setting: 7 (70 ms)
Caution
Pay close attention when setting up the N:N Network for the master station in a program using Structured
Ladder, FBD or ST programming in the FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N or FX2NC PLC.
For details, refer to Section 7.2.
2. Error indication program
Because the master station does not recognize errors within itself (the master station), programs for errors
within itself are not required.
Data transfer sequence error in slave station No. 1
M8184
Y001
Data transfer sequence error in slave station No. 2
M8185
Y002
Data transfer sequence ON
M8191
Y003
B-42
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
8 Practical Program Examples
N:N Network
8.1 Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2)
A
RUN monitor
M8000
MOV
K1X000 K1M1000
Common Items
3. Operation program
Operation [1]
B
Data transfer sequence error
in slave station No. 1
MOV
K1M1064 K1Y014
Operation [2]
MOV
K1M1128 K1Y020
Operation [3]
N:N Network
M8184
Data transfer sequence error
in slave station No. 2
M8185
C
Parallel Link
Data transfer sequence error
in slave station No. 1
M8184
MOV
K 10
D 1
D
Operation [4]
M1070
Computer Link
C1 contact of slave station No. 1
Y005
Data transfer sequence error
in slave station No. 2
M8185
K 10
Operation [5]
C2 contact of slave station No. 2
M1140
Data transfer
sequence error
in slave station
No. 2
M8184
M8185
Y006
F
ADD
D 20
D 3
Operation [6]
MOV
K 10
D 0
Operation [7]
Operation [8]
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
D 10
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Data transfer
sequence
error in slave
station No. 1
E
D 2
Inverter
Communication
MOV
END
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-43
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
8.1.5
8 Practical Program Examples
8.1 Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2)
Setting program for slave station (No. 1)
For the slave station setting program, refer to the program shown below.
The program shown below consists of three blocks, "parameter setting program", "error indication program"
and "operation program".
1. Parameter setting program
Make sure to start from step 0.
0
Parameter setting
M8038
FNC 12
MOV
K 1
D8176
Station number settings: 1 (slave station No. 1)
2. Error indication program
Because slave station No. 1 does not recognize errors within itself (slave station No. 1), programs for errors
within itself are not required.
Data transfer sequence error in master station
M8183
Y000
Data transfer sequence error in slave station No. 2
M8185
Y002
Data transfer sequence ON
M8191
Y003
B-44
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
8 Practical Program Examples
N:N Network
8.1 Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2)
A
Common Items
3. Operation program
Counter reset
X001
RST
C 1
B
K1M1000 K1Y010
Operation [1]
MOV
K1X000 K1M1064
Operation [2]
MOV
K1M1128 K1Y020
Operation [3]
C
Parallel Link
MOV
N:N Network
Master station
Data transfer sequence error
M8183
Data transfer
sequence error in
slave station No. 2
M8185
D
Computer Link
Counter input
X000
C1
D1
C1
Y005
Y006
Operation [5]
K 10
D 10
Operation [6]
Operation [8]
D 0
D 20
D 11
Operation [7]
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
MOV
Inverter
Communication
ADD
E
M1070
Data transfer
sequence
error in slave Slave station No. 2
station No. 2 C2 contact
M8185
M1140
Data transfer
sequence
error in slave
station No. 2
M8185
Operation [4]
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
END
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-45
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
8.1.6
8 Practical Program Examples
8.1 Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2)
Setting program for slave station (No. 2)
For the slave station setting program, refer to the program shown below.
The program shown below consists of three blocks, "parameter setting program", "error indication program"
and "operation program".
1. Parameter setting program
Make sure to start from step 0.
0
Parameter setting
M8038
FNC 12
MOV
K 2
D8176
Station number settings: 2 (slave station No. 2)
2. Error indication program
Because slave station No. 2 does not recognize errors within itself (slave station No. 2), programs for errors
within itself are not required.
Data transfer sequence error in master station
M8183
Y000
Data transfer sequence error in slave station No. 1
M8184
Y002
Data transfer sequence ON
M8191
Y003
B-46
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
8 Practical Program Examples
N:N Network
8.1 Practical Example 1 (Pattern 2)
A
Common Items
3. Operation program
Counter reset
X001
RST
C 2
B
MOV
K1M1000 K1Y010
Operation [1]
MOV
K1M1064 K1Y014
Operation [2]
MOV
K1X000 K1M1128
Operation [3]
Data transfer
sequence error in
slave station No. 1
M8184
C
Parallel Link
D
Slave Station No. 1
C1 contact
M1070
Y005
Computer Link
Data transfer
sequence
error in slave
station No. 1
M8184
N:N Network
Master station
Data transfer sequence error
M8183
Operation [4]
Counter input
X000
E
Inverter
Communication
C2
D2
C2
Y006
Operation [5]
F
MOV
K 10
D 20
Data transfer
sequence
error in slave
station No. 1
M8184
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
M1140
Operation [6]
Operation [7]
G
D 0
D 10
D 21
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
ADD
Operation [8]
H
END
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-47
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
9.
9 Troubleshooting
9.1 Checking FX PLC Version Applicability
Troubleshooting
This chapter explains troubleshooting.
9.1
Checking FX PLC Version Applicability
Verify that the FX Series PLC main unit is an applicable version.
For the version applicability check, refer to Section 1.3.
9.2
Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication
Check the status of the "RD" and "SD" indicator LEDs provided in the optional equipment.
LED status
RD
SD
Flashing
Flashing
Flashing
Off
Off
Flashing
Off
Off
Operation status
Data is being sent or received.
Data is received, but is not sent.
Data is sent, but is not received.
Data is not sent nor received.
While the N:N Network is executed normally, both LEDs flash brightly.
If they do not flash, check the wiring and the communication setting in the master and slave stations.
9.3
Checking Installation and Wiring
1. Mounting status
If the communication equipment is not securely connected to the PLC, communication is not possible.
For mounting method, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.
2. Power supply (For FX0N-485ADP)
The FX0N-485ADP requires a driving power supply. Verify that the power supply is correctly provided.
3. Wiring
Verify that the wiring to all communication equipment is correct. If the communication equipment is wired
incorrectly, communication is not possible.
For wiring method check, refer to Chapter 4.
9.4
Checking Sequence Program
1. Communication setting in the sequence program
Verify that the parallel link is not set. Using both the parallel link and the N:N Network at the same time is not
allowed.
Verify that the communication format (D8120, D8400 and D8420) is set correctly. Communication is not
possible if a communication port is set twice or more.
After changing any setting, make sure to reboot the PLC's power.
For communication setting, refer to Chapter 5.
2. Communication setting using parameters
Verify that the communication settings using parameters are suitable for use. Do not set parameters for the
N:N Network. If the communication settings are not suitable for use, communication will not function correctly.
After changing the setting, make sure to reboot the PLC’s power.
For the communication setting, refer to Chapter 5.
B-48
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
9 Troubleshooting
9.4 Checking Sequence Program
A
Verify that the same channel is not used in the Ethernet port setting. Do not set the channel used in N:N network.
After changing the setting, make sure to reboot the PLC's power.
4. N:N network and MODBUS communication (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
C
5. Presence of VRRD and VRSC instructions
Parallel Link
1) Except FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, reboot the PLC’s power.
2) In FX3G PLC
- In the case of the 14 points and 24-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, reboot the PLC's power.
- In the case of the 40 points and 60-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch2.
Use ch1, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, reboot the PLC's power.
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
3) In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch1.
Use ch2, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, reboot the PLC's power.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
6. Presence of RS instruction (except FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the RS instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, reboot the PLC's power.
7. Presence of RS and RS2 instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the RS and RS2 instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLC’s power.
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
8. Presence of EXTR instruction (in FX2N and FX2NC PLCs)
Verify that the EXTR instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, then reboot the PLC’s power.
9. Presence of IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR*1, and IVMC instructions (in FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
H
Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
Programming
Communication
Verify that the IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR and IVMC instructions are not being used for the same
channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLC’s power.
*1.
B
N:N Network
If N:N network and MODBUS communication are set in a same channel, N:N network is executed, but
MODBUS communication is ignored.
In this case, the error "Communication port is occupied in another communication, (Error code 203)" is stored
in D8402/D8422 for the corresponding channel in the PLC.
For details of MODBUS communication errors and error devices, refer to the FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/
FX3U/FX3UC Series User's Manual - MODBUS Serial Communication Edition.
Common Items
3. Ethernet port setting (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
I
10.Presence of ADPRW instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
11.Presence of FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD, and FLSTRD instructions (in FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs)
B-49
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
Verify that the FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD and FLSTRD instructions are not being used for the
same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLC’s power.
Remote
Maintenance
Verify that the ADPRW instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, and reboot the PLC’s power.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Troubleshooting
N:N Network
9.5
9.5 Checking Setting Contents and Errors
Checking Setting Contents and Errors
1. Checking the setting contents
Verify that the N:N Network is set correctly.
Each FX PLC has devices for checking the setting. Verify that the correct contents are stored in the devices
shown in the table below.
Device
Name
Description
D8173
Station number settings status
Provided to check the station number.
D8174
Slave station quantity setting status
Provided to check the number of slave stations.
D8175
Refresh range setting status
Provided to check the refresh range.
If the correct contents are not stored in the devices above, check the sequence program.
2. Checking setting errors
1) Error flags
If the parameter setting includes an error, the serial communication error flag turns ON.
Verify that the devices shown in the table below are ON.
Device
Name
Description
M8063
Turns ON when abnormality occurs during serial communication
Serial communication error 1 (ch 1)
using ch 1.
M8438
Serial communication error 2 (ch 2)
Turns ON when abnormality occurs during serial communication
using ch 2.
When using the N:N Network on ch 1, check M8063.
When using the N:N Network on ch 2, check M8438.
2) Error codes
When the serial communication error flag turns ON, the error code is stored in the device specified in the
table below.
Device
D8063
D8438
Name
Error code
Serial communication error code 1 (ch 1)
Serial communication error code 2 (ch 2)
Description
6308
N:N Network parameter setting error
6309
N:N Network setting error
3808
N:N Network parameter setting error
3809
N:N Network setting error
Caution
The serial communication error flags and serial communication error codes are not cleared even when
communication is restored.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.
9.6
Checking Absence/Presence of Data Transfer Errors
Verify that link errors have not occurred in the master station and slave stations. Link errors can be checked
using the flags specified below.
9.6.1
Check while data transfer sequence is being executed
While the N:N Network is being executed, the data transfer sequence ON flag remains ON.
Verify that the device specified in the table below is ON.
FX Series
B-50
Device
FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,
FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
M8191
FX0N, FX1S
M503
Name
Data transfer sequence ON flag
Description
Remains ON while data transfer is being
executed.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
9.6 Checking Absence/Presence of Data Transfer Errors
A
Checking data transfer sequence errors
When a link error occurs in the master station or slave station, the data transfer sequence error flag turns ON.
The data transfer sequence error flag varies depending on the FX Series and station number. Refer to the
table below.
Slave
station
No. 1
Slave
station
No. 2
Slave
station
No. 3
Slave
station
No. 4
Slave
station
No. 5
Slave
station
No. 6
Slave
station
No. 7
FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,
FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
M8183
M8184
M8185
M8186
M8187
M8188
M8189
M8190
FX0N, FX1S
M504
M505
M506
M507
M508
M509
M510
M511
Checking error codes
When a data transfer sequence error occurs, the corresponding data transfer sequence error flag turns ON,
and the error code is stored in the corresponding data register.
For error codes, refer to the next page.
The data register used to store the data transfer error code varies depending on the FX Series and station
number. Refer to the table below.
Slave
station
No. 1
Slave
station
No. 2
Slave
station
No. 3
Slave
station
No. 4
Slave
station
No. 5
Slave
station
No. 6
Slave
station
No. 7
FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,
FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
D8211
D8212
D8213
D8214
D8215
D8216
D8217
D8218
FX0N, FX1S
D211
D212
D213
D214
D215
D216
D217
D218
The data register for storing the data transfer error code stores the corresponding error code. When a data
transfer sequence error occurs, refer to the error code list shown below, and confirm the check points.
Error
code
Error name
Contents of error
Check point
G
01H
Monitoring timeout
L
M
Slave station did not respond to the
Wiring and power
sending request from the master station
supply
within the monitoring time.
02H
Station number
error
L
M
An unexpected slave station responded
Station number
to the sending request by the master
settings
station.
03H
Counter error
L
M
The counter value included in the
parameter data is different from the Wiring
counter value given by a slave station.
04H
Message format
error
L
M, L
Wiring, power
The message given by the slave station
supply and station
is incorrect.
number settings
11H
Monitoring timeout
M
L
The master station did not give a sending
Wiring and power
request to the next slave station within
supply
the monitoring timer.
Remote
Maintenance
14H
Message format
error
M
L
Wiring, power
The message from the master station is
supply and station
incorrect.
number settings
Apx.A
21H
Slave station no
response error
L
L*1
Wiring, power
The specified slave station does not exist. supply and station
number settings
Discontinued
models
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Station
Station
in which
which
error
detected
occurred
error
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
2. Error code list
E
Inverter
Communication
Master
station
FX Series
D
Computer Link
1. Error storing device
C
Parallel Link
9.6.3
B
N:N Network
Master
station
FX Series
Common Items
9.6.2
9 Troubleshooting
Programming
Communication
B-51
H
I
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
9 Troubleshooting
9.6 Checking Absence/Presence of Data Transfer Errors
Error
code
Error name
Station
Station
in which
which
error
detected
occurred
error
Contents of error
22H
Station number
error
L
L*1
An unexpected slave station responded
Station number
to the sending request by the master
settings
station.
23H
Counter error
L
L*1
The counter value included in the
parameter data is different from the Wiring
counter value given by a slave station.
31H
Parameter not
received
L
L*2
Before parameters had been received,
Wiring and power
sending request was received from the
supply
master station.
M: Master station, L: Slave station
B-52
Check point
*1.
Any slave station other than the slave station in which error occurred
*2.
Station in which error occurred
9.6 Checking Absence/Presence of Data Transfer Errors
N:N Network
9 Troubleshooting
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
A
Common Items
MEMO
B
N:N Network
C
Parallel Link
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-53
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
10 Related Data
N:N Network
10.1 Related Device List
10. Related Data
10.1
Related Device List
10.1.1 For FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
1. Bit devices
Device
number
Name
Description
Initial
value
Detection
R/W
Devices for communication setting
M8038
Parameter setting
Communication parameter setting flag
—
M, L
R
M8179
Channel setting
Sets the communication port channel to be used
(in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC).
—
M, L
R/W
Devices for checking communication status
M8063
Serial communication Turns ON when abnormality occurs in serial
error 1 (ch 1)
communication using ch 1.
—
M, L
R
M8438
Turns ON when abnormality occurs in serial
Serial communication
communication using ch 2 (in the FX3G, FX3GC,
error 2 (ch 2)
FX3U and FX3UC).
—
M, L
R
M8183
Data transfer
sequence error
Turns ON when a data transfer sequence error
occurs in the master station.
—
L
R
M8184
to M8190
Data transfer
sequence error
Turns ON when a data transfer sequence error
occurs in a slave station.
However, data transfer sequence errors within
the slave station itself cannot be detected.
—
M, L
R
Data transfer
sequence ON
Remains ON while data transfer is being
executed.
—
M, L
R
M8191
R
R/W
M
L
B-54
: Read only (used as a contact in program)
: Read or Write
: Master station (station No. 0)
: Slave station (station No. 1 to 7)
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
10 Related Data
N:N Network
10.1 Related Device List
A
Common Items
B
N:N Network
C
Slave station
No. 3
Slave station
No. 4
Slave station
No. 5
Slave station
No. 6
Slave station
No. 7
































—








M8184
M8185
M8186
M8187
M8188
M8189
M8190








D
Computer Link
Slave station
No. 2
Parallel Link
Slave station
No. 1
E
Inverter
Communication
Master
station
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-55
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
10 Related Data
N:N Network
10.1 Related Device List
2. Word devices (data registers)
Device
number
Name
Description
Initial
value
Detection
R/W
Devices for checking
D8173
Corresponding station
number settings status
Provided to check the station number.
—
M, L
R
D8174
Slave station quantity
setting status
Provided to check the number of slave stations.
—
M, L
R
D8175
Refresh range setting
status
Provided to check the refresh range.
—
M, L
R
D8063
Serial communication
error code 1 (ch 1)
Stores the serial communication error code for
ch 1.
—
M, L
R
D8419
Operation mode display
(ch 1)
Stores the communication type being used by
ch 1. (in the FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
—
M, L
R
D8438
Serial communication
error code 2 (ch 2)
Stores the serial communication error code for
ch 2. (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
—
M, L
R
D8439
Operation mode display
(ch 2)
Stores the communication type being used by
ch 2. (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
—
M, L
R
Devices for communication setting
D8176
Corresponding station
number settings
Provided to set the station number.
0
M, L
R/W
D8177
Slave station quantity
setting
Provided to set the number of slave stations used
in communication.
7
M
R/W
D8178
Refresh range setting
Provided to set the refresh range.
0
M
R/W
D8179
Number of retries
Provided to set the number of retry times.
3
M
R/W
D8180
Monitoring time
Provided to set the no-response monitoring time.
5
M
R/W
—
M
R
Devices for checking communication status
D8201
Present link scan time
D8202
Maximum link scan time Maximum value of the network cycle time
—
M
R
D8203
Data transfer sequence
error count
Amount of data sequence errors that occurred in
the master station
—
L
R
D8204
to D8210
Data transfer sequence
error count
Amount of data sequence errors that occurred in
a slave station.
However, data sequence errors occurring within
the slave station itself cannot be counted.
—
M, L
R
D8211
Data transmission error
code
Stores the error code for the master station.
—
L
R
D8212
to D8218
Data transmission error
code
Stores the error code for a slave station.
However, data sequence errors occurring within
the slave station itself cannot be counted.
—
M, L
R
R
R/W
M
L
B-56
Current value of the network cycle time
: Read only
: Read or Write
: Master station (station No. 0)
: Slave station (station No. 1 to 7)
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
10 Related Data
N:N Network
10.1 Related Device List
A
Slave station
No. 1
Slave station
No. 2
Slave station
No. 3
Slave station
No. 4
Slave station
No. 5
Slave station
No. 6
Slave station
No. 7
































































Computer Link

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Inverter
Communication
Common Items
Master
station

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
F

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—








D8204
D8205
D8206
D8207
D8208
D8209
D8210

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

D8212
D8213
D8214
D8215
D8216
D8217
D8218
B
N:N Network
C
Parallel Link
D
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-57
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
10 Related Data
N:N Network
10.1 Related Device List
10.1.2 For FX0N and FX1S PLCs
1. Bit devices
Device
number
Initial
value
Detection
R/W
—
M, L
R
Turns ON when a data transfer sequence
error occurs in the master station.
—
L
R
Turns ON when a data transfer sequence
error occurs in a slave station.
M505 to M511 Data transfer sequence error
However, data transfer sequence errors within
the slave station itself cannot be detected.
—
M, L
R
Remains ON while data transfer is being
executed.
—
M, L
R
Initial
value
Detection
R/W
—
M, L
R
Name
Description
Devices for communication setting
M8038
Parameter setting
Communication parameter setting flag
Devices for checking communication status
M504
M503
Data transfer sequence error
Data transfer sequence ON
R: Read only (used as a contact in program)
M: Master station (station No. 0) L: Slave station (station No. 1 to 7)
2. Word devices (data registers)
Device
number
Name
Description
Devices for checking
D8173
Corresponding station
number settings status
D8174
Slave station quantity setting Provided to check the number of slave
status
stations.
—
M, L
R
D8175
Refresh range setting status
Provided to check the refresh range.
—
M, L
R
Provided to check the station number.
Devices for communication setting
D8176
Corresponding station
number settings
Provided to set the station number.
0
M, L
R/W
D8177
Slave station quantity setting
Provided to set the number of slave stations
used in communication.
7
M
R/W
D8178
Refresh range setting
Provided to set the refresh range.
0
M
R/W
D8179
Number of retries
Provided to set the number of retries.
3
M
R/W
D8180
Monitoring time
Provided to set the no-response monitoring
time.
5
M
R/W
Devices for checking communication status
D201
Present link scan time
Stores the current value of the network cycle
time.
—
M
R
D202
Maximum link scan time
Stores the maximum value of the network
cycle time.
—
M
R
D203
Data transfer sequence error Stores the amount of data sequence errors
count
that occurred in the master station.
—
L
R
Amount of data sequence errors that
Data transfer sequence error occurred in a slave station.
D204 to D210
However, data sequence errors that occurred
count
within the slave station itself cannot be counted.
—
M, L
R
D211
Data transmission error code Stores the error code for the master station.
—
L
R
Stores the error code for a slave station.
D212 to D218 Data transmission error code However, data sequence errors that occurred
within the slave station itself cannot be counted.
—
M, L
R
D219 to D255 Not applicable
—
—
—
Provided for the internal processing.
R: Read only R/W: Read or Write
M: Master station (station No. 0) L: Slave station (station No. 1 to 7)
B-58
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
10 Related Data
N:N Network
10.1 Related Device List
A
Slave station Slave station Slave station Slave station Slave station Slave station Slave station
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7







—







B
N:N Network

Common Items
Master
station
C
M505
M506
M507
M508
M509
M510
M511








Parallel Link

D
Slave station Slave station Slave station Slave station Slave station Slave station Slave station
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7




























—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—








D204
D205
D206
D207
D208
D209
D210

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

D212
D213
D214
D215
D216
D217
D218
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
F
G
H
I
Remote
Maintenance

Programming
Communication

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)

E
Inverter
Communication

Computer Link
Master
station
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-59
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
10.2
10 Related Data
10.2 Details of Related Devices
Details of Related Devices
The devices described below are used in the N:N Network.
10.2.1 Parameter setting [M8038]
This device works as the communication parameter setting flag.
1. Stations requiring program setting
Setting is required for the master station and slave stations.
2. Detailed contents
"LD M8038" provided in step 0 starts the parameter setting, and the last instruction in this circuit block finishes
the setting.
(This sequence program is not executed in every scan cycle.)
3. Cautions on use
Do not set this device to ON using a program or programming tool.
10.2.2 Channel setting [M8179]
This device works as the channel setting flag (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC).
1. Stations requiring program setting
Setting is required for the master station and slave stations.
2. Detailed contents
When using ch 2 as the communication port, set this device to ON in the sequence program.
When using ch 1, the sequence program is not required.
10.2.3 Serial communication error [M8063 and M8438]
These devices turn ON when an error is included in the parameters used to set the N:N Network. (M8438 is
available in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC.)
1. Stations requiring program setting
Setting is required for the master station and slave stations to check the communication status.
2. Detailed contents
M8063 turns ON when an error is included in the parameters used to set N:N Network using ch 1.
M8438 turns ON when an error is included in the parameters used to set N:N Network using ch 2.
3. Cautions on use
Do not set these devices to ON using a program or programming tool.
Serial communication errors are not cleared even when communication is restored.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.
B-60
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
10 Related Data
N:N Network
10.2 Details of Related Devices
A
These devices turn ON when a data transfer sequence error occurs in the master station or a slave station.
1. Stations requiring program setting
Setting is required for the master station and slave stations.
However, setting for the station itself is not required.
B
A used device varies depending on the FX Series.
Slave
station
No. 1
Slave
station
No. 2
Slave
station
No. 3
Slave
station
No. 4
Slave
station
No. 5
Slave
station
No. 6
Slave
station
No. 7
FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,
FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
M8183
M8184
M8185
M8186
M8187
M8188
M8189
M8190
FX0N, FX1S
M504
M505
M506
M507
M508
M509
M510
M511
3. Cautions on use
D
Computer Link
Data transfer sequence errors in a station itself cannot be detected.
Do not set these devices to ON using a program or programming tool.
10.2.5 Data transfer sequence ON [M8191] [M503]
This device remains ON while data transfer is being from or to in the master station or slave station.
E
1. Stations requiring program setting
Inverter
Communication
Setting is required for the master station and slave stations.
2. Detailed contents
The device used varies depending on the FX Series.
FX Series
Data transfer sequence ON
M8191
FX0N, FX1S
M503
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,
FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
C
Parallel Link
Master
station
N:N Network
2. Detailed contents
FX Series
Common Items
10.2.4 Data transfer sequence error [M8138 to M8190] [M504 to M511]
3. Cautions on use
G
Do not set this device to ON using a program or programming tool.
These devices store the serial communication error code (D8438 is available in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and
FX3UC).
H
1. Stations requiring program setting
Programming
Communication
Setting is required for the master station and slave stations to check the error code.
2. Detailed contents
The following error code is stored when a serial communication error occurs.
Error code
ch2
D8063
D8438
6308
3808
N:N Network parameter setting error
6309
3809
N:N Network setting error
I
Description
Remote
Maintenance
ch1
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
10.2.6 Serial communication error code [D8063 and D8438]
3. Cautions on use
B-61
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
Serial communication errors are not cleared even after communication has recovered its normal status.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
10 Related Data
N:N Network
10.2 Details of Related Devices
10.2.7 Corresponding station number settings status [D8173]
This device is used to check the station’s own station number settings status.
1. Stations requiring program setting
Setting is required for the master station and slave stations to check the setting status.
2. Detailed contents
The contents stored in the corresponding station number settings device D8176 are stored in D8173.
3. Cautions on use
Do not change the preset numeric value using a program or programming tool.
10.2.8 Slave station quantity setting status [D8174]
Use this device to check the number of slave stations set in the master station.
1. Stations requiring program setting
Setting is required for the master station and slave stations to check the setting status.
2. Detailed contents
The contents stored in the slave station quantity setting device D8177 in the master station are stored in
D8174.
3. Cautions on use
Do not change a preset numeric value using a program or programming tool.
10.2.9 Refresh range setting status [D8175]
Use this device to check the refresh range set in the master station.
1. Stations requiring program setting
Setting is required for the master station and slave stations to check the setting status.
2. Detailed contents
The contents stored in the refresh range setting device D8178 in the master station are stored in D8175.
3. Cautions on use
Do not change a preset numeric value using a program or programming tool.
10.2.10 Station number settings [D8176]
Set a value ranging from 0 to 7 to the special data register D8176 (initial value: 0).
1. Stations requiring program setting
The master and slave stations require program setting.
2. Detailed contents
Set value
0
1 to 7
B-62
Description
Master station
Slave station number
Examples: "1"  Station No. 1, "5"  Station No. 5
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
10 Related Data
N:N Network
10.2 Details of Related Devices
A
Common Items
10.2.11 Slave station quantity setting [D8177]
Set a value ranging from 1 to 7 to the special data register D8177 (initial value: 7).
1. Stations requiring program setting
B
The master station requires program setting, and slave stations do not require program setting.
Set value
Description
Set value
4
Description
Not applicable
Four slave stations are connected.
1
One slave station is connected.
5
Five slave stations are connected.
2
Two slave stations are connected.
6
Six slave stations are connected.
3
Three slave stations are connected.
7
Seven slave stations are connected.
10.2.12 Refresh range setting [D8178]
D
Set a value ranging from 0 to 2 to the special data register D8178 (initial value: 0).
Computer Link
1. Stations requiring program setting
The master station requires program setting, and slave stations do not require program setting.
2. Pattern applicability in FX PLC
E
Pattern (set value)
Pattern 0 (0)
Pattern 1 (1)
Pattern 2 (2)
FX0N PLC

Not applicable
Not applicable
FX1S PLC

Not applicable
Not applicable
FX1N, FX1NC PLC



FX2N, FX2NC PLC



FX3S PLC



FX3G, FX3GC PLC



FX3U, FX3UC PLC



Inverter
Communication
FX Series
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
3. Number and assignment of link devices
Pattern 2
Bit device
(M)
Word device
(D)
Bit device
(M)
Word device
(D)
Bit device
(M)
Word device
(D)
H
0
4 in each
station
32 in each
station
4 in each
station
64 in each
station
8 in each
station
Programming
Communication
Station
No.
Pattern 1
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
The number of link devices varies depending on the selected pattern, but the head device number remains
the same.
It is recommended to leave unused numbers in the unused status to enable pattern change in the future.
Pattern 0
C
Parallel Link
0
N:N Network
2. Detailed contents
—
D 0 to D 3
M1000 to M1031
D 0 to D 3
M1000 to M1063
D 0 to D 7
1
—
D10 to D13
M1064 to M1095
D10 to D13
M1064 to M1127
D10 to D17
2
—
D20 to D23
M1128 to M1159
D20 to D23
M1128 to M1191
D20 to D27
3
—
D30 to D33
M1192 to M1223
D30 to D33
M1192 to M1255
D30 to D37
4
—
D40 to D43
M1256 to M1287
D40 to D43
M1256 to M1319
D40 to D47
5
—
D50 to D53
M1320 to M1351
D50 to D53
M1320 to M1383
D50 to D57
6
—
D60 to D63
M1384 to M1415
D60 to D63
M1384 to M1447
D60 to D67
7
—
D70 to D73
M1448 to M1479
D70 to D73
M1448 to M1511
D70 to D77
I
Remote
Maintenance
0
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-63
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
10 Related Data
10.2 Details of Related Devices
4. Cautions on use
1) Cautions on using FX0N and FX1S PLCs
When FX0N and/or FX1S PLCs are included in the system, make sure to set the refresh range to pattern
0.
If any other pattern is selected, data transfer error will occur in all FX0N and FX1S PLCs included in the
system, and the link time will become longer.
2) Occupied devices
The devices used in each pattern are occupied for the N:N Network in all stations.
Make sure that such devices are not used in general programs.
10.2.13 Number of retries [D8179]
Set a value ranging from 0 to 10 to the special data register D8179 (initial value: 3).
1. Stations requiring program setting
The master station requires program setting, and slave stations do not require program setting.
2. Detailed contents
When any response is not given after the specified number of retries, the irresponsive station is regarded as
having a data transfer sequence error by other stations.
10.2.14 Monitoring time setting [D8180]
Set a vale ranging from 5 to 255 to the special data register D8180 in "10 ms" units (initial value: 5 [50 ms]).
1. Stations requiring program setting
The master station requires program setting, and slave stations do not require program setting.
2. Detailed contents
If data transfer between the master station and a slave station requires time longer than the monitoring time
set here, the master station or slave station is regarded as abnormal.
10.2.15 Present link scan time [D8201] [D201]
This device stores the current value of the network cycle in the N:N Network (unit: 10 ms).
1. Stations requiring program setting
The master station requires program setting.
2. Detailed contents
The device used varies depending on the FX Series.
FX Series
Data transfer sequence ON
FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,
FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
D8201
FX0N, FX1S
D201
3. Cautions on use
Do not change the preset numeric value using a program or programming tool.
B-64
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
10 Related Data
N:N Network
10.2 Details of Related Devices
A
Common Items
10.2.16 Maximum link scan time [D8202] [D202]
This device stores the maximum value of the network cycle in the N:N Network (unit: 10 ms).
1. Stations requiring program setting
B
The master station requires program setting.
N:N Network
2. Detailed contents
The device used varies depending on the FX Series.
FX Series
Data transfer sequence ON
D8202
FX0N, FX1S
D202
C
Parallel Link
FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,
FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
3. Cautions on use
Do not change the preset numeric value using a program or programming tool.
D
These devices store the amount of data transfer sequence errors that occurred in the master station and
slave stations.
1. Stations requiring program setting
E
Inverter
Communication
The master and slave stations require program setting.
However, setting for the station itself is not required.
2. Detailed contents
The device used varies depending on the FX Series.
Slave
station
No. 1
Slave
station
No. 2
Slave
station
No. 3
Slave
station
No. 4
Slave
station
No. 5
Slave
station
No. 6
Slave
station
No. 7
FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N,
FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
D8203
D8204
D8205
D8206
D8207
D8208
D8209
D8210
FX0N, FX1S
D203
D204
D205
D206
D207
D208
D209
D210
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
3. Cautions on use
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Master
station
FX Series
Computer Link
10.2.17 Data transfer sequence error count [D8203 to D8210] [D203 to D210]
Data transfer sequence errors that occurred within the station itself cannot be detected.
Do not change a preset numeric value using the program or programming tool.
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-65
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
10 Related Data
N:N Network
10.2 Details of Related Devices
10.2.18 Data transfer error code [D8211 to D8218] [D211 to D218]
These devices store the error code in the master station and slave stations.
1. Stations requiring program setting
The master station requires program setting.
However, this setting for the station itself is not required.
2. Detailed contents
1) The device used varies depending on the FX Series.
FX Series
Master
station
Slave
station
No. 1
Slave
station
No. 2
Slave
station
No. 3
Slave
station
No. 4
Slave
station
No. 5
Slave
station
No. 6
Slave
station
No. 7
FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC,
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
D8211
D8212
D8213
D8214
D8215
D8216
D8217
D8218
FX0N, FX1S
D211
D212
D213
D214
D215
D216
D217
D218
2) Error code list
Error
code
Error name
Station
Station
in which
which
error
detected
occurred
error
Contents of error
01H
Monitoring timeout
L
M
Slave station did not respond to the
Wiring and power
sending request from the master station
supply
within the monitoring time.
02H
Station number
error
L
M
An unexpected slave station responded
Station number
to the sending request by the master
settings
station.
03H
Counter error
L
M
The counter value included in the
parameter data is different from the Wiring
counter value given by a slave station.
04H
Message format
error
L
M, L
Wiring, power
The message given by the slave station
supply and station
is incorrect.
number settings
11H
Monitoring timeout
M
L
The master station did not give a sending
Wiring and power
request to the next slave station within
supply
the monitoring timer.
14H
Message format
error
M
L
Wiring, power
The message from the master station is
supply and station
incorrect.
number settings
21H
Slave station no
response error
L
L*1
Wiring, power
The specified slave station does not exist. supply and station
number settings
22H
Station number
error
L
L*1
An unexpected slave station responded
Station number
to the sending request by the master
settings
station.
23H
Counter error
L
L*1
The counter value included in the
parameter data is different from the Wiring
counter value given by a slave station.
31H
Parameter not
received
L
L*2
Before parameters had been received,
Wiring and power
sending request was received from the
supply
master station.
M: Master station, L: Slave station
*1.
Any slave station other than the slave station in which error occurred
*2.
Station in which error occurred
3. Cautions on use
Data transfer sequence errors that occurred within the station itself cannot be detected.
Do not change the preset numeric value using a program or programming tool.
B-66
Check point
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
10 Related Data
N:N Network
10.2 Details of Related Devices
A
These devices store the communication type being used. (in the FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
1. Detailed contents
The table below shows the contents of the communication type codes.
Code
B
N:N Network
These devices store the code of the communication type currently being used in the communication port.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8419 stores the communication type.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8439 stores the communication type.
Common Items
10.2.19 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439]
Description
Programming communication
1
PP modem mode
2
Protocol dedicated to computer link
3
N:N Network
RS instruction
5
RS2 instruction
6
Parallel link
7
Inverter instruction
8
Variable analog potentiometer expansion board is used.
9
MODBUS communication
CF-ADP
11
ENET-ADP
12
Input/output expansion board is used.
E
Inverter
Communication
10
D
Computer Link
4
C
Parallel Link
0
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
B-67
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
N:N Network
10.2 Details of Related Devices
MEMO
B-68
10 Related Data
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
A
Common Items
B
N:N Network
FX Series Programmable Controllers
C
Parallel Link
User's Manual [Data Communication Edition]
C. Parallel Link
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
Foreword
I
© 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
C-1
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
Remote
Maintenance
This manual explains "parallel link" provided for the MELSEC-F FX Series Programmable Controllers and
should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
C-2
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
Parallel Link
1.1 Outline of System
A
Common Items
1.
Outline
B
This chapter explains the parallel link.
N:N Network
1.1
Outline of System
The parallel link allows connection between two FX PLCs of the same series to mutually link devices.
2) Data link is automatically updated between up to two FX PLCs.
3) The total extension distance is 500 m (1640' 5") maximum (when only the 485ADPs are used except,
when the 485BDs are used with FX2(FX)/FX2C PLCs).
2 units
500 m (1640' 5") [50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is used]
FX PLC
....... Number of linked units
....... Total extension distance
E
For specifications,
refer to Chapter 2.
FX PLC
Inverter
Communication
To check applicable
....... PLC models,
refer to Section 1.3.
+
+
Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-485
Master station
Bit devices
.......
For selection,
refer to Chapter 3.
.......
For wiring,
refer to Chapter 4.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-485
Slave station
Transfer direction
Bit devices
M900 to M999
M900 to M999
Word devices
Word devices
D490 to D499
D490 to D499
D500 to D509
D500 to D509
devices can be selected
among two patterns.
For details,
refer to Chapter 2.
G
H
The figure above shows the maximum number of linked devices. There are differences in the specifications and
limitation depending on the selected link pattern and FX Series.
Programming
Communication
M800 to M899
....... The number of linked
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
M800 to M899
D
Computer Link
Important points and reference
chapter/section
System
C
Parallel Link
1) According to the number of devices to be linked, either pattern can be selected between the regular mode
and the high speed mode.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-3
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
1.2
1 Outline
1.2 Procedures Before Operation
Procedures Before Operation
The flow chart below shows the Parallel Link setting procedures up until data link:
Parallel link
Refer to Chapter 1.
Outline
Refer to Chapter 2.
Check communication specifications.
Refer to Chapter 3.
Determine system configuration and selection.
Outline of system
• Applicable PLC versions
• Applicable programming tools
Communication specifications
• Number of link points and link time
• Number of system devices
System configuration
• Select communication equipment.
Refer to Chapter 4.
Perform wiring.
Wiring procedure
• Wiring using twisted cables
• Wiring example
Programming tool
Connect PLC*1
Refer to Chapter 5.
Perform PLC communication setting
(initialization).
Turn ON power.
PLC serial communication setting
• Communication setting is not required.
(Check only unset items.)
Refer to Chapter 6.
Perform test run (communication test).
Communication test
• Create test programs.
Refer to Chapter 7.
Create programs.
Based on SD/RD lamp lighting status and
contents of error check devices, verify that
communication is being executed normally.
Communication parameter setting
programs
• Basic program
• Error indication program example
• Detailed explanation of setting devices
If there are problems, refer to the troubleshooting
(Chapter 9).
Refer to Chapter 8.
Practical program examples
Program examples in the regular parallel link mode
are shown.
*1 For the programming tool to PLC connection procedure, refer to the "Programming Communication" section in this
manual or the respective programming tool manual.
For details on operating procedures, refer to the respective programming tool manual.
C-4
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
Parallel Link
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC
Communication Type Applicability in PLC
1.3.1
Applicable versions
Common Items
1.3
A
PLC

FX3U Series

FX3GC Series




 (Ver. 1.04 or later)
FX1NC Series

FX1N Series

The link device range is limited.
D
FX1S Series

The link device range is limited.
FX0N Series
 (Ver. 1.20 or later)
The link device range is limited.
Computer Link
FX2NC Series
FX2N Series
C
Parallel Link
FX3G Series
FX3S Series
Remarks
FX0S Series
—
Parallel link is not provided.
FX0 Series
—
Parallel link is not provided.
FX2C Series

The high-speed link mode is supported in Ver. 3.07 and
later.
FX2(FX) Series

The high-speed link mode is supported in Ver. 3.07 and
later.
FX1 Series
—
Parallel link is not provided.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Version check
The PLC version can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001.
For a detailed description of the version check, refer to A. Common Items Section 4.2.
1.3.3
E
Inverter
Communication
1.3.2
Applicability (applicable version)
FX3UC Series
B
N:N Network
The communication types are applicable in the following versions.
 : Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—: Not applicable
G
Products whose production was stopped
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Production was stopped for some models of MELSEC-F Series PLCs and programming tools described in
this manual. For models whose production was stopped, refer to Appendix A.
To see the latest available products, refer to the general catalog.
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-5
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
Parallel Link
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability
1.4
Programming Tool Applicability
1.4.1
For applicable versions
The programming tool is applicable of main units for each FX Series from the following version:
1. English versions
Product name
Model name
Applicable version
Remarks
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
Ver. 1.08J or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-E
Ver. 8.18U or later
FX-30P
-
Ver. 1.00 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX3G PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
Ver. 1.08J or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-E
Ver. 8.72A or later
FX-30P
-
Ver. 1.00 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX3GC PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
FX-30P
Ver. 1.77F or later
Ver. 1.30 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
-
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX3S PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
FX-30P
Ver. 1.492N or later
Ver. 1.50 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
-
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX2N and FX2NC PLCs
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
Ver. 1.08J or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-E
SW2 A or later
FX-PCS/WIN-E
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E
Ver. 1.00 or later
FX-30P
Ver. 1.00 or later
FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC-E
Ver. 3.00 or later
FX-10P-E
Ver. 3.00 or later
GOT-F900 Series display units
F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E
GOT1000 Series display units
-
F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs
GX Works2
C-6
SWDNC-GXW2-E
Ver. 1.08J or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-E
SW5 A or later
FX-PCS/WIN-E
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E
Ver. 3.00 or later
FX-30P
Ver. 1.00 or later
FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD-E
Ver. 4.00 or later
FX-10P-E
Ver. 4.00 or later
-
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
Parallel Link
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability
A
Model name
Remarks
F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
2. Japanese versions
Product name
Model name
Applicable version
Remarks
C
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
SWDNC-GXW2-J
Ver. 1.07H or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-J
Ver. 8.13P or later
FX-30P
Parallel Link
GX Works2
-
Ver. 1.00 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
SWDNC-GXW2-J
Ver. 1.07H or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-J
Ver. 8.72A or later
FX-30P
-
Ver. 1.00 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
SWDNC-GXW2-J
FX-30P
Ver. 1.77F or later
Ver. 1.30 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
-
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
SWDNC-GXW2-J
FX-30P
Ver. 1.492N or later
Ver. 1.50 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
-
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-J
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX-PCS/WIN
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN
Ver. 2.00 or later
FX-PCS-KIT/98
SW1PC-FXGP/98(-3,-5)
Ver. 4.00 or later
FX-PCS/98-3
SW1PC-FXGP/98-3
Ver. 4.00 or later
FX-PCS-KIT/V-3
SW1PC-FXGP/V3
Ver. 2.00 or later
FX-A7PHP-KIT
Ver. 1.07H or later
SW1RX-GPPFX
Ver. 3.00 or later
SW2 A or later
FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC
Ver. 4.00 or later
FX-10P(-SET0)
Ver. 3.00 or later
GOT-F900 Series display units
F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH
I
F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Apx.A
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
C-7
Discontinued
models
GOT1000 Series display units
-
Remote
Maintenance
Ver. 1.00 or later
H
Programming
Communication
FX-30P
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX2N and FX2NC PLCs
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX3S PLC
GX Works2
E
Inverter
Communication
FX3GC PLC
GX Works2
D
Computer Link
FX3G PLC
GX Works2
B
N:N Network
GOT1000 Series display units
Applicable version
Common Items
Product name
GOT-F900 Series display units
F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
Parallel Link
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability
Product name
Model name
Applicable version
Remarks
FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-J
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX-PCS/WIN
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN
Ver. 4.00 or later
FX-PCS/98-3
SW1PC-FXGP/98-3
Ver. 5.00 or later
SW5 A or later
FX-30P
Ver. 1.00 or later
FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD
Ver. 5.00 or later
FX-10P(-SET0)
Ver. 4.00 or later
GOT-F900 Series display units
F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH
-
F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
GOT1000 Series display units
1.4.2
Ver. 1.07H or later
For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model)
Even programming tool not applicable to a PLC can create programs when an alternative model is set.
In this case, however, programming is enabled only in the function ranges provided for the alternative PLC
model such as instructions and program size.
Model to be
programmed
Priority: High  Low
Model to be set
FX3UC Series
FX3UC

FX2N

FX2(FX)
FX3U Series
FX3UC, FX3U

FX2N
FX3GC Series
FX3G, FX3GC
FX3G Series
FX3S Series

FX2(FX)

FX1N
*1

FX2N*1
FX3G

FX1N*1

FX2N*1
FX3S

FX3G

FX1N*1
FX2NC Series
FX2NC, FX2N

FX2(FX)
FX2N Series
FX2N

FX2(FX)
FX1NC Series
FX1NC, FX1N

FX2N

FX2(FX)
FX1N Series
FX1N

FX2N

FX2(FX)
FX1S Series
FX1S

FX2(FX)
FX0N Series
FX0N

FX2(FX)
FX0S Series
FX0S

FX2(FX)
FX0 Series
FX0

FX2(FX)
FX2C Series
FX2C, FX2(FX)

FX2(FX)
FX2(FX) Series
FX1 Series
*1.
FX2(FX)
FX1
"FX2N" is selected when the FX-10P(-E) is used.
Point
In the FX3S PLC, set the memory capacity for PLC parameters to 4,000 steps or less.
C-8
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
Parallel Link
2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference)
A
Common Items
2.
Specifications
B
This chapter explains the communication specifications and performance of the parallel link.
N:N Network
2.1
Communication Specifications (Reference)
The parallel link is executed using the (fixed) communication specifications shown in the table below.
Specification items such as baud rate cannot be changed.
Number of connectable units
Transmission standard
Protocol type
Control procedure
FX3UC, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3G, FX3S PLCs
Baud rate FX2NC, FX2N, FX1NC, FX1N, FX1S, FX0N,
FX2C, FX2(FX) PLCs
2 maximum (1:1)
RS-485 or RS-422 standard
500 m (1640' 5") or less
D
[50 m (164' 0")or less when
485BD is included in system]
Wire link: 10 m (32' 9") or less
Optical fiber: 50 m (164' 0") or less
Wire link: FX2-40AW
Optical fiber: FX2-40AP
Parallel link
—
E
Half-duplex,
bidirectional communication
Inverter
Communication
Communication method
C
Remarks
115200bps
19200bps
Start bit
F
Fixed
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Character Data bit
format
Parity bit
Stop bit
Header
Terminator
Computer Link
FX3UC, FX3U, FX3GC, FX3G, FX3S,
Maximum FX2NC, FX2N, FX1NC, FX1N, FX1S, FX0N
total
PLCs
extension
distance
FX2(FX), FX2C PLCs
Specifications
Parallel Link
Item
Fixed
—
Sum check
Fixed
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Control line
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-9
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
Parallel Link
2.2 Link Specifications
2.2
Link Specifications
2.2.1
PLC communication type applicability status
 : Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—: Not applicable
Regular parallel link mode applicability
(applicable version)
High speed parallel link mode applicability
(applicable version)
FX3UC Series


FX3U Series


PLC
FX3GC Series


FX3G Series


FX3S Series


FX2NC Series


FX2N Series
 (Ver. 1.04 or later)
 (Ver. 1.04 or later)
FX1NC Series


FX1N Series


Series


 (Ver. 1.20 or later)
 (Ver. 1.20 or later)
FX1S
FX0N Series
2.2.2
FX0S Series
—
—
FX0 Series
—
—
FX2C Series

 (Ver. 3.07 or later)
FX2(FX) Series

 (Ver. 3.07 or later)
Link time
The link time indicates the cycle time in which link devices are updated.
The link time varies depending on the link mode as shown in the tables below.
1. For FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC Series
Link mode
Time
Regular parallel link mode
15 ms + Master station operation cycle (ms) + Slave station operation cycle (ms)
High speed parallel link mode
5 ms + Master station operation cycle (ms) + Slave station operation cycle (ms)
2. For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N and FX2NC Series
Link mode
C-10
Time
Regular parallel link mode
70 ms + Master station operation cycle (ms) + Slave station operation cycle (ms)
High speed parallel link mode
20 ms + Master station operation cycle (ms) + Slave station operation cycle (ms)
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
Parallel Link
2.3 Link Device Numbers and Number of Points
Link Device Numbers and Number of Points
2.3.1
For FX0N, FX1S and FX3S Series
Mode
B
High speed parallel link mode
Bit device (M)
Word device (D)
Bit device (M)
Word device (D)
Type
50 in each station
10 in each station
0
2 in each station
Master station
M400 to M449
D230 to D239
—
D230, D231
Slave station
M450 to M499
D240 to D249
—
D240, D241
FX0N, FX1S, FX3S
FX0N, FX1S, FX3S
M400 to M449
M450 to M499
RUN
monitor
M8070
D240 to D249
Automatic update
M400 to M449
D
M450 to M499
D230 to D239
D240 to D249
M8000
RUN
monitor
Master station
Slave station
For the slave station, set M8071 to ON.
2. High speed parallel link mode
FX0N, FX1S, FX3S




M8000
D230, D231
D230, D231
RUN
monitor
M8070
RUN
monitor
Master station
M8162
M8071
D240, D241
Automatic update
For the master station, set M8070 and M8162 to ON.
Slave station
M8162
High speed parallel link
mode
For the slave station, set M8071 and M8162 to ON.
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
High speed parallel link
mode
D240, D241
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
M8000
FX0N, FX1S, FX3S
E
Inverter
Communication
For the master station, set M8070 to ON.
M8071
Computer Link
D230 to D239
M8000
Automatic update
C
Parallel Link
1. Regular parallel link mode
N:N Network
Regular parallel link mode
Common Items
2.3
A
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-11
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
Parallel Link
2.3.2
2.3 Link Device Numbers and Number of Points
For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC Series
Regular parallel link mode
Mode
Bit device (M)
Word device (D)
High speed parallel link mode
Bit device (M)
Word device (D)
Type
100 in each station
10 in each station
0
2 in each station
Master station
M800 to M899
D490 to D499
—
D490, D491
Slave station
M900 to M999
D500 to D509
—
D500, D501
1. Regular parallel link mode
FX2(FX), FX2C,
FX1N, FX1NC,
FX2N, FX2NC,
FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX3UC
M900 to M999
D490 to D499
M8000
RUN
monitor
M800 to M899
M8070
D500 to D509
Automatic update
Automatic update
FX2(FX), FX2C,
FX1N, FX1NC,
FX2N, FX2NC,
FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX3UC
M800 to M899
M900 to M999
D490 to D499
D500 to D509
M8000
RUN
monitor
Master station
For the master station, set M8070 to ON.
M8071
Slave station
For the slave station, set M8071 to ON.
2. High speed parallel link mode
FX2(FX), FX2C,
FX1N, FX1NC,
FX2N, FX2NC,
FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX3UC
M8000
M8070
RUN
Master station
monitor
M8162




M8000
D490, D491
RUN
monitor
M8071
D490, D491
D500, D501
Automatic update
High speed parallel link
mode
For the master station, set M8070 and M8162 to ON.
C-12
FX2(FX), FX2C,
FX1N, FX1NC,
FX2N, FX2NC,
FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX3UC
D500, D501
Slave station
M8162
High speed parallel link
mode
For the slave station, set M8071 and M8162 to ON.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Selection
Parallel Link
3.1 System Configuration
A
Common Items
3.
System Configuration and Selection
3.1
System Configuration
3.1.1
Rule for connection
C
Parallel Link
This section outlines the system configuration required to use the parallel link.
Add (optional) communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-485 to an FX PLC main unit.
B
N:N Network
This chapter explains the configuration of communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-485
and the system selection required by FX PLCs.
When using the parallel link, PLCs in the same group can be connected as shown in the table below.
Group
D
PLC Series
FX3U and FX3UC Series
FX3G and FX3GC Series
3
FX3S Series
FX2N and FX2NC Series
FX1N and FX1NC Series
6
FX1S Series
7
FX0N Series
8
FX2(FX) and FX2C Series
E
Inverter
Communication
4
5
Computer Link
1
2
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-13
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Selection
Parallel Link
3.2 Configuration of Each Group
3.2
Configuration of Each Group
1 , 2 and 3 indicate the communication equipment combination patterns.
1. Group 1 (FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485
FX PLC
Important point in selection
Total extension
distance
1
RDA
RD
+
RDB
SDA
SD
SDB
SG
Communication
board
FX3U Series
This is the communication board
built into the PLC, reducing the
installation area.
50 m
(164' 0")
Attach the expansion board to the
main unit, and then attach the
communication adapter to the left
side of the main unit.
500 m
(1640' 5")
Attach the communication adapter
to the left side of the main unit.
500 m
(1640' 5")
RDA
RD
+
RDB
SDA
SD
SDB
SG
Communication
board
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
2
+
Communication
adapter
+
Expansion
board
+
Communication
adapter
FX3U Series
+
Expansion
board
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
3
+
Communication
adapter
FX3UC Series
(D, DS, DSS)
For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.
C-14
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Selection
Parallel Link
3.2 Configuration of Each Group
A
Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485
FX PLC
Important point in selection
Total extension
distance
1
Communication
board
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G Series
B
N:N Network
This is the communication board
built into the PLC, reducing the
installation area.
+
Common Items
2. Group 2 (FX3G and FX3GC PLCs)
C
+
Attach the connector conversion
adapter to the main unit, and then
attach the communication adapter
to the left side of the main unit.
+
Communication
Connector
adapter
conversion adapter
500 m
(1640' 5")
D
FX3G Series
Attach the communication adapter
to the left side of the main unit.
500 m
(1640' 5")
For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.
F
Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485
FX PLC
Important point in selection
Total extension
distance
1
Communication
board
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3S Series
Attach the connector conversion
adapter to the main unit, and then
attach the communication adapter
to the left side of the main unit.
+
Communication
Connector
adapter
conversion adapter
H
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3S Series
Programming
Communication
2
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
This is the communication board
built into the PLC, reducing the
installation area.
+
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
3. Group 3 (FX3S PLC)
+
E
Inverter
Communication
FX3GC Series
Communication
adapter
Computer Link
3
+
Parallel Link
2
I
Remote
Maintenance
For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-15
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Selection
Parallel Link
3.2 Configuration of Each Group
4. Group 4 (FX2N and FX2NC PLCs)
Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485
FX PLC
Important point in selection
Total extension
distance
1
This is the communication board
built into the PLC, reducing the
installation area.
+
Communication
board
FX2N Series
2
+
Communication
adapter
50 m
(164' 0")
+
Special adapter
connection board
Attach the special adapter
connection board to the main unit,
and then attach the communication
adapter to the left side of the main
unit.
500 m
(1640' 5")
Attach the communication adapter
to the left side of the main unit.
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX2N Series
3
+
Communication
adapter
FX2NC Series
For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.
5. Group 5 (FX1N and FX1NC PLCs)
Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485
FX PLC
1
+
Communication
board
Total extension
distance
This is the communication board
built into the PLC, reducing the
installation area.
50 m
(164' 0")
Attach the special adapter
connection board to the main unit,
and then attach the communication
adapter to the left side of the main
unit.
500 m
(1640' 5")
Attach the communication adapter
to the left side of the main unit.
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX1N Series
2
+
Important point in selection
+
Communication Special adapter
adapter
connection board
FX1N Series
3
+
Communication
adapter
FX1NC Series
For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.
C-16
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Selection
Parallel Link
3.2 Configuration of Each Group
A
Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485
FX PLC
1
+
This is the communication board
built into the PLC, reducing the
installation area.
50 m
(164' 0")
B
Attach the special adapter
connection board to the main unit,
and then attach the communication
adapter to the left side of the main
unit.
500 m
(1640' 5")
C
FX1S Series
2
+
Total extension
distance
+
Parallel Link
Communication Special adapter
adapter
connection board
N:N Network
Communication
board
Important point in selection
Common Items
6. Group 6 (FX1S PLC)
FX1S Series
For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.
D
Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485
FX PLC
Total extension
distance
Attach the communication adapter
to the left side of the main unit.
500 m
(1640' 5")
1
+
FX0N Series
Communication
adapter
For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.
Communication equipment using
optical fiber or in accordance
with RS-485
FX PLC
1
Communication
adapter
Attach the communication adapter
to the left side of the main unit.
Perform wiring using optical fiber
cables.
50 m
(164' 0")
FX2(FX)/FX2C Series
2
10 m
(32' 9")
FX2(FX)/FX2C Series
For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.
G
H
Programming
Communication
Attach the communication adapter
to the left side of the main unit.
Perform wiring using twisted pair
cables.
+
Communication
adapter
Total extension
distance
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
+
Important point in selection
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
8. Group 8 (FX2(FX) and FX2C PLCs)
E
Inverter
Communication
Important point in selection
Computer Link
7. Group 7 (FX0N PLC)
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-17
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Selection
Parallel Link
3.3
3.3 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
Select a (optional) communication equipment combination, and put a check mark in the "Check" column.
During selection, pay attention to the following:
- In the table below, only the external dimensions are different between the units shown in "FX2NC-485ADP/
FX0N-485ADP". Select either one.
- In the table below, only the cable is different between the units shown in "FX3G-485-BD/FX3G-485-BDRJ". Select either one.
- The parallel link is not provided for the FX1, FX0 and FX0S PLCs.
FX Series
Total extension
distance
Communication equipment (option)
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX0N
FX2NC-485ADP
FX0N-485ADP
(European terminal block)
(Terminal block)
50 m
(164' 0")
FX1N-485-BD
(European terminal block)
+
FX1S
FX1N-CNV-BD
+
FX2NC-485ADP
(European terminal block)
FX1N-CNV-BD
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)
50 m
(164' 0")
FX1N-485-BD
(European terminal block)
+
FX1N
FX1N-CNV-BD
+
FX2NC-485ADP
(European terminal block)
FX1N-CNV-BD
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)
50 m
(164' 0")
FX2N-485-BD
+
FX2N
FX2N-CNV-BD
C-18
FX2NC-485ADP
(European terminal block)
+
FX2N-CNV-BD FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)
500 m
(1640' 5")
Check
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Selection
Parallel Link
3.3 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
A
Communication equipment (option)
Total extension
distance
Check
B
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)
+
FX3S
N:N Network
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)
Common Items
FX Series
C
Parallel Link
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3S-CNV-ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
D
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)
Computer Link
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)
E
Inverter
Communication
FX3G
(14-point, 24-point
type)
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
F
ch1
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
G
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)
The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to
the option connector 1.
H
ch1
Programming
Communication
FX3G
(40-point, 60-point
type)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-19
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Selection
Parallel Link
3.3 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
FX Series
Communication equipment (option)
Total extension
distance
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch2
ch2
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)
The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to
the option connector 2.
ch1
FX3G
(40-point, 60-point
type)
ch2
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP
FX3U-  ADP(-MB)
(Where  represents
232 and 485).
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or
FX3G-2EYT-BD is connected to the option connector 2.
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
RD A
50 m
(164' 0")
RD
RD B
SD A
SD
SD B
SG
FX3U-485-BD
(European terminal block)
ch1
FX3U
+
FX3U-CNV-BD
C-20
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
500 m
(1640' 5")
Check
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Selection
Parallel Link
3.3 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
A
Total extension
distance
Communication equipment (option)
Check
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1
ch2
B
SD
FX3U--BD
(Where  represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).
N:N Network
+
RD
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
C
Parallel Link
When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
ch1
ch2
FX3U
+
+
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
D
500 m
(1640' 5")
Computer Link
FX3U-CNV-BD
E
Inverter
Communication
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX1NC
FX2NC-485ADP
(European terminal block)
F
FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
500 m
(1640' 5")
(European terminal block)
G
FX0N-485ADP
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX2NC
FX2NC-485ADP
(Terminal block)
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
H
Programming
Communication
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
I
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
FX3GC
ch2
+
500 m
(1640' 5")
Apx.A
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
Discontinued
models
FX3U-ADP(-MB)
(Where  represents
232 and 485).
Remote
Maintenance
ch1
Common Items
FX Series
C-21
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Selection
Parallel Link
3.3 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
FX Series
Total extension
distance
Communication equipment (option)
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch2
ch1
FX3UC
(D, DS, DSS)
+
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
RD A
50 m
(164' 0")
RD
RD B
SD A
SD
SD B
SG
FX3U-485-BD
(European terminal block)
ch1
+
FX3U-CNV-BD
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1
ch2
+
RD
FX3UC-32MT-LT
(-2)
SD
FX3U--BD
(Where  represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
ch1
+
ch2
+
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
FX3U-CNV-BD
C-22
500 m
(1640' 5")
Check
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
3 System Configuration and Selection
3.3 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
A
Communication equipment (option)
Total extension
distance
Check
Common Items
FX Series
B
N:N Network
50 m
(164' 0")
FX2-40AP
(for optical fiber)
C
Parallel Link
FX2(FX)
10 m
(32' 9")
FX2-40AW
(for wire link)
D
Computer Link
50 m
(164' 0")
FX2-40AP
(for optical fiber)
Inverter
Communication
FX2C
E
10 m
(32' 9")
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX2-40AW
(for wire link)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-23
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Parallel Link
4.
4.1 Wiring Procedure
Wiring
This chapter explains the wiring.
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
• Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
• Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating
operation after installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
• Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents
due to abnormal data written to the PLC under the influence of noise:
1) Do not bundle the main circuit line together with or lay it close to the main circuit, high-voltage line or load line.
Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line
at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or high-voltage lines.
2) Ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable at one point on the PLC. However, do not use common
grounding with heavy electrical systems.
• Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Tighten the screws using a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2 (shaft diameter 6mm (0.24") or less). Make sure
that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block.
• Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.
4.1
1
Wiring Procedure
Preparing for wiring
Prepare cables and terminal resistors required for wiring.
2
3
4
For details, refer to Section 4.2.
Turning OFF the power to the PLC
Before starting any wiring work, make sure that the power to the PLC is OFF.
Connecting the power supply (FX0N-485ADP only)
Connect the power supply to the 24V DC power terminal.
Wiring communication equipment
Connect communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-485.
For details, refer to Section 4.3.
C-24
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors
A
Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors
Common Items
4.2
4 Wiring
Select cables using the procedure described below.
4.2.1
Twisted pair cable
B
1. Recommended cables
Manufacturer
Model name
Showa Holdings Co., Ltd.
The Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd.
Three-pair cable of 0.2 mm2
SPEV(SB)-0.5-2P
Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2
KMPEV-SB CWS-178 0.2SQ  2P
Two-pair cable of 0.2 mm2
KMPEV-SB CWS-178 0.5SQ  2P
Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2
DPEV SB 0.3  3P
Three-pair cable of 0.3 mm2
DPEV SB 0.5  3P
Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2
D-KPEV-SB 0.2  3P
Three-pair cable of 0.2 mm2
D-KPEV-SB 0.5  3P
Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2
IPEV-SB 2P  0.3 mm2
Two-pair cable of 0.3 mm2
IPEV-SB 2P  0.5 mm2
Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2
D
E
Inverter
Communication
Fujikura Ltd.
SPEV(SB)-MPC-0.2  3P
Computer Link
Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.
Two-pair cable of 0.2 mm2
Parallel Link
Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
C
Remarks
SPEV(SB)-0.2-2P
2. Cable structural drawing (reference)
F
Pair
G
Three-pair cable structural
drawing example
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
4.2.2
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Shield
Two-pair cable structural
drawing example
10BASE-T cable
10BASE-T cables used in LAN wiring for a personal computer can be connected to FX3G-485-BD-RJ.
1) Cable type
: 10BASE-T cable (Category 3 or higher)
2) Connection specifications : One-pair wiring: Straight type
Two-pair wiring: Cross type (Use a cross cable with the following connection)
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
I
Remote
Maintenance
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
H
Programming
Communication
1. Selection procedure when purchasing
3) Connector
N:N Network
Use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting communication equipment operating in accordance with RS485.
The table below shows recommended model names and manufacturers of cables used for wiring.
: RJ45 connector (Connector with metal frame is used)
Apx.A
Pay attention to the following point when purchasing commercial cables.
• Use shielded cables. Make sure to connect the shield to the metal frame of the connector, and perform
class D grounding.
C-25
Discontinued
models
2. Cautions on using commercial cables
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Parallel Link
4.2.3
4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors
Connecting cables
1. European type terminal block
The FX3G-485-BD-RJ terminal block is used for grounding.
The other options use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting communication equipment operating in
accordance with RS-485.
The table below shows applicable cables and tightening torques.
Cable size when Cable size when
one cable is
two cables are
connected
connected
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP
(-MB)
AWG22 to
AWG20
AWG22
Bar terminal with
Insulating sleeve
(cable size)
Tightening
torque
Applicable
0.22 to 0.25
(AWG22 to AWG20)
N·m
Tool size
A
B
0.4 (0.01")
2.5 (0.09")
FX3G-485-BDRJ
AWG20 to AWG16
Not applicable
0.5 to 0.6
N·m
0.6 (0.03")
3.5 (0.14")
FX2N-485-BD
FX1N-485-BD
AWG26 to AWG16
Not applicable
0.5 to 0.6
N·m
0.6 (0.03")
3.5 (0.14")
Not applicable
0.4 to 0.5
N·m
0.6 (0.03")
3.5 (0.14")
FX2NC-485ADP
AWG26 to
AWG16
AWG26 to
AWG20
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
With regard to the cable end treatment, use a stranded cable or solid cable as it is, or use a bar terminal with
insulating sleeve.
FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD and FX2NC-485ADP cannot use a bar terminal with insulating
sleeve.
• When using a stranded cable or solid cable as it is
- Twist the end of a stranded cable so that wires do not get barbed.
- Do not plate the end of the cable.
FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD,
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
FX3G-485-BD-RJ,
FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD
Approx. 9 mm
(0.35")
Approx. 6 mm
(0.23")
FX2NC-485ADP
• When using a bar terminal with insulating sleeve
Because it is difficult to insert a cable into an insulating sleeve
depending on the thickness of the cable sheath, select the proper cable
according to the outline drawing.
<Reference>
Manufacturer
Model name
Caulking tool
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
AI 0.5-8WH
CRIMPFOX 6*1
(or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2)
*1.
*2.
C-26
Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3
Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6
Approx. 8 mm
(0.31")
Insulating sleeve
Contact area
(Crimp area)
8 mm (0.31")
2.6 mm
(0.1")
14 mm
(0.55")
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Parallel Link
4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors
A
Select a
screwdriver
with a
straight tip.
Note
A
If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not
be able to be achieved. To achieve the appropriate tightening torque
shown in the previous page, use the following screwdriver or an
appropriate replacement (grip diameter: approximately 25mm (0.98")).
<Reference>
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
For size A and size B,
refer to the table above.
B
B
N:N Network
Manufacturer
C
Model name
Parallel Link
SZS 0.4  2.5
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD, FX2NC-485ADP
Manufacturer
Model name
SZF 1-0.6  3.5
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
D
Computer Link
2. Terminal block
In the FX0N-485ADP and FX-485ADP, the terminal screw size is "M3".
Make sure to use a crimp-style terminal with the following sizes.
Make sure that the tightening torque is 0.5 to 0.8 N·m.
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
E
3.2(0.13")
Inverter
Communication
• When wiring one cable to one terminal
6.2mm(0.24")
or less
Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal
F
3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24")
or less
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Terminal
• When wiring two cables to one terminal
3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24")
or less
G
3.2(0.13")
Terminal
H
6.3mm(0.25")
or more
Programming
Communication
4.2.4
Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
6.3mm(0.25")
or more
6.2mm(0.24")
or less
Optical fiber cable
Two optical fiber cables are required.
I
1. Cable types
Length
Remarks
F-OFC-M10
10 m (32' 9")
Optical connector CA9104AP manufactured by Hitachi is already connected.
F-OFC-M30
30 m (98' 5")
Optical connector CA9104AP manufactured by Hitachi is already connected.
F-OFC-M50
50 m (164' 0")
Optical connector CA9104AP manufactured by Hitachi is already connected.
Remote
Maintenance
Cable
Common Items
• Tool
When tightening a terminal on the European terminal block, use a small
commercial straight shape screwdriver whose tip is shown in the figure to
the right.
Apx.A
Separate the optical connector from strong electric cables as much as possible.
Connect devices with the smallest load to the output terminals Y000 to Y003 which are located near the
optical connector.
C-27
Discontinued
models
2. Cautions on wiring
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
4.2.5
4 Wiring
4.2 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors
Connecting terminal resistors
In the case of one-pair wiring, connect a terminal resistor to the RDA-RDB signal
terminal of the communication equipment.
In the case of two-pair wiring, connect a terminal resistor to the RDA-RDB signal
terminal and SDA-SDB terminal of the communication equipment.
Brown
1. Terminal resistor type
In the case of one-pair wiring, use two terminal resistors of 110 , 1/2 W.
In the case of two-pair wiring, use four terminal resistors of 330 , 1/4 W.
Among the terminal resistors supplied with the communication equipment, select
ones with the color codes shown to the right.
1 1 1
=110 
(101)
Orange Brown Precision
2. When using the FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ or
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
The FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ and FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
have built-in terminal resistors.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly.
• FX3U-485-BD
• FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
Terminal
resistor
selector
switch
Precision
3 3 1
=330 
(101)
330 
OPEN
110 
Terminal
resistor selector
switch
• FX3G-485-BD
Remove the upper terminal block before changing over the switch in the FX3G-485-BD.
Removal: Loosen the terminal block mounting screws, and remove the terminal block.
Installation: Attach the terminal block, and tighten the terminal block mounting screws.
Tightening torque: 0.4 to 0.5 N•m
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range. Failure to do
so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
For installation and removal of the terminal block, use the
recommended tool shown below or a tool having straight tip (such as
screwdriver) as shown in the right figure.
<Reference>
Manufacturer
Model name
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
SZS 0.4  2.5
Select a
screwdriver
with a
straight tip.
0.4mm
(0.01")
Terminal resistor
selector switch
Terminal block mounting screws
• FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Terminal resistor
selector switch
C-28
2.5mm
(0.09")
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Parallel Link
4.3 Connection Diagram
A
Connection Diagram
4.3.1
For FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Common Items
4.3
B
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD-RJ*1
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
SDA
(TXD+)
*2
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD-RJ*1
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
SDA
(TXD+)
C
SDB Terminal
(TXD-) resistor
RDA
(RXD+)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
SG
SG
110 
*2
D
Computer Link
RDA
(RXD+)
Parallel Link
Terminal SDB
resistor (TXD-)
110 
N:N Network
1. In the case of one-pair wiring
Class-D grounding (resistance: 100  or less)*3
*2.
The FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ and FX3U-485ADP(-MB) have a built-in terminal resistor.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch to 110 .
*3.
Make sure to perform Class-D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to
the FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD or FX3U-485ADP(-MB).
2. In the case of two-pair wiring
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD-RJ *4
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
*5
RDB
Terminal (RXD-)
resistor
330 
2
SG
G
*5
H
Programming
Communication
SDA
(TXD+)
*5
RDB
(RXD-) Terminal
SG
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
*5
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD-RJ *4
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
SDA
(TXD+)
E
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Inside FX3G-485-BD-RJ, SDA and RDA are connected and SDB and RDB are connected respectively
when 1-pair wiring is adopted. Signals are not connected to pins Nos. 4 and 5 of the RJ45 connector. For
cables of FX3G-485-BD-RJ, refer to Subsection 4.2.2.
Make sure to perform class D grounding on the shield of connected cables.
Inverter
Communication
*1.
resistor
330 
2
I
Remote
Maintenance
Class-D grounding (resistance: 100  or less)*6
For cables of FX3G-485-BD-RJ, refer to Subsection 4.2.2.
Make sure to perform class D grounding on the shield of connected cables.
*5.
The FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ and FX3U-485ADP(-MB) have a built-in terminal resistor.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch to 330 .
*6.
Make sure to perform Class-D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to
the FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD or FX3U-485ADP(-MB).
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
*4.
C-29
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Parallel Link
4.3 Connection Diagram
3. Switching of 1 pair / 2 paired wiring (FX3G-485-BD-RJ)
The FX3G-485-BD-RJ has a built-in wiring circuit switch.
Set the wiring circuit switch to 1 pair / 2 pair.
Wiring circuit
switch
4.3.2
For FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N and FX2NC PLCs
1. In the case of one-pair wiring
FX2N-485-BD
FX2NC-485ADP FX1N-485-BD FX0N-485ADP
Terminal
resistor
110 
FX2N-485-BD
FX0N-485ADP FX1N-485-BD FX2NC-485ADP
SDA
(TXD+)
SDA
(TXD+)
SDA
(TXD+)
SDA
(TXD+)
SDA
(TXD+)
SDA
(TXD+)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)

SG
LINK
SG
LINK
SG
SG

FG
FG*2
SG
SG
Class-D grounding (resistance: 100  or less)*1
C-30
*1.
Make sure to perform Class-D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to
the FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD or FX2NC-485ADP.
*2.
Make sure to connect the FG terminal to the
(grounding) terminal in the PLC requiring
Class-D grounding.
If the grounding terminal is not provided in the PLC, perform Class-D grounding directly.
Terminal
resistor
110 
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Parallel Link
4.4 Grounding
A
FX2N-485-BD
FX2NC-485ADP FX1N-485-BD FX0N-485ADP
FX2N-485-BD
FX0N-485ADP FX1N-485-BD FX2NC-485ADP
SDA
(TXD+)
SDA
(TXD+)
SDA
(TXD+)
SDA
(TXD+)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)

SG
LINK
SG
LINK
SG
SG

FG
FG*2
Terminal
resistor
330 
2
SG
B
Terminal
resistor
330 
2
C
Parallel Link
SDA
(TXD+)
N:N Network
SDA
(TXD+)
Common Items
2. In the case of two-pair wiring
SG
D
Computer Link
Class-D grounding (resistance: 100  or less)*1
Make sure to perform Class-D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to
the FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD or FX2NC-485ADP.
*2.
Make sure to connect the FG terminal to the
(grounding) terminal in the PLC requiring
Class-D grounding.
If the grounding terminal is not provided in the PLC, perform Class-D grounding directly.
For FX2(FX) and FX2C PLCs
FX2-40AP
FX2-40AW
FX2-40AP
SA
SA
T
R
SB
SB
R
T
SG*1
SG*1
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX2-40AW
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
*1.
4.4
E
Inverter
Communication
4.3.3
*1.
Connect the SG terminal to the SG terminal in each PLC (main unit).
Grounding
H
• The grounding resistance should be 100 or less.
• Independent grounding should be performed for best results.
When independent grounding can not be performed, perform "shared grounding" as shown in the following
figure.
For details, refer to the Hardware Edition of each series.
Other
equipment
Independent grounding
Best condition
PLC
Other
equipment
Shared grounding
Good condition
PLC
Other
equipment
I
Remote
Maintenance
PLC
Programming
Communication
Grounding should be performed as stated below.
Common grounding
Not allowed
Apx.A
• The grounding wire size should be AWG 14 (2 mm2) or larger.
C-31
Discontinued
models
• The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller
Parallel Link
5.
5.1 Check Procedure
Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX
Programmable Controller
The communication setting is not required in FX PLCs for parallel link.
If the communication setting is already provided for another communication type or for checking the existing
communication setting, perform the following procedure.
When using this communication function in ch1 in an FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC PLC, check D8120
and D8400 using the following procedure.
When using this communication function in ch2 in an FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC PLC, check D8420 using
the following procedure.
In other PLCs, use D8120 for verification.
5.1
1
Check Procedure
Monitoring D8120 (D8400, D8420)
Turn ON the power to the PLC while it is in STOP mode, and monitor D8120 (D8400, D8420).
1. When the value of D8120 (D8400, D8420) is "0"
The communication setting is not provided.
2. When the value of D8120 (D8400, D8420) is any value other than "0"
The communication setting is provided.
2
Checking absence/presence of parameter setting
Check absence/presence using the GX Works2, GX Developer, FXGP/WIN or FX-30P.
1) GX Works2 operating procedure (For details, refer to Section 5.2.)
2) FXGP/WIN operating procedure (For details, refer to Section 5.3.)
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.
3
Checking absence/presence of sequence program setting
Check whether or not a write instruction is programmed for D8120 (D8400, D8420).
1. When such an instruction is programmed
Program example: (for D8120)
Change the program as shown below, and then change the PLC mode from STOP to RUN.
M8002
Initial pulse
FNC 12
MOV
H23F6
D8120
Program example
The value varies depending on
the communication setting.
M8002
Initial pulse
FNC 12
MOV
H0000
D8120
Changed program
2. When such an instruction is not programmed
Proceed to the next step.
4
C-32
Monitoring D8120 (D8400, D8420) again, and confirming that its value is "0"
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)
A
Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)
5.2.1
Operating procedure
C
Opening the parameter setting window
In the project view area of the navigation window, double-click [Parameter]  [PLC Parameter].
If the navigation window is not displayed, select [View]  [Docking Window]  [Navigation] from
the menu bar.
Parallel Link
This subsection explains the serial communication setting method.
Suppose that GX Works2 is already started up.
1
B
N:N Network
Communication settings may be changed using the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with GX Works2.
For details on FXGP/WIN operating procedure, refer to section 5.3.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.
Common Items
5.2
5 Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Setting the serial communication (parameters)
Click the [PLC System(2)] tab in the dialog box.
Select a channel to be used, and make sure that the "Operate Communication Setting" box is
cleared.
If a check mark is there, clear it.
Click [End].
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
2
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
3
Writing parameters and program to the PLC
Apx.A
C-33
Discontinued
models
Select [Online]  [Write to PLC] from the menu bar, click [Parameter + Program], and then click
[Execute].
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
5.3
5 Communication Setting (Initialization) in FX Programmable Controller
5.3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)
Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)
Communication settings may be changed using the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with FXGP/WIN.
Ch2 cannot be set using FXGP/WIN.
For details on GX Works2 operating procedure, refer to section 5.2.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.
5.3.1
Operating procedure
This subsection explains the serial communication setting method. Suppose that FXGP/WIN is already
started up.
1
Adjusting serial setting (parameter)
Double-click [Option]  [Serial setting (parameter)] from the toolbar.
The following dialog box appears according to absence/presence of parameter settings.
1. When there are no parameter settings
The dialog box shown below appears to indicate that there are no communication settings.
Click the [No] button.
In this case, the next step is not required.
2. When there are already parameter settings
The dialog box shown below appears to indicate that there are communication settings.
Click the [Clear] button to delete the communication settings from parameters.
Transfer parameters to the PLC using the following step.
2
Writing a sequence program (parameters) to the PLC
Select [PLC]  [Transfers]  [Write] from the toolbar, and click [OK] button.
C-34
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Test Run (Communication Test)
Parallel Link
6.1 Test Procedure
A
Common Items
6.
Test Run (Communication Test)
6.1
C
Parallel Link
1
Test Procedure
B
N:N Network
This chapter explains the communication test procedures for the parallel link.
It is recommended to wire the master station and slave station, initialize communication settings in the FX
PLCs, and then execute the communication test using the following procedure to confirm the proper
operation.
Creating programs for the communication test
Create new programs for the communication test for the master station and slave station.
For program examples, refer to Section 6.2.
Computer Link
2
Transferring the program to each PLC
Turn ON the power to each PLC, and transfer the program.
3
Validating the communication setting
E
When the PLC is in RUN mode, set it to STOP mode once, and then set it to RUN mode again.
Or turn OFF the power of the master station and slave station, and then turn ON the power to both
stations at the same time.
Inverter
Communication
4
Confirming flashing of the communication status indicator lamps (SD and RD)
F
Confirming the link of the master station
Set the inputs X000 to
X003 to ON or OFF.
Slave station
H
Programming
Communication
Master station
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Set the PLC inputs (X000 to X003) to ON or OFF in the master station, and confirm that the outputs
(Y000 to Y003) turn ON or OFF in the slave station.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Confirm that the built-in SD and RD lamps of the communication equipment are flashing.
If they are off, take proper action while referring to the troubleshooting procedures described later.
5
D
Confirm that the outputs Y000 to Y003
of the slave station turn ON or OFF
according to the inputs of the master
station.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-35
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
6
6 Test Run (Communication Test)
6.2 Creating Programs for the Communication Test
Confirming the link of the slave station
Set the PLC inputs (X000 to X003) to ON or OFF in the slave station, and confirm that the outputs
(Y000 to Y003) turn ON or OFF in the master station.
Set the inputs X000 to
X003 to ON or OFF.
Master station
Confirm that the outputs Y000 to Y003
of the slave station turn ON or OFF
according to the inputs of the master
station.
Slave station
If unable to establish link, refer to "9. Troubleshooting".
6.2
Creating Programs for the Communication Test
Create the programs shown below for the master station and slave station.
6.2.1
For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC Series
1. Program for communication test (for the master station)
Create the program shown below for the communication test. (This program is not required during actual
operation.)
M8000
M8070
0
MOV
K500
D8070
M8000
M8178
8
M8000
11
22
C-36
MOV
K1X000
K1M800
MOV
K1M900
K1Y000
END
(In the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
This step is not required when using ch 1.
When using ch 2, set M8178 to ON.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
6 Test Run (Communication Test)
6.2 Creating Programs for the Communication Test
A
Create the program shown below for the communication test. (This program is not required during actual
operation.)
M8000
M8071
0
K500
D8070
M8000
M8178
8
B
N:N Network
MOV
(In the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
This step is not required when using ch 1.
When using ch 2, set M8178 to ON.
C
M8000
MOV
K1X000
K1M900
MOV
K1M800
K1Y000
END
22
D
Computer Link
6.2.2
Parallel Link
11
For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series
1. Master station communication test program
M8000
M8070
MOV
K500
D8070
MOV
K1X000
K1M400
MOV
K1M450
K1Y000
F
M8000
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
8
G
END
19
Create the program shown below for the communication test. (This program is not required during actual
operation.)
M8000
MOV
K500
D8070
MOV
K1X000
K1M450
MOV
K1M400
K1Y000
M8000
8
I
Remote
Maintenance
19
H
Programming
Communication
M8071
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
2. Slave station communication test program
0
E
Inverter
Communication
Create the program shown below for the communication test. (This program is not required during actual
operation.)
0
Common Items
2. Program for communication test (for the slave station)
END
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-37
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
7.
7 Creating Programs
7.1 Regular Parallel Link Mode
Creating Programs
The parallel link has two modes, regular parallel link mode and high speed parallel link mode.
Program settings and the number of device to be used are different in each mode.
When connecting FX PLCs in the parallel link, use the same mode in both PLCs.
7.1
Regular Parallel Link Mode
This section explains the program setting method in the regular parallel link mode.
7.1.1
Checking contents of related devices
The tables below show devices used in the parallel link.
1. Devices for setting the parallel link
These devices are used for setting the parallel link. The setting of these devices is essential to use the
parallel link.
Device
Name
Description
M8070
Parallel link master station
declare
Set this device to ON when linking a PLC as the master station.
M8071
Parallel link slave station
setting
Set this device to ON when linking a PLC as the slave station.
M8178
Channel setting
Set the channel of communication port to be used (in the FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC).
When this device is OFF: ch1
When this device is ON: ch2
D8070
Error judgement time (ms)
Set the time for judging error in the parallel link data communication.
[Initial value: 500]
2. Devices for judging errors in the parallel link
These devices are used for judging errors in the parallel link. Use them to output link errors to the outside and
interlock sequence programs.
Device
C-38
Name
Description
M8072
Parallel link ON
This device remains ON while the parallel link is executed.
M8073
Master/slave station setting
error
This device turns ON when there is an error in the setting of the
master station or slave station.
M8063
Link error
This device turns ON when a communication error occurs.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
7 Creating Programs
7.1 Regular Parallel Link Mode
A
Device
Number of
devices
Bit device
M800 to M899
100
Word device
D490 to D499
10
Description
The devices in the slave station are automatically updated
to the status of devices in the master station.
Device
Number of
devices
Bit device
M400 to M449
50
Word device
D230 to D239
10
Description
The devices in the slave station are automatically updated
to the status of devices in the master station.
Bit device
M900 to M999
100
Word device
D500 to D509
10
Description
The devices in the master station are automatically updated
to the status of devices in the slave station.
F
b) For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series
Number of
devices
Bit device
M450 to M499
50
Word device
D240 to D249
10
Description
The devices in the master station are automatically updated
to the status of devices in the slave station.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Device
E
Inverter
Communication
Number of
devices
D
Computer Link
2) Sending devices for the slave station
These devices are used for sending the information from the slave station to the master station.
To prevent malfunctions, do not change the setting of these devices in the master station.
The device numbers used and number of devices vary depending on the PLC type. For applicable
devices, refer to the tables below.
a) For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC Series
Device
C
Parallel Link
b) For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series
B
N:N Network
1) Sending devices for the master station
These devices are used for sending the information from the master station to the slave station.
To prevent malfunctions, do not change the setting of these devices in the slave station.
The device numbers used and number of devices vary depending on the PLC type. For applicable
devices, refer to the tables below.
a) For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC Series
Common Items
3. Link devices
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-39
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
7.1.2
7 Creating Programs
7.1 Regular Parallel Link Mode
Creating programs for master station
Create programs for the master station.
RUN monitor
M8000
Master station setting
M8070
Channel setting
M8178
Parallel link ON
M8072
Program for setting the master station
M8070 is set to ON to set a PLC as the master station.
(In the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
When using ch 1, this step is not required.
When using ch 2, set M8178 to ON".
Program for indicating link errors
Y010
Master/
slave station
setting error
When the parallel link is interrupted or the setting is
defective, Y10 is set to ON.
M8073
RUN monitor
M8000
FNC 12
MOV
Program for writing link devices (master station → slave
station)
K1X000
Link device
X010
C0
The information on X000 to X003 is written to link
devices.
• For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
M800 to M899
• For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: M400 to M449
K100
FNC 12
MOV
C0
Link device
The current value of C0 is written to link devices.
• For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D490 to D499
• For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D230 to D239
RUN monitor
M8000
FNC 12
MOV
FNC 12
MOV
Program for reading link devices (slave station →
master station)
Link device
Link device
K1Y000
D10
X010
C1
D10
C-40
The information on link devices is read to Y000 to Y003.
• For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
M900 to M999
• For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: M450 to M499
The current value of link devices is read to D10, and
it is made the setting value of C1.
• For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D500 to D509
• For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D240 to D249
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
7.1 Regular Parallel Link Mode
A
Creating programs for slave station
Common Items
7.1.3
7 Creating Programs
Create programs for the slave station.
RUN monitor
M8000
Slave station setting
M8071
M8178
(In the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
When using ch 1, this step is not required.
When using ch 2, set M8178 to ON".
C
Program for indicating link errors
Y010
Master/
slave station
setting error
When the parallel link is interrupted or the setting is
defective, Y10 is set to ON.
M8073
D
FNC 12
MOV
Program for writing link devices (slave station → master
station)
K1X000
Link device
X010
K100
FNC 12
MOV
C0
Link device
The current value of C0 is written to link devices.
FNC 12
MOV
Link device
Link device
K1Y000
D10
X010
C1
The information on link devices is read to Y000 to Y003.
• For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
M800 to M899
• For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: M400 to M449
The current value of link devices is read to D10, and
it is made the setting value of C1.
• For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D490 to D499
• For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D230 to D239
H
Programming
Communication
D10
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FNC 12
MOV
Program for reading link devices (master station →
slave station)
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
• For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S :
D500 to D509
• For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D240 to D249
RUN monitor
M8000
E
Inverter
Communication
C0
The information on X000 to X003 is written to link
devices.
• For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
M900 to M999
• For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: M450 to M499
Computer Link
RUN monitor
M8000
Parallel Link
Parallel link ON
M8072
B
N:N Network
Channel setting
Program for setting the slave station
M8071 is set to ON to set a PLC as the slave station.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-41
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Creating Programs
Parallel Link
7.2
7.2 High Speed Parallel Link Mode
High Speed Parallel Link Mode
This section explains the program setting method in the high speed parallel link mode.
7.2.1
Checking contents of related devices
The tables below show devices used in the parallel link.
1. Devices for setting the parallel link
These devices are used for setting the parallel link. Setting of these devices is essential in using the parallel
link.
Device
Name
Description
M8070
Parallel link master station
declare
Set this device to ON when linking a PLC as the master station.
M8071
Parallel link slave station
declare
Set this device to ON when linking a PLC as the slave station.
M8162
High speed parallel link
mode
Set this device to ON when using the high speed parallel link mode.
M8178
Channel setting
Set the channel of communication port to be used (in the FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC).
When this device is OFF: ch1
When this device is ON: ch2
D8070
Error judgement time (ms)
Set the time for judging error in the parallel link data communication.
[Initial value: 500]
2. Devices for judging errors in the parallel link
These devices are used for judging errors in the parallel link. Use them to output link errors to the outside and
interlock sequence programs.
Device
Name
Description
M8072
Parallel link ON
This device remains ON while the parallel link is executed.
M8073
Master/slave station setting
error
This device turns ON when there is an error in the setting of the
master station or slave station.
M8063
Link error
This device turns ON when a communication error occurs.
3. Link devices
1) Sending devices for the master station
These devices are used for sending the information from the master station to the slave station.
To prevent malfunctions, do not change the setting of these devices in the slave station.
The device numbers used and number of devices vary depending on the PLC type. For applicable
devices, refer to the tables below.
a) For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC Series
Device
Word device
D490, D491
Number of
devices
Description
2
The devices in the slave station are automatically updated
to the status of devices in the master station.
Number of
devices
Description
2
The devices in the slave station are automatically updated
to the status of devices in the master station.
b) For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series
Device
Word device
C-42
D230, D231
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
7 Creating Programs
7.2 High Speed Parallel Link Mode
Word device
D500, D501
Number of
devices
Description
2
The devices in the master station are automatically updated
to the status of devices in the slave station.
C
b) For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series
Word device
D240, D241
Number of
devices
Description
2
The devices in the master station are automatically updated
to the status of devices in the slave station.
Parallel Link
Device
B
N:N Network
Device
A
Common Items
2) Sending devices for the slave station
These devices are used for sending the information from the slave station to the master station.
To prevent malfunctions, do not change the setting of these devices in the master station.
The device numbers used and number of devices vary depending on the PLC type. For applicable
devices, refer to the tables below.
a) For FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC Series
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-43
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
7.2.2
7 Creating Programs
7.2 High Speed Parallel Link Mode
Creating programs for master station
Create programs for the master station.
RUN monitor
M8000
Master station setting
M8070
Program for setting the master station
M8070 is set to ON to set a PLC as the master station.
High speed parallel
link mode
M8162
Channel setting
M8178
Parallel link ON
M8072
M8162 is set to ON to set the high speed parallel link
mode.
(In the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
When using ch 1, this step is not required.
When using ch 2, set M8178 to ON".
Program for indicating link errors
Y010
Master/
slave station
setting error
When the parallel link is interrupted or the setting is
defective, Y10 is set to ON.
M8073
RUN monitor
M8000
FNC 12
MOV
Program for writing link devices (master station → slave
station)
K1X000
Link device
X010
C0
The information on X000 to X003 is written to link
devices.
• For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D490 and D491
• For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D230 and D231
K100
FNC 12
MOV
C0
Link device
The current value of C0 is written to link devices.
• For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S :
D490 and D491
• For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D230 and D231
RUN monitor
M8000
FNC 12
MOV
FNC 12
MOV
Program for reading link devices (slave station →
master station)
Link device
Link device
K1Y000
D10
X010
C1
D10
C-44
The information on link devices is read to Y000 to Y003.
• For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D500 and D501
• For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D240 and D241
The current value of link devices is read to D10, and
it is made the setting value of C1.
• For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D500 and D501
• For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D240 and D241
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
7.2 High Speed Parallel Link Mode
A
Creating programs for slave station
Common Items
7.2.3
7 Creating Programs
Create programs for the slave station.
RUN monitor
M8000
Slave station setting
M8071
Program for setting the slave station
M8071 is set to ON to set a PLC as the slave station.
M8162
Channel setting
Parallel link ON
M8072
C
(In the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
When using ch 1, this step is not required.
When using ch 2, set M8178 to ON".
Parallel Link
M8178
M8162 is set to ON to set the high speed parallel link
mode.
Program for indicating link errors
Y010
When the parallel link is interrupted or the setting is
defective, Y10 is set to ON.
M8073
RUN monitor
M8000
K1X000
Link device
C0
The information on X000 to X003 is written to link
devices.
• For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D500 and D501
• For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D240 and D241
F
K100
C0
Link device
The current value of C0 is written to link devices.
• For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D500 and D501
• For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D240 and D241
Link device
K1Y000
D10
X010
C1
The information on link devices is read to Y000 to Y003.
• For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D490 and D491
• For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D230 and D231
The current value of link devices is read to D10, and
it is made the setting value of C1.
• For PLC series other than the FX0N, FX1S or FX3S:
D490 and D491
• For FX0N, FX1S or FX3S Series: D230 and D231
D10
H
Programming
Communication
FNC 12
MOV
Link device
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FNC 12
MOV
Program for reading link devices (master station →
slave station)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FNC 12
MOV
E
Inverter
Communication
FNC 12
MOV
Program for writing link devices (slave station → master
station)
X010
RUN monitor
M8000
D
Computer Link
Master/
slave station
setting error
N:N Network
High speed parallel
link mode
B
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-45
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
7.3
7 Creating Programs
7.3 Cautions on Program Creation
Cautions on Program Creation
1. Program for reading link devices
1) Do not change the contents of link devices for the other station.
2) When a link error occurs, the link device information remains the same as the status just before the error.
Create a fail-safe program which does not cause abnormality even if a link error occurs.
2. Cautions on using FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC PLCs
1) Only ch1 or ch2 can be set in the parallel link.
2) Do not use the N:N Network and the parallel link at the same time.
(For example, it is not allowed to use ch1 for the N:N Network and simultaneously use ch2 for the parallel
link.)
C-46
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
8 Practical Program Examples
8.1 Practical Example 1 (Regular Parallel Link Mode)
A
Common Items
8.
Practical Program Examples
B
This chapter shows practical programs examples.
N:N Network
8.1
Practical Example 1 (Regular Parallel Link Mode)
When many link devices are required, use the regular parallel link mode.
C
System configuration example
Parallel Link
8.1.1
The example below shows a system configuration in which two FX2N PLCs are linked.
FX2N PLC
FX2N PLC
D
Master station
Slave station
Computer Link
FX2N-485-BD
E
Inverter
Communication
FX2N-485-BD
- Link range: 100-bit devices and 10-word devices (regular parallel link mode)
- Error judgement time: 500 ms
8.1.2
Setting contents
F
Device
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
The program examples shown later adopt the following communication parameters:
Description
Parallel link master station setting
M8071
Parallel link slave station setting
D8070
Communication error judgement time
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
M8070
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-47
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
8 Practical Program Examples
Parallel Link
8.1.3
8.1 Practical Example 1 (Regular Parallel Link Mode)
Program for master station
For the master station, refer to the program shown below.
RUN monitor
M8000
RUN monitor
M8000
FNC 20
ADD
M8070
FNC 12
MOV
K2X000 K2M800
D0
FNC 12
MOV
D2
D490
K2M900 K2Y000
X010
T0
The ON/OFF status of inputs X000 to X007 in the master
station is output to Y000 to Y007 in the slave station.
When the calculation result (D0 + D2) in the master
station is moved to D490 of the slave station.
The ON/OFF status of M0 to M7 in the slave station is
output to Y000 to Y007 in the master station.
The value of D10 in the slave station is stored to the timer
setting (T0) in the master station.
D500
8.1.4
Program for slave station
For the slave station, refer to the program shown below.
RUN monitor
M8000
RUN monitor
M8000
FNC 10
CMP
M8071
FNC 12
MOV
D490
K2M800 K2Y000
K100
M10
X010
C-48
M10
The ON/OFF status of inputs X000 to X007 in the master
station is output to Y000 to Y007 in the slave station.
When the calculation result (D0 + D2) in the master
station is 100 or less, Y010 is set to ON in the slave
station.
Y010
FNC 12
MOV
K2M0
K2M900
FNC 12
MOV
D10
D500
The ON/OFF status of M0 to M7 in the slave station is
output to Y000 to Y007 in the master station.
The value of D10 in the slave station stored to the timer
setting (T0) in the master station.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
9 Troubleshooting
9.1 Checking FX PLC Version Applicability
A
Common Items
9.
Troubleshooting
B
This chapter explains troubleshooting.
N:N Network
9.1
Checking FX PLC Version Applicability
Verify that the FX PLC main unit is an applicable version.
For the version applicability check, refer to Section 1.3.
Parallel Link
9.2
Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication
Check the status of the "RD" and "SD" indicator LEDs provided in the optional equipment.
LED status
D
RD
SD
Flashing
Flashing
Off
Data is received, but is not sent.
Off
Flashing
Data is sent, but is not received.
Off
Off
Computer Link
Operation status
Flashing
Data is being sent or received.
E
Data is not sent or received.
Inverter
Communication
While the parallel link is executed normally, both LEDs flash brightly.
If they do not flash, check the wiring and the communication setting in the master and slave stations.
9.3
Checking Installation and Wiring
F
If the communication equipment is not securely connected to the PLC, communication is not possible.
For the mounting method, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.
2. Power supply (for FX0N-485ADP)
The FX0N-485ADP requires a driving power supply. Verify that the power supply is correctly provided.
Verify that the wiring to all communication equipment is correct. If the communication equipment is wired
incorrectly, communication is not possible.
For wiring method check, refer to Chapter 4.
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
3. Wiring
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
1. Mounting status
H
Checking Sequence Program
1. Communication setting in the sequence program
2. Communication setting using parameters
C-49
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
Verify that the communication settings using parameters are suitable for use. If the communication settings
are not suitable for the purpose of use, communication will not function correctly.
After changing any setting, make sure to reboot the PLC’s power.
For communication setting, refer to Chapter 5.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Verify that N:N Network (D8173 to D8180) is not set. Using both the parallel link and N:N Network at the same
time is not allowed.
Verify that the communication format (D8120, D8400 and D8420) is set correctly. Communication is not
possible if a communication port is set twice or more.
After changing any setting, make sure to cycle power to the PLC.
For communication setting, refer to Chapter 5.
Programming
Communication
9.4
C
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
9 Troubleshooting
9.4 Checking Sequence Program
3. Ethernet port setting (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the same channel is not used in the Ethernet port setting. Do not set the channel used in parallel link.
After changing the setting, make sure to reboot the PLC's power.
4. Presence of VRRD and VRSC instructions
1) Except FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, reboot the PLC’s power.
2) In FX3G PLC
- In the case of the 14 points and 24-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, reboot the PLC's power.
- In the case of the 40 points and 60-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch2.
Use ch1, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, reboot the PLC's power.
3) In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch1.
Use ch2, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, reboot the PLC's power.
5. Presence of RS instruction (except FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the RS instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, reboot the PLC’s power.
6. Presence of RS and RS2 instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the RS and RS2 instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLC’s power.
7. Presence of EXTR instruction (in FX2N and FX2NC PLCs)
Verify that the EXTR instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, then reboot the PLC’s power.
8. Presence of IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR*1, and IVMC instructions (in FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR and IVMC instructions are not being used for the same
channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLC’s power.
*1.
Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
9. Presence of ADPRW instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the ADPRW instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, and reboot the PLC’s power.
10.Presence of FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD, and FLSTRD instructions (in FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD and FLSTRD instructions are not being used for the
same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLC’s power.
C-50
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Troubleshooting
Parallel Link
A
Checking Absence/Presence of Errors
Verify that errors have not occurred in the master station and slave station. Errors can be checked using the
flags shown below.
B
1. Checking the device M8072
2. Checking the device M8073
If the parallel link is not set correctly, M8073 turns ON.
If M8073 is ON, verify that the master station and slave station are set correctly in sequence programs.
3. Devices for checking link errors
No error
6312
Character error in parallel link
6313
Sum check error in parallel link
6314
Format error in parallel link
0000
No error
3812
Character error in parallel link
3813
Sum check error in parallel link
3814
Format error in parallel link
Action
E
Verify that the parallel link
setting programs are set
correctly. Check the wiring
also.
Caution
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
The devices for checking link errors are not cleared even after communication errors are reset.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
D8438
(in FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and
FX3UC)
Description
0000
Inverter
Communication
D8063
Error code
D
Computer Link
2) Checking the error code
When a communication error occurs in parallel link using ch 1, the error code is stored in D8063.
When a communication error occurs in parallel link using ch 2, the error code is stored in D8438.
The table below shows the details of error codes.
C
Parallel Link
1) Checking the error flags M8063 and M8438 (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
If a communication error occurs in the parallel link, the serial communication error flag turns ON.
When ch1 is used, M8063 turns ON. When ch2 is used in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC, M8438
turns ON.
When the serial communication error flag turns ON, the error code is stored in D8063 or D8438.
N:N Network
While the parallel link is established, M8072 remains ON.
If M8072 is OFF, an error has occurred in the parallel link setting or communication.
Device
Common Items
9.5
9.5 Checking Absence/Presence of Errors
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-51
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
10 Related Data
Parallel Link
10.1 Related Device List
10. Related Data
10.1
Related Device List
1. Bit devices
Device
number
Name
Initial DetecR/W
value
tion
Description
Devices for communication setting
M8070
Parallel link master
station setting
M8071
Parallel link slave
station setting
M8162
M8178
Links a PLC as the master station when it turns ON.

M
W
Links a PLC as the slave station when it turns ON.

L
W
High speed parallel
link mode
Turns ON when two-word device communication
mode is selected.

M, L
W
Channel setting
Sets the communication port to be used. (in the FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
OFF: ch1, ON: ch2

M, L
W
Devices for checking communication status
M8072
Parallel link ON
Remains ON while the parallel link is being executed.

M, L
R
M8073
Parallel link setting
error
Turns ON when an error is included in the setting
contents of the master station or slave station.

M, L
R

M, L
R

M, L
R
M8063
Serial communication Turns ON when an error
error 1 (ch 1)
communication using ch 1.
occurs
in
serial
M8438
Turns ON when an error occurs in serial
Serial communication
communication using ch 2. (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U
error 2 (ch 2)
and FX3UC)
R: Read only (used as a contact in program)
W: Write only
M: Master station
L: Slave station
2. Word devices (data registers)
Device
number
Name
Initial DetecR/W
value
tion
Description
Devices for communication setting
D8070
Error judgement time
Sets the error judgement time
communication in the parallel link.
for
data
500
M, L
W
Devices for checking communication status
D8063
Serial communication Stores the error code when an error occurs in serial
communication using ch 1.
error code 1 (ch 1)
0000
M, L
R
D8438
Stores the error code when an error occurs in serial
Serial communication
communication using ch 2. (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U
error code 2 (ch 2)
and FX3UC)
0000
M, L
R
Devices for checking
D8419
Operation mode
display (ch 1)
Stores the communication type being used by
ch 1. (in the FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
—
M, L
R
D8439
Operation mode
display (ch 2)
Stores the communication type being used by
ch 2. (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
—
M, L
R
R: Read only
W: Write only
M: Master station
L: Slave station
C-52
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
10 Related Data
Parallel Link
A
Details of Related Devices
Common Items
10.2
10.2 Details of Related Devices
The devices described below are used in parallel link.
10.2.1 Parallel link master station declare [M8070]
B
N:N Network
When this device is set to ON, the PLC is handled as the master station in the parallel link.
1. Applicable stations
The master station requires program setting.
2. Detailed contents
C
Parallel Link
In the FX PLC to be handled as the master station, set M8070 to "normally ON" using M8000.
3. Cautions on use
Set this device to ON in a sequence program.
10.2.2 Channel setting [M8178]
D
Computer Link
This device works as the channel setting flag (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC).
1. Applicable stations
The master and slave station require program setting.
2. Detailed contents
E
Inverter
Communication
When using ch 2 as the communication port, set this device to ON in the sequence program.
When using ch 1, the sequence program is not required.
10.2.3 Parallel link slave station declare [M8071]
When this device is set to ON, the PLC is handled as the slave station in the started communication.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
1. Applicable stations
The slave station requires program setting.
2. Detailed contents
In the FX PLC to be handled as a slave station, set M8071 to "normally ON" using M8000.
G
3. Cautions on use
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Set this device to ON using a sequence program.
10.2.4 High-speed parallel link mode [M8162]
When M8162 turns OFF, the regular parallel link mode is selected. When M8162 turns ON, the high-speed
parallel link mode is selected.
Programming
Communication
1. Applicable stations
The master and slave station require program setting.
2. Detailed contents
I
The table below shows the number of link devices.
Regular parallel link mode
High-speed parallel link mode
Word device (D)
Bit device (M)
Word device (D)
100 in each station
10 in each station
0
2 in each station
FX0N, FX1S, FX3S
50 in each station
10 in each station
0
2 in each station
3. Cautions on use
Set this device to ON using a sequence program.
C-53
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
Bit device (M)
FX2(FX), FX2C, FX1N, FX1NC,
FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX3UC
Remote
Maintenance
PLC
H
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
10 Related Data
10.2 Details of Related Devices
10.2.5 Parallel link ON [M8072]
This device is provided to verify that the parallel link is being executed.
1. Applicable stations
The master and slave station may check parallel link status.
2. Detailed contents
M8072 remains ON while the parallel link is being executed normally, and remains OFF while the parallel link
is not being executed normally.
10.2.6 Parallel link setting error [M8073]
This device is provided to verify that the setting is correct in the master station and slave station in the parallel
link.
1. Applicable stations
The master and slave station may check parallel link status.
2. Detailed contents
M8073 remains OFF when the setting is correct in the master station or slave station, and turns ON when the
setting is incorrect.
10.2.7 Serial communication error [M8063 and M8438]
These devices are provided to check communication errors. (M8438 is available only in the FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U and FX3UC.)
1. Applicable stations
The master and slave station may check parallel link status.
2. Detailed contents
M8063 turns ON when an error occurs using parallel link on ch 1. When M8063 turns ON, the error code is
stored in D8063.
M8438 turns ON when an error occurs using parallel link on ch 2. When M8438 turns ON, the error code is
stored in D8438.
3. Cautions on use
Do not set these devices to ON using a program or programming tool.
Serial communication errors are not cleared even when communication is restored.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.
10.2.8 Error judgement time setting [D8070]
This device is provided to set the error judgment time (initial value: 500 ms).
1. Applicable stations
The master and slave station may check parallel link status.
2. Detailed contents
When data transmission requires more time than the time set here, it is regarded as error.
3. Cautions on use
Set the error judgment time for the master station to a value twice or more the scan time in the slave station.
If the error judgment time is less than twice the scan time, a serial communication error may occur.
C-54
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
10 Related Data
Parallel Link
10.2 Details of Related Devices
A
These devices store the serial communication error code. (D8438 is available only in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U
and FX3UC.)
1. Applicable stations
B
N:N Network
The master and slave station may check the serial communication error code.
2. Detailed contents
The table below shows the details of error codes.
Device
Error code
D8438
(ch 2)
No error
6312
Character error in parallel link
6313
Sum check error in parallel link
6314
Format error in parallel link
0000
No error
Character error in parallel link
3813
Sum check error in parallel link
3814
Format error in parallel link
C
Verify that the parallel link
setting programs are
correct, and check the wiring
also.
3. Cautions on use
10.2.10 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439]
1. Detailed contents
These devices store the code of the communication type currently being used in the communication port.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8419 stores the communication type.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8439 stores the communication type.
Code
Description
Programming communication
1
PP modem mode
2
Protocol dedicated to computer link
3
N:N Network
RS instruction
5
RS2 instruction
6
Parallel link
7
Inverter instruction
8
Variable analog potentiometer expansion board is used.
9
MODBUS communication
10
CF-ADP
11
ENET-ADP
12
Input/output expansion board is used.
I
Remote
Maintenance
4
H
Programming
Communication
0
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
The table below shows the contents of the communication type codes.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
These devices store the communication type being used. (in the FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
E
Inverter
Communication
Do not set this device to ON using a program or programming tool.
Serial communication errors code are not cleared even when communication is restored.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.
D
Computer Link
3812
Action
Parallel Link
D8063
(ch 1)
Description
0000
Common Items
10.2.9 Serial communication error code [D8063 and D8438]
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
C-55
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Parallel Link
10.2 Details of Related Devices
MEMO
C-56
10 Related Data
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
A
Common Items
B
N:N Network
FX Series Programmable Controllers
C
Parallel Link
User's Manual [Data Communication Edition]
D. Computer Link
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
Foreword
I
© 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
D-1
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
Remote
Maintenance
This manual explains "computer link" provided for the MELSEC-F FX Series Programmable Controllers and
should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
D-2
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
Computer Link
1.1 Outline of System
A
Common Items
1.
Outline
B
This chapter explains computer link.
N:N Network
1.1
Outline of System
Computer link allows connection of up to sixteen FX PLCs and A PLCs to a personal computer working as the
master station to link data.
2) Applicable computer link protocols are the same as dedicated supported computer link protocols units in
the A Series PLC. (But the supported formats and commands are limited.)
Important points and reference
chapter/section
System
In the case of RS-485
....... Number of linked units
....... Total extension distance
500 m (1640' 5") [50 m (164' 0") when 485BD is used]
Personal computer
FX PLC
Station No. 0 (00H)
FX PLC
Station No. 15 (0FH)
FX-485PC-IF
E
+
Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-485
For selection,
refer to Chapter 3.
.......
For wiring,
refer to Chapter 4.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
.......
In the case of RS-232C
15 m (49' 2")
G
FX PLC
Station No. 0 (00H)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Personal computer
Inverter
Communication
+
Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-485
For the specifications,
refer to Chapter 2.
To check applicable PLC
.......
models, refer to Section 1.3.
...
D
Computer Link
16 units
C
Parallel Link
1) Up to sixteen PLCs can be connected in computer link.
H
+
Programming
Communication
Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-232C
I
The number of devices handled all at once varies depending on the command and the types of devices.
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-3
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
Computer Link
1.2
1.2 Procedures Before Operation
Procedures Before Operation
The flow chart below shows the Computer Link setting procedures up until data link.
Computer link
Refer to Chapter 1.
Outline
Refer to Chapter 2.
Check communication specifications.
Refer to Chapter 3.
Determine system configuration and selection.
Outline of system
• Applicable PLC versions
• Applicable programming tools
Communication specifications
• Link time
• Number of devices
System configuration
• Select communication equipment.
Refer to Chapter 4.
Perform wiring.
Wiring procedure
• Wiring example
Programming tool
Connect PLC*1
Refer to Chapter 5.
Perform PLC communication setting.
PLC serial communication setting
• Communication setting
Refer to Chapter 6.
Computer link
Refer to Chapter 7.
Commands
Based on SD/RD lamp lighting status and
contents of error check devices, verify that
communication is being executed normally.
Computer link
• Dedicated protocol format
• Transfer sequence time chart and
communication time
Commands
• Applicable command list
• Specification method
• On-demand function
If there are problems, refer to the troubleshooting
(Chapter 8).
*1 For the programming tool to PLC connection procedure, refer to the "Programming Communication" section in this
manual or the respective programming tool manual.
For details on operating procedures, refer to the respective programming tool manual.
D-4
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
Computer Link
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC
Communication Type Applicability in PLC
1.3.1
Applicable versions
Common Items
1.3
A
PLC

FX3U Series

FX3GC Series




FX2N Series
 (Ver. 1.06 or later)
FX1NC Series

FX1N Series

FX1S Series

FX0N Series
 (Ver. 1.20 or later)
C
The version can be checked by monitoring D8001.
The version can be checked by monitoring D8001.
—
Computer link is not provided.
FX0 Series
—
Computer link is not provided.
FX2C Series
 (Ver. 3.30 or later)*1
FX2(FX) Series
 (Ver. 3.30 or later)*1
*1.
E
Computer link is not provided.
Applicable in products manufactured in June, 1996 and later (manufacturer’s serial No.: 66**** and
later).
The PLC version can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001.
For a detailed description of the version check, refer to A. Common Items Section 4.2.
How to look at the manufacturer's serial number
The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked on the nameplate, and "LOT"
indicated on the front of the product.
For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer's serial number,
refer to A. Common Items Section 4.1.
Products whose production was stopped
Production was stopped for some models of MELSEC-F Series PLCs and programming tools described in
this manual. For models whose production was stopped, refer to Appendix A.
To see the latest available products, refer to the general catalog.
H
Programming
Communication
1.3.4
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
1.3.3
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Version check
Inverter
Communication
FX0S Series
—
D
Computer Link
FX2NC Series
Remarks
Parallel Link
FX3G Series
FX3S Series
FX1 Series
1.3.2
Applicability (applicable version)
FX3UC Series
B
N:N Network
The communication type is applicable in the following versions.
: Applicable (If applicable versions of main units are limited, they are described inside ( ).)
—: Not applicable
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-5
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
Computer Link
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability
1.4
Programming Tool Applicability
1.4.1
For applicable versions
The programming tool is applicable for each FX Series from the following version shown:
1. English versions
Product name
Model name
Applicable version
Remarks
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
Ver. 1.08J or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-E
Ver. 8.18U or later
FX-30P
-
Ver. 1.00 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX3G PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
Ver. 1.08J or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-E
Ver. 8.72A or later
FX-30P
-
Ver. 1.00 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX3GC PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
FX-30PSWDNC-GXW2-E
GOT1000 Series display units
Ver. 1.77F or later
Ver. 1.30 or later
-
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX3S PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
FX-30P
Ver. 1.492N or later
Ver. 1.50 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
-
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX2N and FX2NC PLCs
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
Ver. 1.08J or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-E
SW2 A or later
FX-PCS/WIN-E
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E
Ver. 1.00 or later
FX-30P
Ver. 1.00 or later
FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC-E
Ver. 3.00 or later
FX-10P-E
Ver. 3.00 or later
GOT-F900 Series display units
F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E
GOT1000 Series display units
-
F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs
GX Works2
D-6
SWDNC-GXW2-E
Ver. 1.08J or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-E
SW5 A or later
FX-PCS/WIN-E
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E
Ver. 3.00 or later
FX-30P
Ver. 1.00 or later
FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD-E
Ver. 4.00 or later
FX-10P-E
Ver. 4.00 or later
-
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
Computer Link
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability
A
Model name
Remarks
F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
2. Japanese versions
Product name
Model name
Applicable version
Remarks
C
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
SWDNC-GXW2-J
Ver. 1.07H or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-J
Ver. 8.13P or later
FX-30P
Parallel Link
GX Works2
-
Ver. 1.00 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-J
Ver. 1.07H or later
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-J
Ver. 8.72A or later
FX-30P
-
Ver. 1.00 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
SWDNC-GXW2-J
FX-30P
Ver. 1.77F or later
Ver. 1.30 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
-
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-J
FX-30P
Ver. 1.492N or later
Ver. 1.50 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
-
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-J
Ver. 1.07H or later
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX-PCS/WIN
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN
Ver. 2.00 or later
SW2 A or later
FX-PCS-KIT/98
SW1PC-FXGP/98(-3,-5)
Ver. 4.00 or later
FX-PCS/98-3
SW1PC-FXGP/98-3
Ver. 4.00 or later
FX-PCS-KIT/V-3
SW1PC-FXGP/V3
Ver. 2.00 or later
FX-A7PHP-KIT
SW1RX-GPPFX
Ver. 3.00 or later
Ver. 1.00 or later
FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXC
Ver. 4.00 or later
FX-10P(-SET0)
Ver. 3.00 or later
GOT-F900 Series display units
F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH
I
F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Apx.A
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
D-7
Discontinued
models
GOT1000 Series display units
-
Remote
Maintenance
FX-30P
H
Programming
Communication
GX Developer
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX2N and FX2NC PLCs
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX3S PLC
E
Inverter
Communication
FX3GC PLC
GX Works2
D
Computer Link
FX3G PLC
GX Developer
B
N:N Network
GOT1000 Series display units
Applicable version
Common Items
Product name
GOT-F900 Series display units
F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
Computer Link
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability
Product name
Model name
Applicable version
Remarks
FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-J
Ver. 1.07H or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX-PCS/WIN
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN
Ver. 4.00 or later
FX-PCS/98-3
SW1PC-FXGP/98-3
Ver. 5.00 or later
FX-30P
Ver. 1.00 or later
FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD
Ver. 5.00 or later
FX-10P(-SET0)
Ver. 4.00 or later
GOT-F900 Series display units
F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH
-
F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 1.00 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 1.00 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
GOT1000 Series display units
1.4.2
SW5 A or later
For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model)
Even programming tool not applicable to a PLC can create programs when an alternative model is set.
In this case, however, programming is enabled only in the function ranges provided for the alternative PLC
model such as instructions and program size.
Model to be programmed
Priority: High  Low
Model to be set
FX3UC Series
FX3UC

FX2N

FX2(FX)
FX3U Series
FX3U, FX3UC

FX2N

FX2(FX)
FX3GC Series
FX3G, FX3GC

FX1N*1

FX2N*1
FX3G Series
FX3G

FX1N*1

FX2N*1
FX3S Series
FX3S

FX3G

FX1N*1
FX2NC Series
FX2NC, FX2N

FX2(FX)
FX2N Series
FX2N

FX2(FX)
FX1NC Series
FX1NC, FX1N

FX2N

FX2(FX)
FX1N Series
FX1N

FX2N

FX2(FX)
FX1S Series
FX1S

FX2(FX)
FX0N Series
FX0N

FX2(FX)
FX0S Series
FX0S

FX2(FX)
FX0 Series
FX0

FX2(FX)
FX2C Series
FX2C, FX2(FX)

FX2(FX)
FX2(FX) Series
FX1 Series
*1.
FX2(FX)
FX1
"FX2N" is selected when the FX-10P(-E) is used.
Point
In the FX3S PLC, set the memory capacity for PLC parameters to 4,000 steps or less.
D-8
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
Computer Link
2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference)
A
Common Items
2.
Specifications
B
This chapter explains the communication specifications and performance.
N:N Network
2.1
Communication Specifications (Reference)
Communication is executed within the specifications shown in the table below. The baud rate, etc. can be
changed in the parameter settings of a programming tool or in a sequence program.
Number of connectable units
Transmission standard
Protocol type
Control procedure
Communication method
16 maximum
RS-485 or RS-232C standard
RS-485: 500 m (1640' 5") or less
[50 m (164' 0") or less when 485BD is
included in system]
RS-232C: 15 m (49' 2") or less
Computer link (dedicated protocol)
Distance varies depending
on communication equipment type.
Formats 1 and 4 are applicable.
—
Half-duplex, bidirectional communication
38400
Start bit
Character Data bit
format
Parity bit
Stop bit
Inverter
Communication
*1
bps
Fixed
7 or 8-bit
None, odd or even
F
1 or 2-bit
Fixed
Terminator
Fixed
Control line
Fixed
Sum check
Provided or not provided
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Header
D
E
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or
Baud rate
*1.
Remarks
Computer Link
Maximum total extension
distance
Specifications
Parallel Link
Item
C
FX3U and FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 2.41 or later, and FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC is applicable.
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-9
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
Computer Link
2.2 Link Specifications
2.2
Link Specifications
2.2.1
Applicable commands and number of device points
Number of points processed in
one-time update
Command
Name
Symbol
Unit:
Bit
Batch
reading
WR
57H, 52H
Device memory
BW
*1
BT
WT
51H, 57H
42H, 54H
57H, 54H
Unit:
Word
PLC
QT*1 51H, 54H
54
FX2(FX),
FX3S,
FX2C,
FX3G, FX3GC,
FX1N, FX1NC,
FX3U, FX3UC
FX2N, FX2NC
256
256
13 words
32 words
32 words
208 points 512 points 512 points
Read word devices in 1 point units.
13*4
64*2
64*2
Reads bit devices in 16 point units.
—
—
32 words
512 points
Read word devices in 1 point units.
—
—
64*2
46
160
160
Writes bit devices in 16 point units.
10 words
10 words
10 words
160 points 160 points 160 points
Writes word devices in 1 point units.
11*5
64*2
64*2
Writes bit devices in 16 point units.
—
—
10 words
160 points
Writes word devices in 1 point units.
—
—
64*2
Specifies bit devices arbitrarily in 1
point units, and sets or resets them.
10
20
20
Specifies bit devices arbitrarily in 16
point units, and sets or resets them.
6 words
96 points
Specifies word devices arbitrarily in 1
point units, and writes them.
6*3
10*3
10*3
Specifies bit devices arbitrarily in 16
point units, and sets or resets them.
—
—
10 words
160 points
Specifies word devices arbitrarily in 1
point units, and writes them.
—
—
10*3
—
—
—
1
1
1
Remote RUN
RR
Remote STOP
RS
52H, 52H Requests remote RUN or remote
52H, 53H STOP to PLC.
PLC model
name reading
PC
50H, 43H Reads PLC model name.
GW
Turns global signal ON or OFF
47H, 57H (M8126 in FX Series) in all PLCs
connected in computer link.
Global
10 words
10 words
160 points 160 points
On-demand
—
—
Maximum Maximum Maximum
quantity
quantity
quantity
Set the sending request flag to ON in
specified in specified in specified in
PLC (only when 1-to-1 connection is
sequence sequence sequence
adopted in system configuration).
program:
program:
program:
64 words
64 words
13 words
Loop-back test
TT
54H, 54H
Returns received characters back to
25
254
254
the computer as they are.
characters characters characters
*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.
D-10
Reads bit devices in 16 point units.
42H, 57H Writes bit devices in 1 point units.
WW 57H, 57H
QW
Test
(random
writing)
51H, 52H
Unit:
Word
Unit:
Bit
FX0N, FX1S
42H, 52H Reads bit devices in 1 point units.
Unit:
Word
Unit:
Bit
Contents of processing
BR
QR*1
Batch
writing
ASCII
code
Available only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
32 points when 32-bit counters (C200 to C255) are specified.
32-bit counters (C200 to C255) are not applicable.
6 points when 32-bit counters (C200 to C255) are specified.
5 points when 32-bit counters (C200 to C255) are specified.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
Computer Link
A
Applicable device ranges
Common Items
2.2.2
2.2 Link Specifications
The tables below show devices and device number ranges applicable for the device memory access.
• Construct each of the BR, BW, BT, WR, WW, and WT commands in five characters.
Device
+
Device number
4 characters
3 characters for timer or counter
• Construct each of the QR, QW, and QT commands in seven characters.
Device
+
Device number
= 7 characters
C
6 characters
5 characters for timer or counter
Parallel Link
1 character
2 characters for timer or counter
1. Bit devices
FX PLCs do not support timer coils (TC) and counter coils (CC).
Device number range (character)
FX1S
Input
relay
(X)
X0000
to
X0337
—
Y0000
to
Y0015
Y0000
Y0000
Y0000 to
to
to
Y0267
Y0177
Y0177
—
M0000
M0000 to M0511 M0000 to M1535
to
M3071
—
S0000 to S0127
S0000 to S0999
—
TS000 to TS063
—
TS000 to TS255
—
CS000
to
CS031
CS235
to
CS254
CS000 to CS255

—
—
—

E


—
—
—



—
—
—



—
—
—



—
—
—


—
—
—
—
—
Octal
M008000 to M008511
TS000 to TS000 to TS000 to Decimal
TS137
TS319
TS511
TS00000 TS00000 TS00000
to
to
to
TS00137 TS00319 TS00511
CS000
to
CS031
CS000 to CS255
CS200
to
CS255
CS00000
to
CS00031
CS00000 to
CS00255
CS00200
to
CS00255
F
G
H
I

—
—
—
—
—
D-11
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
—

Remote
Maintenance
CS000
to
CS031
CS235
to
Counter CS255
contact
(C)
M8000 to M8255
X0000
X0000
X0000
to
to
to
X0017
X0177
X0377
X000000 X000000 X000000
to
to
to
X000017 X000177 X000377
Y0000
Y0000
Y0000
to
to
to
Y0015
Y0177
Y0377
Y000000 Y000000 Y000000
to
to
to
Y000015 Y000177 Y000377
M0000
to
M0000 to M7679
M1535
M000000
M000000 to
to
M007679
M001535
S0000
to
S0000 to S4095
S0255
S000000
S000000 to
to
S004095
S000255
M8000 to M8511
D
Programming
Communication
Special M8000 to M8254
auxiliary
relay
(M)
Timer
contact
(T)
Y0000
to
Y0337
FX3S
FX3U,
FX3UC
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
State
relay
(S)
X0000
X0000
X0000 to
to
to
X0267
X0177
X0177
FX0N
FX3G,
FX3GC
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Auxiliary
relay
(M)
FX2N,
FX2NC
Inverter
Communication
Output
relay
(Y)
X0000
to
X0017
FX2(FX), FX1N,
FX2C
FX1NC
Available
Device
commands
number
expression BR, WR, QR,
Decimal/ BW, WW, QW,
Octal
BT WT QT
Computer Link
Device
B
N:N Network
1 character
2 characters for timer or counter
= 5 characters
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
Computer Link
2.2 Link Specifications
2. Word devices
Device number range (character)
Device
FX1S
Timer
current
value
(T)
FX0N
TN000 to
TN063
FX2(FX), FX1N,
FX2C
FX1NC
FX2N,
FX2NC
TN000 to TN255
—
CN000
to
CN031
CN235
Counter
to
current CN255
value
(C)
CN000
to
CN031
CN235
to
CN254
CN000 to CN255
—
Data
register
(D)
File
register
(D)
RAM
file
register
(D)
Extension
register
(R)
Special
data
register
(D)
*1.
D0000 to
D0255
D0000
to
D0999
D0000 to
D7999
—
—
D1000
to
D2499
D1000
to
D2999
FX3S
FX3G,
FX3GC
FX3U,
FX3UC
TN000
TN000
TN000
to
to
to
TN137
TN319
TN511
TN00000 TN00000 TN00000
to
to
to
TN00137 TN00319 TN00511
CN000
to
CN031
CN000 to CN255
CN200
to
CN255
CN00000
to
CN00031
CN00000 to
CN00200
CN00255
to
CN00255
D0000
to
D0000 to D7999
D2999
Decimal
D000000
D000000 to
to
D007999
D002999

—
—

*1
—
—
*1

—
—


—
—
—

—
—

—
—
—

D8000 to D8511

—
D008000 to D008511
—

—
—
—
D6000
to
D7999
—
—
—
—
D8000 to
D8255
D8000 to D8255
—
Available
Device
commands
number
expression BR, WR, QR,
Decimal/ BW, WW, QW,
Octal
BT WT QT
R0000 to R9999
R000000 R000000
to
to
R023999 R032767
—
The WT and QT commands do not support 32-bit counters (C200 to C255).
Caution
1) When using bit devices in a command requiring specification in 1-word units, make sure that the head
device number is a multiple of "8".
2) Special auxiliary relays and special data registers are classified into ones for read only, write only and
ones for system only.
If data is written to any range in which writing is not allowed, an error may occur in the PLC.
For details on special auxiliary relays and special data registers, refer to the manual of the PLC.
3) In FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, the PLCs cannot
access the program area (in the built-in RAM, memory cassette and built-in EEPROM) when users set file
registers (D).
In FX 3U and FX3UC PLCs, extension registers (R) cannot access extension file registers (ER) in a
mounted memory cassette.
In FX3G, FX3GC PLCs, extension registers (R) cannot access extension file registers (ER).
D-12
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
Computer Link
A
Link time
Common Items
2.2.3
2.2 Link Specifications
1. Data transfer
Data transfer
Data transfer
B
Interval time
Time to read continuous word devices (timers, counters or data registers) in one station = (21*1 + 4  Number
of read points*2)  Time to send or receive 1 character (ms) + Interval time + Maximum scan time (special
data register D8012) in PLC  3 + Message waiting time
*1.
The number of points is counted in 1-word units.
3. Time to send or receive one character
The table below shows the time required to send or receive one character when the start bit is 1-bit, the data
length is 7-bit, the parity is 1-bit, and the stop bit is 1-bit.
38400*3
0.26
F
Number of stations
<When the transmission speed is 19200 bps> Unit : sec
Number of stations
1
8
16
Number of
data points
1
8
16
10
0.3
1.9
3.7
10
0.2
1.6
3.2
32
0.4
2.6
5.2
32
0.3
2.0
3.9
64
0.5
3.7
7.3
64
0.4
2.5
5.0
*3.
Available only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
*4.
The message waiting time is "0" when the RS-485 interface and two-pair wiring are used.
The message waiting time is "0" also when the RS-232C interface is used.
When one-pair wiring is adopted, a message waiting time of 70 to 150 ms is required for each transfer.
Add this message waiting time.
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
*5.
I
Remote
Maintenance
When the types of read or written devices increase, "Data transfer time shown in above table  Number of
device types" is required.
When the number of read or written points exceeds "64"*5, the transfer time increase.
Accordingly, for achieving efficient data transfer, it is recommended to decrease the number of types of
transferred devices and use as many continuous device numbers as possible.
H
Programming
Communication
Number of
data points
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
The tables below show the data transfer times depending on the number of continuously read or written word
devices at the transmission speeds of 9600 bps and 19200 bps when the message waiting time is 0 ms*4, the
maximum scan time is 20 ms, and the interval time is 100 ms.
<When the transmission speed is 9600 bps> Unit : sec
E
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Time to send or receive 1 character (ms)
33.34
16.67
8.34
4.17
2.08
1.04
0.52
Inverter
Communication
Transmission speed (baud rate) (bps)
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
D
Computer Link
*2.
This is the number of characters when the protocol format 1 is used and the sum check is not
provided.
When the protocol format 4 is used, add "4" to this value.
When the sum check is provided, add "4" to this value also.
C
Parallel Link
Time to write continuous word devices (timers, counters or data registers) in one station = (20*1 + 4  Number
of written points*2)  Time to send or receive 1 character (ms) + Interval time + Maximum scan time (special
data register D8012) in PLC + Message waiting time
N:N Network
2. Data transfer time
The maximum number of points is as follows for the FX0N and FX1S PLCs:
Maximum number of read points : 13
Maximum number of written points: 11
D-13
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
Computer Link
3.
3.1 System Configuration
System Configuration and Equipment Selection
This chapter explains the system configuration and communication equipment selection operating in
accordance with RS-485 or RS-232C required by FX PLCs.
3.1
System Configuration
This section outlines the system configuration required to use computer link.
Connect (optional) equipment operating in accordance with RS-485 or RS-232C to the FX PLC main unit.
1 , 2 , 3 and 4 indicate the communication equipment combination patterns.
Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485 or
RS-232C
Important point in selection
Total extension
distance
+
This is the communication board built
into the PLC, reducing the installation
area.
RS-485: 50 m
(164' 0")
RS-232C: 15 m
(49' 2")
+
Attach the special adapter connection
board to the main unit, and then
attach the communication adapter to
the left side of the main unit.
RS-485: 500 m
(1640' 5")
RS-232C: 15 m
(49' 2")
+
Attach the connector conversion
adapter to the main unit, and
then attach the communication
adapter to the left of the main unit.
RS-485: 500 m
(1640' 5")
RS-232C: 15 m
(49' 2")
+
Attach the communication adapter to
the left side of the main unit.
RS-485: 500 m
(1640' 5")
RS-232C: 15 m
(49' 2")
FX PLC
1
Communication
board
2
+
Communication
adapter
Special adapter
connection
board
3
+
Communication
adapter
Connector
conversion
adapter
4
Communication
adapter
For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next page.
D-14
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
Computer Link
A
Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
For communication in accordance with RS-232C
FX Series
Communication equipment (option)
Total extension
distance
Check
C
Parallel Link
3.2.1
B
N:N Network
Select a (optional) communication equipment combination, and put a check mark in the "Check" column.
During selection, pay attention to the following:
- In the table below, only the external dimensions are different between the units shown in "FX2NC-485ADP/
FX0N-485ADP". Select either one.
- In the table below, only the outside dimensions and D-SUB connector shape are different between units
shown in "FX2NC-232ADP/FX0N-232ADP". Select either one.
- In the table below, only the cable is different between the units shown in "FX3G-485-BD/FX3G-485-BDRJ". Select either one.
- Computer link is not provided for the FX1, FX0 or FX0S PLCs.
Common Items
3.2
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
D
Computer Link
15 m
(49' 2")
FX0N
FX2NC-232ADP
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
FX0N-232ADP
(25-pin D-Sub, female)
E
Inverter
Communication
15 m
(49' 2")
FX1N-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
+
+
FX1N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP FX1N-CNV-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX1S
F
15 m
(49' 2")
G
FX0N-232ADP
(25-pin D-Sub, female)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
15 m
(49' 2")
FX1N-232-BD
H
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
+
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
15 m
(49' 2")
I
FX0N-232ADP
Remote
Maintenance
FX1N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP FX1N-CNV-BD
+
Programming
Communication
FX1N
(25-pin D-Sub, female)
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-15
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
Computer Link
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
FX Series
Communication equipment (option)
Total extension
distance
15 m
(49' 2")
FX2N-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
FX2N
+
+
FX2N-CNV-BD FX2NC-232ADP
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
FX2N-CNV-BD
15 m
(49' 2")
FX0N-232ADP
(25-pin D-Sub, female)
15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
+
FX3S
FX3S-CNV-ADP
15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
FX3G
(14-point, 24-point
type)
15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-CNV-ADP
D-16
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
Check
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
A
Communication equipment (option)
Total extension
distance
Check
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
Common Items
FX Series
B
N:N Network
15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
C
The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to
the option connector 1.
Parallel Link
15 m
(49' 2")
Computer Link
FX3G-CNV-ADP
D
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
E
Inverter
Communication
FX3G
(40-point, 60-point
type)
15 m
(49' 2")
FX3G-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
F
FX3U- ADP(-MB)
(Where represents
232 and 485).
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
G
15 m
(49' 2")
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX3G-CNV-ADP
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to
the option connector 2.
Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or
FX3G-2EYT-BD is connected to the option connector 2.
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-17
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
Computer Link
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
FX Series
Total extension
distance
Communication equipment (option)
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
15 m
(49' 2")
RD
SD
FX3U-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
ch1
+
FX3U-CNV-BD
15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1
ch2
+
RD
FX3U
SD
FX3U--BD
(Where  represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV)
15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication port
channel.
ch1
+
ch2
+
FX3U-CNV-BD
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port
channel.
15 m
(49' 2")
15 m
(49' 2")
FX1NC
FX2NC-232ADP
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
FX0N-232ADP
(25-pin D-Sub, female)
15 m
(49' 2")
FX2NC
D-18
FX2NC-232ADP
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
FX0N-232ADP
(25-pin D-Sub, female)
Check
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
Computer Link
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
A
Communication equipment (option)
Total extension
distance
Check
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
Common Items
FX Series
B
N:N Network
15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
C
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch2
Parallel Link
ch1
FX3GC
+
15 m
(49' 2")
D
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
Computer Link
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
E
Inverter
Communication
15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1
+
15 m
(49' 2")
G
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX3UC
(D, DS, DSS)
F
ch2
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port
channel.
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-19
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
Computer Link
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
FX Series
Total extension
distance
Communication equipment (option)
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
15 m
(49' 2")
RD
SD
FX3U-232-BD
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
ch1
+
FX3U-CNV-BD
15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1
ch2
+
RD
FX3UC-32MT-LT
(-2)
SD
FX3U--BD
(Where  represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV)
15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication port
channel.
ch1
+
ch2
+
15 m
(49' 2")
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
(9-pin D-Sub, male)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication port
channel.
FX3U-CNV-BD
15 m
(49' 2")
FX2(FX)
FX-232ADP
(25-pin D-Sub, female)
15 m
(49' 2")
FX2C
D-20
FX-232ADP
(25-pin D-Sub, female)
Check
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
Computer Link
A
For communication in accordance with RS-485
FX Series
Total extension
distance
Communication equipment (option)
Check
Common Items
3.2.2
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
B
N:N Network
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX0N
FX2NC-485ADP
FX0N-485ADP
(European terminal block)
(Terminal block)
C
Parallel Link
50 m
(164' 0")
FX1N-485-BD
(European terminal block)
D
FX1N-CNV-BD
+
FX2NC-485ADP
(European terminal block)
FX1N-CNV-BD
Computer Link
+
FX1S
500 m
(1640' 5")
E
FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)
Inverter
Communication
50 m
(164' 0")
FX1N-485-BD
F
(European terminal block)
FX2NC-485ADP
(European terminal block)
FX1N-CNV-BD
500 m
(1640' 5")
G
FX0N-485ADP
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX1N-CNV-BD
+
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
+
FX1N
(Terminal block)
50 m
(164' 0")
H
+
FX2N
FX2NC-485ADP
(European terminal block)
500 m
(1640' 5")
I
FX2N-CNV-BD FX0N-485ADP
Remote
Maintenance
FX2N-CNV-BD
+
Programming
Communication
FX2N-485-BD
(Terminal block)
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-21
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
Computer Link
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
FX Series
Communication equipment (option)
Total extension
distance
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)
+
FX3S
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3S-CNV-ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)
FX3G
(14-point, 24-point
type)
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)
The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to
the option connector 1.
FX3G
(40-point, 60-point
type)
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP
D-22
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
Check
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
Computer Link
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
A
Communication equipment (option)
Total extension
distance
Check
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
Common Items
FX Series
B
N:N Network
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)
C
The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to
the option connector 2.
Parallel Link
FX3G
(40-point, 60-point
type)
FX3U- ADP(-MB)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(Where
represents (European terminal block)
232 and 485).
Computer Link
FX3G-CNV-ADP
D
500 m
(1640' 5")
Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or
FX3G-2EYT-BD is connected to the option connector 2.
E
Inverter
Communication
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
RD A
50 m
(164' 0")
RD
RD B
SD A
SD
SD B
SG
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX3U-485-BD
(European terminal block)
ch1
FX3U
FX3U-CNV-BD
G
500 m
(1640' 5")
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
+
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-23
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
Computer Link
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
FX Series
Total extension
distance
Communication equipment (option)
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1
ch2
+
RD
SD
FX3U--BD
(Where  represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
ch1
FX3U
ch2
+
FX3U-CNV-BD
+
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX1NC
FX2NC-485ADP
(European terminal block)
FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX2NC
FX2NC-485ADP
(European terminal block)
FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1
FX3GC
+
FX3U- ADP(-MB)
(Where
represents
232 and 485).
D-24
ch2
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
Check
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
Computer Link
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
A
Total extension
distance
Communication equipment (option)
Check
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
Common Items
FX Series
B
N:N Network
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
C
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch2
FX3UC
(D, DS, DSS)
Parallel Link
ch1
+
500 m
(1640' 5")
D
Computer Link
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
E
ch1
Inverter
Communication
RD A
50 m
(164' 0")
RD
RD B
SD A
SD
SD B
SG
FX3U-485-BD
F
(European terminal block)
+
FX3U-CNV-BD
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
ch1
500 m
(1640' 5")
G
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
(European terminal block)
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1
+
RD
SD
FX3U--BD
(Where  represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).
H
500 m
(1640' 5")
Programming
Communication
FX3UC-32MT-LT
(-2)
ch2
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
+
I
ch2
+
Remote
Maintenance
ch1
500 m
(1640' 5")
Apx.A
FX3U-CNV-BD
Discontinued
models
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
D-25
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Equipment Selection
Computer Link
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
FX Series
Communication equipment (option)
Total extension
distance
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX2
FX-485ADP
(Terminal block)
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX2C
D-26
FX-485ADP
(Terminal block)
Check
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
4 Wiring
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
A
Common Items
4.
Wiring
B
This chapter explains the wiring.
N:N Network
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
C
Parallel Link
• Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
• Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating
operation after installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
• Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents
due to abnormal data written to the PLC under the influence of noise:
1) Do not bundle the main circuit line together with or lay it close to the main circuit, high-voltage line or load line.
Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line
at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or high-voltage lines.
2) Ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable at one point on the PLC. However, do not use common
grounding with heavy electrical systems.
• Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Tighten the screws using a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2 (shaft diameter 6mm (0.24") or less). Make sure
that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block.
• Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-27
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Computer Link
4.1
1
4.1 Wiring Procedure
Wiring Procedure
Selecting the connection method
Select the wiring method suitable to the application.
For details, refer to Section 4.2.
2
Preparing for wiring
Prepare cables and terminal resistors required for wiring.
For details, refer to Section 4.3.
3
Turning OFF the PLC power
Before starting any wiring work, make sure that the PLC power is OFF.
4
Connecting the power supply (FX0N-485ADP only)
Connect the power supply to the 24V DC power terminal.
5
Wiring communication equipment
Connect communication equipment operating in accordance with RS-485 or RS-232C.
For communication in accordance with RS-232C, refer to Section 4.4.
For communication in accordance with RS-485, refer to Section 4.5.
D-28
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Computer Link
A
Selecting Connection Method
4.2.1
For communication in accordance with RS-232C (1-to-1 connection)
With communication in accordance with RS-232C, 1-to-1 connection is applicable. Make sure that the total
extension distance is 15 m (49' 2") or less.
FX PLC
C
Parallel Link
Personal computer
B
N:N Network
When using computer link, communication can be achieved in accordance with RS-232C or RS-485 (422).
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, computer link is applicable in up to two channels at the same time. In
such a case, communication can be achieved in accordance with RS-232C on both channels, in accordance
with RS-485 on both channels, or in accordance with RS-232C on one channel and RS-485 on the other
channel.
Common Items
4.2
4.2 Selecting Connection Method
D
+
Computer Link
Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-232C
15 m (49' 2") or less
E
For communication in accordance with RS-485 (RS-422) (1-to-N connection)
With communication in accordance with RS-485 (RS-422), up to 16 PLCs can be connected. Make sure that
the total extension distance is 500 m (1640' 5") or less [50 m (164' 0") or less when 485BD is included].
Personal computer
FX PLC
Station No. 0
...
+
+
Communication equipment
operating in accordance
with RS-485
Communication equipment
operating in accordance
with RS-485
G
One-pair wiring and two-pair wiring are applicable for communication in accordance with RS-485 (RS-422).
The wiring method is determined for each application. Refer to the table below, and perform suitable wiring.
Computer link
Two-pair
wiring
When the message waiting time*2 should be 70 ms or less
—

When the message waiting time*2 may be more than 70 ms
*3

When the on-demand function is used
—

*1.
When computer link is added to an existing system, adopt the wiring method used in the existing
system.
*2.
For the message waiting time, refer to Subsection 6.4.3.
*3.
"Echo transfer" is generated when the FX-485PC-IF is used in the one-pair wiring.
Take proper countermeasures in the computer so that the echo transfer can be ignored.
I
Remote
Maintenance
: Recommended wiring method, : Applicable wiring method, —: Non-applicable wiring method
H
Programming
Communication
*1
One-pair
wiring
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX-485PC-IF
F
FX PLC
Station No. 15
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
RS-232C/RS-485
communication
converter
Inverter
Communication
4.2.2
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-29
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
4.3
4 Wiring
4.3 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors (RS-485)
Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors (RS-485)
Select cables using the procedure described below.
4.3.1
Twisted pair cable
Use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting communication equipment operating in accordance with RS485.
The table below shows recommended model names and manufacturers of cables used in wiring.
1. Recommended cables
Manufacturer
Model name
Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
Showa Holdings Co., Ltd.
Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.
The Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd.
Fujikura Ltd.
Remarks
SPEV(SB)-0.2-2P
Two-pair cable of 0.2 mm2
SPEV(SB)-MPC-0.2  3P
Three-pair cable of 0.2 mm2
SPEV(SB)-0.5-2P
Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2
KMPEV-SB CWS-178 0.2SQ  2P
Two-pair cable of 0.2 mm2
KMPEV-SB CWS-178 0.5SQ  2P
Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2
DPEV SB 0.3  3P
Three-pair cable of 0.3 mm2
DPEV SB 0.5  3P
Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2
D-KPEV-SB 0.2  3P
Three-pair cable of 0.2 mm2
D-KPEV-SB 0.5  3P
Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2
IPEV-SB 2P  0.3 mm2
Two-pair cable of 0.3 mm2
IPEV-SB 2P  0.5 mm2
Two-pair cable of 0.5 mm2
2. Cable structural drawing (reference)
Pair
Shield
Two-pair cable structural
drawing example
4.3.2
Three-pair cable structural
drawing example
10BASE-T cable
10BASE-T cables used in LAN wiring for a personal computer can be connected to FX3G-485-BD-RJ.
1. Selection procedure when purchasing
1) Cable type
: 10BASE-T cable (Category 3 or higher)
2) Connection specifications : Straight type
3) Connector
: RJ45 connector (Connector with metal frame is used)
2. Cautions on using commercial cables
Pay attention to the following point when purchasing commercial cables.
• Use shielded cables. Make sure to connect the shield to the metal frame of the connector, and perform
class D grounding.
D-30
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Computer Link
A
Connecting cables
1. European type terminal block
Cable size when Cable size when
one cable is
two cables are
connected
connected
AWG22 to
AWG20
AWG22
Tightening
torque
Applicable
0.22 to 0.25
(AWG22 to AWG20)
N·m
Tool size
A
B
0.4 (0.01")
2.5 (0.09")
AWG20 to AWG16
Not applicable
0.5 to 0.6
N·m
0.6 (0.03")
3.5 (0.14")
FX2N-485-BD
FX1N-485-BD
AWG26 to AWG16
Not applicable
0.5 to 0.6
N·m
0.6 (0.03")
3.5 (0.14")
Not applicable
0.4 to 0.5
N·m
0.6 (0.03")
3.5 (0.14")
FX2NC-485ADP
AWG26 to
AWG16
AWG26 to
AWG20
• When using a stranded cable or solid cable as it is
- Twist the end of a stranded cable so that wires do not get barbed.
- Do not plate the end of the cable.
FX3G-485-BD-RJ,
FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD
Approx. 9 mm
(0.35")
Approx. 6 mm
(0.23")
Model name
Caulking tool
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
AI 0.5-8WH
CRIMPFOX 6*1
(or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2)
Insulating sleeve
Contact area
(Crimp area)
8 mm (0.31")
2.6 mm
(0.1")
H
14 mm
(0.55")
Programming
Communication
Manufacturer
G
Approx. 8 mm
(0.31")
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
• When using a bar terminal with insulating sleeve
Because it is difficult to insert a cable into an insulating sleeve
depending on the thickness of the cable sheath, select the proper cable
according to the outline drawing.
<Reference>
*1.
*2.
F
FX2NC-485ADP
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD,
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
E
Inverter
Communication
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
With regard to the cable end treatment, use a stranded cable or solid cable as it is, or use a bar terminal with
insulating sleeve.
FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD and FX2NC-485ADP cannot use a bar terminal with insulating
sleeve.
D
Computer Link
FX3G-485-BDRJ
C
Parallel Link
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP
(-MB)
Bar terminal with
Insulating sleeve
(cable size)
B
N:N Network
The FX3G-485-BD-RJ terminal block is used for grounding.
The other options use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting communication equipment operating in
accordance with RS-485.
The table below shows applicable cables and tightening torques.
Common Items
4.3.3
4.3 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors (RS-485)
Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3
Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-31
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Computer Link
4.3 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors (RS-485)
• Tool
When tightening a terminal on the European terminal block, use a small
commercial straight shape screwdriver whose tip is shown in the figure to
the right.
Select a
screwdriver
with a
straight tip.
Note
A
If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not
be able to be achieved. To achieve the appropriate tightening torque
shown in the previous page, use the following screwdriver or an
appropriate replacement (grip diameter: approximately 25mm (0.98")).
For size A and size B,
refer to the table above.
<Reference>
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
Model name
SZS 0.4  2.5
FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD, FX2NC-485ADP
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
Model name
SZF 1-0.6  3.5
2. Terminal block
In the FX0N-485ADP and FX-485ADP, the terminal screw size is "M3".
Make sure to use a crimp-style terminal with the following sizes.
Make sure that the tightening torque is 0.5 to 0.8 N·m.
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
• When wiring one cable to one terminal
6.2mm(0.24")
or less
6.2mm(0.24")
or less
3.2(0.13")
Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal
3.2(0.13")
Terminal
• When wiring two cables to one terminal
6.2mm(0.24")
or less
6.2mm(0.24")
or less
D-32
3.2(0.13")
6.3mm(0.25")
or more
Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal
3.2(0.13")
Terminal
6.3mm(0.25")
or more
B
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
A
Connecting terminal resistors
Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line.
In the case of one-pair wiring, connect a terminal resistor to the RDA-RDB signal
terminal of the communication equipment.
In the case of two-pair wiring, connect a terminal resistor to the RDA-RDB signal
terminal and SDA-SDB terminal of the communication equipment.
Brown
Orange Brown Precision
3 3 1
=330 
(101)
The FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ and FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
have built-in terminal resistors.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly.
• FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
• FX3U-485-BD
330 
OPEN
110 
D
Terminal
resistor selector
switch
E
Manufacturer
Select a
screwdriver
with a
straight tip.
Model name
0.4mm
(0.01")
2.5mm
(0.09")
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
SZS 0.4  2.5
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Removal: Loosen the terminal block mounting screws, and remove the terminal block.
Installation: Attach the terminal block, and tighten the terminal block mounting screws.
Tightening torque: 0.4 to 0.5 N•m
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range. Failure to do
so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
Inverter
Communication
• FX3G-485-BD
Remove the upper terminal block before changing over the switch in the FX3G-485-BD.
For installation and removal of the terminal block, use the recommended
tool shown below or a tool having straight tip (such as screwdriver) as
shown in the right figure.
<Reference>
Computer Link
Terminal
resistor
selector
switch
C
Parallel Link
2. When using the FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ or
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
B
N:N Network
1 1 1
=110 
(101)
1. Terminal resistor type
In the case of one-pair wiring, use two terminal resistors of 110 , 1/2 W.
In the case of two-pair wiring, use four terminal resistors of 330 , 1/4 W.
Among the terminal resistors supplied with the communication equipment, select
ones with the color codes shown to the right.
Precision
Common Items
4.3.4
4 Wiring
4.3 Selecting Cables and Terminal Resistors (RS-485)
H
Terminal resistor
selector switch
Programming
Communication
I
Terminal block mounting screws
Remote
Maintenance
• FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Terminal resistor
selector switch
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-33
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Computer Link
4.4
4.4 Connection Diagram for RS-232C
Connection Diagram for RS-232C
Representative wiring examples are shown in this section. When pin numbers in the external equipment are
different, wire the pins as shown below.
4.4.1
Connection diagram between FX PLC and personal computer
External equipment operating in accordance
with RS-232C
PLC side
Name
FX3U-232-BD
FX3G-232-BD
FX2N-232-BD
FX1N-232-BD
FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
1
Name
FG
When CS and
RS are used
Name
9-pin 25-pin
D-Sub D-Sub

1
FG
When DR and
ER are used
9-pin 25-pin
D-Sub D-Sub

1
RD(RXD)
2
3
RD(RXD)
2
3
RD(RXD)
2
3
SD(TXD)
3
2
SD(TXD)
3
2
SD(TXD)
3
2
ER(DTR)
4
20
RS(RTS)
7
4
ER(DTR)
4
20
SG(GND)
5
7
SG(GND)
5
7
SG(GND)
5
7
DR(DSR)
6
6
CS(CTS)
8
5
DR(DSR)
6
6
Connection diagram between FX-485PC-IF and personal computer
485PC-IF
D-34
FX0N232ADP FX-232ADP

FG
4.4.2
FX2NC232ADP
Personal computer
Signal name
Pin No.
Signal name
SD (TXD)
2
SD (TXD)
RD (RXD)
3
RD (RXD)
RS (RTS)
4
RS (RTS)
CS (CTS)
5
CS (CTS)
DR (DSR)
6
DR (DSR)
SG (GND)
7
SG (GND)
ER (DTR)
20
ER (DTR)
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Computer Link
4.5 Connection Diagram for RS-485 and RS-422
Connection Diagram for RS-485 and RS-422
4.5.1
One-pair wiring
*3
B
FX2NC-485ADP
SDA
(TXD+)
SDA
(TXD+)
SDA
(TXD+)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
LINK
SG
LINK
SG
SG

FG*2
Class-D grounding
(resistance: 100  or less)*1
Class-D grounding
(resistance: 100  or less)*1
Terminal
resistor:
110 
*3
C
D
Computer Link
SDA
(TXD+)
Parallel Link
Terminal
resistor:
110 
FX0N-485ADP
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX2N-485-BD
FX1N-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
N:N Network
Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-485
Common Items
4.5
A
SG
*1.
Make sure to perform Class-D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to
the FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD, FX2NC-485ADP or
FX3U-485ADP(-MB).
*2.
Make sure to connect the FG terminal to the
(grounding) terminal in the PLC requiring
Class-D grounding.
If the grounding terminal is not provided in the PLC, perform Class-D grounding directly.
*3.
Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line.
• The FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD and FX3U-485ADP(-MB) have a built-in terminal resistor.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly
• The FX0N-485ADP, FX2NC-485ADP, FX2N-485-BD and FX1N-485-BD are supplied together with
terminal resistors.
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-35
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Computer Link
4.5 Connection Diagram for RS-485 and RS-422
• FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Communication
equipment operating
in accordance
with RS-485
SDA
(TXD+)
Terminal SDB
resistor (TXD-)
110Ω RDA
*2
(RXD+)
RDB
(RXD-)
LINK
SG
Distributor (BMJ-8)
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
Class-D
grounding
Class-D Class-D
grounding grounding
Connector metal frame
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(Terminal resistor selector switch: Open)
*1.
*1
*1
SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
Connector metal frame
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
*1
*1
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Distributor (BMJ-8)
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
Class-D
grounding
*1
5
RDA
4
RDB
3
SDA
6
SDB
1
SG
2
Terminal
7
resistor
*2
8
Connector metal frame
Class-D
grounding (Terminal resistor
selector switch:
110Ω)*2
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(Terminal resistor selector switch: Open)
Use shielded cables, and make sure to perform class D grounding on the shield.
When using the terminal block to connect ground of FX3G-485-BD-RJ, wire the ground wire only to
either one of two poles of the terminal block.
*2.
Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line. Set the FX3G-485-BD-RJ terminal
resistor selector switch accordingly.
Prepare the following devices if necessary.
Product name
D-36
Model name
Manufacturer
RJ45 connector
TM11AP-88P
HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Distributor
BMJ-8
BMJ-8-28N (No internal connection of the No. 2 and 8 pin) HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
(Do not use a plug with terminal resistor)
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Computer Link
A
Two-pair wiring
*3
Terminal
resistor:
330 
×2
FX2NC-485ADP
SDA
(TXD+)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
SDB
(TXD-)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDA
(RXD+)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
RDB
(RXD-)
LINK
SG
LINK
SG
SG

FG*2
Class-D grounding
(resistance: 100  or less)*1
Class-D grounding
(resistance: 100  or less)*1
*3
B
C
*3
Terminal
resistor:
330 
×2
Parallel Link
*3
FX0N-485ADP
SDA
(TXD+)
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX2N-485-BD
FX1N-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
SDA
(TXD+)
N:N Network
Communication
equipment operating
in accordance with
RS-485/RS-422
SDA
(TXD+)
Common Items
4.5.2
4.5 Connection Diagram for RS-485 and RS-422
D
SG
Computer Link
*1.
Make sure to perform Class-D grounding on the shield of a twisted pair cable connected to
the FX2N-485-BD, FX1N-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD, FX2NC-485ADP or
FX3U-485ADP(-MB).
*2.
Make sure to connect the FG terminal to the
(grounding) terminal in the PLC requiring
Class-D grounding.
If the grounding terminal is not provided in the PLC, perform Class-D grounding directly.
*3.
Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line.
• The FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD and FX3U-485ADP(-MB) have a built-in terminal resistor.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly.
• The FX0N-485ADP, FX2NC-485ADP, FX2N-485-BD and FX1N-485-BD are supplied together with
terminal resistors.
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-37
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Computer Link
4.5 Connection Diagram for RS-485 and RS-422
• FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Communication equipment
operating in accordance
with RS-485/RS-422
Distributor (BMJ-8)
SDA
5
(TXD+)
4
SDB
*2
3
(TXD-)
6
RDA
(RXD+)
1
RDB
*2
2
Terminal (RXD-)
7
resistor LINK
8
330Ω SG
×2
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
Class-D
grounding
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
Class-D Class-D
grounding grounding
*1
*1
Connector metal frame
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(Terminal resistor selector switch: Open)
*1.
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
SG
SDB
SDA
RDB
RDA
Connector metal frame
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
*1
*1
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Distributor (BMJ-8)
Class-D
grounding
*1
RDA
5
4
RDB
3
SDA
6
SDB
1
SG
Terminal
2
resistor
7 *2
Terminal
8
resistor
Connector metal frame
Class-D
grounding (Terminal resistor
selector switch:
330Ω)*2
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(Terminal resistor selector switch: Open)
Use shielded cables, and make sure to perform class D grounding on the shield.
When using the terminal block to connect ground of FX3G-485-BD-RJ, wire the ground wire only to
either one of two poles of the terminal block.
*2.
Make sure to provide a terminal resistor at the end of each line. Set the FX3G-485-BD-RJ terminal
resistor selector switch accordingly.
Prepare the following devices if necessary.
Product name
D-38
Model name
Manufacturer
RJ45 connector
TM11AP-88P
Distributor
BMJ-8
BMJ-8-28N (No internal connection of the No. 2 and 8 pin) HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
(Do not use a plug with terminal resistor)
HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Computer Link
A
Switching of 1 pair / 2 paired wiring (FX3G-485-BD-RJ)
Common Items
4.5.3
4.6 Grounding
The FX3G-485-BD-RJ has a built-in wiring circuit switch.
Set the wiring circuit switch to 1 pair / 2 pair.
B
N:N Network
Wiring circuit
switch
C
Parallel Link
4.6
Grounding
D
Grounding should be performed as stated below.
• Independent grounding should be performed for best results.
When independent grounding can not be performed, perform "shared grounding" as shown in the following
figure.
For details, refer to the Hardware Edition of each series.
Other
equipment
Independent grounding
Best condition
PLC
Other
equipment
Shared grounding
Good condition
PLC
Other
equipment
E
Inverter
Communication
PLC
Computer Link
• The grounding resistance should be 100 or less.
Common grounding
Not allowed
• The grounding wire size should be AWG 14 (2 mm2) or larger.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
• The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-39
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller
Computer Link
5.
5.1 Communication Setting Methods
Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller
This chapter explains the communication setting method types and setting methods for computer link.
5.1
Communication Setting Methods
This section explains the communication setting methods and setting procedures in FX PLCs.
1. Setting method types
1) Specifying the setting using parameters in the sequence programming software:
Register the setting as parameters by executing communication setting on the personal computer screen
using the sequence programming software, and transfer them to a PLC.
(This method using parameters is not available for FX2(FX), FX2C, or FX0N PLCs.)
2) Specifying the setting by writing data to special data registers:
Create a sequence program specifying the communication format, station number settings and time-out
time setting, and then transfer the sequence program to a PLC.
Caution
A PLC operates in the same way regardless of the selected method shown above. If both methods are
selected, priority is given to the method using parameters.
2. Communication setting method applicability for each FX Series
FX Series
Specification using parameters
Specification using special data registers
FX1S, FX1N, FX1N, FX2N, FX2NC,
FX3S, FX3G(ch1), FX3GC(ch1),
FX3U(ch1), FX3UC(ch1)
 (Recommended)

FX3G(ch2), FX3GC(ch2),
FX3U(ch2), FX3UC(ch2)

—
FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N
—

For the detailed contents of special data registers, refer to Section 9.2.
Setting data write method to special data registers, refer to Section 9.3.
3. Setting data flow
PLC memory
Setting window
Parameter area
Parameter
method
Transferred
when power
is turned ON
Program area
[MOV H D8120]
[MOV H D8121]
[MOV K D8129]
Written by
program
ch1: Computer link
D8120 Communication format
D8121 Station number settings
D8129 Time-out time setting
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC
ch2: Computer link
Sequence
program for
set values
Program
method
D8420 Communication format
D8421 Station number settings
D8429 Time-out time setting
When both methods are used at the same time,
priority is given to the contents set in the parameter
method.
D-40
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
5 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller
5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)
A
Caution
5.2
Communication settings may be changed via the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with GX Works2.
For details on FXGP/WIN operating procedure, refer to section 5.3.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.
D
Operating procedure
E
Inverter
Communication
This subsection explains the serial communication setting method.
Suppose that GX Works2 is already started up.
1
Computer Link
5.2.1
Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)
C
Parallel Link
Since the special data registers (D8120, D8121, D8129) is a battery backed area in the case of the FX2N,
FX2NC, FX3U and FX3UC series, a value cannot be normally saved when the battery is discharge (or after a
battery error occurs).
Therefore, keep in mind that a computer link setting may not be possible in this case.
B
N:N Network
1) When specifying the setting using parameters:
When the PLC power is turned ON, the parameters set using the parameter setting window in the
sequence programming software are automatically transferred to the PLC.
As soon as the parameters are transferred to the PLC, the setting becomes valid.
After the program (parameters) are transferred to the PLC, it is necessary to reboot the PLC’s power.
2) When specifying the setting by writing data to special data registers:
Set the PLC mode from STOP to RUN, write the required data, reboot the PLC’s power.
As soon as the PLC power is turned ON, the setting becomes valid.
Common Items
4. Time at which the settings become valid
Opening the parameter setting window
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
In the project view area of the navigation window, double-click [Parameter]  [PLC Parameter].
If the navigation window is not displayed, select [View]  [Docking Window]  [Navigation] from
the menu bar.
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-41
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
2
5 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller
5.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)
Setting the serial communication (parameters)
Click the [PLC System(2)] tab on the dialog box.
3
Setting the serial communication (parameters)
Select a channel and check the box labeled "Operate Communication Setting" box, then adjust the
parameters for that channel.
Click [End].
Adjust the settings on the personal computer to match those set here.
4
Writing parameters to the PLC
Select [Online]  [Write to PLC] from the menu bar, click [Parameter + Program], and then click
[Execute].
D-42
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
A
Communication Settings Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)
5.3.1
Operating procedure
1
Displaying the serial setting (parameter)
Select [Option]  [Serial setting (parameter)] from the toolbar.
The following dialog box appears according to absence/presence of parameter setting.
C
Parallel Link
This subsection explains the serial communication setting method. Suppose that FXGP/WIN is already
started up.
B
N:N Network
Communication settings may be changed by the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with FXGP/WIN.
Ch2 cannot be set using FXGP/WIN.
For details on GX Works2 operating procedure, refer to section 5.2.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.
Common Items
5.3
5 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller
5.3 Communication Settings Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)
D
Computer Link
1. When there are no parameter settings
There are no communication settings. Click the [Yes] button.
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-43
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
5 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller
5.3 Communication Settings Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)
2. When there are already parameter settings
The existing communication setting contents are displayed.
2
Adjusting serial setting (parameter)
Execute the communication setting as shown below.
Adjust the settings on the personal computer to match those set here.
3
Writing a sequence program (parameters) to the PLC
Select [PLC]  [Transfers]  [Write] from the toolbar, and click [OK] button.
D-44
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods
Computer Link
6.1 Data Flow by Link
A
Control Procedures and Setting Methods
B
Data Flow by Link
The figures below show images of data flow achieved when data is read from or written to a PLC CPU and
the status is controlled.
In the case of communication in accordance with RS-232C, ignore "485PC-IF" and regard "485ADP" as
"232ADP".
[10] [11]
485PC-IF
RS-485
[3]
485ADP
PLC CPU
[4]
[9] Various data
[8]
[7]
[12] Response
[13]
[14]
 Device
memory
information
(read)
 PLC CPU
information
(read)
[5] Read
[6] Data
Interface for
signal
conversion
Sequence
program
OS*1
Device
memory, etc.
E
Inverter
Communication
2. When the computer writes data to the PLC
Computer
OS*1
RS-232C
[2] Command,
data, etc.
485PC-IF
[1] Request
RS-485
[3]
485ADP
PLC CPU
[4]
Sequence
program
OS*1
[6]
[7]
 Device
memory
information
(written)
 PLC CPU
information
(written)
[5] Write
Device
memory, etc.
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
3. When the PLC sends data to the computer (on-demand function)
[4] Data
OS*1
Sequence
program
[2]
[3] Data
Read [1] Sending
request
Device
+
memory, etc. Data writing
The OS (standing for "Operating System") indicates the software used to efficiently operate the
resources including the CPUs, memories, terminals, files, and networks using user programs, etc.
H
I
Remote
Maintenance
*1.
 On-demand
data
RS-485
[5]
PLC CPU
Programming
Communication
[7]
Write
485ADP
485PC-IF
RS-232C
[6] Data
OS*1
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
[8] Response
Computer
D
Computer Link
[1] Request
OS*1
RS-232C
[2] Command
C
Parallel Link
1. When the computer reads data from the PLC
Computer
N:N Network
6.1
Common Items
6.
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-45
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods
Computer Link
6.2
6.2 Important Points in Computer Link
Important Points in Computer Link
This section explains important points to be understood before creating programs for computer link.
6.2.1
Operations of PLC caused by data transfer
The PLC operations and scan time using computer link are as described below.
1. While the PLC is in RUN mode
For requests from the computer, the PLC executes access for one request during each END processing.
Sending and receiving are executed as interrupts.
Accordingly, when sending and receiving are executed, the scan time is longer by about 10%. The scan time
can be checked in D8010 to D8012 in the PLC.
2. Condition in which the transfer sequence in the PLC is initialized
The transfer sequence in the PLC is initialized in the following cases:
- When the power is turned ON
- When regular sending/receiving is completed
- When the control code "EOT" or "CL" is received in each format
- When the control code "NAK" is sent
- When the time-out time setting is detected
For details on the time-out time setting, refer to Subsection 6.4.4.
3. Occurrence of framing error in the computer
When a commercial interface in accordance with RS-485 is used in the computer, a framing error may occur
while nothing is sent from the PLC to the computer depending on the interface in the computer.
To cope with this nonconformity, let the computer ignore any data until the PLC sends STX, ACK or NAK.
4. Response of "NAK" from the PLC
When an error is detected, the PLC sends NAK to the computer.
5. Command sending from the computer
When sending commands from the computer to the PLC, wait for the interval times in the following table or
more after the PLC finishes receiving data in response to the previous command, and then send the next
command.
PLC
Interval times
FX3U, FX3UC
300 s
FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC
100 s
FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC two scan times
D-46
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods
Computer Link
A
How to Understand Control Procedure
This section explains how to understand the transfer data shown in the later description of each function.
1. When the computer reads data from the PLC (computer  PLC)
E
N
Q
A
C
K
Data
S
T
X
PLC side
N:N Network
Computer side
B
C
A
Data
Data
C
B
A
E
N
Q
Data
A
C
K
PLC side
E
Data
Basic Formats of Dedicated Protocol
Control code CR  LF
Sum check code
Character
Message waiting time
Command
PLC number
*1.
Whether or not the sum check code is added can be specified using a parameter.
*2.
Whether or not the control code is added can be specified by selecting the protocol type.
H
I
Remote
Maintenance
Station number
*2
Programming
Communication
Control code
*1
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
There are two types of control procedures in dedicated protocols.
CR and LF are not added to each block in format 1. CR and LF are added to each block in format 4.
(The format names are the same as those used in the computer link units for A Series PLCs.)
This section explains the contents of control procedures and the contents of each item specified in the control
procedures in each format.
The basic format of control procedures (protocols) is as shown below:
For details, refer to Subsections 6.4.1 and 6.4.2.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
[1] Part A indicates transfer from the computer to the PLC.
[2] Part B indicates transfer from the PLC to the computer.
[3] Create a program in the computer so that each data is transferred in turn from the left to the right, and
that the data is transferred in the order "A  B" as a whole.
(Example: In the part A, data is transferred in turn from the right starting from "ENQ".)
Inverter
Communication
B
6.4
D
Computer Link
2. When the computer writes data to the PLC (computer  PLC)
Parallel Link
[1] Parts A and C indicate transfer from the computer to the PLC.
[2] Part B indicates transfer from the PLC to the computer.
[3] Create a program in the computer so that each data is transferred in turn from the left to the right, and
that the data is transferred in the order "A  B  C" as a whole.
(Example: In the part A, data is transferred in turn from the right starting from "ENQ".)
Computer side
Common Items
6.3
6.3 How to Understand Control Procedure
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-47
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods
Computer Link
6.4.1
6.4 Basic Formats of Dedicated Protocol
Control procedure format 1
The table below shows the control procedure for format 1.
PLC No.
A
C
K
or
or
E
Character
area B T
X
Sum check
code
PLC No.
S
T
X
N
A
K
Station
No.
PLC No.
A
C
K
Station
No.
PLC No.
Station
No.
PLC No.
*
Error
code
PLC side
Station
No.
Character
area A
Sum check
code
Message
wait time
Command
PLC No.
When
computer
reads data
from PLC
E
N
Computer side Q
Station
No.
*
PLC No.
Transfer order
N
A
K
Station
No.
Control procedure (protocol)
Station
No.
Description
When
computer
writes data to
PLC
PLC side
Transfer order
Character
area C
Sum check
code
Message
wait time
Command
PLC No.
E
N
Computer side Q
Station
No.
*
N
A
K
Remarks
Error
code
or
1) The sum check code is added only when "sum check code provided" is selected.
The sum check code is not added when "sum check code not provided" is selected.
2) When "sum check code provided" is selected, the sum check is executed only to the character
areas marked with "*" in the figure above.
3) The contents of "Character area A", "Character area B" and "Character area C" vary depending
on the contents of transfer, but do not vary depending on the control procedure format.
For details on character contents, refer to "7. Commands".
D-48
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods
Computer Link
A
Control procedure format 4
Common Items
The table below shows the control procedure for format 4.
PLC No.
or
A
C
K
C L
or
X
RF
C L
RF
D
PLC No.
Station
No.
*
C L
RF
C L
RF
A
C
K
PLC No.
Sum check
code
Message
wait time
Command
Transfer order
Character
area C
Station
No.
PLC side
E
Inverter
Communication
C L
F
RF
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
When
computer
writes data to
PLC
PLC No.
*
E
N
Computer side Q
Error
code
PLC No.
N
A
K
Station
No.
or
C L
RF
G
1) The sum check code is added only when "sum check code provided" is selected.
The sum check code is not added when "sum check code not provided" is selected.
2) When "sum check code provided" is selected, the sum check is executed only to the character
areas marked with "*" in the figure above.
3) The contents of "Character area A", "Character area B" and "Character area C" vary depending
on the contents of transfer, but do not vary depending on the control procedure format.
For details on character contents, refer to "7. Commands".
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Remarks
C
Computer Link
N
A
K
E
Character
area B T
Sum check
code
S
T
X
Error
code
PLC side
PLC No.
RF
Station
No.
Character
area A
Sum check
code
Message
wait time
Command
PLC No.
C L
RF
B
Parallel Link
When
computer
reads data
from PLC
E
N
Computer side Q
Station
No.
*
PLC No.
Transfer order
C L
N:N Network
N
A
K
Station
No.
Control procedure (protocol)
Station
No.
Description
Station
No.
6.4.2
6.4 Basic Formats of Dedicated Protocol
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-49
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods
Computer Link
6.4.3
6.4 Basic Formats of Dedicated Protocol
Contents of set items in each control procedure (protocol)
This subsection explains the contents of the data used in each control procedure.
1. Control codes
The table below shows control codes.
Signal name
Code
STX
02H
Start of Text
Description
ETX
03H
End of Text
CL
0CH
Clear
EOT
04H
End of Transmission
CR
0DH
Carriage Return
NAK
15H
Negative Acknowledge
ENQ
05H
Enquiry
ACK
06H
Acknowledge
Signal name
Code
LF
0AH
Description
Line Feed
1) When the PLC receives ENQ or ACK, it initializes the transfer sequence and begins receiving.
2) When the PLC receives EOT or CL as shown below, it initializes the transfer sequence.
At this time, the PLC gives no response.
For format 1
For format 4
E
O
T
EC L
O
T RF
or
or
C
CC L
Computer side L
Computer side L R F
PLC side
PLC side
3) In FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, a waiting time of 2 scan times or more is required from
sending of the EOT/CL code from the computer to sending of the next message.
2. Station number
The station number indicates a number provided in each PLC to determine to which PLC the computer
accesses.
The station number is specified in hexadecimal.
• In FX Series PLCs, set the station number using parameters. The setting range is from 00H to 0FH.
• For the station number setting method in A Series PLCs, refer to the respective A Series PLC manual.
Computer
FX
Series
485PC-IF
FX
Series
 485 ADP
Station No. 0
(00H)
 485 ADP
Station No. 1
(01H)
FX
Series
 485 ADP
Station No. 2
(02H)
FX
Series
 485 ADP
Station No. 15
(0FH)
In FX2(FX), FX2C and FX0N PLCs, set a value to D8121.
M8002
Initial pulse
MOV
H0
D8121
For details on the program, refer to Section 9.3.
Cautions on setting station numbers
1) Do not overlap station numbers. If the same number is set for two or more stations, the transfer data is
destroyed and normal communication is not possible.
2) It is not necessary to set consecutive station numbers as shown in the setting example above. Any station
numbers in the setting range (00H to 0FH) are applicable.
(Examples: Station numbers may be set arbitrarily. Some station numbers may be skipped.)
D-50
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods
6.4 Basic Formats of Dedicated Protocol
A
4. Command
A command specifies the contents of access executed by the computer to a PLC.
A command is converted into a two-digit ASCII code.
For an explanation of commands, refer to Chapter 7.
Example: When the message waiting time is set to 100 ms
Message waiting time (100 ms)
E
Inverter
Communication
"A"
Computer side
PLC side
The waiting time should be the interval
times in the following table or more.
Interval times
FX3U, FX3UC
300 s
FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC
100 s
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Sending is started 100 ms or later.
PLC
D
Computer Link
The message waiting time should be specified because some computers require more time before receiving
additional data. Set the waiting time according to the specifications of each computer.
Set the waiting time within the range from 0 to 150 ms in 10-ms units. 10 ms is handled as "1H", and a value
ranging from "0H (0)" to "FH (15)" is converted into a one-digit ASCII code.
When executing communication using the 485PC-IF in a 1-to-N system adopting the one-pair wiring, make
sure to set the message waiting time to 70 ms (7) or more. When the scan time of a PLC in the system
exceeds 70 ms, set the message waiting time to the maximum scan time or higher.
C
Parallel Link
5. Message waiting time
B
N:N Network
The PLC number is used to identify a PLC to be accessed when computer link is combined with the
MELSECNET (II) or MELSECNET/B in A Series PLCs. The PLC number of each FX Series PLC is fixed to
"FFH", and converted into two-digit ASCII code.
When the on-demand function is used, however, the PLC number is automatically changed to "FEH" by the
PLC.
For the PLC number of an A Series PLC used together with the MELSECNET (II) or MELSECNET/B, refer to
the respective A Series PLC manual.
Common Items
3. PLC number
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC two scan times
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-51
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods
Computer Link
6.4 Basic Formats of Dedicated Protocol
6. Sum check code
The sum check code indicates a two-digit ASCII code converted from the least significant byte (8-bit) of the
sum check target data added as hexadecimal data.
Using the FX PLC parameters, set whether or not the sum check code is added in the message.
- When "sum check code provided" is selected, the sum check code is added in the message during
sending. During receiving, the sum check code is compared with the value calculated from the received
data to check the received data.
- When "sum check code not provided" is selected, the sum check code is not added, so the received
data is not checked either. A calculation example of the sum check code is shown below.
Example: When the station number "0", PLC number "FF", command "BR (device memory batch read)",
message waiting time "30 ms" and data "ABCD" are transferred in format 1, the sum check code
value is as shown below:
Computer side
E Station
No.
N
Q
00
PLC
No.
FF
Com- Mes- Character area Sum
mand sage
check
wait
code
time
A
B
C
D
BR
BD
3
05H 30H 30H 46H 46H 42H 52H 33H 41H 42H 43H 44H 42H 44H
PLC side
30H+30H+46H+46H+42H+52H+33H+41H+42H+43H+44H=2BDH
Total from "station number" to "character area"
D-52
Last two
digits
S
T
X
00
FF
02H 30H 30H 46H 46H
30 ms
(Message waiting time)
...
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods
Computer Link
A
Time-out time setting
When the receiving of data from the computer is interrupted and is not restarted within the preset time (timeout time setting), the PLC regards the situation as a timeout error and initializes the transfer sequence.
1. Time-out time setting range
1) Details of setting range
Setting range in parameter
Setting range in sequence program
(D8129 (ch1) and D8429 (ch2))
Not applicable
1 to 3276 (10 to 32760 ms)
Not applicable
1 to 255 (10 to 2550 ms)
FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC
1 to 255 (10 to 2550 ms)
1 to 255 (10 to 2550 ms)
FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S
1 to 255 (10 to 2550 ms)
1 to 3276 (10 to 32760 ms)
FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
ch1
1 to 255 (10 to 2550 ms)
1 to 3276 (10 to 32760 ms)
ch2
1 to 3276 (10 to 32760 ms)
Not applicable
D
Computer Link
FX2(FX), FX2C
FX0N
When the set value is "0", it is handled as "100 ms".
E
Inverter
Communication
2) Example of setting program
When setting the time-out time setting to 60 ms
M8002
MOV
K6
C
Parallel Link
FX Series
B
N:N Network
The time-out time setting can be set using parameters or sequence program.
In the FX2(FX), FX2C and FX0N Series, however, the parameter setting method is not applicable.
When setting the time-out time setting in a sequence program, write a value for ch1 to D8129, and a value for
ch2 (in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC Series) to D8429 (unit: 10 ms).
However, D8429 (ch2) cannot be set in sequence programs.
The setting range is different between the parameter method and the sequence program method.
Common Items
6.4.4
6.4 Basic Formats of Dedicated Protocol
D8129
Initial pulse
For details on the program, refer to Section 9.3.
F
The time-out time setting is not updated until the next character data is received. Set a time to receive a
character according to the transmission speed (baud rate).
For one character (12-bit), the minimum set value of the time-out time setting is as shown below:
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
2. Caution on programming
Baud rate (bps)
Time-out time setting (minimum set value)
40
50 ms (5)
600
20
30 ms (3)
1200
10
20 ms (2)
5
10 ms (1)
4800
2.5
10 ms (1)
9600
1.25
10 ms (1)
19200
0.625
10 ms (1)
38400
0.312
10 ms (1)
H
Programming
Communication
2400
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Time to receive one character (ms)
300
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-53
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods
Computer Link
6.5
6.5 Transfer Sequence Time Chart and Communication Time
Transfer Sequence Time Chart and Communication Time
This section explains the communication time chart between the computer and the PLC.
As shown in the figures below, communication between the computer and the PLC is always executed after
"END". The scan time is extended by the communication time.
6.5.1
When computer reads data from PLC
E
N
Q
Computer
A
C
K
Waiting time
(TW)
Interface
T3
T4
Reading
processing
S
T
X
PLC
T0
T1
T5
It should be the interval times in the following
table or more.
This time is "0" when the message waiting time is
not set or when the waiting time is shorter than the
communication time with the CPU.
T2
Sequence
program
END
Step 0
Step 0
Step 0
END
END
END
The PLC watches the time elapse. When it reaches the
transmission time, the PLC starts the transmission. If not,
the PLC evaluate the time elapse in the END process of
the next step.
PLC
Interval times
FX3U, FX3UC
300 s
FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC
100 s
FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC two scan times
6.5.2
When computer writes data to PLC
Computer
E
N
Q
Waiting time
(TW)
T3
Interface
Writing
processing
Data is
written.
PLC
T0
This time is "0" when the message waiting time is
not set or when the waiting time is shorter than the
communication time with the CPU.
T1 T2
Sequence
program
END
D-54
Step 0
END
Step 0
END
Step 0
END
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods
Computer Link
A
Transfer time in transfer sequence
This subsection explains how to calculate the approximate time after the computer starts data transfer and
the PLC gives a response until all communication is completed.
For the contents of T0 to T5, refer to the previous page.
1. When the computer reads data from the PLC
1
 Number of bits in one character (1 + 7 (8) + 0 (1) + 1 (2))
Baud rate
 Number of characters
Data length
(7 or 8)
Parity bit
(0 or 1)
Stop bit
(1 or 2)
2. When the computer writes data to the PLC
Communication time = T0 + (T1 + Longer time between T2 and TW) + T3
T0, T3 =
E
Start
bit
Data length
(7 or 8)
Parity bit
(0 or 1)
Stop bit
(1 or 2)
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
T1: Maximum one scan time (Because data is written to the PLC during the END processing while the
PLC is in RUN mode, writing requires up to one scan time depending on the sending timing. Writing
requires about 1 ms while the PLC is in STOP mode.)
T2: END processing time in the PLC executing data transfer
TW: Message waiting time
Inverter
Communication
1
 Number of bits in one character (1 + 7 (8) + 0 (1) + 1 (2))
Baud rate
 Number of characters
D
Computer Link
T1: Maximum one scan time (Because data is read from the PLC during the END processing while the
PLC is in RUN mode, reading requires up to one scan time depending on the sending timing.
Reading requires about 1 ms while the PLC is in STOP mode.)
T2: END processing time in the PLC executing data transfer
T4: Scan time or longer (In the case of wiring in the 1-to-N configuration, T4 should be longer than the
time-out time setting (D8129) extended by one scan time.)
TW: Message waiting time
C
Parallel Link
Start
bit
B
N:N Network
Communication time = T0 + (T1 + Longer time between T2 and TW) + T3 + T4 + T5
T0, T3, T5 =
Common Items
6.5.3
6.5 Transfer Sequence Time Chart and Communication Time
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-55
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods
Computer Link
6.6
6.6 Transfer Data in Character Area
Transfer Data in Character Area
This section explains the transfer data in the character area sent and received between the computer and a
PLC using each command.
The transfer data explained below is handled as the character area B in reading and the character area C in
writing.
For character areas, refer to Subsections 6.4.1 and 6.4.2.
6.6.1
When bit device memory is read or written
The bit device memory is handled in 1-bit (1-point) units or in 1-word (16-point) units.
The transfer data in each case is explained below.
1) In 1-bit (1-point) units
When the bit device memory is handled in 1-bit (1-point) units, a specified number of devices starting
from the specified head device are expressed in turn from the left end in "1 (31H)" for the ON status or "0
(30H)" for the OFF status.
Example: When indicating the ON/OFF status of five devices starting from M10
Number
of
devices
Head device
M
0
0
1
0
0
5
1
0
1
0
1
4DH 30H 30H 31H 30H 30H 35H 31H 30H 31H 30H 31H
Indicates that M14 is ON.
Indicates that M13 is OFF.
Indicates that M12 is ON.
Indicates that M11 is OFF.
Indicates that M10 is ON.
2) In 1-word (16-point)" units
When the bit device memory is handled in 1-word (16-point) units, one word is expressed in 4-bit units in
turn from the most significant bit in hexadecimal.
Example: When indicating the ON/OFF status of 32 devices starting from M16
Because devices are handled in 16 point units,
the number of device is "02".
Number
of
devices
Head device
M
0
0
1
6
0
2
Data
A
B
1
Data
2
3
4
C
D
4DH 30H 30H 31H 36H 30H 32H 41H 42H 31H 32H 33H 34H 43H 44H
A
B
1
2
3
4
C
D
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
D-56
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Control Procedures and Setting Methods
Computer Link
A
When word device memory is read or written
In the case of word device memory, one word is expressed in 4-bit units in turn from the most significant bit in
hexadecimal.
B
Example 1: When indicating the contents stored in the data registers D350 and D351
D
0
3
5
0
0 2
Data
5
6
A
Data
B
1
7
0
N:N Network
Number
of
devices
Head device
F
44H 30H 33H 35H 30H 30H 32H 35H 36H 41H 42H 31H 37H 30H 46H
5
6
A
B
1
7
0
C
F
Parallel Link
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Indicates that D350 stores "56ABH ("22187"
in decimal)".
Indicates that D351 stores "170FH ("5903"
in decimal)".
Number
of
devices
Head device
C N
2
0
0
0
1
Data
1
2
3
D
*1
Computer Link
Example 2: When indicating the contents stored in the 32-bit counter C200
Data
4
5
6
7
8
44H 4EH 32H 30H 30H 30H 31H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 38H
2
3
4
5
6
E
7
8
Inverter
Communication
1
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
F
Indicates that C200 stores "12345678H ("305,419,896" in decimal)".
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
*1.
Common Items
6.6.2
6.6 Transfer Data in Character Area
For indicating the current value of C200, use "CN200".
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-57
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
7.
6.6 Transfer Data in Character Area
Commands
This chapter explains specification methods and specification examples of commands in dedicated protocols
used in computer link communication type.
For control procedures in dedicated protocols, refer to "6. Control Procedures and Setting Methods".
The table below shows a reference section for each command.
Applicable PLC
Command
D-58
Contents of processing
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U, FX3UC
FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0N,
FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC,
FX2N, FX2NC
Reference
section
BR
Reads bit devices in 1-point units.


7.1
WR
Reads bit devices in 16-point units, or
word devices in 1-point units.


7.2
QR
Reads bit devices in 16-point units, or
word devices in 1-point units.

—
7.3
BW
Writes bit devices in 1-point units.


7.4
WW
Writes bit devices in 16-point units, or
word devices in 1-point units.


7.5
QW
Writes bit devices in 16-point units, or
word devices in 1-point units.

—
7.6
BT
Specifies bit devices arbitrarily in 1-point
units, and sets or resets them (forcibly
sets them to ON or OFF).


7.7
WT
Specifies bit devices arbitrarily in 16-point
units, and sets or resets them (forcibly
sets them to ON or OFF). Or specifies
word devices arbitrarily in 1-point units,
and writes data to them.


7.8
QT
Specifies bit devices arbitrarily in 16-point
units, and sets or resets them (forcibly
sets them to ON or OFF). Or specifies
word devices arbitrarily in 1-point units,
and writes data to them.

—
7.9
RR
Sets a PLC to RUN mode in remote
control.


RS
Sets a PLC to STOP mode in remote
control.


PC
Reads the PLC model name code.


7.11
GW
Turns the global function ON or OFF in all
linked PLCs.


7.12
—
Offers the on-demand function (by which
a PLC gives a sending request), and does
not offer any command.


7.13
TT
Returns received characters back to the
computer as they are.


7.14
7.10
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
A
BR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Bit Units]
This section explains the control procedure specification method and specification example when the bit
device memory is read all at once.
B
1. Specification method
S
T
X
*
E
T
X
PLC No.
A
C
K
Sum check
code
Read device range
specification
PLC No.
PLC side
Station
No.
Head device
(5 characters)
Sum check
code
Message
wait time
PLC No.
Station
No.
BR
"0 (30H)" indicates the OFF
status.
"1 (31H)" indicates the ON
status.
Station
No.
Number of device points
(2 characters (hexadecimal)
1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:
- 1  Number of device points  256*1 (Use "00H" to specify 256 points.)
- Head device number + Number of device points -1  Maximum device number
*1.
54 in the FX0N and FX1S Series
2. Specification example
Computer side
PLC side
E
N 0 5 F F B R A X 0 0 4 0 0 5 4 7
Q
This range is regarded as the
sum check target.
05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 42H 52H 41H 58H 30H 30H 34H 30H 30H 35H 34H 37H
06H 30H 35H 46H 46H
G
S
E
T 0 5 F F 0 1 1 0 1 T 0 5
X
X
02H 30H 35H 46H 46H 30H 31H 31H 30H 31H 03H 30H 35H
The message wait time is specified in 10-ms units within the range from 0 to 150 ms, and expressed in
hexadecimal within the range from 0 to FH. For example, "100 ms" is expressed as "A".
I
Remote
Maintenance
Point
H
Programming
Communication
Indicates that X044 is
ON.
Indicates that X043 is
OFF.
Indicates that X042 is
ON.
Indicates that X041 is
ON.
Indicates that X040 is
OFF.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
This range is regarded as the
sum check target.
A
C 0 5 F F
K
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
When reading the contents of five devices X040 to X044 in the PLC whose station number is 5 (while the
message waiting time is set to 100 ms)
(When X040 and X043 are OFF and X041, X042 and X044 are ON)
E
Inverter
Communication
2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.
D
Computer Link
Character area B
* Data on specified number of device points
(Characters of specified number of device points)
C
Parallel Link
E
N
Computer side Q
N:N Network
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:
Batch read command (unit: bit) Character area A
Common Items
7.1
7.1 BR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Bit Units]
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-59
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
7.2
7.2 WR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Word Units]
WR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Word Units]
This section explains the control procedure specification method and specification examples when the word
device memory is read all at once or when the bit device memory is read (in 16-point units) all at once.
1. Specification method
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:
S
T
X
Read device range
specification
E
T
X
*
A
C
K
Sum check
code
PLC side
PLC No.
One device uses 4 characters.
Four digits (hexadecimal)
express one word data.
Station
No.
Head device
(5 characters)
Station
No.
Sum check
code
WR
Message
wait time
PLC No.
Station
No.
E
N
Q
Computer side
PLC No.
Number of device points
(2 characters (hexadecimal)
Batch read command (unit: word) Character area A
Character area B
* Data on specified number of device points
(Characters of specified number of device points)
1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:
- 1  Number of device points  64*1 (32*1 in case of bit devices)
- Head device number + Number of device points ("Number of devices  16" in case of bit devices) -1 
Maximum device number
- When 32-bit devices (CN200 to CN255) are read, one device point is handled as two word data.
Accordingly, up to 32 device points*2 can be specified.
2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.
*1.
Up to 13 device points in the FX0N and FX1S Series
*2.
Up to 6 device points in the FX0N and FX1S Series
2. Specification examples
Example 1: When reading the contents of thirty-two devices from X040 to X077 in the PLC whose station
number is 5 (while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)
Computer side
E
N 0 5 F F W R 0 X 0 0 4 0 0 2 4 8
Q
05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 57H 52H 30H 58H 30H 30H 34H 30H 30H 32H 34H 38H
PLC side
This range is regarded as the
sum check target.
A
C 0 5 F F
K
This range is regarded as the
sum check target.
06H 30H 35H 46H 46H
S
T 0 5 F F
X
E
A B C D T 0 8
X
1 2 3 4
02H 30H 35H 46H 46H 31H 32H 33H 34H 41H 42H 43H 44H 03H 30H 38H
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
X
0
5
7
D-60
X
0
5
2
X
0
5
1
X
0
5
0
X
0
4
7
X
0
4
3
X
0
4
2
X
0
4
1
X
0
4
0
X
0
7
7
X
0
7
2
X
0
7
1
X
0
7
0
X
0
6
7
X
0
6
3
X
0
6
2
X
0
6
1
X
0
6
0
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
7.2 WR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Word Units]
A
The WR command handles data in 1-word units. When reading thirty-two devices from X040 to X077, specify
the number of device points as "02" (One point specifies 16 devices.)
Example 2: When reading the present value of two devices from T123 and T124 in the PLC whose station
number is 5 (while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)
PLC side
This range is regarded as the
sum check target.
05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 57H 52H 30H 54H 4EH 31H 32H 33H 30H 32H 36H 34H
This range is regarded as the
sum check target.
S
T 0 5 F F
X
7 B C 9
1 2 3 4
E
T B 3
X
06H 30H 35H 46H 46H
Indicates that the current value of T123 is "7BC9H
(hexadecimal) (which is "31689" in decimal).
Indicates that the current value of T124 is "1234H
(hexadecimal) (which is "4660" in decimal).
C
Parallel Link
02H 30H 35H 46H 46H 37H 42H 43H 39H 31H 32H 33H 34H 03H 42H 33H
A
C 0 5 F F
K
B
N:N Network
Computer side
E
N 0 5 F F W R 0 T N 1 2 3 0 2 6 4
Q
Common Items
Point
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-61
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
7.3
7.3 QR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Word Units]
QR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Word Units]
This section explains the control procedure specification method and specification examples when the word
device memory is read all at once or when the bit device memory is read (in 16-point units) all at once.
This command is available only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
1. Specification method
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:
Batch read command
(unit: word)
Number of device points
(2 characters (hexadecimal)
S
T
X
Read device range
specification
Data on
E
specified
number of T
device points X
PLC No.
Station
No.
Sum check
code
K
PLC No.
PLC side
One device uses 4 characters.
Four digits (hexadecimal)
A
express one data word .
C
Station
No.
Head device
(7 characters)
Sum check
code
QR
Message
wait time
PLC No.
E
N
Computer side Q
Station
No.
Character area A
Character area B
1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:
- 1  Number of device points  64 (32 for bit devices)
- Head device number + Number of device points ("Number of devices  16" for bit devices) -1 
Maximum device number
- When 32-bit devices (CN00200 to CN00255) are read, one device point is handled as two word data.
Accordingly, up to 32 device points can be specified.
2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.
2. Specification examples (For FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Example 1: When reading the contents of thirty-two devices from X040 to X077 in the PLC whose station
number is 5 (while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)
Computer side
E
N 0 5 F F Q R 0 X 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 2 A 2
Q
05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 51H 52H 30H 58H 30H 30H 30H 30H 34H 30H 30H 32H 41H 32H
PLC side
This range is regarded as the sum
check target.
A
C 0 5 F F
K
This range is regarded as the
sum check target.
06H 30H 35H 46H 46H
S
T 0 5 F F
X
1 2 3 4
E
A B C D T C 8
X
02H 30H 35H 46H 46H 31H 32H 33H 34H 41H 42H 43H 44H 03H 43H 38H
1
2
3
4
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
X
0
5
7
D-62
X
0
5
0
X
0
4
7
X
0
4
1
X
0
4
0
X
0
7
7
X
0
7
0
X
0
6
7
X
0
6
1
X
0
6
0
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
7.3 QR Command [Reads Device Memory in 1-Word Units]
Computer side
B
05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 51H 52H 30H 52H 30H 33H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 32H 39H 42H
N:N Network
PLC side
E
N 0 5 F F Q R 0 R 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 2 9 B
Q
This range is regarded as the
sum check target.
A
C 0 5 F F
K
This range is regarded as the
sum check target.
06H 30H 35H 46H 46H
7 B C 9
1 2 3 4
C
E
T B 3
X
Parallel Link
S
T 0 5 F F
X
A
Common Items
Example 2: When reading the contents of two devices from R30000 to R30001 in the PLC whose station
number is 5 (while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)
02H 30H 35H 46H 46H 37H 42H 43H 39H 31H 32H 33H 34H 03H 42H 33H
Indicates that the value of R30000 is "7BC9H" (hexadecimal)
(which is "31689" in decimal).
Indicates that the value of R30001 is "1234H" (hexadecimal)
(which is "4660" in decimal).
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-63
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
7.4
7.4 BW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Bit Units]
BW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Bit Units]
This section explains the control procedure specification method and shows a specification example when the
bit device memory is written all at once.
1. Specification method
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:
Number of device points
Character area A (2 characters (hexadecimal)
PLC side
Written device range
specification
"0 (30H)" indicates the OFF status.
"1 (31H)" indicates the ON status.
A
C
K
PLC No.
*
Station
No.
Head device
(5 characters)
Sum check
code
BW
Message
wait time
PLC No.
E
N
Q
Computer side
Station
No.
Batch write command (unit: bit)
* Data on specified number of device points
(Characters of specified number of device points)
1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:
- 1  Number of device points  160*1
- Head device number + Number of device points -1  Maximum device number
2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal
respectively.
*1.
46 in the FX0N and FX1S Series
2. Specification example
When writing data to five devices from M903 to M907 in the PLC whose station number is 0 (while the
message waiting time is set to 0 ms)
This range is regarded as the sum check target.
Computer side
PLC side
D-64
E
N 0 0 F F B W 0 M 0 9 0 3 0 5 0 1 1 0 1 2 6
Q
05H 30H 30H 46H 46H 42H 57H 30H 4DH 30H 39H 30H 33H 30H 35H 30H 31H 31H 30H 31H 32H 36H
Specifies to turn M903 OFF.
Specifies to turn M904 ON.
Specifies to turn M905 ON.
Specifies to turn M906 OFF.
Specifies to turn M907 ON.
A
C 0 0 F F
K
06H 30H 30H 46H 46H
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
A
WW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Word Units]
This section explains the control procedure specification method and shows a specification examples when
the word device memory is written all at once or when the bit device memory is written (in 16-point units) all at
once.
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:
C
PLC side
A
C
K
Written device
range specification
PLC No.
*
Station
No.
Head device
(5 characters)
Sum check
code
Message
wait time
Station
No.
W W
Number of device points
(2 characters (hexadecimal)
Character area C
Parallel Link
E
N
Q
Computer side
PLC No.
Batch write command (unit: word)
D
Computer Link
One device uses 4 characters.
Four digits (hexadecimal) express
one data word.
* Data on specified number of device points
(Characters of specified number of device points)
1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:
2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.
*2.
Up to 5 device points in the FX0N and FX1S Series
2. Specification examples
Example 1: When writing data to thirty-two devices from M640 to M671 in the PLC whose station number is
0 (while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)
Computer side
2 3 4 7
A B 9 6
0 5
05H 30H 30H 46H 46H 57H 57H 30H 4DH 30H 36H 34H 30H 30H 32H 32H 33H 34H 37H 41H 42H 39H 36H 30H 35H
PLC side
A
C 0 0 F F
K
This range is regarded as the
sum check target.
H
3
4
7
A
B
9
Programming
Communication
06H 30H 30H 46H 46H
2
6
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
M
6
5
4
M
6
5
3
M
6
4
3
M
6
4
2
M
6
4
1
M
6
4
0
M
6
7
1
M
6
7
0
M
6
6
9
M
6
5
9
M
6
5
8
M
6
5
7
I
M
6
5
6
Remote
Maintenance
M
6
5
5
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
E
N 0 0 F F W W 0 M 0 6 4 0 0 2
Q
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Up to 11 device points in the FX0N and FX1S Series
E
Inverter
Communication
- 1  Number of device points  64*1 (10 in case of bit devices)
- Head device number + Number of device points ("Number of devices x 16" in case of bit devices) -1 
Maximum device number
- When 32-bit devices (CN200 to CN255) are written, one device point is handled as two word data.
Accordingly, up to 32 device points*2 can be specified.
*1.
B
N:N Network
1. Specification method
Common Items
7.5
7.5 WW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Word Units]
Point
The WW command handles data in 1-word units. When writing data to thirty-two devices from M640 to M671,
specify the number of device points as "02" (One point specifies 16 devices.)
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-65
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
7.5 WW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Word Units]
Example 2: When writing data to two devices D0 and D1 in the PLC whose station number is 0 (while the
message waiting time is set to 0 ms)
Computer side
E
N 0 0 F F W W 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 2
Q
1 2 3 4
A C D 7 F 9
05H 30H 30H 46H 46H 57H 57H 30H 44H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 32H 31H 32H 33H 34H 41H 43H 44H 37H 46H 39H
PLC side
This range is regarded as the sum check target.
A
C 0 0 F F
K
06H 30H 30H 46H 46H
Indicates that "1234H (hexadecimal) (which is "4660" in decimal) is written to D0.
Indicates that "ACD7H (hexadecimal) (which is "-21289" in decimal) is written to D1.
D-66
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
A
QW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Word Units]
This section explains the control procedure specification method and shows a specification examples when
the word device memory is written all at once or when the bit device memory is written (in 16-point units) all at
once.
This command is available only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:
Number of device points
(2 characters (hexadecimal)
C
A
C
K
Written device range
specification
PLC No.
PLC side
Station
No.
Data on
specified
number of
device points
Head device
(7 characters)
Sum check
code
Message
wait time
PLC No.
QW
Parallel Link
Station
No.
Character area C
E
N
Computer side Q
D
2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.
2. Specification examples (For FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
E
N 0 5 F F Q W 0 M 0 0 0 6 4 0 0 2 2 3 4 7 A B 9 6 6 4
Q
G
05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 51H 57H 30H 4DH 30H 30H 30H 36H 34H 30H 30H 32H 32H 33H 34H 37H 41H 42H 39H 36H 36H 34H
A
C 0 5 F F
K
This range is regarded as the
sum check target.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
PLC side
06H 30H 35H 46H 46H
2
3
4
7
A
B
9
6
H
M
6
4
8
M
6
4
7
M
6
4
1
M
6
4
0
M
6
7
1
M
6
6
4
M
6
6
3
M
6
5
7
Programming
Communication
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
M
6
5
6
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Example 1: When writing data to thirty-two devices from M640 to M671 in the PLC whose station number is
5 (while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)
E
Inverter
Communication
1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:
- 1  Number of device points  64 (10 in case of bit devices)
- Head device number + Number of device points ("Number of devices  16" in case of bit devices) -1 
Maximum device number
- When 32-bit devices (CN00200 to CN00255) are written, one device point is handled as two word data.
Accordingly, up to 32 device points can be specified.
Computer Link
One device uses 4 characters. Four digits
(hexadecimal) express one data word.
Computer side
B
N:N Network
1. Specification method
Batch write command
(unit: word)
Common Items
7.6
7.6 QW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Word Units]
M
6
5
6
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-67
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
7 Commands
7.6 QW Command [Writes Device Memory in 1-Word Units]
Example 2: When writing data to two devices from R30000 to R30001 in the PLC whose station number is 5
(while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)
Computer side
E
N 0 5 F F Q W 0 R 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 2 7 B C 9 1 2 3 4 5 F
Q
05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 51H 57H 30H 52H 30H 33H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 32H 37H 42H 43H 39H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 46H
PLC side
This range is regarded as the
sum check target.
A
C 0 5 F F
K
06H 30H 35H 46H 46H
Indicates that "7BC9H (hexadecimal) (which is "31689" in decimal) is written to R30000.
Indicates that "1234H (hexadecimal) (which is "4660" in decimal) is written to R30001.
D-68
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
BT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Bit Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)]
This section explains the control procedure specification method and shows a specification example when the
bit device memory is specified arbitrarily and written all at once.
B
1. Specification method
PLC No.
A
C
K
1 character
"0 (30H)" indicates reset (setting to OFF).
"1 (31H)" indicates set (setting to ON).
* Number of device points
(2 characters (hexadecimal))
1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:
- 1  Number of device points  20*1
2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.
2. Specification example
When writing data for setting M50 to ON, S100 to OFF and Y001 to ON in the PLC whose station number is 5
(while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)
F
This range is regarded as the sum check target.
Computer side 05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 42H 54H 30H 30H 33H 4DH 30H 30H 35H 30H 31H 53H 30H 31H 30H 30H 30H 59H 30H 30H 30H 31H 31H 45H 43H
PLC side
Set (ON)
06H 30H 35H 46H 46H
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
A
C 0 5 F F
K
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
E
N 0 5 F F B T 0 0 3 M 0 0 5 0 1 S 0 1 0 0 0 Y 0 0 0 1 1 E C
Q
Reset (OFF)
E
Inverter
Communication
10 in the FX0N and FX1S Series
Set (ON)
D
Computer Link
Point
*1.
Parallel Link
PLC side
C
Station
No.
Device
(5 characters)
Sum check
code
Device
(5 characters)
Set or reset
*
Character area A
Set or reset
BT
Message
wait time
PLC No.
Station
No.
Computer side
E
N
Q
N:N Network
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:
Test (write arbitrarily) command (unit: bit)
A
Common Items
7.7
7 Commands
7.7 BT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Bit Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)]
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-69
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
7.8
7 Commands
7.8 WT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Word Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)]
WT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Word Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)]
This section explains the control procedure specification method and shows a specification example when the
word device memory and bit device memory (in 16-point units) are specified arbitrarily and written all at once.
Word devices and bit devices (in 16-point units) can be specified together. However, the WT command
cannot handle 32-bit word devices C200 to C255 (CN200 to CN255).
1. Specification method
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:
WT
Message
wait time
PLC No.
Computer side
E
N
Q
Station
No.
Test (write arbitrarily) command (unit: word)
Number of
device points
(2 characters
(hexadecimal))
Character area A
Device
Data
(5 characters) (4 characters)
Device
Data
(5 characters) (4 characters)
PLC side
One device uses 4 characters. Four digits
(hexadecimal) express one data word.
PLC No.
A
C
K
Station
No.
Sum check
code
When specifying bit devices,
specify the head device.
1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:
- 1  Number of device points  10*1 (in unit of 10*1 in case of bit devices (One unit indicates 16 points.))
2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.
3) The WT command cannot handle 32-bit word devices C200 to C255 (CN200 to CN255).
*1.
D-70
6 in the FX0N and FX1S Series
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
7 Commands
7.8 WT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Word Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)]
A
When writing data for setting the current value of D500 to "1234H", Y100 to Y117 to "BCA9H" and the current
value of C100 to "64H" in the PLC whose station number is 5 (while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)
This range is regarded as the sum check target.
B
E
N 0 5 F F W T 0 0 3 D 0 5 0 0 1 2 3 4 Y 0 1 0 0 B C A 9
Q
N:N Network
Computer side
05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 57H 54H 30H 30H 33H 44H 30H 35H 30H 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 59H 30H 31H 30H 30H 42H 43H 41H 39H
PLC side
B
This range is regarded as the
sum check target.
A
9
C
Parallel Link
Indicates that "1234H (which is "4660"
in decimal)" is written to D500.
C
1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
Y
1
1
7
Y
1
1
6
Y
1
1
5
Y
1
1
4
Y
1
1
3
Y
1
1
2
Y
1
1
1
Y
1
1
0
Y
1
0
7
Y
1
0
6
Y
1
0
5
Y
1
0
4
Y
1
0
3
Y
1
0
2
Y
1
0
1
Y
1
0
0
D
Computer Link
Each bit is reset (OFF) in the case of "0", and
set (ON) in the case of "0".
C N 1 0 0 0 0 6 4 0 7
43H 4EH 31H 30H 30H 30H 30H 36H 34H 30H 37H
A
C 0 5 F F
K
E
06H 30H 30H 46H 46H
Inverter
Communication
Indicates that "64H (which is "100" in decimal)"
is written to the current value of C100.
Common Items
2. Specification example
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-71
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
7.9
7 Commands
7.9 QT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Word Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)]
QT Command [Tests Device Memory in 1-Word Units (by Writing Arbitrarily)]
This section explains the control procedure specification method and shows a specification example when the
word device memory and bit device memory (in 16-point units) are specified arbitrarily and written all at once.
Word devices and bit devices (in 16-point units) can be specified together. However, the QT command cannot
handle 32-bit word devices C200 to C255 (CN00200 to CN00255).
This command is available only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
1. Specification method
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:
Message
wait time
Number of
device points
(2 characters)
PLC No.
QT
Station
No.
PLC No.
Computer side
E
N
Q
Station
No.
Command for test (by writing arbitrarily in 1-word units)
Character area A
Data on
devices
(4 characters)
Device
(7 characters)
Device
(7 characters)
Data on
devices
(4 characters)
Sum check
code
PLC side
A
C
K
1) Specify the device point range while satisfying the following conditions:
- 1  Number of device points  10 (in unit of 10 in case of bit devices (One unit indicates 16 points.))
2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.
3) Word devices and bit devices (in 16-point units) can be specified together.
4) The QT command cannot handle 32-bit word devices C200 to C255 (CN00200 to CN00255).
2. Specification example
When writing data for setting the current value of R12000 to "1234H" and Y100 to Y117 to "BCA9H" in the
PLC whose station number is 5 (while the message waiting time is set to 0 ms)
This range is regarded as the sum check target.
Computer side
E
N 0 5 F F Q T 0 0 2 R 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 2 3 4
Q
05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 51H 57H 30H 30H 32H 52H 30H 31H 32H 30H 30H 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H
PLC side
This range is regarded as the
sum check target.
Y 0 0 0 1 0 0 B C A 9 E 3
59H 30H 30H 30H 31H 30H 30H 42H 43H 41H 39H 45H 33H
A
C 0 5 F F
K
B
C
A
06H 30H 35H 46H 46H
9
1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
Y
1
1
7
D-72
Y
1
1
0
Y
1
0
7
Y
1
0
1
Y
1
0
0
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
A
RR/RS Command [Remotely Sets PLC to RUN/STOP Mode]
This section explains the control procedure specification method and shows a specification example when the
computer remotely sets the PLC mode to RUN or STOP.
B
7.10.1 Contents of remote control to set RUN or STOP mode
Remote control to set to
STOP mode
E
NO
Inverter
Communication
YES
Special auxiliary relay
M8037 is set to ON.
D
Computer Link
• Remote STOP mode control
When the RS command (which sets remote STOP mode in control) is executed in the computer, the PLC
executes the following processing.
If the RS command is executed while the PLC is in STOP mode, the PLC status does not change, and the
PLC returns the remote error code (18H) to the computer.
C
Parallel Link
• Remote RUN mode control
When the RR command (which sets remote RUN mode in control) is executed in the computer, the PLC
sets M8035 and M8036 to activate the forced RUN mode.
If the RR command is executed while the PLC is in RUN mode, however, the PLC status does not change,
and the PLC returns the remote error code (18H) to the computer.
N:N Network
When the computer executes remote control of the PLC mode to RUN or STOP, the forced RUN mode is
activated in the PLC, and the special auxiliary relays M8035, M8036 and M8037 are controlled as follows:
Forced RUN mode
Common Items
7.10
7 Commands
7.10 RR/RS Command [Remotely Sets PLC to RUN/STOP Mode]
PLC returns remote error code (18H) to
computer, and PLC status does not change.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Special auxiliary relays
M8035, M8036 and
M8037 are set to OFF.
PLC switches to
STOP mode.
G
• Remote STOP mode control
The PLC is in RUN mode (forced RUN mode) without using the RUN terminal or built-in RUN/STOP
selector switch.
When the PLC power is turned OFF and then ON after the RR command is executed by the computer, all of
the special auxiliary relays M8035, M8036 and M8037 are set to OFF. As a result, the PLC switches to STOP
mode.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Point
H
Programming
Communication
• Remote RUN mode control
The PLC is in STOP mode.
(The built-in RUN/STOP selector switch is set to STOP.)
(In an FX2(FX) or FX2C PLC, the RUN terminal in the PLC is OFF, and the built-in RUN/STOP selector
switch is set to STOP.)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
7.10.2 Condition validating remote control to set RUN or STOP mode
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-73
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
7.10 RR/RS Command [Remotely Sets PLC to RUN/STOP Mode]
7.10.3 Remote control specification method and specification examples
This subsection explains the control procedure specification method and specification examples when remote
RUN or STOP mode control is executed.
1. Specification method
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:
A
C
K
PLC No.
PLC side
Station
No.
Sum check
code
RR
or
RS
Message
wait time
Station
No.
Computer side
E
N
Q
PLC No.
RR command to remotely set the PLC to the RUN mode
RS command to remotely set the PLC to the STOP mode
Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal
respectively.
2. Specification examples
Example 1: When remotely setting the PLC whose station number is 5 to RUN mode (while the message
waiting time is set to 0 ms)
This range is regarded as
the sum check target.
Computer side
E
N 0 5 F F R R 0 C 5
Q
05H 30H 35H 46H 46H 52H 52H 30H 43H 35H
PLC side
A
C 0 5 F F
K
06H 30H 35H 46H 46H
Example 2: When remotely setting the PLC whose station number is 0 to STOP mode (while the message
waiting time is set to 0 ms)
This range is regarded as
the sum check target.
Computer side
PLC side
E
N 0 0 F F R S 0 C 1
Q
05H 30H 30H 46H 46H 52H 53H 30H 43H 31H
A
C 0 0 F F
K
06H 30H 30H 46H 46H
D-74
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
A
PC Command [Reads PLC Model Name]
This section explains the control procedure specification method and specification example when the model
name of a PLC linked to the computer is read.
B
7.11.1 PLC model name (CPU) and read contents
Model name code
(hexadecimal)
PLC model name (CPU)
8DH
A2CCPU
9AH
FX0N
8EH
A2USCPU
82H
FX1S
F2H
A2CPU-S1, A2USCPU-S1
83H
C
FX1N, FX1NC
9EH
A3CPU, A3NCPU
A3H
FX2N, FX2NC
9DH
A3ACPU
94H
FX3S
F5H
A3HCPU, A3MCPU
A4H
FX3G, FX3GC
F4H
A3UCPU
84H
FX3U, FX3UC
F3H
A4UCPU
85H
A0J2HCPU
98H
A52GCPU
9AH
A1CPU, A1NCPU
A1H
A73CPU
A3H
A1SCPU, A1SJCPU
98H
A7LMS-F
A3H
D
AJ72P25/R25
ABH
92H
AJ72LP25/BR15
8BH
A2ACPU-S1
93H
7.11.2 Control procedure specification method and specification example
1. Specification method
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
PLC model
name
(2 characters)
E
T
X
PLC No.
G
Sum check
code
PLC No.
S
T
X
Station
No.
Character area B
Station
No.
Sum check
code
Message
wait time
PLC No.
A
C
K
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
PLC side
Station
No.
PC command to read the PLC model name
Computer side
E
F
The specification method for control procedure format 1 is shown below:
PC
Computer Link
A2H
Inverter
Communication
A2CPU(-S1), A2NCPU(-S1), A2SCPU
A2ACPU
E
N
Q
Parallel Link
FX2(FX), FX2C
N:N Network
Model name code
(hexadecimal)
PLC model name (CPU)
Common Items
7.11
7.11 PC Command [Reads PLC Model Name]
Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal
respectively.
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-75
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
7 Commands
7.11 PC Command [Reads PLC Model Name]
2. Specification example
When reading the model name of the PLC whose station number is 15 (while the message waiting time is set
to 0 ms)
This range is regarded as
the sum check target.
Computer side
PLC side
E
N 0 F F F P C 0 C 5
Q
This range is regarded as
the sum check target.
05H 30H 46H 46H 46H 50H 43H 30H 43H 35H
A
C 0 F F F
K
06H 30H 46H 46H 46H
S
E
T 0 F F F 8 D T 8 1
X
X
02H 30H 46H 46H 46H 38H 44H 03H 38H 31H
The example above indicates that the model name of the target PLC is the FX2(FX) or FX2C Series.
D-76
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
A
GW Command [Offers Global Function]
7.12.1 Contents of control
• In the control procedure, specify the station number "FFH" so that all stations are handled as targets.
If any value other than "FFH" is specified, a special auxiliary relay is set to ON or OFF only in a station with
the specified station number.
• When the PLC power is turned OFF or when the PLC is set to STOP mode, the special auxiliary relay
M8126 or M8426 is set to OFF and the processing request in the global function is cleared.
7.12.2 Global function control procedure specification method and specification example
1. Specification method
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:
Factor
number
(1 character)
PLC side
Sum check
code
Message
wait time
PLC No.
GW
F
Character area A
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
E
N
Q
Computer side
Station
No.
GW command to execute
the global command
When the data value is "1 (31H)", M8126 or M8426 is set to ON.
When the data value is "0 (30H)", M8126 or M8426 is set to OFF.
2. Specification example
When setting to ON the special auxiliary relay M8126 of M8426 in all FX PLCs (In all of A Series PLCs in
computer link, however, Xn2 is set to ON.)
H
Programming
Communication
This range is regarded as the sum
check target.
E
N F F F F G W 0 1 1 7
Q
I
05H 46H 46H 46H 46H 47H 57H 30H 31H 31H 37H
Indicates that the special auxiliary relay M8126 or
M8426 is set to ON in target stations.
Remote
Maintenance
PLC side
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal
respectively.
Computer side
E
Inverter
Communication
This subsection explains the control procedure specification method and specification example when the
global function is executed from the computer.
D
Computer Link
• In this function, PLCs do not give any response to the GW command from the computer.
C
Parallel Link
The global function sets a special auxiliary relay to ON or OFF in all FX Series PLCs linked to the computer.
M8126 is set to ON or OFF in PLCs except the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC Series.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, M8126 is set to ON or OFF in computer link using ch1, and M8426 is
set to ON or OFF in computer link using ch2.
In A Series PLCs, Xn2 is set to ON or OFF for all PLCs linked to the computer.
B
N:N Network
The global function executed in the computer sets a special auxiliary relay to ON or OFF in all PLCs linked to
the computer in the multi-drop link method. For A Series PLCs, however, refer to the respective A Series PLC
manual.
This section explains the control procedure specification method and specification example when the global
function is used.
Common Items
7.12
7 Commands
7.12 GW Command [Offers Global Function]
Specify "FFH" for handling all stations as targets.
When handling only one station as a target, specify the station
number (ranging from 00 to 0F) of the target station.
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-77
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
7.13
7.13 On-demand Function
On-demand Function
When there is data to be sent from a PLC to the computer, the on-demand function can specify the data
register area storing the data to be sent, and let the PLC start sending.
When data is sent between the computer and a PLC, only the computer can start data transmission.
When there is emergency data to be sent from a PLC to the computer, the on-demand function is applicable
to let the PLC begin sending data to the computer.
PLC
Sequence
program
D8127
D8128
Head device number (n)
Data length (m)
Computer
D(n)
D(n+m-1)
Point
This function is applicable when the computer and the PLC CPU have the 1-to-1 configuration.
7.13.1 Special data registers and special auxiliary relays used in on-demand function
The tables below show the special data registers and special auxiliary relays used in the on-demand function.
1. In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs and when ch1 is used in FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Device
Name
On-demand send
M8127*1 processing
Remains ON while the on-demand function is being executed.
ON: On-demand data is being sent.
OFF: Sending of on-demand data is completed.
M8128
On-demand error flag
Turns ON when an error is included in a specified value to be sent in the ondemand function.
ON: Error is included.
OFF: Error is not included.
M8129
On-demand byte/word
changeover
Specifies the unit (byte or word) of data handled in the on-demand function.
ON: Unit = Byte (8-bit)
OFF: Unit = Word (16-bit)
D8127
On-demand head device
number specification
Sets the head data register device number containing the data to be sent
using the on-demand function in a sequence program.
D8128
On-demand data quantity
specification
Sets the amount of data to be sent using the on-demand function in a
sequence program.
*1.
D-78
Description
FX0N, FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs do not support this device.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
7.13 On-demand Function
A
Common Items
2. When ch2 is used in FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Description
M8427
On-demand send
processing
Remains ON while the on-demand function is being executed.
ON: On-demand data is being sent.
OFF: Sending of on-demand data is completed.
M8428
On-demand error flag
Turns ON when an error is included in a specified value to be sent in the ondemand function.
ON: Error is included.
OFF: Error is not included.
M8429
On-demand byte/word
changeover
Specifies the unit (byte or word) of data handled in the on-demand function.
ON: Unit = Byte (8-bit)
OFF: Unit = Word (16-bit)
D8427
On-demand head device
number specification
Sets the head data register device number containing the data to be sent
using the on-demand function in a sequence program.
D8428
On-demand data quantity
specification
Sets the amount of data to be sent using the on-demand function in a
sequence program.
B
C
Parallel Link
Name
N:N Network
Device
D
• The on-demand send processing signal (M8127 or M8427) turns ON when the PLC gives a request to
send data to the computer, and turns OFF when sending of the specified data is completed. Use this signal
for interlock to prevent giving two or more on-demand requests at the same time.
• While the on-demand send processing signal is ON, the PLC cannot receive commands sent from the
computer.
Computer Link
Point
E
Inverter
Communication
• Amount of on-demand data and number of data registers used for sending according to the unit
specification (word or byte)
When the specified unit is a word:
The amount of on-demand data is equivalent to the number of data registers to be sent.
F
Example: When the amount of on-demand data is "5", the number of data registers for sending is "3".
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
When the specified unit is a byte:
Two on-demand data units use one data register for sending.
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-79
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
7.13 On-demand Function
7.13.2 Control procedures in on-demand function
This subsection explains the control procedures for the on-demand function.
When using ch2 in an FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC Series PLC, exchange special auxiliary relays (M) and
special data registers (D) according to the table below.
All PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs (ch1)
FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs (ch2)
M8127*1
M8427
M8128
M8129
*1.
M8428

M8429
D8127
D8427
D8128
D8428
FX0N, FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs do not support this device.
1) Control procedure in the PLC
Sending of on-demand data
Checks unit (word or byte) of
data to be sent
........ It is checked whether M8129 is ON or OFF.
ON: Unit = byte (8-bit)
OFF: Unit = word (16-bit)
Writes data to be sent to data
registers
........ Data to be sent is written to data registers.
Resets on-demand error
........ The on-demand error flag M8128 turns OFF.
(While M8128 is ON, the on-demand function is disabled.)
Starts on-demand function
........ The head device (data register) number storing the ondemand data is written to D8127, and the amount of data is
written to D8128.
When a request is accepted, M8127 is set to ON.
When sending is complete, M8127 turns OFF.
Checks for sending error
When there
is error
When there is
no error
Sending is completed
D-80
........ If the on-demand error flag M8128 is ON, it means that data
was not sent due to an error in the specified value to be sent.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
7.13 On-demand Function
A
Common Items
2) Control procedure in the computer
Receiving of on-demand data
"FE", the received data should be processed as on-demand
data.
Data processing
C
Parallel Link
Completion of receiving
3) Time chart when the on-demand function is requested
While the computer is sending data
E
N
Q
D
A
C
K
[2] On-demand data
[3]
PLC side
Computer Link
Computer side
E
Inverter
Communication
S
T
X
On-demand send processing
M8127
[1]
F
Writes data to be sent and
amount of data to be sent.
PLC
[3]
H
S
T
X
[1]
I
[2]
Remote
Maintenance
On-demand send processing
M8127
PLC
A
C
K
Programming
Communication
PLC side
On-demand data
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
While the computer is receiving data
E
N
Q
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
[1] As soon as an on-demand request is given, the on-demand send processing signal M8127 turns ON.
[2] After receiving of command data (ENQ ~) from the computer is completed, the PLC sends on-demand
data.
[3] After the sending of on-demand data is complete, the PLC sends response data (STX ~) to the
command data (ENQ ~).
Computer side
B
N:N Network
Judges whether receive data is ........ To the on-demand data, the PLC adds "FE" as the PLC
on-demand data or data given
number. Only when the PLC number of the received data is
by command execution.
Writes data to be sent and
amount of data to be sent.
D-81
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
[1] As soon as an on-demand request is given, the on-demand send processing signal M8127 turns ON.
[2] After the sending of response data (STX ~) to the command data (ENQ ~) from the computer is
completed, the PLC sends on-demand data.
[3] After the receiving of on-demand data is complete, the computer sends response data (ACK ~) to the
sending of the response data (STX ~) from the PLC.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
7.13 On-demand Function
7.13.3 On-demand function specification method and specification examples
This subsection explains the on-demand function specification method and specification examples.
When using ch2 in an FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC Series PLC, exchange special auxiliary relays (M) and
special data registers (D) according to the table below.
All PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs (ch1)
FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs (ch2)
M8127*1
M8427
M8128
M8428

M8129
*1.
M8429
D8127
D8427
D8128
D8428
FX0N, FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs do not support this device.
1. Specification method
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:
Added by PLC
On-demand send processing
M8127
PLC
Writes data to be sent and
amount of data to be sent.
ON
Data to be
sent
E
T
X
Sum check
code
S
T
X
PLC No.
PLC side
Station
No.
Computer side
OFF
Write the head device number (data register)
storing the data to be sent to the special data
register D8127.
Write the amount of data to the special data
register D8218.
1) Specify the data quantity specification range while satisfying the following condition:
- Amount of data  40H (= 64 in decimal)
2) The PLC adds "FE" as the PLC number.
3) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal.
IMPORTANT
Do not use the on-demand function when the system configuration is not 1-to-1 type.
If the on-demand function is used in the multi-drop link system in which the computer and PLC CPUs have
the 1-to-N configuration, the transfer data and on-demand send data in the control procedure format 1 or 4
are destroyed, and normal data sending is not possible.
D-82
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
7.13 On-demand Function
A
When sending the data stored in the data registers D100 and D101 by a trigger from a sequence program
(when the station number is 0 and the data unit to be sent is set to "word")
The PLC number "FE" is automatically added by the PLC.
Computer side
PLC side
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
B
E
T 9 2
X
N:N Network
S
T 0 0 F E
X
02H 30H 30H 46H 45H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 38H 03H 39H 32H
M8127
On-demand
command [1]
D8127
D8128
100
2
C
M8128 ON/OFF
M8129
OFF
[2]
D100
D101
1234H
5678H
It turns ON when an error is
included in the specified
value for sending.
Data is sent in 4-bit units
starting from highest-order bits.
D
Computer Link
Sequence program example
0
3
40
M8127
M8127 M8128
M8127 M8128
M0
MOV
H1234
D100
MOV
H5678
D101
RST
M8128
RST
Y000
RST
Y001
MOV
K100
D8127
MOV
K2
D8128
SET
Y000
SET
Y001
E
........ Data to be sent is set.
The on-demand error flag is reset.
........ (The on-demand function is disabled while
M8128 is ON.)
F
The head device number storing the data to be
........ sent and the amount of data are specified, and
the on-demand function is started up.
........ On-demand error is checked for, and the check
result is output.
END
M8128
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
37
M0
PLS
........ The data unit is set to "word" value.
The startup command is the pulse operation
........
type.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
33
M8129
M8002
Inverter
Communication
7
M8000
X000
Parallel Link
PLC
Writes data to be
sent and amount of
data to be sent.
Common Items
2. Specification example 1
H
OFF: Data is sent normally.
Programming
Communication
ON: Data is not sent because an
error occurred.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-83
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
7.13 On-demand Function
3. Specification example 2
When sending the data stored in the data registers D100 and D101 by a trigger from a sequence program
(when the station number is 0 and the data unit to be sent is set to "byte")
The PLC number "FE" is automatically added by the PLC.
Computer side
PLC side
S
T 0 0 F E
X
3 4 1 2
7 8 5 6
E
T 9 2
X
02H 30H 30H 46H 45H 31H 32H 33H 34H 37H 38H 35H 36H 03H 39H 32H
M8127
PLC
Writes data to be
sent and amount of
data to be sent.
On-demand
command [1]
D8127
D8128
100
4
M8128 ON/OFF
M8129
ON
[2]
D100
D101
1234H
5678H
It turns ON when an error is
included in the specified
value for sending.
Data is sent in 4-bit units, in
the order "lowest-order 8-bit 
highest-order 8-bit".
Sequence program example
0
3
7
33
37
40
M8000
M8129
X000
M8002
M0
M8127
M8127 M8128
M8127 M8128
PLS
M0
MOV
H1234
D100
MOV
H5678
D101
RST
M8128
RST
Y000
RST
Y001
MOV
K100
D8127
MOV
K4
D8128
SET
Y000
SET
Y001
........ The data unit is set to "byte" value.
........ The startup command is the pulse operation type.
........ Data to be sent is set.
The on-demand error flag is reset.
........ (The on-demand function is disabled while M8128 is
ON.)
The head device number storing the data to be sent
........ and the amount of data are specified, and the ondemand function is started up.
........ On-demand error is checked for, and the check result
is output.
END
M8128
OFF: Data is sent normally.
ON: Data is not sent because an
error occurred.
D-84
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Commands
Computer Link
A
TT Command [Loop-back Test]
The loop-back test function checks whether or not communication between the computer and a PLC is normal.
This section explains the control procedure specification method and specification example when the loopback test function is used.
The specification method in the control procedure format 1 is shown below:
Data
(Data for
character
length)
E
T
X
Sum check
code
Character
length
S
T
X
2 characters (hexadecimal)
PLC No.
PLC side
C
2 characters (hexadecimal)
Station
No.
Data
(Data for
character
length)
Sum check
code
Character
length
Message
wait time
PLC No.
TT
Character area A
Parallel Link
E
N
Q
Computer side
Station
No.
Loop-back test command
D
Character area B
2) Express the station number, PLC number, number of device points and sum check code in hexadecimal
respectively.
When executing the loop-back test to the PLC whose station number is 0 using the data "ABCDE" (while the
message waiting time is set to 0 ms)
This range is regarded as the
sum check target.
F
E
N 0 0 F F T T 0 0 5 A B C D E 7 8
Q
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
PLC side
E
Inverter
Communication
2. Specification example
Computer Link
1) Specify the character length specification range while satisfying the following condition:
- 1  Character length  254
Computer side
B
N:N Network
1. Specification method
Common Items
7.14
7.14 TT Command [Loop-back Test]
This range is regarded as
the sum check target.
05H 30H 30H 46H 46H 54H 54H 30H 30H 35H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 37H 38H
S
E
T 0 0 F F 0 5 A B C D E T A 3
X
X
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
02H 30H 30H 46H 46H 30H 35H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 03H 41H 33H
Both data should be equivalent.
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-85
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
8.
8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Checking FX PLC Version Applicability
Troubleshooting
This chapter explains troubleshooting.
8.1
Checking FX PLC Version Applicability
Verify that the FX PLC main unit is an applicable version.
For the version applicability check, refer to Section 1.3.
8.2
Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication
Check the status of the "RD(RXD)" and "SD(TXD)" indicator LEDs provided in the optional equipment.
LED status
Operation status
RD(RXD)
SD(TXD)
Flashing
Flashing
Flashing
Off
Data is received, but is not sent.
Off
Flashing
Data is sent, but is not received.
Off
Off
Data is being sent or received.
Data is not sent or received.
While computer link is executed normally, both LEDs flash brightly.
If they do not flash, check the wiring, station number settings and communication setting.
8.3
Checking Installation and Wiring
1. Mounting status
If the communication equipment is not securely connected to the PLC, communication is not possible.
For mounting method, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.
2. Power supply (for FX0N-485ADP)
The FX0N-485ADP requires a driving power supply. Verify that the power supply is provided correctly.
3. Wiring
Verify that the wiring to all communication equipment is correct. If the communication equipment is wired
incorrectly, communication is not possible.
For wiring method check, refer to Chapter 4.
8.4
Checking Sequence Program
1. Communication setting in the sequence program
Verify that the parallel link and N:N Network are not set. Verify that the communication format (D8120, D8400
and D8420) is set correctly. Communication is not possible if a communication port is set twice or more.
After changing any setting, make sure to reboot the PLC’s power.
2. Communication setting using parameters
Verify that the communication settings using parameters is suitable to the purpose of use.
If the communication settings are not suitable to the purpose of use, communication will not function correctly.
After changing any setting, make sure to reboot the PLC’s power.
3. Ethernet port setting (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the same channel is not used in the Ethernet port setting. Do not set the channel used in computer link.
After changing the setting, make sure to reboot the PLC's power.
D-86
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
8 Troubleshooting
8.4 Checking Sequence Program
A
Common Items
4. Presence of VRRD and VRSC instructions
1) Except FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, reboot the PLC’s power.
2) In FX3G PLC
- In the case of the 14 points and 24-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, reboot the PLC's power.
- In the case of the 40 points and 60-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch2.
Use ch1, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, reboot the PLC's power.
B
N:N Network
C
Parallel Link
3) In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch1.
Use ch2, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, reboot the PLC's power.
D
Computer Link
5. Presence of RS instruction (except FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the RS instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, reboot the PLC’s power.
6. Presence of RS and RS2 instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
E
Inverter
Communication
Verify that the RS and RS2 instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLC’s power.
7. Presence of EXTR instruction (in FX2N and FX2NC PLCs)
Verify that the EXTR instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, then reboot the PLC’s power.
F
Verify that the IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR and IVMC instructions are not being used for the same
channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLC’s power.
*1.
Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
8. Presence of IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, IVBWR*1, and IVMC instructions (in FX3S, FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
G
Verify that the ADPRW instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, and reboot the PLC’s power.
10.Presence of FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD, and FLSTRD instructions (in FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs)
H
Programming
Communication
Verify that the FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD and FLSTRD instructions are not being used for the
same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLC’s power.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
9. Presence of ADPRW instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-87
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
8 Troubleshooting
8.5 Checking Error Codes
8.5
Checking Error Codes
8.5.1
Error codes when NAK is sent
The table below shows error codes and contents of errors when NAK is sent in communication between the
computer and a PLC.
As an error code, a two-digit ASCII code (hexadecimal) within the range from 00H to FFH is sent.
When two or more errors occur at the same time, priority is given to the error code with the smallest number,
and the error code with the smallest number is sent.
When any error shown below occurs, the entire transfer sequence is initialized.
Error code list
Error code
(hexadecimal)
Contents of error
Sum check error has occurred.
The sum check code included in the
received data is different from the sum
value calculated from the received data.
Action
Check the data sent from the computer
and the contents of the sum check.
Modify either one, and then execute
communication again.
02H
Sum check
error
03H
The communication protocol is
1) Check the contents of parameters
abnormal.
and the contents of control
A control procedure set using
procedure. Modify either contents,
parameters was ignored, and a different
and then execute communication
control procedure was adopted in
again.
Protocol error
communication. Or the adopted control
2) Refer to the command list shown in
procedure was partially different from the
Chapter 7, modify the specified
preset control procedure. Or a command
command etc., and then execute
specified in the preset control procedure
communication again.
does not exist.
06H
Character
area error
An error occurred in the character area
A, B or C. Or a specified command does 1) Check the contents of the character
areas A, B and C, modify the
not exist.
contents if necessary, and then
1) The control procedure set using
execute communication again.
parameters is different.
2) Refer to "2.2.2 Applicable device
2) A specified device number does not
ranges", modify the number of
exist in the target PLC.
characters used to specify the device
3) A device number is not set with the
number, and then execute
specified number of characters (5 or
communication again.
7 characters).
07H
Character
error
Check the data to be written to the
ASCII code data to be written to a device
device, modify it if necessary, and then
is not hexadecimal.
execute communication again.
0AH
10H
18H
D-88
Error item
A station with the corresponding PLC
number does not exist.
Check the PLC number included in the
message, modify it if necessary, and
then execute communication again.
The PLC number should be "FFH" in all
FX Series PLCs.
PLC number
error
A station with the corresponding PLC
number does not exist.
Check the PLC number included in the
message, modify it if necessary, and
then execute communication again.
The PLC number should be "FFH" in all
FX Series PLCs.
Remote
control error
Remote control to set the RUN or STOP
mode is disabled.
Set the PLC mode to RUN or STOP
The RUN or STOP mode is determined
using the forced RUN mode.
in the PLC hardware (by using the RUN/
STOP selector switch, etc.).
PLC number
error
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
A
Error codes in PLC
Device
The transfer data is abnormal.
Check the transfer specifications
set using parameters, and
execute communication again.
6305
Command error
When the station number was FF,
any command other than "GW"
was received.
Check the specified command,
modify it if necessary, and then
execute communication again.
6306
Monitoring timeout
The received message was
insufficient. Because normal
message was not received within
the time-out time setting, the
transfer sequence was initialized.
The message is insufficient.
Check the transfer program in the
computer, modify it if necessary,
and then execute communication
again.
3801
Parity, overrun or
framing error
The transfer data is abnormal.
Check the transfer specifications
set using parameters, and
execute communication again.
3805
Command error
When the station number was FF,
any command other than "GW"
was received.
Check the specified command,
modify it if necessary, and then
execute communication again.
Monitoring timeout
The received message was
insufficient. Because normal
message was not received within
the time-out time setting the
transfer sequence was initialized.
The message is insufficient.
Check the transfer program in the
computer, modify it if necessary,
and then execute communication
again.
3806
E
F
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Serial communication errors and serial communication error code are not cleared even when communication
is restored.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.
D
Computer Link
Parity, overrun or
framing error
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
6301
Action
Inverter
Communication
D8438
(ch2)
Error item
Parallel Link
D8063
(ch1)
C
Error
code
Contents of error
B
N:N Network
When an error is included in a message sent from the computer to a PLC, an error occurs in the PLC.
When such an error occurs, the serial communication error flag turns ON.
When PLCs other then FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs are used or when ch1 is used in an FX3G,
FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC PLC, the special auxiliary relay M8063 turns ON as an error flag. When ch2 is used in
an FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U or FX3UC PLC, the special auxiliary relay M8438 turns ON as an error flag.
When a serial communication error occurs, the error code is stored in D8063 if M8063 turns ON, or stored in
D8438 if M8438 turns ON.
The error code list is shown below:
Common Items
8.5.2
8 Troubleshooting
8.5 Checking Error Codes
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-89
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Related Data
Computer Link
9.
9.1
9.1 Related Device List
Related Data
Related Device List
1. Bit devices
Device
Name
Description
R/W
M8063
Serial communication error 1
Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication using
ch 1.
R
M8120
Communication setting keep
Keeps the communication setting status (for FX0N PLCs).
Global function ON
Turns ON or OFF when the global command (GW) is received
from the computer (for ch 1).
R
On-demand send processing
Remains ON while the on-demand function is being executed
(for ch 1).
ON: On-demand data is being sent.
OFF: Sending of on-demand data is completed.
R
M8128
On-demand error flag
Turns ON when an error is included in a specified value for
data sending used in the on-demand function (for ch 1).
R
M8129
On-demand data byte/word
switch
Specifies the unit (byte or word) of data handled in the ondemand function (for ch 1).
ON: Unit = Byte (8-bit)
OFF: Unit = Word (16-bit)
R/W
M8426
Global function ON
Turns ON or OFF when the global command (GW) is received
from the computer (for ch 2).
R
M8427
On-demand send processing
Remains ON while the on-demand function is being executed
(for ch 2).
ON: On-demand data is being sent.
OFF: Sending of on-demand data is completed.
R
M8428
On-demand error flag
Turns ON when an error is included in a specified value for
data sending used in the on-demand function (for ch 2).
R
M8429
On-demand data byte/word
switch
Specifies the data unit (byte or word) handled in the ondemand function (for ch 2).
ON: Unit = Byte (8-bit)
OFF: Unit = Word (16-bit)
M8438
Serial communication error 2
Turns ON when an error occurs in serial communication using
ch 2.
M8126
M8127
*1
R: Read only
R/W: Read or Write
*1.
D-90
FX0N, FX1S, FX1N and FX1NC PLCs do not support this device.
R/W
R/W
R
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Related Data
Computer Link
9.1 Related Device List
A
Device
Name
Description
R/W
Stores the error code when an error occurs in serial
communication (for ch 1).
D8120
Communication format setting
Sets the communication format (for ch 1).
R/W
D8121
Station number settings
Sets the station number in computer link (for ch 1).
R/W
D8127
On-demand data head device
number specification
Sets the head data register device number containing the data
to be sent using the on-demand function (for ch 1).
R/W
D8128
On-demand data quantity
specification
Sets the amount of data to be sent using the on-demand
function (for ch 1).
R/W
D8129
Time-out time setting
Sets the evaluation time for error when the receiving of data
from the computer is interrupted (for ch 1).
R/W
D8063
R
Communication format setting
Sets the communication format (for ch 2).
R/W
R
D8421
Station number settings
Sets the station number in computer link (for ch 2).
R/W
D8427
On-demand data head device
number specification
Sets the head data register device number containing the data
to be sent using the on-demand function (for ch 2).
R/W
D8428
On-demand data quantity
specification
Sets the amount of data to be sent using the on-demand
function (for ch 2).
R/W
D8429
Time-out time setting
Sets the evaluation time for error when the receiving of data
from the computer is interrupted (for ch 2).
R/W
D8438
Serial communication error
code 2
Stores the error code when an error occurs in serial
communication (for ch 2).
D8439
Operation mode display (ch 2) Stores the communication type being used (for ch 2).
R
R
D
Computer Link
Operation mode display (ch 1) Stores the communication type being used (for ch 1).
D8420
C
Parallel Link
D8419
B
N:N Network
Serial communication error
code 1
Common Items
2. Word devices
E
Inverter
Communication
R: Read only
R/W: Read or Write
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-91
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
9.2
9 Related Data
9.2 Details of Related Devices
Details of Related Devices
The devices described below are used for computer link.
9.2.1
Serial communication error [M8063 and M8438]
These devices turn ON when an error occurs during serial communication.
1. Detailed contents
These devices work as the serial communication error flags.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port, M8063 turns ON.
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1, M8063 turns ON.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch2, M8438 turns ON.
When serial communication error flags turn ON, a corresponding error code is stored in D8063 and D8438.
2. Cautions on use
Serial communication errors code are not cleared even when communication is restored.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.
9.2.2
Communication setting keep [M8120]
Set this device to ON in a sequence program so that the communication setting is kept (for FX0N PLCs).
1. Detailed contents
In an FX0N PLC, set M8120 to ON in a sequence program so that the communication format setting and
station number settings are kept.
2. Cautions on use
In an FX0N PLC, the communication setting status is kept only when M8120 is set to ON.
In any PLC other than FX0N PLCs, setting of M8120 is not required.
9.2.3
Global function ON [M8126 and M8426]
These devices turn ON/OFF when the PLC receives the global command (GW) from personal computers.
1. Detailed contents
When the computer sends the global command, the global ON flag turns ON or OFF in all connected stations.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port, M8126 turns ON or
OFF.
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1, M8126 turns ON or OFF.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch2, M8426 turns ON or OFF.
2. Cautions on use
The global ON flag turns OFF from ON when the PLC power is turned OFF or when the PLC mode is
changed to STOP.
9.2.4
On-demand send processing [M8127 and M8427]
These devices remain ON while the on-demand function is being executed.
1. Detailed contents
When a PLC gives data sending request using the on-demand function, the on-demand send processing flag
turns ON.
In FX2(FX), FX2C, FX2N, FX2NC and FX3S PLCs and in FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the
communication port ch1, M8127 turns ON/OFF.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch2, M8427 turns ON/OFF.
2. Cautions on use
Use these devices for interlock to prevent generation of two or more on-demand requests at the same time.
D-92
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Related Data
Computer Link
A
On-demand error flag [M8128 and M8428]
These devices turn ON when an error is included in a specified value for data sending used with the ondemand function.
1. Detailed contents
2. Cautions on use
C
Parallel Link
While the on-demand error flag is ON, data sending is disabled for the on-demand function.
When sending data from a PLC using the on-demand function, set to OFF the on-demand error flag.
9.2.6
B
N:N Network
When the amount of on-demand data is incorrect, the on-demand error flag turns ON.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port, M8128 turns ON.
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1, M8128 turns ON.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch2, M8428 turns ON.
Common Items
9.2.5
9.2 Details of Related Devices
On-demand data word/byte changeover [M8129 and M8429]
These devices specify the unit (word or byte) of on-demand data.
D
1. Detailed contents
Computer Link
Use this device to specify the data unit sent using the on-demand function.
Set these devices to ON to specify "byte" (8-bit). Set these devices to OFF to specify "word" (16-bit).
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port, use M8129.
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1, use M8129.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch2, use M8429.
E
2. Cautions on use
9.2.7
F
Serial communication error code [D8063 and D8438]
1. Detailed contents
Parity, overrun or
framing error
The transfer data is abnormal.
6305
Command error
When the station number was FF, any command other than "GW"
was received.
6306
Monitoring timeout
The received message was insufficient. Because normal message
was not received within the time-out time setting, the transfer
sequence was initialized.
3801
Parity, overrun or
framing error
The transfer data is abnormal.
3805
Command error
When the station number was FF, any command other than "GW"
was received.
Monitoring timeout
The received message was insufficient. Because normal message
was not received within the time-out time setting, the transfer
sequence was initialized.
3806
D-93
H
I
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
6301
Contents of error
Remote
Maintenance
D8438
(ch2)
Error item
Programming
Communication
D8063
(ch1)
Error
code
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
When the serial communication error flag (M8063 or M8438) turns ON, a corresponding error code is stored
in these devices.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port, an error code is
stored in D8063.
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1, an error code is stored in
D8063.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch2, an error code is stored in D8438.
The error code list is shown below:
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
These devices store the error codes during serial communication.
Device
Inverter
Communication
When the unit is set to "word", the amount of on-demand data units is equivalent to the number of data
registers for sending.
When the unit is set to "byte", two on-demand data units use one data register for sending.
Example: When the amount of on-demand data is "5", the amount of data registers for sending is "3".
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Related Data
Computer Link
9.2 Details of Related Devices
2. Cautions on use
Error codes are not cleared even after communication recovers its normal status.
Serial communication errors are cleared in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs when the power is
turned off and on.
Serial communication errors are cleared in other PLCs when the mode is switched from STOP to RUN.
9.2.8
Communication format setting [D8120 and D8420]
These devices set the serial communication format.
1. Detailed contents
These devices set the serial communication format. In FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, the contents set in parameters are transferred to these devices when the power is
turned ON.
In FX2(FX), FX2C and FX0N PLCs, set the communication format using a sequence program, and then turn
ON the power.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using communication port ch1, use D8120.
Set the communication format using parameters when using the communication port ch2 in FX3G, FX3GC,
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
Use D8420 for confirmation.
The tables below show the setting details.
• Contents of D8120
Bit No.
Name
b0
Data length
b1
b2
Parity
b3
Stop bit
b4
b5
b6
b7
Baud rate
(bps)
Contents
0 (bit = OFF)
1 (bit = ON)
7-bit
8-bit
b2, b1
(0, 0): Not provided
(0, 1): Odd
(1, 1): Even
1-bit
b7, b6, b5, b4
(0, 1, 1, 1): 4800
(1, 0, 0, 0): 9600
(1, 0, 0, 1): 19200
(0, 1, 1, 0): 2400
(1, 0, 1, 0): 38400*1
b8
Header
Not provided
Provided (D8124) Initial value: STX (02H)
b9
Terminator
Not provided
Provided (D8125) Initial value: ETX (03H)
b10
b11
Control line
Computer
link
b11, b10
(0, 0): RS-485/RS-422 interface
(1, 0): RS-232C interface
b12
*1.
D-94
2-bit
b7, b6, b5, b4
(0, 0, 1, 1): 300
(0, 1, 0, 0): 600
(0, 1, 0, 1): 1200
Not applicable
b13
Sum check
Not added
Added
b14
Protocol
Not used
Used
b15
Control
procedure
Format 1
Format 4
This setting is available only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Related Data
Computer Link
9.2 Details of Related Devices
A
Bit No.
Name
b0
Data length
Parity
b3
Stop bit
Baud rate
(bps)
1 (bit = ON)
7-bit
8-bit
b2, b1
(0, 0): Not provided
(0, 1): Odd
(1, 1): Even
B
1-bit
b7, b6, b5, b4
(0, 0, 1, 1): 300
(0, 1, 0, 0): 600
(0, 1, 0, 1): 1200
(0, 1, 1, 0): 2400
2-bit
b7, b6, b5, b4
(0, 1, 1, 1): 4800
(1, 0, 0, 0): 9600
(1, 0, 0, 1): 19200
(1, 0, 1, 0): 38400
C
b8
Header
Not provided
Provided
b9
Terminator
Not provided
Provided
b10
b11
b12
Control line
b13
Sum check
Not added
Added
b14
Protocol
Not used
Used
b15
Control
procedure
Format 1
Format 4
b12, b11, b10
(0, 0, 0): RS-485/RS-422 interface
(0, 1, 0): RS-232C interface
D
Computer Link
Computer
link
Parallel Link
b4
b5
b6
b7
Contents
0 (bit = OFF)
N:N Network
b1
b2
Common Items
• Contents of D8420
E
9.2.9
Station number settings [D8121 and D8421]
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Do not use both the parameters and communication format setting devices (D8120 or D8420) at the same
time. If the communication format is set using both methods at the same time, priority is given to the setting
using parameters.
When setting the communication format device (D8120) in an FX0N PLC, set the communication setting
latched (battery backed) device (M8120) to ON.
When using computer link, make sure to set the header (b8) and terminator (b9) to "not provided". And set the
protocol (b14) to "used".
If the communication format is set using the special data register, the setting becomes valid when the power
is turned ON after the setting is written to the special data register.
Inverter
Communication
2. Cautions on use
G
1. Detailed contents
Do not use both the parameters and station number settings device (D8121) at the same time. If the station
number is set using both methods at the same time, priority is given to the setting using a parameter.
When setting the station number settings device (D8121) in an FX0N PLC, set the communication setting
latched (battery backed) device (M8120) to ON.
I
Remote
Maintenance
2. Cautions on use
H
Programming
Communication
Set the station number of each PLC used in computer link. The applicable setting range is from 0 to 15 (from
H00 to H0F).
In FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, the contents set using
parameters are stored when the power is turned ON.
In FX2(FX), FX2C and FX0N PLCs, set the station number using a sequence program, and then turn ON the
power.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs and in FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using
communication port ch1, use D8121.
Set the station number using parameters when using the communication port ch2 in FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs.
Use D8421 for confirmation.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
These devices set the station number in computer link.
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-95
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
9 Related Data
9.2 Details of Related Devices
9.2.10 On-demand data head device number specification [D8127 and D8427]
These devices set the head data register device number containing the data to be sent using the on-demand
function in a sequence program.
1. Detailed contents
These devices set the head data register device number containing the data to be sent using the on-demand
function.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs and in FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using
the communication port, use D8127.
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1, use D8127.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch2, use D8427.
If there is an error in the set data, the on-demand error flag (M8128 or M8428) turns ON.
2. Cautions on use
When setting the on-demand data head device number specification device (D8127 or D8427), set the flag
using the pulse operation type.
While the on-demand send processing flag (M8127 or M8427) is ON, do not write data.
9.2.11 On-demand data quantity specification [D8128 and D8428]
These devices set the amount of data to be sent from a PLC using the on-demand function in a sequence
program.
1. Detailed contents
These devices set the amount of data to be sent using the on-demand function. Set the amount of data 64 or
less.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port, use D8128.
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1, use D8128.
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch2, use D8428.
If an error is included in the set data, the on-demand error flag (M8128 or M8428) turns ON.
2. Cautions on use
When setting the on-demand data quantity specification device (D8128 or D8428), set the flag using the pulse
operation type.
While the on-demand send processing flag (M8127 or M8427) is ON, do not write data.
D-96
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Related Data
Computer Link
9.2 Details of Related Devices
A
These devices set the evaluation time for error when receiving of data from the computer is interrupted.
1. Detailed contents
Setting range
1 to 255 (10 to 2550 ms) (When "0" is set, it is handled as "100 ms".)
FX2(FX), FX2C, FX2N, FX2NC,
1 to 3276 (10 to 32760 ms) (When "0" is set, it is handled as "100 ms".)
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
D
2. Cautions on use
These devices store the communication type being used. (in the FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC)
1. Detailed contents
The table below shows the contents of the communication type codes.
G
Description
Programming communication
PP modem mode
2
Protocol dedicated to computer link
3
N:N Network
4
RS instruction
5
RS2 instruction
6
Parallel link
7
Inverter instruction
8
Variable analog potentiometer expansion board is used.
MODBUS communication
CF-ADP
11
ENET-ADP
12
Input/output expansion board is used.
I
Remote
Maintenance
9
10
H
Programming
Communication
1
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
0
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
These devices store the code of the communication type currently being used in the communication port.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8419 stores the communication type.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8439 stores the communication type.
E
Inverter
Communication
9.2.13 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439]
Computer Link
Do not set the time-out time setting parameter and the time-out time (D8129) at the same time. The priority is
given to the parameter setting.
When setting the time-out time setting device (D8129) in an FX0N PLC, set the communication setting latched
(battery backed) device (M8120) to ON.
Make sure that the time-out time setting is not shorter than the time required to receive one character at the
set baud rate.
Code
C
Parallel Link
FX Series
FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC
B
N:N Network
These devices set the error evaluation time in 10-ms units used when the receiving of data from the computer
is interrupted.
In all PLCs except FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port, use D8129.
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs using the communication port ch1, use D8129.
Set the time-out time setting using parameters when using the communication port ch2 in FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U
and FX3UC PLCs.
Use D8429 for confirmation.
The table below shows the setting range.
Common Items
9.2.12 Time-out time setting [D8129 and D8429]
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-97
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Related Data
Computer Link
9.3
9.3 Communication Setting Method Using Sequence Program
Communication Setting Method Using Sequence Program
When adjusting the communication setting using a sequence program, transfer values to D8120
(communication format), D8121 (station number settings) and D8129 (time-out time setting), and then turn
the power ON.
This section explains the communication setting method using a sequence program.
9.3.1
Setting procedure
Perform the following procedure to set the communication using a sequence program.
1
Creating a program using a programming tool
Create the program shown below using a programming tool.
M8000
M8002
Initial pulse
M8120
This step is required only in FX0N PLC.
FNC 12
MOV
H6082
D8120
The communication format is set.
FNC 12
MOV
H0
D8121
The station number is set.
FNC 12
MOV
K1
D8129
The time-out time setting is set.
For details on these devices, refer to Section 9.2.
2
Writing the sequence program to the PLC
Transfer the created program to the PLC.
3
Setting the PLC mode to RUN
Set the PLC to RUN mode, and execute the program.
4
Turning the PLC power OFF and then ON
Turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn it to ON so that the communication setting becomes valid.
9.3.2
Caution on communication setting using sequence program
1) Do not set the communication using a sequence program and parameters at the same time.
If the communication is set using both methods at the same time, priority is given to the setting using
parameters.
2) Since the special data registers (D8120, D8121, D8129) is a battery backed area in the case of the FX2N,
FX2NC, FX3U and FX3UC series, a value cannot be normally saved when the battery is discharge (or after
a battery error occurs).
Therefore, keep in mind that a computer link setting may not be possible in this case.
D-98
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
A
ASCII Code Table
Common Items
9.4
9 Related Data
9.4 ASCII Code Table
<ASCII code table (8-bit code expressed in hexadecimal)>
The ASCII codes A1H to DFH indicate Japanese characters.
B
N:N Network
C
Parallel Link
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
*1.
\ (ASCII CODE:5C) symbol is displayed as " " in Japanese.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
D-99
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Computer Link
MEMO
D-100
9 Related Data
9.4 ASCII Code Table
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
A
Common Items
B
N:N Network
FX Series Programmable Controllers
C
Parallel Link
User's Manual [Data Communication Edition]
E. Inverter Communication
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
Foreword
I
© 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
E-1
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
Remote
Maintenance
This manual explains "inverter communication" provided for the MELSEC-F FX Series Programmable
Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
E-2
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
Inverter Communication
1.1 Outline of System
A
Common Items
1.
Outline
B
This chapter explains inverter communication.
N:N Network
1.1
Outline of System
1) Mitsubishi Electric general-purpose inverters FREQROL F800, A800, F700, A700, E700, D700, V500,
F500, A500, E500 and S500 (containing the communication type) Series can be linked.
(FX2N and FX2NC PLCs support only the A500, E500, and S500 (containing the communication function)
Series inverters.)
3) The total extension distance is 500m (1640' 5") maximum (for the system configured with 485ADP only).
Important points and reference
chapter/paragraph
System
FX PLC
Inverter
Inverter
+
+
+
G
Built-in PU port
For selection,
in accordance ....... refer to Chapter 3.
with RS-485
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Built-in PU port
in accordance
with RS-485
For the communication
setting of inverters,
refer to Chapter 5.
wiring,
....... For
refer to Chapter 4.
Master station
Station No. 1
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
....... To check available PLC
models, refer to Section 1.3.
......
Communication
equipment
operating in
accordance with
RS-485
E
....... Number of linked units
....... Total extension distance
For the specifications,
refer to Chapter 2.
Inverter
Communication
Up to eight inverters
500m (1640' 5") [50m (164' 0") when 485BD is included]
D
Computer Link
2) Inverter operations can be monitored, various command can be given to inverters, and parameters can
be read or written in inverters.
C
Parallel Link
Inverter communication allows connection between an FX PLC and up to eight inverters to monitor operations
of inverters, give various commands to inverters and read and write inverter parameters through
communication via RS-485 .
Station No. n
H
Inverter operations, reading/writing parameters, and monitor output can be performed with the PLC function
by writing a prepared sequence program to the inverter.
The inverter PLC function differs from the inverter communication function.
Programming
Communication
Point
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-3
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
Inverter Communication
1.2
1.2 Procedures Before Operation
Procedures Before Operation
The flow chart below shows the Inverter Communication setting and sequence programs creation procedures
up until data link:
Inverter Communication
Refer to Chapter 1
Outline
Refer to Chapter 2
Check communication specifications
Refer to Chapter 3
Determine system configuration and selection
Outline of system
• Available PLC versions
• Available programming tools
Communication specifications
• Applicable inverters
• Operation commands and parameters
• Execution time in inverter communication
System configuration
• Select communication equipment
Refer to Chapter 4
Perform wiring
Refer to Chapter 5
Set inverter communication
Refer to Chapter 6
Perform PLC communication setting
Wiring procedure
• Selection of cables and connection
equipment
• Wiring example
Parameter communication
Programming tool
Connect PLC*1
Refer to Chapter 7, 9
Create programs
Based on SD/RD lamp lighting status and
contents of error check devices, verify that
communication is being executed normally.
If there are problems, refer to the troubleshooting
(Chapter 11).
Programs for FX2N, FX2NC Series
(Chapter 7)
• Common items
• Basic programs
Programs for FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U,
FX3UC Series (Chapter 9)
• Common items
• Basic programs
Refer to Chapter 8, 10
Practical program examples
*1.
E-4
Program examples for FX2N, FX2NC Series
(Chapter 8)
• Basic programs
Program examples for FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U,
FX3UC Series (Chapter 10)
• Basic programs
For the programming tool to PLC connection procedure, refer to the "Programming Communication"
section in this manual or the respective programming tool manual.
For details on operation method, refer to the respective programming tool manual.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
Inverter Communication
1.3 Communication Type Applicability in PLC
Communication Type Applicability in PLC
1.3.1
For applicable versions
Common Items
1.3
A
The communication types are applicable for the following versions.
PLC
Applicability
*1
FX3U Series
*1
FX3GC Series
*1
FX3G Series
*1
FX3S Series
*1
FX2NC Series
*1
FX2N Series
*1
A500, E500 and S500 Series inverters can be
connected.
—
Inverter communication is not provided.
—
Inverter communication is not provided.
FX1S Series
—
Inverter communication is not provided.
FX0N Series
—
Inverter communication is not provided.
—
Inverter communication is not provided.
FX0 Series
—
Inverter communication is not provided.
FX2C Series
—
Inverter communication is not provided.
FX2(FX) Series
—
Inverter communication is not provided.
FX1 Series
—
Inverter communication is not provided.
E
F
The table below shows PLC versions applicable to each inverter.
Ver.1.00 or later
Ver.2.20 or later
Ver.2.20 or later
FX3U
Ver.2.32 or later
Ver.3.11 or later
Ver.2.32 or later
Ver.3.11 or later
Ver.1.40 or later
Ver.2.22 or later
FX3G
Ver.1.10 or later
Ver.2.22 or later
FX3S
Ver.1.00 or later
Ver.1.10 or later
FX2N,
FX2NC
Ver.3.00 or later
—
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX3GC
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FREQROL-S500/ FREQROL-F500/ FREQROL-F700/ FREQROL-D700/ FREQROL-A800/
E500/A500
V500
A700
E700
F800
FX3UC
D
Inverter
Communication
FX0S Series
C
Computer Link
FX1NC Series
PLC
Version check
H
The PLC version can be checked by reading the last three digits of device D8001.
For a detailed description of the version check, refer to A. Common Items Section 4.2.
Programming
Communication
1.3.3
F800, A800, F700, A700, E700, D700, V500, F500, A500,
E500 and S500 Series inverters can be connected.
FX1N Series
*1.
1.3.2
Remarks
Parallel Link
FX3UC Series
B
N:N Network
: Applicable
—: Not applicable
How to look at the manufacturer's serial number
I
Remote
Maintenance
The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked on the nameplate, and "LOT"
indicated on the front of the product.
For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer's serial number,
refer to A. Common Items Section 4.1.
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-5
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
Inverter Communication
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability
1.4
Programming Tool Applicability
1.4.1
For applicable versions
The programming tool is applicable for each FX Series from the version shown:
1. English versions
Product name
Model name
Applicable version
Remarks
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
Ver. 1.08J or later
The IVMC instruction is supported in
Ver. 1.48A or later.
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-E
Ver. 8.18U or later
The IVMC instruction is not supported.
Ver. 1.00 or later
The IVMC instruction is supported in
Ver. 1.20 or later.
FX-30P
GOT1000 Series display units
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX3G PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
Ver. 1.08J or later
The IVMC instruction is supported in
Ver. 1.62Q or later.
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-E
Ver. 8.72A or later
The IVMC instruction is not supported.
Ver. 1.00 or later
The IVMC instruction is supported in
Ver. 1.50 or later.
FX-30P
GOT1000 Series display units
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX3GC PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
FX-30P
GOT1000 Series display units
Ver. 1.77F or later
-
Ver. 1.30 or later
The IVMC instruction is supported in
Ver. 1.50 or later.
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX3S PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
FX-30P
Ver. 1.492N or later
Ver. 1.50 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
-
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX2N and FX2NC PLCs
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-E
SW7 A or later
FX-PCS/WIN-E
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E
Ver. 3.10 or later
FX-30P
Ver. 1.00 or later
FX-20P-E(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD-E
Ver. 4.10 or later
FX-10P-E
Ver. 4.10 or later
GOT-F900 Series display units
F940WGOT-TWD-E
F940GOT-*WD-E
F940GOT-*BD-H-E
F940GOT-*BD-RH-E
GOT1000 Series display units
E-6
Ver. 1.08J or later
The versions shown on
supporting EXTR instruction
are applicable.
the
left
F940WGOT-TWD-E (Ver. 1.30 or later)
F940GOT-LWD-E, F940GOT-SWD-E (Ver. 6.30 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H-E, F940GOT-SBD-H-E (Ver. 6.30 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH-E, F940GOT-SBD-RH-E (Ver. 6.30 or later)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
1 Outline
Inverter Communication
1.4 Programming Tool Applicability
A
Product name
Model name
Applicable version
Remarks
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
SWDNC-GXW2-J
Ver. 1.07H or later
The IVMC instruction is supported in
Ver. 1.45X or later.
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-J
Ver. 8.13P or later
The IVMC instruction is not supported.
Ver. 1.00 or later
The IVMC instruction is supported in
Ver. 1.20 or later.
FX-30P
GOT1000 Series display units
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX3G PLC
SWDNC-GXW2-J
Ver. 1.07H or later
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-J
Ver. 8.72A or later
The IVMC instruction is not supported.
Ver. 1.00 or later
The IVMC instruction is supported in
Ver. 1.50 or later.
FX-30P
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX3GC PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-J
FX-30P
-
Ver. 1.30 or later
The IVMC instruction is supported in
Ver. 1.50 or later.
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
FX3S PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-J
FX-30P
Ver. 1.492N or later
-
Ver. 1.50 or later
GOT1000 Series display units
FX2N and FX2NC PLCs
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-J
GX Developer
SWD5C(F)-GPPW-J
FX-PCS/WIN
SW0PC-FXGP/WIN
SW7 A or later
Ver. 4.20 or later
Ver. 1.00 or later
FX-20P(-SET0)
FX-20P-MFXD
Ver. 5.10 or later
FX-10P(-SET0)
Ver. 4.10 or later
the
left
G
F940WGOT-TWD (Ver. 1.30 or later)
F940GOT-LWD, F940GOT-SWD (Ver. 6.30 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-H, F940GOT-SBD-H (Ver. 6.30 or later)
F940GOT-LBD-RH, F940GOT-SBD-RH (Ver. 6.30 or later)
H
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
Programming
Communication
GOT1000 Series display units
The versions shown on
supporting EXTR instruction
are applicable.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX-30P
GOT-F900 Series display units
F940WGOT-TWD
F940GOT-*WD
F940GOT-*BD-H
F940GOT-*BD-RH
1.4.2
Ver. 1.07H or later
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Refer to manuals of GOT1000 Series display units for applicable
models and versions supporting the list editor function.
E
Inverter
Communication
GOT1000 Series display units
Ver. 1.77F or later
D
Computer Link
GOT1000 Series display units
C
Parallel Link
GX Works2
The IVMC instruction is supported in
Ver. 1.56J or later.
B
N:N Network
GX Works2
Common Items
2. Japanese versions
I
For non-applicable versions (setting an alternative model)
Remote
Maintenance
In FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, it is not possible to create programs using programming tools
of inapplicable versions.
Select "FX3G" in model selection when creating programs using a programming tool whose version is not
applicable to the FX3S and FX3GC PLC.
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
Point
In the FX3S PLC, set the memory capacity for PLC parameters to 4,000 steps or less.
E-7
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
Inverter Communication
2.
2.1 Communication Specifications (Reference)
Specifications
This chapter explains the communication specifications and performance.
2.1
Communication Specifications (Reference)
Item
Specifications
Number of connectable units
8 maximum
Transmission standard
Remarks
RS-485 standard
Maximum total extension
distance
500 m (1640' 5") or less when 485ADP is used
50 m (164' 0") or less when 485BD is used
Protocol type
Inverter computer link
Control procedure
Asynchronous system
Communication method
Distance varies depending
on communication
equipment type.
Link startup mode
Half-duplex, bidirectional communication
4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400*1 bps
Baud rate
Any one can be selected.
ASCII
Character
format
*1.
2.2
Start bit
—
Data bit
7-bit
Parity bit
Even
Stop bit
1-bit
FX3U and FX3UC Series PLC Ver. 2.41 or later, and FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC Series PLC is applicable.
Connectable Mitsubishi Electric General-purpose Inverters
Series
E-8
Built-in PU connector
FR-A5NR (option)
Remarks
Only models containing the RS-485
communication type can be connected.
FREQROL-S500

—
FREQROL-E500

—
FREQROL-A500


FREQROL-F500


FREQROL-V500


Only available for FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U
and FX3UC PLCs.
Series
Built-in PU connector
Built-in RS-485 terminal
Remarks
FREQROL-A700
—

FREQROL-F700
—

FREQROL-A800
—

FREQROL-F800
—

Only available for FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC FX3U
and FX3UC PLCs.
Series
Built-in PU connector
FR-E7TR (option)
Remarks
FREQROL-D700

—
FREQROL-E700


Only available for FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U
and FX3UC PLCs.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
Inverter Communication
A
Link Specifications
Common Items
2.3
2.3 Link Specifications
The tables below show applicable parameters and operation commands.
2.3.1
When monitoring inverter operations (PLC  inverter)
Read contents
V500, F500, A500
E500
S500







H70
Output current




H71
Output voltage



—
H72
Special monitor


—
—
H73
Special monitor selection number


—
—
H74
Alarm definition




H75
Alarm definition




H76
Alarm definition



—
H77
Alarm definition



—
H79
Inverter status monitor (extended)

—
—
—
H7A
Inverter status monitor




H6E
Set frequency (EEPROM)




H6D
Set frequency (RAM)




H7F
Link parameter expansion setting
H6C
Second parameter changing
Refer to Subsection 9.4.2
When controlling inverter operations (PLC  inverter)
D
E
F
F800, A800, F700,
A700, E700, D700
V500
F500, A500
E500, S500
Operation mode




HF3
Special monitor selection number



—
HF9
Run command (expansion)

—
—
—
HFA
Run command




Set frequency (EEPROM)




Set frequency (RAM)




HFD
Inverter reset




HF4
Alarm definition all clear

—


HFC
All parameter all clear




HFC
User clear
—
—

—
HFF
Link parameter expansion setting




H
Programming
Communication
HEE
HED
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
HFB
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Applicable inverter
Written contents
C
Computer Link

Output frequency [number of rotations]
Parallel Link
Operation mode
H6F
Inverter
Communication
H7B
Instruction code
(hexadecimal)
2.3.3
F800, A800, F700,
A700, E700, D700
N:N Network
Applicable inverter
Instruction code
(hexadecimal)
2.3.2
B
I
Parameters (PLC  inverter)
Remote
Maintenance
For inverter parameters which can be changed (read and written), refer to "12. Related Detailed Data" later.
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-9
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
Inverter Communication
2.4 Execution Times in Inverter Communication Instructions
2.4
Execution Times in Inverter Communication Instructions
2.4.1
Outline
The period of time after one inverter communication instruction is driven until communication with the inverter
is completed (M8029 turns ON) is regarded as the required time for the inverter communication instruction as
shown in the figure below.
X0
SET
M0
M0
Inverter communication instruction
M8029
RST
M0
M0
M8029
Tinv
T1
T2
First time sending/receiving
in a single instruction
T3
Second time sending/receiving
in a single instruction
"n"th time sending/receiving
in a single instruction
Communication
preparation
processing
Communication
termination
processing
T4
Inverter
waiting time
T6[n]*1
T5
T7[n]*1
T8[n]*1
T9[n]*1
The request message
is being sent
Inverter data
check time
The response message
is being received
*1.
E-10
The time required for the "n"th time sending/receiving in a single instruction.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
2 Specifications
2.4 Execution Times in Inverter Communication Instructions
Inverter communication instruction
IVWR
1
IVCK
1
Change of the 2nd parameter is
unnecessary
2
Change of the 2nd parameter is
necessary*2
3
Change of the 2nd parameter is
unnecessary
2
Change of the 2nd parameter is
necessary*2
3
Number of times of
communication S2
IVMC
C
 2 + Number of parameters *2 requiring change of the
2nd parameter
1
D
For parameters requiring change of the 2nd parameter, refer to section 9.10.
Computer Link
*2.
S2
B
Parallel Link
IVBWR
IVDR
N:N Network
IVRD
Number of times of sending/receiving in per instruction
A
Common Items
Some inverter communication instructions execute several times of sending/receiving in a single instruction.
The following table shows the number of times of sending/receiving in each communication instruction.
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-11
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
Inverter Communication
2.4.2
2.4 Execution Times in Inverter Communication Instructions
Calculation method
Calculate the required time "Tinv" for inverter communication instruction in units of "ms" as follows.
"INT(n)" in the calculation formula indicates an integer obtained by truncating decimal places of "n".
1. Length of 1 character
In inverter communication, the communication setting is as shown in following table.
The length of 1 character is as shown in the following calculation expression.
Length of 1 character = Start bit + Data length + Parity bit + Stop bit
= 10[bit]
Name
Set value
bit
Start bit
-
1
Data length
7
7
Parity bit
Even number
1
Stop bit
1
1
Total
10
2. Execution times in inverter communication instructions
Execution times in inverter communication instructions is as shown in the following calculation expression.
Tinv = T1 + T2 + T3
T1 = 1[ms]
T2 = {n(T4+T5)}+T6[n][ms]
Sending and
receiving
frequency
T6[1]+T6[2]+T6[3]+
T3 = 1[ms]
Calculate "T4", "T5" and "T6 [n]" as shown in the following table.
Communication
time
T4
= ( INT (
T5
= 1[ms]
T6[n]
T7[n]+T9[n]
T8[n]
E-12
Calculation method
15
) + 1)  Scan time
Scan time
• For Scan time < T7[n]+T8[n]+T9[n]
T7[n]+T8[n]+T9[n]
= ( INT (
) + 1)  Scan time
Scan time
• For Scan time  T7[n]+T8[n]+T9[n]
T7[n]+T8[n]+T9[n]
= ( INT (
) + 2)  Scan time
Scan time
={(
1
Number of sending and Length of
)(

) }  1000
receiving characters*1 1 character
Communication speed [bps]
= Data check time in inverters*4
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
Inverter Communication
Inverter
communication
instruction
IVDR
IVMC
Third
Sending Receiving Total Sending Receiving Total Sending Receiving Total
Change of the 2nd
parameter is
unnecessary.
11
4
15
9
11
20
-
-
-
Change of the 2nd
parameter is
necessary.
11
4
15
11
4
15
9
11
20
HF3, HFA, HFF
11
4
15
-
-
-
-
-
-
HFD
13
*3
13
-
-
-
-
-
-
Other than above
13
4
17
-
-
-
-
-
-
H73, H7A, H7F, H6C
9
9
18
-
-
-
-
-
-
Other than above
9
11
20
-
-
-
-
-
-
Change of the 2nd
parameter is
unnecessary.
11
4
15
13
4
17
-
-
-
Change of the 2nd
parameter is
necessary.
11
4
15
11
4
15
13
4
17
Change of the 2nd
parameter is
unnecessary.
11
4
15
13
4
17
-
-
-
Change of the 2nd
parameter is
necessary.
11
4
15
11
4
15
13
4
17
19
19
38
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0
S2
.
The inverter gives no response because the inverter is being reset.
The PLC waits for 2.2 s until reset of the inverter is completed, and then completes execution of the
inverter communication instruction.
*4.
Refer to the following table for the data check time in inverters.
Make sure to refer to the manual of the inverter used, and confirm the data check time for the
communication command used.
D
E
F
G
Item
Data check time
Various monitors, operation command, set frequency
(RAM)
<12ms
Parameters read/write, set frequency (EEPROM)
<30ms
Parameter all clear/all clear
<5s
H
Reset instruction
No response
(The PLC waits for 2.2 s until reset of the inverter is
completed, and then completes execution of the
inverter communication instruction.)
Programming
Communication
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
*3.
C
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Indicates the number of sent/received characters required to write 1 parameter.
The IVBWR instruction executes parameter writing by the number of times of communication
B
Inverter
Communication
IVBWR*2
Second
Computer Link
IVWR
First
Parallel Link
IVCK
Parameter/
instruction code
N:N Network
IVRD
*2.
A
Refer to the following table for the number of sent/received characters.
Common Items
*1.
2.4 Execution Times in Inverter Communication Instructions
I
Remote
Maintenance
The IVWR, IVRD and IVBWR instructions automatically change expansion parameters and the 2nd
parameter.
The data check time for the last (2nd or 3rd) sending/receiving in the IVWR and IVRD instructions and
the data check time for the last sending/receiving of each parameter writing in the IVBWR instruction
correspond to parameter reading/writing (< 30 ms).
The data check time for sending and receiving (expansion parameter change and 2nd parameter
change) other than the above correspond to various monitors (< 12 ms).
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-13
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
2.4.3
2 Specifications
2.4 Execution Times in Inverter Communication Instructions
Calculation example
This is a calculation example for the following communication settings and scan time when communicating
with an inverter.
Communication speed = 19200[bps]
Length of 1 character = 10[bit]
Scan time = 10[ms]
1. Calculation example 1
Calculation of required time when Pr. 3 is read by the IVRD instruction
Tinv = T1 + T2 + T3 = 114[ms]
T1 = 1[ms], T3 = 1[ms]
Calculate "T2" as follows because Pr.3 does not require change of the 2nd parameter.
T2 = 2(T4+T5) + T6[1] + T6[2] = 2(20+1) + 20 + 50 = 112[ms]
Sending and
receiving
frequency
The first
sending and
receiving
The second
sending and
receiving
) + 1 )  10 = 20[ms]
T4 = ( INT( 15
10
T5 = 1[ms]
T7[1] + T8[1] + T9[1]
T6[1] = ( INT(
) + 1 )  10 = ( INT( 19.8
) + 1 )  10 = 20[ms]
10
10
T7[1] + T8[1] + T9[1] = 7.8 + 12 = 19.8[ms]
T7[1] + T9[1] = ( (
T8[1] = 12[ms]
T6[2] = ( INT(
1 )  (11+4)  10 )  1000 = 7.8[ms]
19200
T7[2] + T8[2] + T9[2]
) + 1 )  10 = ( INT( 40.4
) + 1 )  10 = 50[ms]
10
10
T7[2] + T8[2] + T9[2] = 10.4 + 30 = 40.4[ms]
T7[2] + T9[2] = ( ( 1 )  (9+11)  10 )  1000 = 10.4[ms]
19200
T8[2] = 30[ms]
Tinv = T1 + T2 + T3 = 1+112+1 = 114[ms]
2. Calculation example 2
Calculation of required time when Pr.902 is read by the IVRD instruction
Tinv = T1 + T2 + T3 = 155[ms]
T1 = 1[ms], T3 = 1[ms]
Calculate "T2" as follows because Pr.902 requires change of the 2nd parameter.
T2 = 3(T4+T5) + T6[1] + T6[2] + T6[3] = 3(20+1) + 20 + 20 + 50 = 153[ms]
Sending and
receiving
frequency
The first
sending and
receiving
The second
sending and
receiving
) + 1 )  10 = 20[ms]
T4 = ( INT( 15
10
The third
sending and
receiving
T5 = 1[ms]
T7[1] + T8[1] + T9[1]
T6[1] = ( INT(
) + 1 )  10 = ( INT( 19.8
) + 1 )  10 = 20[ms]
10
10
T7[1] + T8[1] + T9[1] = 7.8 + 12 = 19.8[ms]
T7[1] + T9[1] = ( (
T8[1] = 12[ms]
T6[2] = ( INT(
1 )  (11+4)  10 )  1000 = 7.8[ms]
19200
T7[2] + T8[2] + T9[2]
) + 1 )  10 = ( INT( 19.8
) + 1 )  10 = 20[ms]
10
10
T7[2] + T8[2] + T9[2] = 7.8 + 12 = 19.8[ms]
T7[2] + T9[2] = ( (
T8[2] = 12[ms]
T6[3] = ( INT(
1 )  (11+4)  10 )  1000 = 7.8[ms]
19200
T7[3] + T8[3] + T9[3]
) + 1 )  10 = ( INT( 40.4
) + 1 )  10 = 50[ms]
10
10
T7[3] + T8[3] + T9[3] = 10.4 + 30 = 40.4[ms]
T7[3] + T9[3] = ( ( 1 )  (9+11)  10 )  1000 = 10.4[ms]
19200
T8[3] = 30[ms]
Tinv = T1 + T2 + T3 = 1+153+1 = 155[ms]
E-14
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
2 Specifications
Inverter Communication
2.4 Execution Times in Inverter Communication Instructions
A
Calculation of required time when Pr. 10 to Pr. 14 [
S2
= 5] are written by the IVBWR instruction
Tinv = T1 + T2 + T3 = 512[ms]
T1 = 1[ms], T3 = 1[ms]
Calculate "T2" as follows because Pr.10 to Pr. 14 do not require change of the 2nd parameter and the
time required for writing is same in each parameter.
S2
C
) + 1 )  10 = 20[ms]
T4 = ( INT( 15
10
Parallel Link
T5 = 1[ms]
T7[1] + T8[1] + T9[1]
T6[1] = ( INT(
) + 1 )  10 = ( INT( 19.8
) + 1 )  10 = 20[ms]
10
10
T7[1] + T8[1] + T9[1] = 7.8 + 12 = 19.8[ms]
T8[1] = 12[ms]
1 )  (11+4)  10 )  1000 = 7.8[ms]
19200
D
Computer Link
T7[2] + T8[2] + T9[2]
) + 1 )  10 = ( INT( 38.9
) + 1 )  10 = 40[ms]
T6[2] = ( INT(
10
10
T7[2] + T8[2] + T9[2] = 8.9 + 30 = 38.9[ms]
T7[2] + T9[2] = ( (
T8[2] = 30[ms]
B
N:N Network
T2 = ( 2  (T4+T5) + T6[1]+T6[2] ) + ( 2  (T4+T5) + T6[3]+T6[4] ) +
Time required to write Pr. 10
Time required to write Pr. 11
= 5  ( 2  (T4+T5) + T6[1]+T6[2] ) = 5  ( 2  (20+1) + 20 + 40 ) = 510[ms]
T7[1] + T9[1] = ( (
Common Items
3. Calculation example 3
1 )  (13+4)  10 )  1000 = 8.9[ms]
19200
E
Tinv = T1 + T2 + T3 = 1+510+1 = 512[ms]
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-15
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Selection
Inverter Communication
3.
3.1 System Configuration
System Configuration and Selection
This chapter explains the system configuration and communication equipment selection operating in
accordance with RS-485 required by FX PLCs.
3.1
System Configuration
This section outlines the system configuration required to use inverter communication.
Connect (optional) equipment operating in accordance with RS-485 to the FX PLC main unit.
1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 , 7 and 8 indicate the communication equipment combination patterns.
Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485
FX PLC
1
Important point in selection
This is the communication board
built into the PLC, reducing the
installation area.
+
Total extension
distance
50 m
(164' 0")
FX2N PLC
Communication board
Function extension memory cassette
(only for FX2N PLC)
2
+
+
Communication Special adapter
connection board
adapter
FX2N PLC
Attach the special adapter
connection board to the main unit,
and then attach the communication
adapter to the left side of the main
unit.
500 m
(1640' 5")
Attach the communication adapter
to the left side of the main unit.
500 m
(1640' 5")
Because the communication board
can be built in to the PLC, the
installation area does not change
50 m
(164' 0")
Function extension memory cassette
(only for FX2N PLC)
3
+
FX2NC PLC
Communication adapter
Function extension memory board
(only for FX2NC PLC)
4
RD A
RD
RD B
SD A
SD
SD B
+
SG
Communication board
FX3U PLC
RD A
RD
RD B
SD A
SD
SD B
+
SG
Communication board
E-16
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Selection
Inverter Communication
3.1 System Configuration
A
FX PLC
Important point in selection
Total extension
distance
5
+
+
FX3U PLC
Expansion
board
Attach the expansion board to the
main unit, and then attach the
communication adapter to the left
side of the main unit.
500 m
(1640' 5")
+
+
Expansion
board
C
Parallel Link
Communication
adapter
B
N:N Network
Communication
adapter
Common Items
Communication equipment operating
in accordance with RS-485
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
D
6
FX3GC, FX3UC(D, DS, DSS)
Communication
adapter
E
Because the communication
board can be built in to the PLC,
the installation area does not
change.
+
F
FX3S, FX3G PLC
+
+
Connector
conversion
adapter
FX3S, FX3G PLC
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Attach the connector conversion adapter
500 m
to the main unit, and then attach the
(1640'
5")
communication adapter to the left side
of the main unit.
8
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Communication
board
50 m
(164' 0")
Inverter
Communication
7
Communication
adapter
500 m
(1640' 5")
Computer Link
Attach the communication adapter to
the left side of the main unit.
+
H
Programming
Communication
For communication equipment combinations for each FX Series, refer to the next section.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-17
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Selection
Inverter Communication
3.2
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
Select a (optional) communication equipment combination, and put a check mark in the "Check" column.
During selection, pay attention to the following:
- In the table below, only the external dimensions are different between the units shown in "FX2NC-485ADP/
FX0N-485ADP". Select either one.
- In the table below, only the cable is different between the units shown in "FX3G-485-BD/FX3G-485-BDRJ". Select either one.
- Inverter communication is not provided for the FX1, FX2(FX), FX2C, FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N and
FX1NC PLCs.
FX Series
Communication equipment (option)
Total
extension Check
distance
50 m
(164' 0")
FX2N-485-BD
FX2N
+
+
FX2N-ROM-E1
(Function extension
memory cassette)
FX2N-CNV-BD
+
FX2NC-485ADP
(European terminal block)
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX2N-CNV-BD FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)
+
FX3S
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3S-CNV-ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)
FX3G
(14-point, 24-point type)
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP
E-18
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Selection
Inverter Communication
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
A
Communication equipment (option)
Total
extension Check
distance
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
Common Items
FX Series
B
N:N Network
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)
C
Parallel Link
The communication equipment works as ch1 when connected to
the option connector 1.
500 m
(1640' 5")
Computer Link
FX3G-CNV-ADP
D
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
E
Inverter
Communication
FX3G
(40-point, 60-point type)
50 m
(164' 0")
FX3G-485-BD
(European terminal block)
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
(RJ45 connector)
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
The communication equipment works as ch2 when connected to
the option connector 2.
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3G-CNV-ADP
FX3U- ADP(-MB)
(Where
represents
232 and 485).
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
H
Programming
Communication
Ch2 is not available when the FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3G-4EX-BD or
FX3G-2EYT-BD is connected to the option connector 2.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-19
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Selection
Inverter Communication
FX Series
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
Total
extension Check
distance
Communication equipment (option)
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
RD A
50 m
(164' 0")
RD
RD B
SD A
SD
SD B
SG
FX3U-485-BD
(European terminal block)
ch1
+
FX3U-CNV-BD
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1
ch2
+
RD
FX3U
SD
FX3U--BD
(Where  represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
ch1
+
FX3U-CNV-BD
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
ch2
+
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
FX2NC
500 m
(1640' 5")
+
FX2NC-485ADP
(European terminal block)
FX2NC-ROM-CE1
(Function extension
memory board)
E-20
FX0N-485ADP
(Terminal block)
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Selection
Inverter Communication
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
A
Communication equipment (option)
Total
extension Check
distance
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
B
N:N Network
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
C
(European terminal block)
ch1
Parallel Link
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch2
FX3GC
+
500 m
(1640' 5")
D
Computer Link
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
FX3U- ADP(-MB)
(Where
represents
232 and 485).
(European terminal block)
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
E
ch1
Inverter
Communication
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
F
(European terminal block)
ch1
ch2
+
(Where  represents
232 and 485).
G
500 m
(1640' 5")
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FX3U-ADP(-MB)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
FX3UC
(D, DS, DSS)
Common Items
FX Series
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-21
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
3 System Configuration and Selection
Inverter Communication
FX Series
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
Total
extension Check
distance
Communication equipment (option)
When using channel 1 (ch 1)
ch1
RD A
50 m
(164' 0")
RD
RD B
SD A
SD
SD B
SG
FX3U-485-BD
(European terminal block)
ch1
+
FX3U-CNV-BD
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When using channel 2 (ch 2)
ch1
ch2
+
RD
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
SD
FX3U--BD
(Where  represents
232, 422, 485, USB and 8AV).
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When a FX3U-8AV-BD is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
ch1
+
FX3U-CNV-BD
FX3U-232ADP(-MB),
FX3U-485ADP(-MB),
FX3U-CF-ADP
ch2
+
500 m
(1640' 5")
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
(European terminal block)
When a FX3U-CF-ADP is used, it occupies one communication
port channel.
E-22
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
4 Wiring
3.2 Applicable FX PLC and Communication Equipment
A
Common Items
4.
Wiring
B
This chapter explains the wiring.
N:N Network
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
C
Parallel Link
• Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the product.
• Make sure to attach the terminal cover, offered as an accessory, before turning on the power or initiating
operation after installation or wiring work.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
D
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
• Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent any damage to the machinery or accidents
due to abnormal data written to the PLC under the influence of noise:
1) Do not bundle the main circuit line together with or lay it close to the main circuit, high-voltage line or load line.
Otherwise, noise disturbance and/or surge induction are likely to take place. As a guideline, lay the control line
at least 100mm (3.94") or more away from the main circuit or high-voltage lines.
2) Ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable at one point on the PLC. However, do not use common
grounding with heavy electrical systems.
• Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Tighten the screws using a Phillips-head screwdriver No.2 (shaft diameter 6mm (0.24") or less). Make sure
that the screwdriver does not touch the partition part of the terminal block.
• Make sure to properly wire to the terminal block (European type) in accordance with the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock, equipment failures, a short-circuit, wire breakage, malfunctions, or
damage to the product.
- The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in the manual.
- Tightening torque should follow the specifications in the manual.
- Twist the end of strand wire and make sure that there are no loose wires.
- Do not solder-plate the electric wire ends.
- Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size.
- Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed.
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-23
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
4.1
1
4.1 Wiring Procedure
Wiring Procedure
Confirming the connection method
Confirm the inverter connection method.
For details, refer to Section 4.2.
2
Preparing for wiring
Prepare cables, distributors and terminal resistors required for wiring.
For connection cables, refer to Section 4.3.
For distributors, refer to Section 4.4.
For terminal resistors, refer to Section 4.5.
3
Turning OFF the PLC power
Before starting any wiring work, make sure that the PLC power is OFF.
4
Connecting the power supply (FX0N-485ADP only)
Connect the power supply to the 24V DC power terminal.
5
Wiring communication equipment
Connect communication equipment with communication port of inverters (PU port, built-in terminal
for RS-485, FR-A5NR, FR-7TR).
For details, refer to Section 4.8.
6
Connecting terminal resistors
Connect terminal resistors to the communication equipment of the PLC and the RDA-RDB signal
terminal in the last inverter.
For details, refer to Section 4.5.
7
Wiring a shielding wire (Class-D grounding)
When using a twisted pair cable, wire a shielding wire.
For details, refer to Section 4.6.
E-24
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
A
Selecting Cables and Connection Devices
When connecting equipment operating in accordance with RS-485, use the following connection method with
10BASE-T or shielded twisted pair cables.
4.2.1
Non-stranded cable
(10BASE-T cable for LAN)
Terminal resistor
(Which is supplied with or built in the communication
equipment for the FX PLC side, and should be arranged
by the user for the inverter side)
S500, E500, A500, F500, V500, D700 and E700 Series (PU connector)
C
Parallel Link
1. In the case of 1-to-1 connection
When a distributor is not used
When a distributor is used
10BASE-T cable
Terminal resistor
RS-485 connector
(PU connector)
Terminal
resistor
10BASE-T cable
10BASE-T cable
E
Terminal resistor
Use a distributor because a terminal resistor cannot
be connected to the inverter.
Inverter
Communication
RS-485 connector
(PU connector)
2. In the case of 1-to-N connection
F
When a distributor is used
10BASE-T
cable
10BASE-T cable
Distributor
10BASE-T
cable
10BASE-T cable
Distributor
Terminal
resistor
10BASE-T cable
RS-485 connector
PU
connector
H
Programming
Communication
*1.
PU
connector
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
10BASE-T cable
Terminal resistor
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Distributor
*1
D
Computer Link
Distributor
*1
B
N:N Network
PU connector
(RJ45 connector)
Common Items
4.2
4.2 Selecting Cables and Connection Devices
When using FX3G-485-BD-RJ, use the PU connector (RJ45 connector) for connection.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-25
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
4.2.2
4.2 Selecting Cables and Connection Devices
A500, F500 and V500 Series (FR-A5NR)
1. In the case of 1-to-1 connection
When a distributor is not used
FR-A5NR
Twisted pair cable
Terminal
resistor
Terminal resistor
2. In the case of 1-to-N connection
When a distributor is not used
Twisted pair cable
Twisted pair cable
Terminal
resistor
Twisted pair cable
Terminal resistor
E-26
FR-A5NR
FR-A5NR
FR-A5NR
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
A
F800, A800, F700 and A700 Series (built-in RS-485 terminal)
Common Items
4.2.3
4.2 Selecting Cables and Connection Devices
1. In the case of 1-to-1 connection
Set the terminal resistor switch in the inverter to "100 ".
B
N:N Network
Built-in RS-485
terminal
C
Parallel Link
Twisted pair cable
2. In the case of 1-to-N connection
Set the terminal resistor switch in the last inverter to "100 ".
D
Twisted pair cable
Computer Link
Twisted pair cable
E
Twisted pair cable
Built-in
RS-485
terminal
Inverter
Communication
Built-in
RS-485
terminal
Built-in
RS-485
terminal
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-27
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
4.2.4
4.2 Selecting Cables and Connection Devices
E700 Series (FR-E7TR)
1. In the case of 1-to-1 connection
When a distributor is not used
FR-E7TR
Twisted pair cable
Terminal resistor
2. In the case of 1-to-N connection
When a distributor is not used
Twisted pair cable
Terminal resistor
E-28
Twisted pair cable
Twisted pair cable
FR-E7TR
FR-E7TR
FR-E7TR
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
Connection Cables
4.3.1
10BASE-T cable
A
Common Items
4.3
4.3 Connection Cables
B
10BASE-T cables used in LAN wiring for a personal computer can be connected.
N:N Network
1. Selection procedure when purchasing
1) Cable type
: 10BASE-T cable (Category 3 or 5)
2) Connection specifications
: Straight type
3) Connector
: RJ45 connector
C
Parallel Link
2. Cautions on using commercial cables
Pay attention to the following point when purchasing commercial cables.
• 5V DC is output to the PU connector in the inverters for supplying power to the PU.
It is necessary to cut pins No. 2 and 8 of commercial cables to prevent wiring to pins No. 2 and 8.
(It is recommended to use the distributor BMJ-8-28N).
Twisted pair cable (recommended)
Computer Link
4.3.2
D
The table below shows recommended model names and manufacturers of cables used in wiring.
Use commercial three-pair type twisted pair cables of 0.3 mm2 or more.
E
1. Recommended cable list
Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.
The Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd.
Model name
Inverter
Communication
Manufacturer
Remarks
DPEV SB 0.3  3P
Three-pair cable of 0.3 mm2
DPEV SB 0.5  3P
Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2
D-KPEV-SB 0.5  3P
Three-pair cable of 0.5 mm2
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
2. Cable structural drawing (reference)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Three-pair cable structural
drawing example
H
Programming
Communication
3. Point of contact
For details on cables such as specifications and price, contact each cable manufacturer.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-29
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
4.3.3
4.3 Connection Cables
Connecting cables
1. European type terminal block
The FX3G-485-BD-RJ terminal block is used for grounding.
The other options use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting communication equipment operating in
accordance with RS-485.
The table below shows applicable cables and tightening torques.
Cable size when Cable size when
one cable is
two cables are
connected
connected
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP
(-MB)
AWG22 to
AWG20
Bar terminal with
Insulating sleeve
(cable size)
Applicable
0.22 to 0.25
(AWG22 to AWG20)
N·m
AWG22
Tool size
Tightening
torque
A
B
0.4 (0.01")
2.5 (0.09")
FX3G-485-BDRJ
AWG20 to AWG16
Not applicable
0.5 to 0.6
N·m
0.6 (0.03")
3.5 (0.14")
FX2N-485-BD
AWG26 to AWG16
Not applicable
0.5 to 0.6
N·m
0.6 (0.03")
3.5 (0.14")
Not applicable
0.4 to 0.5
N·m
0.6 (0.03")
3.5 (0.14")
FX2NC-485ADP
AWG26 to
AWG16
AWG26 to
AWG20
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
With regard to the cable end treatment, use a stranded cable or solid cable as it is, or use a bar terminal with
insulating sleeve.
FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD and FX2NC-485ADP cannot use a bar terminal with insulating sleeve.
• When using a stranded cable or solid cable as it is
- Twist the end of a stranded cable so that wires do not get barbed.
- Do not plate the end of the cable.
FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD,
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
FX3G-485-BD-RJ,
FX2N-485-BD
Approx. 9 mm
(0.35")
FX2NC-485ADP
Approx. 6 mm
(0.23")
Approx. 8 mm
(0.31")
• When using a bar terminal with insulating sleeve
Insulating sleeve Contact area
(Crimp area)
Because it is difficult to insert a cable into an insulating sleeve
depending on the thickness of the cable sheath, select the proper cable
according to the outline drawing.
8 mm (0.31")
<Reference>
2.6 mm
14 mm
Manufacturer
Model name
Caulking tool
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
AI 0.5-8WH
CRIMPFOX 6*1
(or CRIMPFOX 6T-F*2)
*1.
*2.
E-30
Old model name : CRIMPFOX ZA 3
Old model name : CRIMPFOX UD 6
(0.1")
(0.55")
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
4.4 Connection Devices (RJ45 Connector and Distributor)
A
Select a
screwdriver
with a
straight tip.
A
If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small, tightening torque will not
be able to be achieved. To achieve the appropriate tightening torque
shown in the previous page, use the following screwdriver or an
appropriate replacement (grip diameter: approximately 25mm (0.98")).
<Reference>
FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
For size A and size B,
refer to the table above.
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
C
Model name
Parallel Link
Manufacturer
B
B
N:N Network
Note
SZS 0.4  2.5
FX3G-485-BD-RJ, FX2N-485-BD, FX2NC-485ADP
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
Model name
D
SZF 1-0.6  3.5
Computer Link
2. Terminal block
In the FX0N-485ADP, the terminal screw size is "M3".
Make sure to use a crimp-style terminal with the following sizes.
Make sure that the tightening torque is 0.5 to 0.8 N·m.
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range.
Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
E
Inverter
Communication
• When wiring one cable to one terminal
3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24")
or less
Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24")
or less
Terminal
• When wiring two cables to one terminal
3.2(0.13")
6.3mm(0.25")
or more
3.2(0.13")
6.2mm(0.24")
or less
H
Terminal
6.3mm(0.25")
or more
Programming
Communication
4.4
G
Terminal Crimp
screw
terminal
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
6.2mm(0.24")
or less
Connection Devices (RJ45 Connector and Distributor)
I
Model name
Remote
Maintenance
Prepare the following devices if necessary.
Product name
Common Items
• Tool
When tightening a terminal on the European terminal block, use a small
commercial straight shape screwdriver whose tip is shown in the figure to
the right.
Manufacturer
5-554720-3
Distributor
BMJ-8
BMJ-8-28N (No internal connection of the No. 2
HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
and 8 pin)
(Do not use a plug with terminal resistor)
Tyco Electronics Japan G.K.
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
RJ45 connector
E-31
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
4.5
4.5 Connecting Terminal Resistors
Connecting Terminal Resistors
Connect a terminal resistor to both the communication equipment of the FX PLC and the RDA-RDB signal
terminal in the last inverter.
For details on connection, refer to each wiring diagram.
1. Terminal resistor types
Prepare the following two types of terminal resistors.
Among the terminal resistors supplied with the communication equipment,
select ones with the color codes shown to the right.
1) On the FX PLC side, use a terminal resistor of 110 , 1/2 W supplied
together with the communication equipment operating in accordance with
RS-485.
Brown
Precision
1 1 1
=110 
(101)
Brown Black Brown Precision
2) On the inverter side (PU connector except FR-A5NR, FR-E7TR), use a
terminal resistor of 100 , 1/2 W (not supplied).
3) On the inverter side (FR-A5NR), use a terminal resistor chip (supplied
together with the FR-A5NR).
1 0 1 =100 
(101)
4) On the inverter side (FR-E7TR), use the terminal resistor switch.
2. Connecting a terminal resistor to the FX PLC
Connect a terminal resistor between the RDA and RDB terminals of the communication equipment.
3. When using the FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ or FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
The FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD-RJ and FX3U-485ADP(-MB) have built-in terminal resistors.
Set the terminal resistor selector switch accordingly.
• FX3U-485-BD
• FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
Terminal
resistor
selector
switch
330 
OPEN
110 
Terminal
resistor selector
switch
• FX3G-485-BD
Remove the upper terminal block before changing over the switch in the FX3G-485-BD.
Removal: Loosen the terminal block mounting screws, and remove the terminal block.
Installation: Attach the terminal block, and tighten the terminal block mounting screws.
Tightening torque : 0.4 to 0.5 N•m
Do not tighten terminal screws with a torque outside the above-mentioned range. Failure to do
so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions.
For installation and removal of the terminal block, use the
recommended tool shown below or a tool having straight tip (such as
Select a
screwdriver
screwdriver) as shown in the right figure.
with a
<Reference>
straight tip.
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
Model name
SZS 0.4  2.5
Terminal resistor
selector switch
Terminal block mounting screws
E-32
0.4mm
(0.01")
2.5mm
(0.09")
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
4 Wiring
4.6 Wiring a Shielding Wire (Class-D grounding)
A
Common Items
• FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Terminal resistor
selector switch
B
N:N Network
4. Connecting a terminal resistor to the inverter
1) When the PU connector or RS-485 connector (S500 Series) is used
- Connect a terminal resistor between pin No. 3 (RDA) and pin No. 6 (RDB).
- Connect a distributor to the PU terminal because terminal resistors cannot be connected.
- Connect a terminal resistor only to the inverter located furthest away from the FX PLC.
C
Parallel Link
Communication may be affected by noise echo depending on the transmission speed and transmission
distance. When communication is hindered by noise echo, connect a terminal resistor to the inverter.
D
3) When the FR-E7TR is used in connection
A terminal resistor is built into the FR-E7TR. Set the terminal resistor switch in the E700 Series inverter
located at the end to "100".
Computer Link
2) When the FR-A5NR is used in connection
- Connect a terminal resistor chip (which is supplied together with the FR-A5NR) between the RDB and
RDR terminals in the most distant inverter.
E
Inverter
Communication
Terminal
resistor
switch
F
100
H
Programming
Communication
Wiring a Shielding Wire (Class-D grounding)
Connect the
FG
FG
terminal is provided in the communication equipment
terminal to the
(grounding) terminal of the PLC requiring Class-D grounding.
Apx.A
terminal is not provided in the communication equipment
Discontinued
models
2. When the
FG
I
Remote
Maintenance
Perform Class-D grounding only to one side of a cable according to the absence/presence of the grounding
terminal.
For details on connection, refer to each wiring diagram.
1. When the
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
OPEN
Terminal
resistor
switch
4.6
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
4) When the inverter built-in RS-485 terminal is used
A terminal resistor is built into the RS-485 terminal. Set the terminal resistor switch in the F700/A700
Series inverter located at the end to "100".
Perform Class-D grounding directly to the shielding wire of the cable.
E-33
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
4.7
4.7 Connector in Inverter
Connector in Inverter
1. In the case of PU port connector
Pin No.
Signal name
8
P5S
7
SG
6
RDB
5
SDA
4
SDB
3
RDA
2
P5S
1
SG
Remarks
When seen from inverter front
(receptacle side)
Not used
(8)
(1)
Modular jack
Not used
The pins Nos. 2 and 8 (P5S) are provided for the power supply of the operation panel or parameter unit.
Do not wire them into inverter communication.
2. In the case of computer link using the FR-A5NR
Attach the FR-5NR to an A500, F500 or V500 Series inverter.
Terminal
block
Screw size:
M3
SDA SDB RDA RDB RDR SG
A
B
C
Terminal
symbol
Connect them to PLC communication
equipment operating in accordance with
RS-485.
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the FR-A5NR.
3. In the case of computer link using the FR-E7TR
Attach the FR-E7TR to an E700 Series inverter.
Terminal block
Connect them to PLC
communication equipment
operating in accordance
with RS-485.
For details, refer to the instruction manual of the FR-E7TR.
E-34
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
4.7 Connector in Inverter
A
Common Items
4. In the case of built-in RS-485 terminal
F800, A800, F700 and A700 Series inverters are equipped with a built-in RS-485 terminal.
Terminal
symbol
B
N:N Network
Connect them to the communication equipment
operating in accordance with RS-485 of the PLC.
European
terminal block
C
Parallel Link
For details, refer to the instruction respective inverter manual.
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-35
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
4.8 Connection Diagram
4.8
Connection Diagram
4.8.1
For S500, E500, A500, F500 , V500 and D700 Series (PU connector)
1. When one inverter is connected
Terminal resistor: 110 
• FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD and
FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
• FX2N-485-BD and FX2NC-485ADP:
Connect a terminal resistor (supplied)
between the RDA and RDB terminals.
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX2N-485-BD
FX2NC-485ADP
FX0N-485ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
24V
LINK
DC
50mA SG
24+
24G
FG
Distributor
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
Class-D grounding
10BASE-T
cable
PLC
5
4
3
6
1
Connect a terminal
resistor of 100 , 1/2 W
(not supplied).
5
4
3
6
1
When seen from inverter front
(receptacle side)
54361
8
PU (RS-485) S S R R
connector
DDDD S
A B A BG
1
Inverter
54361
Modular jack
• FX3G-485-BD-RJ
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
5
4
3
6
1
2
Terminal
7
resistor
8
Connector metal frame
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
PLC
E-36
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
PU(RJ45)
connector
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
(Terminal resistor
selector switch: 110Ω)
(Wiring circuit switch:
2 pair)
Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)
Inverter
Connect a terminal resistor of
100 Ω, 1/2 W (not supplied).
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
4.8 Connection Diagram
A
Terminal resistor: 110 
• FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD and
FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
• FX2N-485-BD and FX2NC-485ADP:
Connect a terminal resistor (supplied)
between the RDA and RDB terminals.
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
Class-D grounding
10BASE-T
cable
PLC
5
4
3
6
1
Distributor
5
4
3
6
1
5
4
3
6
1
Distributor
5
4
3
6
1
5
4
3
6
1
5
4
3
6
1
54361
54361
54361
PU (RS-485) S S R R S
connector D D D D G
PU (RS-485) S S R R S
connector D D D D G
PU (RS-485) S S R R S
connector D D D D G
54361
54361
Inverter
ABAB
Inverter
ABAB
...
Inverter
C
Parallel Link
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
24V
LINK
DC
50mA SG
24+
24G
FG
Distributor
ABAB
D
54361
Computer Link
For the pin arrangement in the connector,
refer to the connection diagram for one inverter.
• FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Connect a terminal resistor of
100 Ω, 1/2 W (not supplied) to
the most distant inverter.
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
PU(RJ45)
connector
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
PU(RJ45)
connector
F
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
G
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
H
Programming
Communication
Inverter
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
PLC
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
(Terminal resistor
selector switch: 110Ω)
(Wiring circuit switch:
2 pair)
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
5
4
3
6
1
2
Terminal
7
resistor
8
Connector metal frame
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)
E
Inverter
Communication
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
B
N:N Network
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX2N-485-BD
FX2NC-485ADP
FX0N-485ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
Connect a terminal resistor of
100 , 1/2 W (not supplied) to
the most distant inverter.
Common Items
2. When two or more (up to eight) inverters are connected
Inverter
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-37
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
4.8.2
4.8 Connection Diagram
For A500, F500 and V500 Series (FR-A5NR)
1. When one inverter is connected
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX2N-485-BD
FX2NC-485ADP
FX0N-485ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
24V
DC
LINK
50mA
SG
24+
24G
FG
Class-D grounding
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
Terminal resistor: 110 
• FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD and
FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
• FX2N-485-BD and FX2NC-485ADP:
Connect a terminal resistor (supplied)
between the RDA and RDB terminals.
Twisted pair cable
(0.3mm2or more)
Connect the terminal resistor connection piece.
0.3mm2 or more
SS
S DD
G
AB
Terminal
arrangement
RRR
DDD
A BR
Terminal
block
Screw size:
M3
FR-A5NR
Inverter
PLC
SDA SDB RDA RDB RDR
Terminal
symbol
SG
A
B
C
Connect them to the
communication unit of the PLC.
2. When two or more (up to eight) inverters are connected
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX2N-485-BD
FX2NC-485ADP
FX0N-485ADP FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
24V
LINK
DC
50mA SG
24+
24G
FG
Class-D grounding
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
Terminal resistor: 110 
• FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD and
FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
• FX2N-485-BD and FX2NC-485ADP:
Connect a terminal resistor (supplied)
between the RDA and RDB terminals.
0.3mm2 or more
Class D
grounding
SS
S DD
G AB
PLC
Connect the terminal
resistor connection
piece to the inverter
located furthest
away from the PLC.
Twisted pair cable
(0.3mm2 or more)
RRR
DDD
A BR
FR-A5NR
Inverter
SS
S DD
G AB
Class D
grounding
RRR
DDD
ABR
FR-A5NR
Inverter
....
SS
S DD
G AB
RRR
DDD
ABR
FR-A5NR
Inverter
For the pin arrangement of the connector,
refer to the connection diagram above for one inverter.
E-38
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
A
For E700 Series (PU connector)
Common Items
4.8.3
4.8 Connection Diagram
1. When one inverter is connected (4-wire type)
Terminal resistor: 110 
• FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
N:N Network
Distributor
B
Connect a terminal
resistor of 100 Ω, 1/2 W
(not supplied).
C
Parallel Link
When seen from inverter front
(receptacle side)
10BASE-T
cable
PLC
PU (RS-485)
connector
Inverter
D
Computer Link
Modular jack
• FX3G-485-BD-RJ
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
E
Connect a terminal resistor of
100 Ω, 1/2 W (not supplied).
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
PU(RJ45)
connector
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
PLC
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
(Terminal resistor
selector switch: 110Ω)
(Wiring circuit switch:
2 pair)
Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)
Inverter
Communication
5
4
3
6
1
2
Terminal
7
resistor
8
Connector metal frame
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
Inverter
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-39
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
4.8 Connection Diagram
2. When two or more (up to eight) inverters are connected (4-wire type)
Terminal resistor: 110 
• FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
Distributor
Connect a terminal resistor of
100  , 1/2 W (not supplied) to
the most distant inverter.
Distributor
Distributor
10BASE-T
cable
PU (RS-485)
connector
PU (RS-485)
connector
PU (RS-485)
connector
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
PLC
For the pin arrangement in the connector,
refer to the connection diagram for one inverter.
• FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Connect a terminal resistor of
100 Ω, 1/2 W (not supplied) to
the most distant inverter.
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
5
4
3
6
1
2
Terminal
7
resistor
8
Connector metal frame
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
E-40
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
PU(RJ45)
connector
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
Inverter
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
PU(RJ45)
connector
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
PLC
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)
SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
(Terminal resistor
selector switch: 110Ω)
(Wiring circuit switch:
2 pair)
Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)
Inverter
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
4.8 Connection Diagram
A
Common Items
3. When one inverter is connected (2-wire type)
Terminal resistor: 110 
• FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
Distributor
B
N:N Network
Connect a terminal
resistor of 100 , 1/2 W
(not supplied).
When seen from inverter front
(receptacle side)
C
Parallel Link
10BASE-T
cable
PU (RS-485)
connector
Inverter
PLC
Modular jack
D
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
Connect a terminal resistor of
100 Ω, 1/2 W (not supplied).
E
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
PU(RJ45)
connector
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
PLC
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
(Terminal resistor
selector switch: 110Ω)
(Wiring circuit switch:
1 pair)
Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)
Inverter
Communication
5
4
3
6
1
2
Terminal
7
resistor
8
Connector metal frame
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
Computer Link
• FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Inverter
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-41
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
4.8 Connection Diagram
4. When two or more (up to eight) inverters are connected (2-wire type)
Terminal resistor: 110 
• FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
Distributor
Connect a terminal resistor of
100  , 1/2 W (not supplied) to
the most distant inverter.
Distributor
Distributor
10BASE-T
cable
PU (RS-485)
connector
PU (RS-485)
connector
PU (RS-485)
connector
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
PLC
For the pin arrangement in the connector,
refer to the connection diagram for one inverter.
• FX3G-485-BD-RJ
Connect a terminal resistor of
100 Ω, 1/2 W (not supplied) to
the most distant inverter.
FX3G-485-BD-RJ
5
4
3
6
1
2
Terminal
7
resistor
8
Connector metal frame
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
E-42
Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
PU(RJ45)
connector
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
Inverter
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
PU(RJ45)
connector
5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8
SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
PLC
5
4
3
6
1
2
7
8
SG
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
(Terminal resistor
selector switch: 110Ω)
(Wiring circuit switch:
1 pair)
Distributor (BMJ-8-28N)
Inverter
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
A
For E700 Series (FR-E7TR)
Common Items
4.8.4
4.8 Connection Diagram
1. When one inverter is connected (4-wire type)
B
N:N Network
Terminal resistor: 110 
• FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
Twisted pair cable
(0.3mm2 or more)
C
Set the terminal resistor
switch to the "100  " side.
Parallel Link
0.3mm2 or more
Terminal
arrangement
Terminal
block
PLC
D
Computer Link
Connect them to PLC
communication unit.
Inverter
2. When two or more (up to eight) inverters are connected (4-wire type)
E
Twisted pair cable
(0.3mm2 or more)
Inverter
Communication
Terminal resistor: 110 
• FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
Set the terminal resistor
switch to "100  " in the inverter
located furthest away from the PLC.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
0.3mm2 or more
Class D
grounding
Inverter
Inverter
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
PLC
Class D
grounding
Inverter
For the pin arrangement of the connector,
refer to the connection diagram above for one inverter.
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-43
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
4 Wiring
4.8 Connection Diagram
When adopting branches, perform the wiring as shown below: (4-wire type)
When connecting a 100 terminal resistor, set the switch to the "100  " side.
For crossover wiring of a shielded cable using the terminal SG, set the
terminal 2/SG selector switch to the right side (ON) to change over the
terminal 2 to the terminal SG.
(By this setting, analog inputs to the terminal 2 become invalid.)
To next station inverter
PLC
E-44
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
4.8 Connection Diagram
A
Common Items
3. When one inverter is connected (2-wire type)
Terminal resistor: 110 
• FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
B
0.3mm2 or more
N:N Network
Twisted pair cable
(0.3mm2 or more)
Set the terminal resistor switch to the
"100  " side.
Crossover
wiring
Terminal
arrangement
C
PLC
Parallel Link
Terminal
block
Connect them to PLC
communication unit.
Inverter
D
Terminal resistor: 110 
• FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
Crossover
wiring
Crossover
wiring
Crossover
wiring
0.3mm2 or more
PLC
Inverter
F
Class D
grounding
Inverter
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Class D
grounding
E
Inverter
Communication
Twisted pair cable
(0.3mm2 or more)
Set the terminal resistor switch
to "100  " in the inverter located
furthest away from the PLC.
Computer Link
4. When two or more (up to eight) inverters are connected (2-wire type)
Inverter
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
For the pin arrangement of the connector,
refer to the connection diagram above for one inverter.
When adopting branches, perform the wiring as shown below: (2-wire type)
H
To next station inverter
I
Remote
Maintenance
For crossover wiring of a shielded cable using the
terminal SG, set the terminal 2/SG selector switch
to the right side (ON) to change over the terminal
2 to the terminal SG.
(By this setting, analog inputs to the terminal 2
become invalid.)
Programming
Communication
When connecting a 100  terminal
resistor, set the switch to the "100 "
side.
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
PLC
Perform crossover wiring.
E-45
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
4.8.5
4.8 Connection Diagram
For F800, A800, F700 and A700 Series (built-in RS-485 terminal)
1. When one inverter is connected
Terminal resistor: 110
- FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
Twisted pair cable
(0.3mm2 or more)
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
Set the terminal resistor switch to the
"100" side.
0.3mm2 or more
PLC
SS
S DD
G AB
11
Class-D
grounding
RR
DD
AB
11
Inverter
2. When two or more (up to eight) inverters are connected
Terminal resistor: 110
- FX3U-485-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3U-485ADP(-MB):
Set the built-in selector switch.
FX3U-485-BD
FX3G-485-BD
FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
Set the terminal resistor switch
to "100" in the inverter located
furthest away from the PLC.
Twisted pair cable
(0.3mm2 or more)
0.3mm2 or more
Class-D
grounding
Class-D
grounding
Class-D
grounding
PLC
SS SS
S D D DD
G BA BA
1122
SS SS
S DD D D
G BA BA
1122
R R RR
D D DD S
B ABA G
1122
Inverter
R R RR
D D DD S
BA BA G
1122
....
Inverter
When adopting branches, perform the wiring as shown below:
+ - + -
Connect them
to SDA and
SDB in PLC.
Connect them
to RDA and
RDB in PLC.
Connect it to
SG in PLC.
E-46
RXD
+ - + - RXD
TXD + - + -
TXD + - + -
SG
SG
SG VCC
SG VCC
Connect them to
RDA1 and RDB1 in
next inverter.
Connect them to
SDA1 and SDB1 in
next inverter.
Connect it to SG in
next inverter.
SS
S DD
G BA
11
RR
DD
BA
11
Inverter
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
4 Wiring
Inverter Communication
A
Switching of 1 pair / 2 paired wiring (FX3G-485-BD-RJ)
Common Items
4.8.6
4.9 Grounding
The FX3G-485-BD-RJ has a built-in wiring circuit switch.
Set the wiring circuit switch to 1 pair / 2 pair.
B
N:N Network
Wiring circuit
switch
C
Parallel Link
4.9
Grounding
D
Grounding should be performed as stated below.
• Independent grounding should be performed for best results.
When independent grounding can not be performed, perform "shared grounding" as shown in the following
figure.
For details, refer to the Hardware Edition of each series.
Other
equipment
Independent grounding
Best condition
PLC
Other
equipment
Shared grounding
Good condition
PLC
Other
equipment
E
Inverter
Communication
PLC
Computer Link
• The grounding resistance should be 100 or less.
Common grounding
Not allowed
• The grounding wire size should be AWG 14 (2 mm2) or larger.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
• The grounding point should be close to the PLC, and all grounding wires should be as short as possible.
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-47
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
Inverter Communication
5.
5.1 Communication Port and Applicable Parameters
Communication Setting in Inverter
Before connecting an inverter to a PLC, set parameters related to communication in the inverter parameter
unit (PU) in advance using the procedure described in this chapter.
If these parameters are overwritten from the PLC after the inverter is connected, communication will be
disabled.
If these parameters are changed by mistake, they should be set again.
5.1
Communication Port and Applicable Parameters
When connecting an inverter to a PLC, it is necessary to set parameters corresponding to the communication
port in advance.
S500 Series
Remove the surface cover.
E500 Series
Remove the operation panel.
A500, F500 and V500 Series
Remove the operation panel.
PU
connector
FR-A5NR
PU
connector
Remove the
surface cover
RS-485 port
(PU connector)
F700 and A700 Series
Remove the surface cover.
E700 Series
Open the PU connector cover.
PU connector
RS-485 terminal
D700 Series
Remove the surface cover.
F800, A800 Series
Remove the surface cover.
RS-485
terminal
PU connector
E-48
Remove the surface cover.
FR-E7TR
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
5.1 Communication Port and Applicable Parameters
A
Model classification
Inverter connection
destination
S500 Series Only models with built-in RS-485 port RS-485 port
Parameters applicable in Reference
inverter
section
Pr79, n1 to n12
5.2
5.4
Option
FR-A5NR computer link
Pr79, Pr331 to Pr342
5.5
Models with built-in PU port
PU port
Pr79, Pr117 to Pr124
5.4
Option
FR-A5NR computer link
Pr79, Pr331 to Pr342
5.5
Models with built-in PU port
PU port
Pr79, Pr117 to Pr124
5.4
Option
FR-A5NR computer link
Pr79, Pr331 to Pr342
5.5
PU port
Pr79, Pr117 to Pr124,
Pr340, Pr549
5.6
Pr79, Pr117 to Pr124,
Pr.340, Pr549
5.6
A700 Series Models with built-in RS-485 terminal RS-485 terminal
Pr79, Pr331 to Pr342, Pr549
5.7
F700 Series Models with built-in RS-485 terminal RS-485 terminal
Pr79, Pr331 to Pr342, Pr549
5.7
A800 Series Models with built-in RS-485 terminal RS-485 terminal
Pr79, Pr331 to Pr342, Pr549
PN000, PN001, PN030 to
PN038, PD000, PD001,
PD010, PD011
5.8
F800 Series Models with built-in RS-485 terminal RS-485 terminal
Pr79, Pr331 to Pr342, Pr549
PN000, PN001, PN030 to
PN038, PD000, PD001,
PD010, PD011
5.8
A500 Series
F500 Series
V500 Series
D700 Series Models having built-in PU port
E700 Series
Models having built-in PU port
PU port
Option
FR-E7TR
control terminal option
B
C
D
Computer Link
5.3
Pr79, Pr117 to Pr124
Parallel Link
Pr79, Pr117 to Pr124
PU port
N:N Network
PU port
Models with built-in PU port
E
Inverter
Communication
E500 Series Models with built-in PU port
Common Items
Model
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-49
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
Inverter Communication
5.2 S500 Series (When Connected to RS-485 Port)
5.2
S500 Series (When Connected to RS-485 Port)
5.2.1
Contents of parameter setting
1. Contents of communication setting (essential items)
The table below shows parameters which should be set in all cases.
Parameter No.
Parameter item
Set value
n1
Communication station number
n2
Communication speed
n3
Stop bit length
n4
n7
n11
00 to 31
Setting contents
Up to eight inverters can be connected.
48
4800 bps
96
9600 bps
192
19200 bps (standard)
10
Data length: 7-bit/Stop bit: 1-bit
Parity check presence/absence
2
Even parity present
Wait time setting
---
Set with communication data
CR/LF selection
1
With CR, without LF
Pr79
Operation mode selection
0
External operation mode is selected when
power is turned ON.
n10
Link start mode selection
1
Computer link operation
n6
Communication check time interval
---
Communication check suspension
2. Parameters which should be adjusted between test operation and actual operation
Parameter No.
n5
Parameter item
Number of
communication retries
Set value
Setting contents
---
Set the value shown on the left during adjustment, and
set a value from 1 to 10 during operation.
3. Others (which should be set if necessary)
The table below shows parameters to be considered when using various system configuration and inverters.
For the method of use, refer to the respective inverter manual.
Parameter No.
E-50
Set value
Setting contents
n12
EEPROM write selection
0 or 1
0: Written to RAM and EEPROM
1: Written to RAM only. Not written to EEPROM
n8
Operation command
write
0 or 1
0: PLC
1: External
n9
Speed command write
0 or 1
0: PLC
1: External
Pr37
*1.
Parameter item
Speed display*1
0 or 0.1 to
999
0: Frequency display, setting
0.1 to 999: Machine speed at 60Hz.
This inverter communication function cannot read or write Pr37.
Set Pr37 to "0" when setting or monitoring the frequency in the PLC.
If any value other than "0" is set and the instruction code HFF is set to "01", the frequency may not be
set or monitored normally.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
Inverter Communication
A
Parameter setting method (reference)
Common Items
5.2.2
5.2 S500 Series (When Connected to RS-485 Port)
This subsection explains the parameter setting method using the operation panel.
For details on the operation panel, refer to the respective inverter manual.
B
MODE key
Changes over the setting mode.
C
N:N Network
3-digit monitor LED
Shows the frequency,
parameter number, etc.
RUN indicator
Lights or flashes during
operation.
Parallel Link
Setting dial
Changes the set value of
the frequency and
parameters.
SET key
Sets each setting.
The operating procedure example below shows a case in which the baud rate is set to 19,200 bps.
D
Confirming the RUN indicator and the operation mode
Computer Link
1
Confirm that the operation is stopped (that the RUN indicator is OFF).
2
Selecting the parameter setting mode
E
Monitor/frequency setting mode
Inverter
Communication
Press the MODE key, and select the parameter setting mode.
Parameter setting mode
The last parameter read
is displayed.
F
Setting the set value of Pr. 30 to "1"
(This step is not necessary if Pr. 30 is already set to "1".)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
3
1. Turn the setting dial to display "P30".
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
2. Press the SET key to read the currently set value.
H
Programming
Communication
3. Turn the setting dial to change the set value to "1".
I
Remote
Maintenance
Press the SET key to set "1".
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.
When the set value and parameter number are displayed alternately, the setting is completed.
E-51
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
4
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
5.2 S500 Series (When Connected to RS-485 Port)
Setting the set value of "n2" to "192"
("192" indicates the baud rate of 19200 bps.)
Turn the setting dial to display "n2".
Press the SET key to read the currently set value.
Turn the setting dial to change the set value to "192".
Press the SET key to set "192".
The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.
When the set value and parameter number are displayed alternately, the setting is completed.
5
E-52
Changing other parameters in the same way as step 4
For details on the parameters to be set, refer to Subsection 5.2.1.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
Inverter Communication
5.3 E500 Series (When Connected to PU Port)
E500 Series (When Connected to PU Port)
5.3.1
Contents of parameter setting
Common Items
5.3
A
B
N:N Network
1. Contents of communication setting (essential items)
The table below shows parameters which should be set in all cases.
Parameter item
Set value
Pr117
Communication station number
00 to 31
Pr118
Communication speed
Pr119
Stop bit / Data length
Setting contents
Up to eight inverters can be connected.
48
4800 bps
96
9600 bps
C
192
19200 bps (standard)
10
Data length: 7-bit/Stop bit: 1-bit
2
Even parity present
Parallel Link
Parameter No.
Pr120
Parity check presence/absence
Pr123
Waiting time setting
Pr124
CR•LF presence/absence
selection
1
With CR, without LF
Pr79
Operation mode selection
0
External operation mode is selected when power
is turned ON.
Pr122
Communication check time
interval
9999
D
Communication check suspension
E
Pr121
Parameter item
Number of
communication retries
Set value
Setting contents
9999
Set the value shown on the left during adjustment, and
set a value from 1 to 10 during operation.
3. Others (which should be set if necessary)
Parameter No.
Pr37
Pr342
Speed display*1
Frequency setting
command selection*2
EEPROM write selection
(only in 400 V class)
Set value
0 or 0.01 to
9998
0, 1, 9999
0 or 1
Setting contents
0: Frequency display, setting
0.01 to 9998: Machine speed at 60Hz.
0
: The built-in frequency setting knob is valid.
1
: The built-in frequency setting knob is invalid.
9999 : The built-in frequency setting knob is valid when
the frequency is set to "0 Hz" by the keys.
0: EEPROM is written.
1: RAM is written.
This inverter communication function cannot read or write Pr37.
Set Pr37 to "0" when setting or monitoring the frequency in the PLC.
If any value other than "0" is set to Pr37 and the instruction code HFF is set to "01", the frequency may
not be set or monitored normally (in the 400 V class).
(In the 200 V and 100 V classes, the frequency may not be set or monitored normally if any value
other than "0" is set to Pr37 without regard to the setting of the instruction code HFF.)
*2.
When changing the frequency from the PLC, set "1" or "9999".
H
Programming
Communication
*1.
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Pr146
Parameter item
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
The table below shows parameters to be considered when using various system configuration and inverters.
For the method of use, refer to the respective inverter manual.
Inverter
Communication
2. Parameters which should be adjusted between test operation and actual operation
Parameter No.
Computer Link
9999
Set with communication data
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-53
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
Inverter Communication
5.3.2
5.3 E500 Series (When Connected to PU Port)
Parameter setting method (reference)
This subsection explains the parameter setting method using the operation panel.
For details on the operation panel, refer to the respective inverter manual.
When the cover is closed
When the cover is open
Display LED 4 digits
Displays the frequency,
parameter number, etc.
Unit indicator
Operation status indication
The LEDs light and flash according
to the mode and operation status.
Setting key
Sets each setting.
UP/DOWN key
Change the set value of the
frequency and parameters.
MODE key
Changes over the mode.
The operating procedure example below shows a case in which the baud rate is set to 19200 bps.
1
Confirming the RUN indicator and the operation mode indicator
Confirm that the operation is stopped (that the RUN indicator is Off).
2
Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press the MODE key, and select the parameter setting mode.
Monitoring mode
*1.
3
Frequency setting mode*1
Parameter setting mode
The frequency setting mode is displayed only in the PU operation mode.
Reading the parameter (Pr. 118)
There are two methods to read the parameter number:
• Method to read the parameter number using the UP and DOWN keys
Press the UP and DOWN keys, and display the parameter number to be read.
E-54
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
5.3 E500 Series (When Connected to PU Port)
A
Common Items
• Method to set each digit of the parameter number
a) Press the SET key to flash the most significant digit. Set a numeric value using the UP and DOWN
keys.
B
N:N Network
b) Press the SET key to flash the middle digit. Set a numeric value using the UP and DOWN keys.
C
Parallel Link
c) Press the SET key to flash the least significant digit. Set a numeric value using the UP and DOWN
keys.
D
Computer Link
E
Setting the set value of Pr. 118 to "192"
("192" indicates the baud rate of 19200 bps.)
1. Press the SET key to read the currently set value. Change the set value using the UP and
DOWN keys.
Inverter
Communication
4
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
2. Press and hold the SET key for 1.5 seconds to set "192".
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Press and hold it
for 1.5 sec.
The set value and parameter number are displayed
alternately.
H
Programming
Communication
3. Press the SET key to display the next parameter.
I
5
Remote
Maintenance
The parameter number and set value are displayed
alternately
Change other parameters in the same way as step 3.
For details on parameters to be set, refer to Subsection 5.3.1.
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-55
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
Inverter Communication
5.4 V500, F500 and A500 Series (Connection to PU Port)
5.4
V500, F500 and A500 Series (Connection to PU Port)
5.4.1
Contents of parameter setting
1. Contents of communication setting (essential items)
The table below shows parameters which should be set in any case.
Parameter No.
Parameter item
Set value
Pr117
Communication station number
Pr118
Communication speed
Pr119
Stop bit length/data length
00 to 31
Setting contents
Up to eight inverters can be connected.
48
4800 bps
96
9600 bps
192
19200 bps (standard)
10
Data length: 7-bit/Stop bit: 1-bit
2
2: Even parity
Pr120
Parity check presence/absence
Pr123
Waiting time setting
Pr124
CR•LF presence/absence
selection
1
CR: Provided, LF: Not provided
Pr79
Operation mode selection
0
External operation mode is selected when
power is turned ON.
Pr122
Communication check time interval
9999
9999
Set in communication data
Communication check is stopped.
2. Parameters which should be adjusted between test operation and actual operation
Parameter No.
Pr121
Parameter item
Number of
communication retries
Set value
Setting contents
9999
Set the value shown on the left during adjustment, and
set a value from 1 to 10 during operation.
3. Others (which should be set if necessary)
The table below shows parameters to be considered when using various system configuration and inverters.
For the method of use, refer to the respective inverter manual.
E-56
Parameter No.
Parameter item
Set value
Pr342
EEPROM write selection
0 or 1
Setting contents
0: EEPROM are written.
1: RAM is written.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
5.4 V500, F500 and A500 Series (Connection to PU Port)
A
Parameter setting method (reference)
Common Items
5.4.2
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
This subsection explains the parameter setting method using the operation panel.
For details on the operation panel, refer to the respective inverter manual.
B
N:N Network
Display LED4 digit
Displays the frequency,
parameter number, etc.
Operation status
indication
REV LED flashes during
reverse rotation.
FWD LED flashes during
forward rotation.
C
Parallel Link
Mode key
Changes over the mode.
UP.down key
Change the set value of
the frequency and
parameters.
Set key
Sets each setting.
D
1
Computer Link
The operating procedure example below shows a case in which the baud rate is set to 19200 bps.
Confirming the RUN indicator and the operation mode indicator
Confirm that the operation is stopped (that both the REV and FWD indicators are Off).
E
Selecting the parameter setting mode
Inverter
Communication
2
Press the MODE key, and select the parameter setting mode.
Monitor mode
Frequency setting mode*1
Parameter setting mode
F
The frequency setting mode is displayed only during the PU operation mode.
G
Reading the parameter (Pr. 118)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
3
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
*1.
There are two methods to read the parameter number:
• Method to read the parameter number using the UP and DOWN keys
Press the UP and DOWN keys, and display the parameter number to be read.
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
• Method to set each digit of the parameter number
a) Press the SET key to flash the most significant digit. Set a numeric value using the UP and DOWN
keys.
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-57
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
5.4 V500, F500 and A500 Series (Connection to PU Port)
b) Press the SET key to flash the middle digit. Set a numeric value using the UP and DOWN keys.
c) Press the SET key to flash the least significant digit. Set a numeric value using the UP and DOWN
keys.
4
Setting the set value of Pr. 118 to "192"
("192" indicates the baud rate of 19200 bps.)
1. Press the SET key to read the currently set value. Change the set value using the UP and
DOWN keys.
2. Press and hold the SET key for 1.5 seconds to set "192".
Press and hold it
for 1.5 sec.
The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.
3. Press the SET key to display the next parameter
The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.
5
E-58
Changing other parameters in the same way as step 3
For details on the parameters to be set, refer to Subsection 5.4.1.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
Inverter Communication
5.5 V500, F500 and A500 Series (Connection to FR-A5NR)
V500, F500 and A500 Series (Connection to FR-A5NR)
5.5.1
Contents of parameter setting
Common Items
5.5
A
B
The table below shows parameters which should be set in all cases.
Parameter No.
Parameter item
Set value
Communication station number
Pr332
Communication speed
Pr333
Stop bit / Data length
00 to 31
Pr334
Parity check presence/absence
Pr337
Waiting time setting
Pr341
CR, LF presence/absence selection
Setting contents
Up to eight inverters can be connected.
48
4800 bps
96
9600 bps (standard)
192
19200 bps
10
Data length: 7-bit/Stop bit: 1-bit
2
9999
C
Parallel Link
Pr331
2: Even parity
Set in communication data
D
CR: Provided, LF: Not provided
0
External operation mode is selected when
power is turned ON.
1
Computer link
Computer Link
1
Communication check is stopped.
2. Parameters which should be adjusted between test operation and actual operation
E
Pr79
Operation mode selection
Pr340
Link startup mode selection
Pr336
Communication check time interval
Pr335
Parameter item
9999
Set value
Setting contents
9999
Set the value shown on the left during adjustment,
and set a value from 1 to 10 during operation.
Number of communication
retries
3. Others (which should be set if necessary)
Parameter No.
Parameter item
Set value
Setting contents
F
Pr342
EEPROM write selection
0 or 1
0: EEPROM is written.
1: RAM is written.
Pr338
Operation command right
0 or 1
0: PLC
1: Outside
G
Pr339
Speed command write
0 or 1
0: PLC
1: Outside
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
The table below shows parameters to be considered when using various system configuration and inverters.
For the method of use, refer to the respective inverter manual.
Inverter
Communication
Parameter No.
5.5.2
N:N Network
1. Contents of communication setting (essential items)
Parameter setting method (reference)
H
Programming
Communication
The parameter setting method is the same as that for the V500, F500 and A500 Series (connection to the PU port).
For the parameter setting method, refer to Subsection 5.4.2.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-59
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
Inverter Communication
5.6 E700, D700 Series (when PU port, FR-E7TR is connected)
5.6
E700, D700 Series (when PU port, FR-E7TR is connected)
5.6.1
Contents of parameter setting
1. Contents of communication setting (essential items)
The table below shows parameters which should be set in all cases.
Parameter No.
Pr117
Pr118
Pr119
Parameter item
PU communication station number
PU communication speed
PU communication stop bit length
Set value
00 to 31
Setting contents
Up to eight inverters can be connected.
48
4800 bps
96
9600 bps
192
19200 bps (standard)
384
38400 bps
10
Data length: 7-bit/Stop bit: 1-bit
2
2: Even parity
Pr120
PU communication parity check
Pr123
PU communication waiting time setting
Pr124
PU communication CR/LF presence/
absence selection
1
CR: Provided, LF: Not provided
Pr79
Operation mode selection
0
External operation mode is selected when
power is turned ON.
Pr549
Protocol selection
0
Mitsubishi
inverter
operation) protocol
Pr340
Communication startup mode selection
9999
1 or 10
Set in communication data
(computer
link
1: Network operation mode
10: Network operation mode
Operation mode can be changed
between the PU operation mode and
network operation mode from the
operation panel.
2. Parameters which should be adjusted between test operation and actual operation
Parameter No.
Pr121
Pr122
Parameter item
Number of PU communication retries
PU communication check time interval
Set value
Setting contents
9999
Set the value shown on the left during
adjustment, and set a value from 1 to 10
during operation.
9999
Set the value shown on the left during
adjustment, and set a proper value in
accordance with the system specification
during operation.
Caution on setting the PU communication check time interval (Pr122)
Description
During adjustment or when communication with the PLC is not executed periodically
E-60
Set value
9999
When communication with the PLC is not executed
0 (Initial Value)
Set the communication time in the following cases
• When it is necessary to monitor absence of communication for a certain time and stop
the inverter in such a case while communication with the PLC is being executed
• When it is necessary to stop the motor at the point which the PLC mode is changed
from RUN to STOP
0.1 to 999.8 sec
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
Inverter Communication
5.6 E700, D700 Series (when PU port, FR-E7TR is connected)
A
The table below shows parameters to be considered when using various system configuration and inverters.
For the method of use, refer to the respective inverter manual.
Parameter No.
Pr37
Parameter item
Speed display*1
Set value
Setting contents
0 or 0.01 0: Frequency display, setting
to 9998 0.01 to 9998: Machine speed at 60Hz.
Built-in potentiometer switching*2
0 or 1
Pr342
Communication EEPROM write selection
0 or 1
0: EEPROM is written.
1: RAM is written.
B
N:N Network
Pr146
0: Built-in frequency setting potentiometer
valid
1: Built-in frequency setting potentiometer
invalid
Common Items
3. Others (which should be set if necessary)
C
This inverter communication function cannot read or write Pr37.
Set Pr37 to "0" when setting or monitoring the frequency in the PLC.
If any value other than "0" is set to Pr37 and the instruction code HFF is set to "01", the frequency may
not be set or monitored normally.
*2.
Set Pr146 to "1" when changing the frequency from the PLC.
Parallel Link
*1.
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-61
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
Inverter Communication
5.6.2
5.6 E700, D700 Series (when PU port, FR-E7TR is connected)
Parameter setting method (reference)
This subsection explains the parameter setting method using the operation panel.
For details on the operation panel, refer to the respective inverter manual.
Operating status display
Lit or flicker during inverter operation
Monitor
(4-digit LED)
Show the frequency,
parameter number, etc.
Setting dial
Used to change
the frequency setting
and parameter values.
SET key
Determines each setting
MODE key
Used to change each setting mode
The operating procedure example below shows a case in which the baud rate is set to 19200 bps.
1
Confirming the RUN indicator and the operation mode indicator
Confirm that the operation is stopped (that the RUN indicator is off).
2
Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press the MODE key, and select the parameter setting mode.
Monitor/frequency
setting mode
Parameter setting mode
The previously read parameter
is displayed.
3
Setting the parameter Pr. 160 to "0"
(This step is not required if Pr. 160 is already set to "0".)
1. Turn the setting dial until "Pr. 160" is displayed.
2. Press the SET key to read the current set value.
3. Turn the setting dial, and change the set value to "0".
E-62
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
5.6 E700, D700 Series (when PU port, FR-E7TR is connected)
A
Common Items
Press the SET key to determine the set value.
B
The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.
4
N:N Network
The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately, and the setting is completed.
Setting the parameter Pr. 118 to "192"
("192" indicates the baud rate of 19200 bps.)
C
Turn the setting dial until "Pr. 118" is displayed.
Parallel Link
D
Computer Link
Press the SET key to read the current set value.
E
Inverter
Communication
Turn the setting dial, and change the set value to "192".
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Press the SET key to determine the set value.
G
The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately, and the setting is completed.
5
Changing other parameters in the same way as step 4
For details on the parameters to be set, refer to Subsection 5.6.1.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-63
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
Inverter Communication
5.7 F700 and A700 Series (when built-in RS-485 terminal is connected)
5.7
F700 and A700 Series (when built-in RS-485 terminal is connected)
5.7.1
Contents of parameter setting
1. Contents of communication setting (essential items)
The table below shows parameters which should be set in all cases.
Parameter No.
Pr331
Pr332
Parameter item
Set value
RS-485 communication station
00 to 31
RS-485 communication speed
Setting contents
Up to eight inverters can be connected.
48
4800 bps
96
9600 bps (standard)
192
19200 bps
384
38400 bps
Pr333
RS-485 communication stop bit length
10
Data length: 7-bit/Stop bit: 1-bit
Pr334
RS-485 communication
selection
2
2: Even parity
parity
check
Pr337
RS-485 communication waiting time setting
Pr341
RS-485 communication CR/LF selection
1
CR: Provided, LF: Not provided
Pr79
Operation mode selection
0
External operation mode is selected when
power is turned ON.
Pr340
Communication startup mode selection
1
Computer link
Pr336
RS-485 communication check time interval
Pr549
Protocol selection
9999
9999
0
Set in communication data
Communication check is stopped.
Mitsubishi inverter (computer link) protocol
2. Parameters which should be adjusted between test operation and actual operation
Parameter No.
Parameter item
Pr335
RS-485 communication number
of retries
Set value
Setting contents
9999
Set the value shown on the left during adjustment, and
set a value from 1 to 10 during operation.
3. Others (which should be set if necessary)
The table below shows parameters to be considered when using various system configuration and inverters.
For the method of use, refer to the respective inverter manual.
Parameter No.
E-64
Parameter item
Set value
Setting contents
Pr342
Communication EEPROM write selection
0 or 1
0: EEPROM is written.
1: RAM is written.
Pr338
Communication operation command source
0 or 1
0: PLC
1: Outside
Pr339
Communication operation command source
0 or 1
0: PLC
1: Outside
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
5.7 F700 and A700 Series (when built-in RS-485 terminal is connected)
A
Parameter setting method (reference)
Common Items
5.7.2
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
This subsection explains the parameter setting method using the operation panel.
For details on the operation panel, refer to the respective inverter manual.
Rotation direction indicator
FWD: Lit during forward rotation
REV: Lit during reverse rotation
Setting dial
Used to change the
frequency setting and
parameter values.
C
Parallel Link
MODE key
Changes over the mode.
SET key
Sets each setting.
D
The operating procedure example below shows a case in which the baud rate is set to 19200 bps.
Computer Link
1
Confirming the RUN indicator and the operation mode indicator
Confirm that the operation is stopped (that the RUN indicator is off).
2
E
Selecting the parameter setting mode
Inverter
Communication
Press the MODE key, and select the parameter setting mode.
Monitor/frequency
setting mode
Parameter setting mode
The previously read parameter
is displayed.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
3
B
N:N Network
Operation mode indicator
NET: Lit to indicate network
operation mode
Monitor (4-digit LED)
shows the frequency,
parameter number, etc.
Setting the parameter Pr. 160 to "0"
(This step is not required if Pr. 160 is already set to "0".)
G
1. Turn the setting dial until "Pr. 160" is displayed.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
2. Press the SET key to read the current set value.
Programming
Communication
I
3. Turn the setting dial, and change the set value to "0".
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-65
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
5.7 F700 and A700 Series (when built-in RS-485 terminal is connected)
Press the SET key to determine the set value.
The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.
The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately, and the setting is completed.
4
Setting the parameter Pr. 332 to "192"
("192" indicates the baud rate of 19200 bps.)
Turn the setting dial until "Pr. 332" is displayed.
Press the SET key to read the current set value.
Turn the setting dial, and change the set value to "192".
Press the SET key to determine the set value.
The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.
The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately, and the setting is completed.
5
E-66
Change other parameters in the same way as step 4
For details on the parameters to be set, refer to Subsection 5.7.1.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
Inverter Communication
5.8 F800 and A800 Series (when built-in RS-485 terminal is connected)
F800 and A800 Series (when built-in RS-485 terminal is connected)
5.8.1
Contents of parameter setting
B
N:N Network
1. Contents of communication setting (essential items)
The table below shows parameters which should be set in all cases.
Parameter Parameter
Parameter item
No.
group
Pr331
N030
RS-485 communication station
Set value
Setting contents
00 to 31
Up to eight inverters can be connected.
4800 bps
96
9600 bps (standard)
192
19200 bps
384
38400 bps
RS-485 communication stop bit length/
data length
10
Data length: 7-bit/Stop bit: 1-bit
N032
RS-485 communication data length
1
Data length: 7 bits
N033
RS-485 communication stop bit length
0
Stop bit: 1 bit
Pr334
N034
RS-485 communication parity check
selection
2
2: Even parity
Pr337
N037
RS-485 communication waiting time
setting
9999
Pr341
N038
RS-485 communication CR/LF selection
1
CR: Provided, LF: Not provided
Pr79
D000
Operation mode selection
0
External operation mode is selected
when power is turned ON.
Pr340
D001
Communication startup mode selection
1
Computer link
0
Mitsubishi inverter (computer link)
protocol
N031
—
Pr333
Protocol selection
Computer Link
N000
D
Set in communication data
E
Parameter Parameter
No.
group
Pr335
N035
RS-485 communication number of
retries
N036
RS-485 communication check time
interval
Set value
Setting contents
9999
Set the value shown on the left during
adjustment, and set a value from 1 to
10 during operation.
9999
Set the value shown on the left during
adjustment, and set a value in
accordance with the system
specification during operation.
H
3. Others (which should be set if necessary)
Set value
Setting contents
N001
Communication EEPROM write
selection
0 or 1
0: Write to EEPROM and RAM.
1: Write to RAM only.
Pr338
D010
Communication operation command
source
0 or 1
0: PLC
1: Outside
Pr339
D011
Communication operation command
source
0 or 1
0: PLC
1: Outside
I
Remote
Maintenance
Pr342
Programming
Communication
The table below shows parameters to be considered when using various system configuration and inverters.
For the method of use, refer to the respective inverter manual.
Parameter Parameter
Parameter item
No.
group
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Pr336
Parameter item
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
2. Parameters which should be adjusted between test operation and actual operation
Inverter
Communication
Pr549
RS-485 communication speed
C
Parallel Link
48
Pr332
Common Items
5.8
A
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-67
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
Inverter Communication
5.8.2
5.8 F800 and A800 Series (when built-in RS-485 terminal is connected)
Parameter setting method (reference)
This subsection explains the parameter setting method using the operation panel.
For details on the operation panel, refer to the respective inverter manual.
Hz
Operation mode indicator
NET : Lit to indicate network
operation mode
PU
EXT
NET
MODE key
Changes over the mode.
MODE
MON
PRM
P.RUN
SET
Monitor (5-digit LED)
shows the frequency,
parameter number, etc.
IM
PM
ESC
FWD
REV
SET key
Sets each setting.
PU
EXT
STOP
RESET
FR-DU08
Rotation direction key
FWD: Lit during forward rotation
REV : Lit during reverse rotation
Setting dial
Used to change the frequency
setting and parameter values.
The operating procedure example below shows a case in which the baud rate is set to 19200 bps.
1
Confirming the RUN indicator and the operation mode indicator
Confirm that the operation is stopped (that the P.RUN indicator is off).
2
Selecting the parameter setting mode
Press the MODE key, and select the parameter setting mode.
Monitor/frequency
setting mode
Parameter setting mode
MODE
3
The previously read parameter
is displayed.
Setting the parameter Pr. 160 to "0"
(This step is not required if Pr. 160 is already set to "0".)
1. Turn the setting dial until "Pr. 160" is displayed.
2. Press the SET key to read the current set value.
SET
3. Turn the setting dial, and change the set value to "0".
E-68
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
5 Communication Setting in Inverter
Inverter Communication
5.9 Cautions on Setting
A
Common Items
Press the SET key to determine the set value.
SET
B
The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.
4
N:N Network
The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately, and the setting is completed.
Setting the parameter Pr. 332 to "192"
("192" indicates the baud rate of 19200 bps.)
C
Turn the setting dial until "Pr. 332" is displayed.
Parallel Link
D
Computer Link
Press the SET key to read the current set value.
SET
E
Inverter
Communication
Turn the setting dial, and change the set value to "192".
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Press the SET key to determine the set value.
SET
G
The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately.
5
For details on the parameters to be set, refer to Subsection 5.8.1.
Cautions on Setting
1. Setting of the "communication check time interval" and "RS-485 communication check time
interval"
During adjustment or when communication with the PLC is not executed periodically
When communication with the PLC is not executed
Value shown in table
0
0.1 to 999.8 sec
E-69
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
Set the communication time in the following cases:
When it is necessary to monitor the absence of communication for a certain time and stop
the inverter in such a case while communication with the PLC is being executed
When it is necessary to stop the motor at the point which the PLC mode is changed from
RUN to STOP
Set value
I
Remote
Maintenance
Description
H
Programming
Communication
5.9
Change other parameters in the same way as step 4
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
The set value and parameter number are displayed alternately, and the setting is completed.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller
Inverter Communication
6.
6.1 Parameter Assigning Method
Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller
This chapter explains the communication setting method for inverter communication.
Set non-protocol communication for inverter communication.
6.1
Parameter Assigning Method
Use parameters for communication setting in the FX PLC.
1. Parameter assigning method
Register the communication setting in the sequence programming software parameters, and transfer the
parameters to the PLC.
2. Setting flow
PLC memory
Setting window
Parameter area
Parameter
method
Transferred
when
power is
turned ON
Inverter communication using
ch1
D8120 Communication format
Program area
In FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC
Inverter communication using
ch2
D8420 Communication format
E-70
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller
Inverter Communication
A
Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)
6.2.1
Operating procedure
1
Opening the parameter setting window
D
Computer Link
In the project view area of the navigation window, double-click [Parameter] [PLC Parameter].
If the navigation window is not displayed, select [View]  [Docking Window]  [Navigation] from
the menu bar.
C
Parallel Link
This subsection explains the serial communication setting method. Suppose that GX Works2 is already
started up.
B
N:N Network
Communication settings may be changed via the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with GX Works2.
For details on FXGP/WIN operating procedure, refer to section 6.3.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.
Common Items
6.2
6.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)
E
Inverter
Communication
Setting the serial communication (parameters)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
2
F
Click the [PLC System(2)] tab in the FX Parameter window.
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-71
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller
Inverter Communication
3
6.2 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (GX Works2)
Setting the serial communication (parameters)
Set the parameters as shown below:
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1] Set the channel to be used. (This parameter can be set only in the FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs.)
[2] Check the "Operate Communication Setting" box.
[3] Set "Protocol" to "Non-procedural", "Data Length" to "7Bit", "Parity" to "Even", and "Stop Bit" to
"1Bit".
[4] Set "Transmission Speed" to either "4800", "9600", "19200" or "38400*1", and make sure that
the set value here is the same as the set value in the inverters.
[5] Ignore these items.
*1.
This transmission speed is supported only in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCS.
Click [End].
4
Writing parameters and program to the PLC
Select [Online]  [Write to PLC] from the menu bar, click [Parameter + Program], and then click
[Execute].
E-72
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
6.3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)
A
Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)
6.3.1
Operating procedure
1
Displaying serial setting (parameter)
Select [Option]  [Serial setting (parameter)] from the toolbar.
The following dialog box appears according to absence/presence of parameter setting.
C
Parallel Link
This subsection explains the serial communication setting method. Suppose that FXGP/WIN is already
started up.
B
N:N Network
Communication settings may be changed via the parameter method with GX Works2, GX Developer,
FXGP/WIN for Windows and FX-30P handy programming panel. This section describes how to change
parameters with FXGP/WIN. Ch2 cannot be set using FXGP/WIN.
For details on GX Works2 operating procedure, refer to section 6.2.
For details on GX Developer operating procedure, refer to GX Developer Operating Manual.
For details on FX-30P operating procedure, refer to FX-30P Operation Manual.
Common Items
6.3
6 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller
D
Computer Link
1. When there are no parameter settings
There are no communication settings. Click the [Yes] button.
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-73
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
6 Communication Setting in FX Programmable Controller
Inverter Communication
6.3 Communication Setting Using Parameter Method (FXGP/WIN)
2. When there are already parameter settings
The existing communication setting contents are displayed.
2
Adjusting serial setting (parameter)
Execute the communication setting as shown below.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] Set "Protocol" to "RS instruction", "Data bits" to "7", "Parity" to "Even", and "Stop bits" to "1".
[2] Set "Transfer speed [bps]" to either "4800", "9600" or "19200", and make sure that the set value
here is the same as the set value in the inverters.
[3] Ignore these items.
3
Writing a sequence program (parameters) to the PLC
Select [PLC]  [Transfers]  [Write] from the toolbar, and click [OK] button.
E-74
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)
Inverter Communication
7.1 Checking Contents of Related Devices
A
Common Items
7.
Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)
7.1
Checking Contents of Related Devices
C
1. Bit devices
Name
Description
R/W
R
M8104
Extension ROM
cassette check
R
Remains ON while an extension ROM cassette is attached.

R
Remains ON while the communication port is used by an EXTR instruction.
R
Unused
M8155
Communication port
busy
M8156
Communication error
Turns ON when a communication error is caused by an EXTR instruction.
or parameter error
R
M8157
Communication error
Turns ON when a communication error occurs.
latch*1
R
F
R: Read only (used as a contact in program)
Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.
2. Word devices
Device No.
Name
Description
R/W
Stores the extension ROM cassette type code (value: K1).
R
D8105
Extension ROM
cassette version
Stores the extension ROM cassette version.
(value: K100 = Ver. 1.00).
R
D8154
Inverter response
waiting time
Sets the inverter response waiting time.
D8155
Step number of
instruction using
communication port
Stores the step number of the EXTR instruction using the communication
port.
R
D8156
Error code*1
Stores an error code when a communication error is caused by an EXTR
instruction.
R
D8157
Error occurrence
step number latch*1
Stores the instruction step number in which a communication error has
occurred. (Stores K-1 when no error has occurred.)
R
R/W
*1.
H
I
Remote
Maintenance
R: Read only
W: Write only
R/W: Read or Write
G
Programming
Communication
Extension ROM
cassette type code
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
D8104
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
*1.
E
Inverter
Communication
M8154
D
Computer Link
M8029
Turns ON when execution of EXTR instruction is completed, and remains
Instruction execution ON for 1 scan.
complete
Turns ON also when execution of instruction is completed if M8156
(communication error or parameter error) turns ON.
Parallel Link
The tables below show the devices used in inverter communication in FX2N and FX2NC PLCs.
Device No.
B
N:N Network
This chapter explains how to create programs which change inverter parameters and give operation
commands to inverters.
As explanation, a program example is shown for each applied instruction.
Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-75
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)
Inverter Communication
7.2 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions
7.2
Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions
7.2.1
Inverter communication types (EXTR K10 to K13)
An FX2N and FX2NC PLC and inverter execute communication using EXTR (FNC180) instruction.
EXTR instruction can be described in four types of methods, from "EXTR K10" to "EXTR K13", depending on
the data communication direction and parameter writing/reading direction.
S
S1 
FNC180 Function Inverter station
number
EXTR
number
S2 
S3 
Inverter
instruction code
Read/
Write
Only EXTR (16-bit type) is applicable.
DEXTR (32-bit type), EXTRP (pulse type)
and DEXTRP (32-bit pulse type) are not
applicable.
Instruction
EXTR(FNC180)
7.2.2
Function
number (S)
Read value storage
destination or value written
to inverter
Function
Control direction
Detailed
explanation
K10
Monitors inverter operations
PLC  inverter
7.3
K11
Controls inverter operations
PLC  inverter
7.4
K12
Reads inverter parameters
PLC  inverter
7.5
K13
Writes inverter parameters
PLC  inverter
7.6
Function and operation
1. Communication start timing
At the rising edge (OFFON) of the drive condition, the PLC starts communication with an inverter.
Even if the drive condition turns OFF during communication with an inverter, the PLC executes
communication until the end.
When the drive condition is always ON, the PLC executes communication repeatedly.
2. Simultaneous driving of EXTR instructions and communication processing
1) Driving instructions at the same time
- Two or more EXTR functions (K10 to K13) can be programmed, and driven at the same time.
- When two or more instructions are driven at the same time during communication, the next EXTR
instruction in the program is executed after the current communication with an inverter is finished.
M8000
RUN
monitor
FNC180
EXTR

FNC180
EXTR




(1)
M8155
ONOFF



M8155
ONOFF
(2)
M8155
ONOFF
FNC180
EXTR
E-76




(3)
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)
Inverter Communication
7.2 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions
M1
FNC180
EXTR




......[1]
FNC180
EXTR




......[2]
C
Parallel Link
M0
*1
*2
EXTR
instruction [1]
(Communicating)
D
15ms
15ms
M1
*2
E
15ms
EXTR
instruction [1]
15ms
EXTR
instruction [2]
EXTR
instruction [1]
EXTR
instruction [2]
*3
EXTR
instruction [1]
*3
The PLC does not execute the instruction even if M8155 is turned OFF because the drive contact is
OFF.
*2.
When two or more instructions are driven at the same time during communication, the next EXTR
instruction is executed after the current instruction is completed.
*3.
M8155 remains OFF until the next EXTR instruction is driven after execution of the current EXTR
instruction is completed.
FNC180
EXTR

M8029

M0
Command is latched


Communication is
executed
RST
M0
Command is reset
I
Remote
Maintenance
SET
H
Programming
Communication
X001
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
2) Cautions on programming
When the drive contact for another EXTR instruction is driven by a pulse signal during communication
with an inverter, the communication is not executed.
When communicating with inverters for two or more items, let the drive contact for the EXTR instruction
remain ON until sending is completed. After communication with all inverters is completed, set the drive
contact to OFF using the instruction execution complete flag M8029.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
*1.
Inverter
Communication
EXTR
instruction [2]
(Communicating)
M0
Computer Link
15ms
M8155
B
N:N Network
M0
A
Common Items
- The PLC waits for 15 ms after acquiring the communication port, and then starts communication using
EXTR instructions. Even if the drive condition turns ON, the PLC does not start execution of the EXTR
instruction until the communication port busy flag M8155 turns OFF from ON if M8155 was set to ON by
another EXTR instruction.
The PLC frees the communication port, and then executes EXTR instructions driven in the next step and
so on.
Instruction execution
complete
3. Communication complete flag (M8029)
E-77
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
When communication with an inverter is completed, the instruction execution complete flag M8029 turns ON,
and remains ON for 1 scan.
For details on using M8029 method, refer to program examples shown below.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)
Inverter Communication
7.2.3
7.2 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions
Instruction completion and error flag operation
When two or more EXTR instructions are programmed, the following flags turn ON or OFF according to the
execution result of each EXTR instruction.
For acquiring the result of each EXTR instruction, make sure to provide these flags just below each EXTR
instruction.
Device number
Description
M8029
Instruction execution complete
M8156
Communication error or parameter error
D8156
Error code
1. Operation of M8029 (instruction execution complete flag)
M8029 (instruction execution complete flag) operates as shown below.
In the program below, M0 and M2 turn OFF and M1 turn ON when communication is completed.
M0 (OFF)
M1 (ON)
M2 (OFF)
Operation of
instruction execution
complete flag
[1] EXTR instruction is not driven.
FNC180
EXTR




M8029 : OFF


M8029 : ON


M8029 : OFF
[2] EXTR instruction is driven.
FNC180
EXTR


[3] EXTR instruction is not driven.
FNC180
EXTR


2. Operations of M8156 (error flag) and D8156 (error code)
M8156 (error flag) and D8156 (error code) operate as shown below.
In the program below, a communication error occurs in [1] and [3], and communication is completed normally
in [2].
M8000
RUN
monitor


Operation of
communication
error flag
M8156 : ON


M8156 : OFF
D8156: K1
Error code is not
changed

M8156 : ON
D8156: K268
Error code is
stored
[1] Communication error (no response from inverter)
FNC180
EXTR


Error code
status
D8156: K1
Error code is
stored
[2] Normal communication
FNC180
EXTR


[3] Communication error (data range error)
FNC180
EXTR
E-78



FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)
Inverter Communication
7.2 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions
A
X000
SET
M0


SET
M50
Common Items
3. Program examples
Start command
M0
FNC180
EXTR


Communication error
M8029
FNC 12
MOV
X001
D8156
D50
RST
M0
SET
M1


SET
M51
M50
Error in the 1st
instruction
D50
C
Parallel Link
Instruction
execution
complete
N:N Network
M8156
B
D
M1
FNC180
EXTR


M8156
Communication error
Instruction
execution
complete
M51
E
Error in the 2nd
instruction
FNC 12
MOV
D8156
D51
RST
M1
Inverter
Communication
M8029
Computer Link
Start command
D51
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-79
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)
Inverter Communication
7.2.4
7.2 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions
Cautions on programming
1. Using the EXTR instruction together with another instruction
• The EXTR instruction cannot be used together with the RS instruction.
• The EXTR instruction cannot be used together with a EXTR K0 instruction.
2. When programming the EXTR instruction in a state of a STL instruction
Make sure to let the state relay remain ON until communication with an inverter is completed. If the state relay
is set to OFF during communication, the EXTR instruction is stopped in the middle of execution, and another
EXTR instruction cannot be started. Program a sequence while observing the following cautions
• Add M8029 (instruction execution complete flag) ON condition to the state relay transfer condition, and
provide such an interlock that the state relay ON/OFF status does not change during communication with
an inverter.
If the state changes during communication, communication may not be performed normally.
• When resetting many state relays all at once using ZRST (FNC 40) instruction, etc., make sure that the
M8155 (communication port busy) OFF condition is established.
X000
SET
M0
S0
S999
RST
M0
Reset input
M0
M8155
Communication
port busy
FNC 40
ZRST
State relays S0 to S999
are reset all at once.
3. Using the EXTR instruction in a program flow
The EXTR instruction cannot be used in the following program flows
Program flow disabling the EXTR instruction
Between CJ and P instructions
Between FOR and NEXT instructions
Between P and SRET instructions
Between I and IRET instructions
Remarks
Conditional jump
Repeat
Subroutine
Interrupt routine
4. Caution on write during RUN
1) Condition in which the EXTR instruction can be written
While the PLC is in the STOP status, the EXTR instruction can be written during RUN.
2) Condition in which the EXTR instruction cannot be written
The EXTR instruction cannot be written during RUN.
If the EXTR instruction is written during RUN while communication or if the EXTR instruction is deleted in
RUN mode, communication may be disabled after that. (In such a case, set the PLC to STOP, and then to
RUN mode again to initialize the status.)
5. When using the E500 Series
Parameters Nos. 922 and 923 in the E500 Series cannot be used in inverter communication.
E-80
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)
7.3 Inverter Operation Monitoring Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K10]
Inverter Communication
Inverter Operation Monitoring Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K10]
EXTR K10 instruction reads the operation status of an inverter to the PLC.
7.3.1
Function and operation
B
1. Applicable devices
Bit device
Word device
X
Y
M
T
System/
User
Digit specification
C
S KnX KnY KnM KnS
T
C
D
Index
V
Z
Constant Pointer
Modification
S
K
H






S2







D


D
Computer Link
S1
P
2. Program example
M0
S1 
S2 
D
K10
K6
H6F
D100
Command
contact
Function number: K10
Inverter station number: 0 to 31
7.3.2
E
Inverter
Communication
FNC180
EXTR
S
Read value storage destination
Inverter instruction code (hexadecimal)
F
Inverter instruction codes
Applicable inverter
S2
Read contents
Operation mode



H6F
Output frequency [speed]



H70
Output current



H71
Output voltage


—
H72
Special monitor

—
—
H73
Special monitor selection No.

—
—
H74
Alarm definition



H75
Alarm definition



H76
Alarm definition


—
H77
Alarm definition


—
H7A
Inverter status monitor



H7B
Set frequency read (E2PROM)



Set frequency read (RAM)



H7F
Link parameter expansion setting
H6C
Second parameter changing
These codes cannot be specified in S2 in
EXTR K10 instruction.
They are automatically processed when a
"second parameter specification code" is
specified in EXTR K12 instruction.
E-81
H
I
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
H6E
H6D
G
Remote
Maintenance
S500
Programming
Communication
E500
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
A500
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
The table below shows inverter instruction codes which can be specified in S2 .
For the instruction codes, refer to the pages explaining computer link in detail in each inverter manual.
Inverter instruction
code (hexadecimal)
C
Parallel Link
System/User
Others
N:N Network
When an "instruction code" specified for computer link operation in inverters is specified in EXTR instruction,
a value in the inverter is read to D .
Operand
type
Common Items
7.3
A
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)
7.4 Inverter Operation Control Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K11]
Inverter Communication
7.4
Inverter Operation Control Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K11]
This instruction writes a control value required to operate an inverter from the PLC to the inverter.
7.4.1
Function and operation
When an "instruction code" specified for computer link operation in inverters is specified in EXTR instruction,
a value specified in S3 is written to the specified item in the inverter.
1. Applicable devices
Bit device
Operand
type
Word device
System/User
X
Y
M
T
System/
User
Digit specification
C
Others
S KnX KnY KnM KnS
T
C
D
Index
V
Z
Constant Pointer
Modification
S
K
H


S1




S2









S3



P
2. Program example
S
M0
S1 
FNC180
EXTR
K11
K6
Command
contact
Function number: K11
Inverter station number: 0 to 31
7.4.2
S2 
S3 
HFA
K2M50
Value written to inverter
Inverter instruction code (hexadecimal)
Inverter instruction codes
The table below shows inverter instruction codes which can be specified in S2 .
For the instruction codes, refer to the pages explaining computer link in detail in each inverter manual.
Applicable inverter
S2
Read contents
Inverter instruction
code (hexadecimal)
E-82
E500
S500
HFB
Operation mode



HF3
Special monitor selection No.

—
—
HFA
Run command



HEE
Set frequency write (EEPROM)



HED
Set frequency write (RAM)



Inverter reset



HFD*1
*1.
A500
HF4
Alarm definition batch clear



HFC
Parameter all clear



HFC
User clear

—
—
The instruction code "HFD (inverter reset)" does not request response from the inverter. Accordingly,
even if inverter reset is executed to a station number in which an inverter is not connected, error does
not occur.
It takes about 2.2 seconds to complete execution of inverter reset.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)
7.5 Inverter Parameter Reading Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K12]
Inverter Communication
Inverter Parameter Reading Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K12]
Common Items
7.5
A
This instruction reads a parameter of an inverter to the PLC.
7.5.1
Function and operation
B
1. Applicable devices
Bit device
System/User
X
Y
M
T
System/
User
Digit specification
C
Others
S KnX KnY KnM KnS
T
C
D
Index
V
Z
Constant Pointer
Modification
S
K
H






S2




D


D
Computer Link
S1
P
2. Program example
M0
S1 
S2 
D
K12
K6
K7
D150
Command
contact
Function number: K12
Inverter station number: 0 to 31
7.5.2
E
Inverter
Communication
FNC180
EXTR
S
Read value storage destination
Inverter parameter number (decimal)
F
Inverter parameter number
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Refer to related data shown later.
7.5.3
Program example of "second parameter specification code"
SET
M0
H
X001
Drive
contact
FNC180
EXTR
S
S1 
S2 
S3 
K12
K6
K2201
D100
Programming
Communication
M0
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
In the program example shown below, the parameter number 201 (frequency: 201, time: 1201, motor rotation
direction: 2201) is read from the A500 inverter whose station number is 6.
Read devices: D100 = Motor rotation direction, D101 = Frequency, D102 = Time
Read
command
C
Parallel Link
Operand
type
Word device
N:N Network
When a parameter number of an inverter is specified in EXTR instruction, the value of the parameter in the
inverter is read to D .
Motor rotation directionD100
Read value storage destination
Function number
Inverter station number:
0 to 31
Inverter parameter number (decimal)
K12
K6
K201
D101
FNC180
EXTR
K12
K6
K1201
D102
I
FrequencyD101
Remote
Maintenance
FNC180
EXTR
TimeD102
The unit is specified by Pr. 200.
Apx.A
M8029
M0
Discontinued
models
RST
Execution complete flag
E-83
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)
7.6 Inverter Parameter Writing Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K13]
Inverter Communication
7.6
Inverter Parameter Writing Instruction (PLCInverter) [EXTR K13]
This instruction writes a value from the PLC to a parameter in an inverter.
7.6.1
Function and operation
When a parameter number in an inverter is specified in EXTR instruction, the value of
specified item in the inverter.
is written to the
S3
1. Applicable devices
Bit device
Operand
type
Word device
System/User
X
Y
M
T
System/
User
Digit specification
C
Others
S KnX KnY KnM KnS
T
C
D
Index
V
Z
Constant Pointer
Modification
S
K
H


S1




S2




S3




P
2. Program example
S
S1 
S2 
S3 
K13
K6
Command
contact
Function number: K13
Inverter station number: 0 to 31
K7
D160
M0
7.6.2
FNC180
EXTR
Value written to inverter
Inverter parameter number (decimal)
Inverter parameter number
Refer to related data shown later.
7.6.3
Program example of "second parameter specification code"
In the program example shown below, data is written from the PLC to parameter number 201 (frequency:
201, time: 1201, motor rotation direction: 2201) in the A500 inverter.
X001
Write
command
M0
Drive
contact
FNC180
EXTR
SET
M0
S
S1 
S2 
S3 
K13
K6
K2201
H1
Function
number: K13
Inverter station number:
0 to 31
Value written to inverter
Inverter parameter number (decimal)
FNC180
EXTR
K13
K6
K201
H14
FNC180
EXTR
K13
K6
K1201
H100
RST
Execution complete flag
Frequency: 20Hz
Time: 1:00
The unit is specified by Pr. 200.
M8029
E-84
Motor rotation direction: Forward
M0
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)
Inverter Communication
A
Second Parameter Specification Codes
7.7.1
S500 Series
1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers C2 to C7
Name
[Value to be specified in S2 in EXTR instruction for
parameter No. (decimal)]
Frequency setting voltage bias frequency
902
C3
Frequency setting voltage bias
1902
C4
Frequency setting voltage gain
903
C5
Frequency setting current bias frequency
904
C6
Frequency setting current bias
1904
C7
Frequency setting current gain
905
D
Computer Link
C2
E
E500 Series
Second parameter specification code
Name
[Value to be specified in S2 in EXTR instruction for
parameter No. (decimal)]
Analog
(H01)
Terminal analog
value (H02)
902
Frequency setting voltage bias
902
1902
2902
903
Frequency setting voltage gain
903
1903
2903
904
Frequency setting current bias
904
1904
2904
905
Frequency setting current gain
905
1905
2905
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Offset/Gain
(H00)
Inverter
Communication
1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 902 to 905
Parameter
No.
Parallel Link
7.7.2
C
Second parameter specification code
Parameter
No.
B
N:N Network
When handling the following parameters in computer link operation, it is necessary to select second
parameters.
In EXTR K12 and EXTR K13 instructions, when a value shown in the tables below is set to S2 , the
extension parameter and second parameter are automatically overwritten, and the parameter values are then
read or written.
Common Items
7.7
7.7 Second Parameter Specification Codes
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-85
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
7 Creating Programs (FX2N, FX2NC)
Inverter Communication
7.7.3
7.7 Second Parameter Specification Codes
A500 Series
1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 201 to 230
Second parameter specification code
Parameter
No.
[Value to be specified in S2 in EXTR instruction for
parameter No. (decimal)]
Name
Operation frequency
read/write
Time read/write
Rotation direction
write/read
201
Program set 1
201
1201
2201
202
Program set 1
202
1202
2202
203
Program set 1
203
1203
2203
204
Program set 1
204
1204
2204
205
Program set 1
205
1205
2205
206
Program set 1
206
1206
2206
207
Program set 1
207
1207
2207
208
Program set 1
208
1208
2208
209
Program set 1
209
1209
2209
210
Program set 1
210
1210
2210
211
Program set 2
211
1211
2211
212
Program set 2
212
1212
2212
213
Program set 2
213
1213
2213
214
Program set 2
214
1214
2214
215
Program set 2
215
1215
2215
216
Program set 2
216
1216
2216
217
Program set 2
217
1217
2217
218
Program set 2
218
1218
2218
219
Program set 2
219
1219
2219
220
Program set 2
220
1220
2220
221
Program set 3
221
1221
2221
222
Program set 3
222
1222
2222
223
Program set 3
223
1223
2223
224
Program set 3
224
1224
2224
225
Program set 3
225
1225
2225
226
Program set 3
226
1226
2226
227
Program set 3
227
1227
2227
228
Program set 3
228
1228
2228
229
Program set 3
229
1229
2229
230
Program set 3
230
1230
2230
2. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 902 to 905
Second parameter specification code
Parameter
No.
E-86
Name
[Value to be specified in S2 in EXTR instruction for
parameter No. (decimal)]
Offset/Gain
(H00)
Analog
(H01)
Terminal analog
value (H02)
902
Frequency setting voltage bias
902
1902
2902
903
Frequency setting voltage gain
903
1903
2903
904
Frequency setting current bias
904
1904
2904
905
Frequency setting current gain
905
1905
2905
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)
Inverter Communication
8.1 Practical Example 1
A
Common Items
8.
Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)
B
This chapter explains practical programs for inverter communication.
N:N Network
8.1
Practical Example 1
This fundamental program example monitors operations of an inverter, controls operations of an inverter and
writes parameters to an inverter.
Parallel Link
8.1.1
System configuration example
An FX PLC is connected to an inverter.
FX2N, FX2NC
Inverter
D
Computer Link
System memory
Terminal resistor
E
Distributor
Contents of operation
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
As an example of operation control, an inverter can be stopped (X000), rotated forward (X001) and rotated
reverse (X002).
By changing the contents of D10, the speed can be changed.
The contents of D10 can be changed from a sequence program or display unit.
Inverter
Communication
8.1.2
C
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-87
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)
Inverter Communication
8.1.3
8.1 Practical Example 1
Program example
1. Writing parameters to an inverter while the PLC is in RUN mode
M8002
SET
Initial pulse
The write
instruction
is driven
M10
Driving of
write
instruction
FNC180
EXTR
K11
K0
H0FD
H9696
The inverter is reset
FNC180
EXTR
K11
K0
H0FB
H0*1
Computer link
operation is specified
FNC180
EXTR
K13
K0
K1
K12000
The maximum frequency
is set to "120 Hz"
FNC180
EXTR
K13
K0
K2
K500
The minimum frequency
is set to "5 Hz"
FNC180
EXTR
K13
K0
K7
K10
The acceleration time
is set to "1 s"
FNC180
EXTR
K13
K0
K8
K10
The deceleration time
is set to "1 s"
RST
M10
M8029
Instruction execute
complete
*1.
M10
The write
instruction
is driven
When using an E500 Series inverter, use "H2" to specify computer link operation.
2. Changing the speed using a sequence program
M8000
FNC 12 K6000
MOV P
RUN
monitor
D10
Operation
speed
M17
FNC 12 K4000
MOV P
Command for
switching to speed 1
FNC 12 K2000
MOV P
Command for
switching to speed 2
D10
The operation speed is
written as "20 Hz"
Operation
speed
K11
K0
H0ED
D10
Operation
speed
E-88
The operation speed is
written as "40 Hz"
Operation
speed
M18
FNC180
EXTR
D10
"60 Hz" is written as
the initial value at
startup
The preset frequency
is written to the
inverter
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)
Inverter Communication
8.1 Practical Example 1
A
X000
SET
Operation stop
command input
H0FA is set to "00H"
Operation
stop
X000
RST
Forward
Operation stop
rotation
command input
command
input
X002
M15
B
Operation stop is reset
by input X001 or X002
N:N Network
X001
M15
Common Items
3. Controlling operations of an inverter
Operation
stop
C
M15
Operation
stop
X001
X002
M21
Forward
Reverse rotation
rotation
command input
command
input
X002
X001
M22
D
b2 of H0FA is set to ON
Reverse rotation
command
K11
K0
H0FA
K2M20
Operation command is written
M27 to M20H0FA
Computer Link
RUN monitor
FNC180
EXTR
b1 of H0FA is set to ON
Forward rotation
command
Reverse
Forward rotation
rotation
command input
command
input
M8000
Parallel Link
Reverse rotation
command input
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-89
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)
Inverter Communication
8.1 Practical Example 1
4. Monitoring operations of an inverter
M8000
FNC180
EXTR
RUN
monitor
K10
K0
H07A
K2M100
Inverter
running
M100
Y000
Inverter
running
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M101
Y001
Forward
rotation
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M102
Y002
Reverse
rotation
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M103
Y003
Up to
frequency
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M104
Contents of status
(according to
necessity)
Y004
Overload
is applied
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M106
Y006
Frequency
is detected
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M107
Y007
Alarm
occurrence
Indicator
lamp, etc.
FNC180
EXTR
K10
K0
H06F
D50
Frequency
monitor
value
END
E-90
Inverter status is read
H7AM107 to M100
Output frequency
monitor
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)
Inverter Communication
A
Practical Example 2
Common Items
8.2
8.2 Practical Example 2
This program executes the same control as practical example 1 shown above.
8.2.1
System configuration example
B
FX2N, FX2NC
N:N Network
An FX PLC is connected to an inverter.
Inverter
C
Parallel Link
System memory
Terminal resistor
Distributor
8.2.2
D
The differences from practical example 1 are that the inverter status is not read while data is written to an
inverter, and that the contents to be written are detected and written to an inverter only when the contents to
be written are changed.
Because communication between the PLC and the inverter is minimum in this program, the communication
time is reduced and the response time is improved.
E
Computer Link
Contents of operation
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-91
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)
Inverter Communication
8.2.3
8.2 Practical Example 2
Program example
1. Writing parameters to an inverter while the PLC is in RUN mode
M8002
SET
Initial pulse
M10
The write
instruction
is driven
M10
Driving of
write
instruction
FNC180
EXTR
K11
K0
H0FD
H9696
FNC180
EXTR
K11
K0
H0FB
H0*1
FNC180
EXTR
K13
K0
K1
K12000
The maximum
frequency is set to
"120Hz"
FNC180
EXTR
K13
K0
K2
K500
The minimum
frequency is set to
"5Hz"
FNC180
EXTR
K13
K0
K7
K10
The acceleration time
is set to "1s"
FNC180
EXTR
K13
K0
K8
K10
The deceleration time
is set to "1s"
RST
M10
M8029
Instruction execute
complete
*1.
E-92
The inverter is reset
Computer link
operation is specified
The write
instruction
is driven
When using an E500 Series inverter, use "H2" to specify computer link operation.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)
Inverter Communication
8.2 Practical Example 2
A
M8000
FNC 12 K6000
MOV P
RUN
monitor
D10
Operation
speed
FNC 12 K4000
MOV P
Command for
switching to speed 1
FNC 12 K2000
MOV P
Command for
switching to speed 2
D10
D10
C
D80
Operation Operation
speed
speed is
withdrawn
SET
FNC180
EXTR
K11
M11
Change in the
operation speed
(D10) is
detected
D
Computer Link
D80
Operation Operation speed is
speed
withdrawn
The write
instruction
is driven
The operation speed is
written as "20 Hz"
Parallel Link
FNC 12
MOV
Initial pulse
M11
The operation speed is
written as "40 Hz"
Operation
speed
M8002
D10
B
Operation
speed
M18
FNC228
LD<>
D10
"60 Hz" is written as
the initial value at
startup
N:N Network
M17
Common Items
2. Changing the speed using a sequence program
The write
instruction
is driven
K0
H0ED
D10
The preset frequency is
written to the inverter
E
M8029
Instruction execute
complete
RST
Inverter
Communication
Operation
speed
M11
The write
instruction
is driven
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-93
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)
Inverter Communication
8.2 Practical Example 2
3. Controlling operations of an inverter
X000
SET
M15
Operation stop
command input
X001
H0FA is set to "00H"
Operation
stop
X000
RST
M15
Forward
Operation stop
rotation
command input
command
input
X002
Operation stop is reset
by input X001 or X002
Operation
stop
Reverse rotation
command input
M15
X001
X002
Operation
stop
Forward
rotation
command
input
X002
Reverse
rotation
command
input
X001
Forward
rotation
command
Forward
rotation
command
input
Reverse
rotation
command
Reverse
rotation
command
input
M8002
M21
M22
FNC 12
K2M20
MOV
Initial pulse
D81
SET
Operation
command is
withdrawn
M12
M8029
Instruction execute
complete
E-94
Changes in the
operation commands
(M28 to M20) are
detected
M12
Driving of
write
instruction
FNC180
EXTR
Driving of
write
instruction
b2 of H0FA is set to ON
D81
Operation
command is
withdrawn
FNC228
LD<> K2M20
b1 of H0FA is set to ON
K11
K0
H0FA
K2M20
RST
M12
Driving of
write
instruction
Operation commands
are written
M27 to M20H0FA
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
8 Practical Program Examples (FX2N, FX2NC)
Inverter Communication
8.2 Practical Example 2
A
M10
M11
M12
MC
N0
M70
Driving of Driving of Driving of
write
write
write
instruction instruction instruction
While data is not
written to an inverter,
the status is read.
B
N:N Network
N0
Common Items
4. Monitoring operations of an inverter
M70
M8000
FNC180
EXTR
RUN
monitor
K10
K0
H07A
K2M100
C
Inverter status is read.
H07AM107 to M100
M100
Parallel Link
Inverter
running
Y000
Inverter
running
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M101
D
Forward
rotation
Computer Link
Y001
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M102
Y002
Reverse
rotation
E
Indicator
lamp, etc.
Y003
Up to
frequency
Inverter
Communication
M103
Contents of status
(according to necessity)
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M104
F
Y004
Overload
is applied
M106
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Indicator
lamp, etc.
Y006
Frequency
is detected
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M107
G
Alarm
occurrence
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Y007
Indicator
lamp, etc.
FNC180
EXTR
K10
K0
H06F
D50
Output frequency monitor
H
MCR
Programming
Communication
Frequency
monitor
value
N0
END
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-95
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
9.
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
9.1 Differences between FX2N, FX2NC and FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
This chapter explains how to create programs which change parameters of inverters and give operation
commands to inverters.
As explanation, a program example is shown for each applied instruction.
9.1
Differences between FX2N, FX2NC and FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
Instruction devices used in inverter communication are different between FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
PLCs and FX2N, FX2NC PLCs.
When using a program for FX2N, FX2NC PLCs in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC PLCs, change the devices
according to the tables below.
1. Inverter communication instructions
Function
FX2N,FX2NC
FX3S,FX3G,FX3GC,FX3U,FX3UC
Monitoring operation of an inverter
EXTR(K10)
IVCK
Controlling operation of an inverter
EXTR(K11)
IVDR
Reading parameters from an inverter
EXTR(K12)
IVRD
Writing parameters to an inverter
EXTR(K13)
IVWR
Writing parameters to an inverter all at once
—
IVBWR*1
Controls operations and monitors operations of an inverter
with a single command
—
IVMC
*1.
Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
2. Related devices
1) Bit devices
Function
FX2N,FX2NC
FX3S,FX3G,FX3GC,FX3U,FX3UC
ch1
ch2
Instruction execution complete
M8029
M8029
M8029
Communication error
(shared by all communication)
M8063*2
M8063*5
M8438*5
M8155
M8151
M8156
Inverter communication error
M8156
M8152*3
M8157*3
Inverter communication error latch*3
M8157
M8153
M8158
—
M8154*3
M8159*3
Inverter communicating
IVBWR instruction error*4
*2. In the FX2N and FX2NC PLCs, M8063 does not turn ON when an inverter communication error occurs.
*3. Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.
*4. The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
*5. Cleared when PLC power supply is turned from OFF to ON.
2) Word devices
Function
ch1
ch2
D8063
D8063*6
D8438*6
Response wait time of inverter communication
D8154
D8150*6
D8155*6
Step number of instruction during inverter communication
D8155
D8151
D8156
Inverter communication error code*7
D8156
D8152
D8157
Inverter communication error occurrence step*7
D8157
D8153
D8158
IVBWR instruction error parameter
E-96
FX3S,FX3G,FX3GC,FX3U,FX3UC
Error code (shared by all communication)
Operation mode display
*6.
*7.
*8.
FX2N,FX2NC
number*7*8
—
D8154
D8159
—
D8419
D8439
Cleared when PLC power supply is turned from OFF to ON.
Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.
The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
A
Contents of Related Devices
The tables below show devices used for inverter communication in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC
PLCs.
B
1. Bit devices
Name
Turns ON when execution of inverter communication
instruction is completed, and remains ON for 1 scan.
Turns ON also when execution of instruction is
completed if inverter communication error flag
(M8152 or M8157) turns ON.
R
M8063 M8438 Serial communication error*1
Turns ON when an error occurs in any type of
communication.
R
M8151 M8156 Inverter communicating
Remains ON while inverter communication is being
executed.
R
M8152 M8157 Inverter communication error*2
Turns ON when an error occurs during
communication with an inverter.
R
M8153 M8158 Inverter communication error latch*2
Turns ON when an error occurs during
communication with an inverter.
R
M8154 M8159 IVBWR instruction error*2, *3
Turns ON when an error is caused by IVBWR
instruction.
R
M8029
Instruction execution complete
*2.
Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.
*3.
The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
Inverter
Communication
Cleared when PLC power supply is turned from OFF to ON.
F
2. Word devices
Name
ch2
Description
D8063 D8438 Error code for serial communication*4 Stores a communication error code.
R/W
R
D8151 D8156
Step number of instruction executing Stores the step number of an instruction during
inverter communication
inverter communication.
R
D8152 D8157
Error code for inverter
communication*5
Stores an inverter communication error code.
R
Step where inverter communication
Latches a step number in which inverter
error occurred*5
communication error has occurred.*7
Error parameter number of IVBWR
instruction*5*6
Stores a parameter number in which an IVBWR
instruction error has occurred.
R
Stores the communication type being used.
R
D8153 D8158
D8154 D8159
D8419 D8439 Operation mode display
Sets the response wait time of inverter
communication.
R/W
R
R: Read only
W: Write only
R/W: Read or Write
Cleared when PLC power supply is turned from OFF to ON.
*5.
Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.
*6.
The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
*7.
Updated only for the first error occurrence, and not for the second error occurrence or later.
H
I
Remote
Maintenance
*4.
G
Programming
Communication
Inverter communication response
waiting time*4
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
D8150 D8155
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Device No.
ch1
D
E
R: Read only (used as a contact in program)
*1.
C
Computer Link
R/W
Parallel Link
Description
ch2
N:N Network
Device No.
ch1
Common Items
9.2
9.2 Contents of Related Devices
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-97
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
9.3 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions
9.3
Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions
9.3.1
Inverter communication types (IVCK to IVMC)
Execute inverter communication using the following applied instructions.
There are six types of applied instructions, "IVCK (FNC270) to IVMC (FNC275)", depending on the data
communication direction and parameter reading/writing direction.
Inverter
communication
instruction
S1 
S2 
S3 
n
Inverter
station
number
Inverter
instruction
code
Read/
Write
Used
channel
Only 16-bit type is applicable.
DIVCK (32-bit type), IVCKP
(pulse operation type) and
DIVCKP (32-bit pulse operation
type) are not applicable.
Instruction
Function
Control direction
Detailed
explanation
IVCK(FNC270)
Monitors operations of an inverter.
PLC  inverter
9.4
IVDR(FNC271)
Controls operations of an inverter.
PLC  inverter
9.5
IVRD(FNC272)
Reads a parameter from an inverter.
PLC  inverter
9.6
Writes a parameter to an inverter.
PLC  inverter
9.7
IVBWR(FNC274)
Writes parameters to an inverter all at once.
PLC  inverter
9.8
IVMC(FNC275)
Controls operations and monitors operations of an
inverter with a single command
PLC  inverter
9.9
IVWR(FNC273)
*1
*1.
9.3.2
K1:ch1
K2:ch2
Read value storage destination
or value written to inverter
Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
Function and operation
1. Communication start timing
At the rising edge (OFFON) of the drive condition, the PLC starts communication with an inverter.
Even if the drive condition turns OFF during communication with an inverter, the PLC executes
communication until the last instruction.
When the drive condition is always ON, the PLC executes communication repeatedly.
2. Simultaneous driving of instructions and communication processing
1) Driving instructions at the same time
- Two or more IVCK (FNC270) to IVMC (FNC275) instructions can be programmed, and driven at the
same time.
- When two or more instructions are driven at the same time in the channel used for communication, the
latter inverter communication instruction in the program is executed after the current communication
with the inverter has finished.
M8000
RUN
monitor
FNC273
IVWR

FNC271
IVDR




(1)
M8151
ONOFF



(2)
M8151
ONOFF
FNC270
IVCK
E-98




(3)
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
9.3 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions
M1
FNC273
IVWR




FNC270
IVCK




C
Parallel Link
M0
*2
*1
IVWR
instruction
(Communicating)
D
15ms
15ms
M1
*2
E
15ms
IVWR
15ms
IVCK
IVWR
IVCK
*3
IVWR
*3
The PLC does not execute the instruction even if M8151 is turned OFF because the drive contact is
OFF.
*2.
When two or more instructions are driven at the same time during communication, the next inverter
communication instruction is executed after the current instruction is completed.
*3.
M8151 remains OFF until the next inverter communication instruction is driven after execution of the
current inverter communication instruction is completed.
X001

M8029
Command is
latched


Communication is
executed
RST
M0
Command is
reset
H
I
3. Communication complete flag (M8029)
When communication with an inverter is completed, the instruction execution complete flag M8029 turns ON,
and remains ON for 1 scan.
For the M8029 use method, refer to program examples shown below.
Remote
Maintenance
Instruction execution
complete

M0
Programming
Communication
FNC274
IVCK
SET
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
2) Cautions on programming
When communicating with inverters for two or more items, let the drive contact for inverter
communication instruction remain ON until sending is completed. After communication with all inverters is
completed, set the drive contact to OFF using the instruction execution complete flag M8029.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
*1.
Inverter
Communication
IVCK
instruction
(Communicating)
M0
Computer Link
15ms
M8151
B
N:N Network
M0
A
Common Items
- The PLC waits for 15 ms after acquiring the communication port, and then starts communication using
inverter communication instructions. Even if the drive condition turns ON, the PLC does not start
execution of an inverter communication instruction until the communication port busy flag M8151 turns
OFF from ON, if M8151 is already set to ON by another inverter communication instruction.
The PLC frees the communication port, and then executes inverter communication instructions driven in
the next step and so on.
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-99
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
9.3.3
9.3 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions
Instruction completion and error flag operation
When two or more inverter communication instructions are programmed, the following flags turn ON or OFF
according to the execution result of each inverter communication instruction.
To acquire the result of each inverter communication instruction, make sure to provide these flags just below
each inverter communication instruction.
Device
number
ch1
Device
number
Description
ch2
M8029
ch1
Instruction execution complete
Description
ch2
D8063 D8438 Serial communication error code
M8063 M8438 Serial communication error
D8152 D8157 Inverter communication error code
M8152 M8157 Inverter communication error
D8153 D8158 Step in which inverter communication error occurred
Inverter communication error
M8153 M8158
latch
D8154 D8159 IVBWR error parameter number*1
M8154 M8159 IVBWR instruction error*1
The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
*1.
1. Operation of M8029 (instruction execution complete flag)
The operation of M8029 (instruction execution complete flag) represents the state in which the IVDR
instruction is completed while M0, M2 are off and M1 is ON.
M0 (OFF)
M1 (ON)
M2 (OFF)
Operation of
instruction execution
complete flag
[1] IVWR instruction is not driven
FNC273
IVWR




M8029 : OFF


M8029 : ON


M8029 : OFF
[2] IVDR instruction is driven
FNC271
IVDR


[3] IVCK instruction is not driven
FNC270
IVCK


2. Processing of communication errors
The following two types of processing are executed for communication errors.
The parity error/overrun error/framing error flags (shown in the upper column) turns ON when an error occurs
in any type of communication.
The error flag shown in the lower column turns ON when an error occurs during communication with an
inverter.
Bit device
ch1
ch2
ch1
ch2
Word device
ch1
ch2
M8063 M8438 M8152 M8157 M8153
M8159
ch1
ch2
Description
D8063 D8438
ON
OFF
OFF
6301
3801
Parity error, overrun error or framing error
ON
ON
ON
(only at first time)
6320
3820
Any inverter communication error other than
those above
When inverter communication error flag turns ON, the step number is stored in the inverter communication
error occurrence step device (D8153 or D8158).
Create the program shown below for each corresponding instruction to check the inverter communication
error code (stored in D8152 or D8157).
E-100
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
9.3 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions
A
X000
SET
M0

K1
SET
M50
Common Items
3. Program example
Start command
M0
FNC277
IVWR


Communication error
M8029
Instruction
execution
complete
FNC 12
MOV
N:N Network
M8152
B
M50
Instruction error is
checked
D50
RST
M0
D50
C
Parallel Link
D8152
D
Computer Link
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-101
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
9.3.4
9.3 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions
Cautions on programming
1. Using an inverter communication instruction together with another instruction
• An inverter communication instruction using ch1 cannot be used together with a RS instruction.
• An inverter communication instruction cannot be used together with a RS2 instruction if the RS2 instruction
uses the same channel.
2. When programming an inverter communication instruction in a state of a STL instruction
Make sure to let the state relay remain ON until communication with an inverter is completed. Program a
sequence while observing the following cautions
• Add M8029 (instruction execution complete flag) ON condition to the state relay transfer condition, and
provide such interlock that the state relay ON/OFF status does not change during communication with an
inverter.
If the state changes during communication, communication may not be performed normally.
• When resetting many state relays all at once using the ZRST (FNC 40) instruction, etc., make sure that the
M8151 or M8156 (communication port busy) condition is OFF.
X000
SET
M0
S0
S999
RST
M0
Reset input
M0
M8151
Communication
port busy
FNC 40
ZRST
State relays S0 to S999
are reset all at once.
3. Using an inverter communication instruction in a program flow
An inverter communication instruction cannot be used in the following program flows
Program flow disabling the inverter communication
instruction
Between CJ and P instructions
Between FOR and NEXT instructions
Between P and SRET instructions
Between I and IRET instructions
Remarks
Conditional jump
Repeat
Subroutine
Interrupt routine
4. Caution on writing during RUN
1) Condition in which inverter communication instruction can be written:
While the PLC is in the STOP status, inverter communication instruction can be written during RUN.
2) Condition in which inverter communication instruction cannot be written:
Inverter communication instruction cannot be written during RUN.
If an inverter communication instruction is written during RUN during communication or if an inverter
communication instruction is deleted while in RUN, communication may be disabled after that. (In such a
case, set the PLC to STOP, and then to RUN mode again to initialize the status.)
5. When using the E500 Series
Parameters Nos. 922 and 923 in the E500 Series cannot be used in inverter communication.
E-102
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
9.3 Common Items in Inverter Communication Instructions
A
The FX PLC executes the first communication, and then retries communication twice (3 time in total).
*2.
When "display of the number of times of password disable error" is enabled using Pr297 and when a
password disable error occurs 5 times, the "reading/writing restriction" cannot be disabled even if the
right password is input. For recovery from this status, it is necessary to all-clear all parameters.
When the value given as a result of reading Pr297 is "0" to "4", registration of the password is
completed normally.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
*3.
E
Inverter
Communication
*1.
D
Computer Link
2) When registering the password
When registering the password in the inverter using an inverter communication instruction, write the
password to Pr297, read Pr297, and then confirm that registration of the password is completed
normally*3.
If writing of the password to Pr297 is not completed normally due to noise, etc., the FX PLC automatically
retries writing, and the registered password may be reset by the retry.
C
Parallel Link
Cases in which a password reset error occurs in an inverter communication instruction, and the actual
number of times of reset error in such cases
- When a wrong password is written to Pr297 due to a password input error
When the writing instruction is executed once, a password reset error occurs 3 times.
- When the password cannot be written correctly to Pr297 due to noise, etc.
A password reset error occurs up to 3 times.
B
N:N Network
1) When a communication error occurs
When a communication error occurs in an inverter communication instruction, the FX PLC automatically
retries communication up to 3 times*1.
Hence, when a password disable error occurs in the inverter in which "display of the number of times of
password disable error"*2 is enabled using Pr297, please note that the number of times of password
disable error displayed in accordance with the setting of Pr297 may not be the same as the actual
number of times of password input error as described below.
Do not execute automatic retry (re-driving of an inverter instruction) using a sequence program when
writing data to Pr297.
Common Items
6. Cautions when using the password function for inverter
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-103
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
9.4 Inverter Operation Monitoring Instruction (PLCInverter) [FNC270 / IVCK]
Inverter Communication
9.4
Inverter Operation Monitoring Instruction
(PLCInverter) [FNC270 / IVCK]
The IVCK instruction reads the operation status of an inverter to the PLC.
9.4.1
Function and operation
When an "instruction code" specified for computer link operation in the inverters is specified in the IVCK
(FNC270) instruction, a value in the inverter is read to D .
1. Applicable devices
Operand
Type
Bit Devices
Word Devices
System/User
Digit Specification
System/User
X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D
R
Others
Special
Unit
U\G V
ConReal
CharacPointer
stant Number ter String
Index
Z Modify K H
S1
 1
2

 
S2
 1
2

 
 1
2


D


n
E
""
P
 
1: Only available for FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
2: Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
2. Program example
M0
FNC270
IVCK
Command
contact
S1 
S2 
D
n
K6
H6F
D100
K1
Communication channel K1:ch1
Read value storage destination
K2:ch2
Inverter instruction code (hexadecimal)
Inverter station number: 0 to 31
9.4.2
Inverter instruction codes
The table below shows inverter instruction codes which can be specified in S2 . Any instruction codes not
shown in the table below may cause communication errors. Use only instruction codes shown below.
For the instruction codes, refer to the pages explaining computer link in detail in each inverter manual.
S2
Inverter Instruction
code (hexadecimal)
E-104
Applicable inverter
F800, A800, F700,
V500 F500, A500
A700, E700, D700



H7B
Operation mode
H6F
Output frequency [speed]

H70
H71
H72
H73
H74
H75
H76
H77
H79
H7A
Output current
Output voltage
Special monitor
Special monitor selection No.
Alarm definition
Alarm definition
Alarm definition
Alarm definition
Inverter status monitor (expansion)
Inverter status monitor
H6E
Set frequency read (E2PROM)
E500 S500















*1








—









—



—
—




—


—
—
—


—
—
—


*1




*1



H6D
Set frequency read (RAM)
H7F
Link parameter expansion setting These codes cannot be specified in S2
of the IVCK
instruction. They are automatically processed when a
"second parameter specification code" is specified the
Second parameter changing
IVRD instruction.
H6C
*1.
Read contents
Please write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just before the IVCK
instruction when reading frequency.
When "0" is not written, reading of the frequency may not be executed normally.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
9.5 Inverter Operation Control Instruction (PLCInverter) [FNC271 / IVDR]
Inverter Operation Control Instruction (PLCInverter) [FNC271 / IVDR]
This instruction writes a control value required to operate an inverter from the PLC to the inverter.
9.5.1
Function and operation
1. Applicable devices
Bit Devices
System/User
Word Devices
Digit Specification
System/User
X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D
R
Others
Special
Unit
U\G V
ConReal
CharacPointer
stant Number ter String
Index
Z Modify K H
S1
 1
2

 
S2
 1
2

 
 1
2

 

S3



n
E
""
P
D
Computer Link
 
1: Only available for FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
2: Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
2. Program example
M0
S2 
S3 
n
K6
HFA
K2M50
K1
Communication channel K1:ch1
K2:ch2
Value written to inverter
Inverter station number: 0 to 31
Inverter instruction code (hexadecimal)
F
Inverter instruction codes
The table below shows inverter instruction codes which can be specified in S2 .
For the instruction codes, refer to the pages explaining computer link in detail in each inverter manual.
Applicable inverter
S2
Inverter Instruction
code (hexadecimal)
F500, A500
E500, S500



Operation mode

HF3
Special monitor selection No.



—
HF9
Run command (expansion)

—
—
—
HFA
Run command




HEE
Set frequency write (EEPROM)

*3


HED
Set frequency write (RAM)

*3


Inverter reset*2





Alarm definition batch clear

—

Parameter all clear




HFC
User clear
—
—

—
HFF
Link parameter expansion setting




E-105
I
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
The instruction code "HFD (inverter reset)" does not request a response from the inverter.
Accordingly, even if inverter reset is executed to a station number at which an inverter is not
connected, error does not occur.
It takes about 2.2 seconds to complete execution of inverter reset.
When resetting the inverter, please specify H9696 as the operand S3 of the IVDR instruction.
Do not use H9966.
Please write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just before the IVDR
instruction when writing frequency.
When "0" is not written, writing of the frequency may not be executed normally.
H
Remote
Maintenance
HF4
HFC
G
Programming
Communication
*3.
V500
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
*2.
F800, A800, F700,
A700, E700, D700
HFB
HFD*1
*1.
Write contents
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
9.5.2
E
Inverter
Communication
Command
contact
FNC271
IVDR
S1 
C
Parallel Link
Operand
Type
B
N:N Network
When an "instruction code" specified for computer link operation in the inverters is specified in the IVDR
(FNC271) instruction, the value specified in S3 is written to the specified item of the inverter.
Common Items
9.5
A
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
9.6 Inverter Parameter Reading (PLCInverter) [FNC272 / IVRD]
Inverter Communication
9.6
Inverter Parameter Reading (PLCInverter) [FNC272 / IVRD]
This instruction reads a parameter of an inverter to the PLC.
9.6.1
Function and operation
When a parameter number of an inverter is specified in IVRD (FNC272) instruction, the value of the
parameter is read to D .
1. Applicable devices
Operand
Type
Bit Devices
System/User
Word Devices
Digit Specification
System/User
X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D
R
Others
Special
Unit
U\G V
ConReal
CharacPointer
stant Number ter String
Index
Z Modify K H
S1
 1
2

 
S2
 1
2

 
D
 1
2

n
E
""
P
 
1: Only available for FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
2: Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
2. Program example
M0
Command
contact
FNC272
IVRD
S1 
S2 
D
n
K6
K7
D150
K1
Inverter station number: 0 to 31
9.6.2
Communication channel K1:ch1
K2:ch2
Read value storage destination
Inverter parameter number (decimal)
Inverter instruction codes
Refer to related data shown later.
9.6.3
Program example of "second parameter specification code"
For second parameter specification code, refer to Section 9.9.
In the program example shown below, the parameters (frequency: 201, time: 1201, motor rotation direction:
2201) are read from the A500 inverter whose station number is 6.
E-106
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
9.6 Inverter Parameter Reading (PLCInverter) [FNC272 / IVRD]
Inverter Communication
A
Common Items
Read devices: D100 = Motor rotation direction, D101 = Frequency, D102 = Time
X001
Read
command
M0
M0
S1 
S2 
D
n
K6
K2201
D100
K1
B
Motor rotation directionD100
N:N Network
Drive
contact
FNC272
IVRD
SET
Communication channel K1:ch1
Read value storage destination
Inverter parameter number (decimal)
Inverter station
number:
0 to 31
K6
K201
D101
K1
FNC272
IVRD
K6
K1201
D102
K1
C
FrequencyD101
Parallel Link
FNC272
IVRD
TimeD102
The unit is specified by Pr. 200.
M8029
RST
D
M0
Computer Link
Execution
complete flag
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-107
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
9.7 Inverter Parameter Writing (PLCInverter) [FNC273 / IVWR]
Inverter Communication
9.7
Inverter Parameter Writing (PLCInverter) [FNC273 / IVWR]
This instruction writes a value from the PLC to a parameter in an inverter.
9.7.1
Function and operation
When a parameter number in an inverter is specified in IVWR (FNC273) instruction, the value of
written to the specified item in the inverter.
is
S3
1. Applicable devices
Operand
Type
Bit Devices
Word Devices
System/User
Digit Specification
System/User
X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D
R
Others
Special
Unit
U\G V
ConReal
CharacPointer
stant Number ter String
Index
Z Modify K H
S1
 1
2

 
S2
 1
2

 
S3
 1
2

 
n
E
""
P
 
1: Only available for FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
2: Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
2. Program example
M0
Command
contact
FNC273
IVWR
S1 
S2 
S3 
n
K6
K7
D160
K1
Communication channel K1:ch1
K2:ch2
Value written to inverter
Inverter parameter number (decimal)
Inverter station number: 0 to 31
9.7.2
Inverter instruction codes
Refer to related data shown later.
9.7.3
Program example of "second parameter specification code"
For second parameter specification code, refer to Section 9.9.
In the program example shown below, data is written from the PLC to the parameters (frequency: 201, time:
1201, motor rotation direction: 2201) in the A500 inverter.
X001
Write
command
M0
Drive
contact
SET
M0
S1 
S2 
S3 
n
K6
K2201
H1
K1
FNC273
IVWR
Communication channel K1:ch1
Value written to inverter
Inverter parameter number (decimal)
Inverter station
number: 0 to 31
FNC273
IVWR
K6
K201
H14
K1
FNC273
IVWR
K6
K1201
H100
K1
RST
Execution complete flag
Frequency: 20Hz
Time: 1:00
The unit is specified by Pr. 200.
M8029
E-108
Motor rotation direction: Forward
M0
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
9.8 Inverter Parameter Batch Writing (PLCInverter) [FNC274 / IVBWR]
Inverter Communication
Inverter Parameter Batch Writing (PLCInverter) [FNC274 / IVBWR]
Common Items
9.8
A
This instruction writes values from the PLC to parameters in an inverter all at once.
The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
9.8.1
B
Function and operation
S3
1. Applicable devices
Bit Devices
Word Devices
System/User
Digit Specification
System/User
X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U\G V
ConReal
CharacPointer
stant Number ter String
Index
Z Modify K H
 


 
S2
 


 
S3
 


E
""
P
D
Computer Link
S1
n
C
Others
Special
Unit
 
2. Program example
FNC274
IVBWR
Command
contact
S2 
S3 
n
K6
K8
D200
K1
Inverter station number: 0 to 31
Number of parameters to be written
(decimal)
E
Inverter
Communication
M0
S1 
Communication channel K1: ch1
K2: ch2
Head device of parameter
table written to inverter
Parameter No. 1
D201
Value 1 written to parameter
S3  +2
D202
Parameter No. 2
S3  +3
D203
Value 2 written to parameter
:
:
:
:
:
:
S3  +14
D214
Parameter No. 8
S3 +15
D215
Value 8 written to parameter
G
S2 
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
D200
S3  +1
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
The following table shows values (two word devices/point) in a specified table which are written to a number
of consecutive parameters specified in S2 starting from a word device specified in S3 .
S3 
Parallel Link
Operand
Type
N:N Network
When a parameter number in an inverter is specified in the IVBWR (FNC274) instruction, the values of
and later are written to the specified items in the inverter all at once.
 2 = Number of occupied word devices
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-109
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9.9 Controls Operations and Monitors Operations of an Inverter with a Single Command(PLCInverter)[FNC275 / IVMC]
Inverter Communication
9.9
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Controls Operations and Monitors Operations of an Inverter
with a Single Command(PLCInverter)[FNC275 / IVMC]
This instruction writes 2 types of settings (operation command and set frequency) to the inverter, and reads 2
types of data (inverter status monitor, output frequency, etc.) from the inverter at the same time.
The following PLC versions support the IVMC instruction.
PLC
9.9.1
Applicable version
FX3S
Ver. 1.00 or later
FX3G, FX3GC
Ver. 1.40 or later
FX3U, FX3UC
Ver. 2.70 or later
Function and operation
1. Applicable devices
Bit Devices
Operand
Type
Word Devices
System/User
Digit Specification
System/User
X Y M T C S D.b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D
Others
Special
Unit
R
ConReal
CharacPointer
stant Number ter String
Index
U\G V
Z Modify K H
S1
 1
2

 
S2
 1
2

 
S3
 1
2

D
 1
2

n
E
""
P
 
1: Only available for FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
2: Only available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
2. Program example
S1 
S2 
S3 
D
n
D10
D20
K1
M0
FNC275
K0
H0000
IVMC
Command
contact
Inverter station number
(K0 to K31)
Multiple instructions for inverter:
Send/receive data type specification
3. Send/receive data type
Channel to be used
(K1: ch1, K2: ch2)
Head device which stores values to be read
from the inverter
Head device which stores data to be written to the inverter
S2
The table below shows valid send data 1 and 2 and receive data 1 and 2 specified by the send/receive data
type S2 .
S2
Send/receive
data type
(HEX)
Send data
(Write contents to Inverter)
Data 1 ( S3
)
H0000
H0001
H0010
H0011
Run command
(expansion)
Data 2 ( S3
Receive data
(Read contents from Inverter)
+1)
Set frequency
(RAM)
Set frequency
(RAM, EEPROM)
Data 1 ( D
Data 2 ( D
+1)
Output frequency (speed)
Inverter status monitor
(expansion)
• Number of occupied devices
Two devices are occupied respectively by S3 and
Make sure not to use those devices in another control.
Special monitor
Output frequency (speed)
Special monitor
Caution
E-110
)
D
.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
9.9 Controls Operations and Monitors Operations of an Inverter with a Single Command(PLCInverter)[FNC275 / IVMC]
Inverter Communication
A
• If any unspecified value is set in S2 , unexpected data may be written to and read from the inverter, and
values of D
and D +1 may be updated.
9.9.2
Applicable inverters
This instruction is applicable to the following inverters:
• FREQROL-A800 (Applicable in all)
C
Parallel Link
• FREQROL-F800 (Applicable in all)
• FREQROL-E700 (February 2009 and later)
• FREQROL-D700 (Applicable in all)
For details, refer to the respective inverter manual.
Applicable programming tool
The following programming tools support this instruction.
1. English versions
Product name
Model name
Applicable version
Remarks
E
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
SWDNC-GXW2-E
Ver. 1.48A or later
Ver. 1.20 or later
Inverter
Communication
GX Works2
FX-30P
-
FX3G PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
FX-30P
Ver. 1.62Q or later
Ver. 1.50 or later
-
F
SWDNC-GXW2-E
FX-30P
Ver. 1.77F or later
Ver. 1.50 or later
-
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FX3GC PLC
GX Works2
-
G
FX3S PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-E
FX-30P
Ver. 1.492N or later
Ver. 1.50 or later
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
2. Japanese versions
Product name
Model name
Applicable version
Remarks
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-J
Ver. 1.45X or later
Ver. 1.20 or later
H
-
Programming
Communication
FX-30P
FX3G PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-J
FX-30P
Ver. 1.56J or later
Ver. 1.50 or later
-
FX3GC PLC
GX Works2
SWDNC-GXW2-J
Ver. 1.50 or later
I
-
Remote
Maintenance
FX-30P
Ver. 1.77F or later
FX3S PLC
GX Works2
FX-30P
SWDNC-GXW2-J
Ver. 1.492N or later
Ver. 1.50 or later
D
Computer Link
9.9.3
B
N:N Network
• IVMC instruction reads the inverter status at the time of communication with the inverter, and stores the
read status to D . Accordingly, the status written by the IVMC instruction can be read by a next or later
read instruction (IVCK or IVMC).
Common Items
• If a device number outside the range due to indexing, etc. is specified in D , the receive data from the
inverter is not stored in D . However, values set in S3 and S3 +1 may be written to the inverter.
-
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-111
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
9.10
9.10 Second Parameter Specification Codes
Second Parameter Specification Codes
When handling the following parameters in computer link operation, it is necessary to select second
parameters.
In IVRD, IVWR, and IVBWR*1 instructions, when a value shown in the tables below is set in S2 ( S3 in
IVBWR*1 instruction), the extension parameter and second parameter are automatically overwritten, and
parameter values are either read or written.
*1.
The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
9.10.1 S500 Series
1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers C2 to C7
Second parameter specification code
Parameter
No.
Name
[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in IVRD/IVWR
instruction for parameter number]
C2
Frequency setting voltage bias
frequency
902
C3
Frequency setting voltage bias
1902
C4
Frequency setting voltage gain
903
C5
Frequency setting current bias
frequency
904
C6
Frequency setting current bias
1904
C7
Frequency setting current gain
905
9.10.2 E500 Series
1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 902 to 905
Second parameter specification code
Parameter
No.
E-112
Name
[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in IVRD/IVWR
instruction for parameter number]
Offset/Gain
(H00)
Analog
(H01)
Analog value of
terminal (H02)
902
Frequency setting voltage bias
902
1902
2902
903
Frequency setting voltage gain
903
1903
2903
904
Frequency setting current bias
904
1904
2904
905
Frequency setting current gain
905
1905
2905
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
9.10 Second Parameter Specification Codes
A
1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 201 to 230 and 902 to 905
Second parameter specification code
Name
Operation frequency
read/write
Time read/write
Rotation direction
write/read
203
Program set 1
203
1203
2203
204
Program set 1
204
1204
2204
205
Program set 1
205
1205
2205
206
Program set 1
206
1206
2206
207
Program set 1
207
1207
2207
208
Program set 1
208
1208
2208
209
Program set 1
209
1209
2209
210
Program set 1
210
1210
2210
211
Program set 2
211
1211
2211
212
Program set 2
212
1212
2212
213
Program set 2
213
1213
2213
214
Program set 2
214
1214
2214
215
Program set 2
215
1215
2215
216
Program set 2
216
1216
2216
217
Program set 2
217
1217
2217
218
Program set 2
218
1218
2218
219
Program set 2
219
1219
2219
220
Program set 2
220
1220
2220
221
Program set 3
221
1221
2221
222
Program set 3
222
1222
2222
223
Program set 3
223
1223
2223
224
Program set 3
224
1224
2224
225
Program set 3
225
1225
2225
226
Program set 3
226
1226
2226
227
Program set 3
227
1227
2227
228
Program set 3
228
1228
2228
229
Program set 3
229
1229
2229
230
Program set 3
230
1230
2230
C
D
E
F
G
H
2. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 902 to 905
Second parameter specification code
Parameter
No.
Name
[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in IVRD/IVWR
instruction for parameter number]
Analog
(H01)
Analog value of
terminal (H02)
902
Frequency setting voltage bias
902
1902
2902
903
Frequency setting voltage gain
903
1903
2903
904
Frequency setting current bias
904
1904
2904
905
Frequency setting current gain
905
1905
2905
I
Remote
Maintenance
Offset/Gain
(H00)
Programming
Communication
2202
Computer Link
2201
1202
Parallel Link
1201
202
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
201
Program set 1
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Program set 1
202
Inverter
Communication
201
B
N:N Network
Parameter
No.
[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in IVRD/IVWR
instruction for parameter number]
Common Items
9.10.3 A500 Series
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-113
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
9.10 Second Parameter Specification Codes
9.10.4 F500 Series
1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 902 to 905
Second parameter specification code
Parameter
No.
Name
[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in IVRD/
IVWR instruction for parameter number]
Offset/Gain
(H00)
Analog
(H01)
Analog value of
terminal (H02)
902
Frequency setting voltage bias
902
1902
2902
903
Frequency setting voltage gain
903
1903
2903
904
Frequency setting current bias
904
1904
2904
905
Frequency setting current gain
905
1905
2905
9.10.5 V500 Series
1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 902 to 905
Second parameter specification code
Parameter
No.
Name
[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in IVRD/
IVWR instruction for parameter number]
Offset/Gain
(H00)
Analog
(H01)
Analog value of
terminal (H02)
902
1902
2902
902
Speed setting No. 2 bias
903
Speed setting No. 2 gain
903
1903
2903
904
Torque command No. 3 bias
904
1904
2904
905
Torque command No. 3 gain
905
1905
2905
917
No.1 terminal bias (speed)
917
1917
2917
918
No.1 terminal gain (speed)
918
1918
2918
919
No.1 terminal bias (torque/magnetic flux)
919
1919
2919
920
No.1 terminal gain (torque/magnetic flux)
920
1920
2920
9.10.6 F700 Series
1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 125, 126, and C2 to C7
Parameter
No.
E-114
Second parameter specification code
Name
[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in
IVRD/IVWR instruction for parameter number]
C2
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency
902
C3
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
1902
125
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency
903
C4
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
1903
C5
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency
904
C6
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
1904
126
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency
905
C7
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
1905
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
9.10 Second Parameter Specification Codes
A
1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 125, 126, C2 to C7, C12 to
C19, and C38 to C41
Second parameter specification code
Name
[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in
IVRD/IVWR instruction for parameter number]
C2
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency
902
C3
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
1902
125
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency
903
C4
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
1903
904
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
1904
126
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency
905
C7
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
1905
C12
Bias frequency (speed) for terminal No. 1
917
C13
Bias (speed) for terminal No. 1
1917
C14
Gain frequency (speed) for terminal No. 1
918
C15
Gain (speed) for terminal No. 1
1918
Bias command (torque) for terminal No. 1
919
C17
Bias (torque) for terminal No. 1
1919
C18
Gain command (torque) for terminal No. 1
920
C19
Gain (torque) for terminal No. 1
1920
C38
Bias command (torque) for terminal No. 4
932
C39
Bias (torque) for terminal No. 4
1932
C40
Gain command (torque) for terminal No. 4
933
C41
Gain (torque) for terminal No. 4
1933
E
Inverter
Communication
C16
D
Computer Link
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency
C6
C
Parallel Link
C5
B
N:N Network
Parameter
No.
Common Items
9.10.7 A700 Series
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-115
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
9.10 Second Parameter Specification Codes
9.10.8 E700 and D700 Series
1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers 125, 126, C2 to C7 and C22 to
C25
Second parameter specification code
Parameter
No.
C2
C3
125
C4
C5
C6
126
C7
E-116
Name
[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in IVRD/
IVWR instruction for parameter number]
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency
902
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
1902
Terminal 2 analog value
2902 (Only the IVRD instruction)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
903
1903
Terminal 2 analog value
2903 (Only the IVRD instruction)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency
904
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
1904
Terminal 4 analog value
2904 (Only the IVRD instruction)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
905
1905
Terminal 4 analog value
2905 (Only the IVRD instruction)
C22
Frequency setting voltage bias frequency (built-in
potentiometer)
922
C23
Frequency setting voltage bias
(built-in potentiometer)
1922
C24
Frequency setting voltage gain frequency (built-in
potentiometer)
923
C25
Frequency
setting
potentiometer)
1923
voltage
gain
(built-in
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
9.10 Second Parameter Specification Codes
A
1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers Pr125, Pr126, C2 to C19 and
C38 to C41
Second parameter specification code
Name
[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in IVRD/
IVWR instruction for parameter number]
C2
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency
902
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
1902
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency
903
C4
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
1903
C5
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency
904
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
1904
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency
905
C7
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
1905
C12
Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed)
917
C13
Terminal 1 bias (speed)
1917
918
Terminal 1 gain (speed)
1918
C16
Terminal 1 bias command (torque)
919
C17
Terminal 1 bias (torque)
1919
C18
Terminal 1 gain command (torque)
920
C19
Terminal 1 gain (torque)
1920
C8
Current output bias signal
930
C9
Current output bias current
1930
C10
Current output gain signal
931
C11
Current output gain current
1931
C38
Terminal 4 bias command (torque)
932
C39
Terminal 4 bias (torque)
1932
C40
Terminal 4 gain command (torque)
933
C41
Terminal 4 gain (torque)
1933
PID display bias coefficient
934
C43
PID display bias analog value
1934
C44
PID display gain coefficient
935
C45
PID display gain analog value
1935
F
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
C42
E
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed)
C15
Inverter
Communication
C14
D
Computer Link
C6
126
C
Parallel Link
C3
125
B
N:N Network
Parameter
No.
Common Items
9.10.9 F800 Series
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-117
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
9 Creating Programs (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
9.10 Second Parameter Specification Codes
9.10.10 A800 Series
1. Second parameter specification codes for parameter numbers Pr125, Pr126, C2 to C19 and
C38 to C41
Parameter
No.
E-118
Second parameter specification code
Name
[(decimal) value to be specified in S2 in IVRD/
IVWR instruction for parameter number]
C2
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency
902
C3
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
1902
125
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency
903
C4
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
1903
C5
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency
904
C6
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
1904
126
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency
905
C7
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
1905
C12
Terminal 1 bias frequency (speed)
917
C13
Terminal 1 bias (speed)
1917
C14
Terminal 1 gain frequency (speed)
918
C15
Terminal 1 gain (speed)
1918
C16
Terminal 1 bias command (torque)
919
C17
Terminal 1 bias (torque)
1919
C18
Terminal 1 gain command (torque)
920
C19
Terminal 1 gain (torque)
1920
C8
Current output bias signal
930
C9
Current output bias current
1930
C10
Current output gain signal
931
C11
Current output gain current
1931
C38
Terminal 4 bias command (torque)
932
C39
Terminal 4 bias (torque)
1932
C40
Terminal 4 gain command (torque)
933
C41
Terminal 4 gain (torque)
1933
C42
PID display bias coefficient
934
C43
PID display bias analog value
1934
C44
PID display gain coefficient
935
C45
PID display gain analog value
1935
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
10.1 Practical Example 1
A
Common Items
10. Practical Program Examples
(FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
B
N:N Network
This chapter explains practical programs for inverter communication.
10.1
Practical Example 1
An FX PLC (ch 1) is connected to an inverter.
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
D
Computer Link
10.1.1 System configuration example
C
Parallel Link
This fundamental program example monitors operations of an inverter, controls operations of the inverter and
writes parameters to the inverter.
Programs can be made simpler and the communication time can be reduced by using the IVMC instruction as
long as the PLC and inverter support the IVMC instruction.
For details on PLC versions support the IVMC instruction, refer to section 9.9.
Refer to "9.9.2 Applicable inverters" for supported inverters.
Inverter
E
Inverter
Communication
F
Terminal resistor
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Distributor
10.1.2 Contents of operation
*1.
D11 when the IVMC instruction is used
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
As an example of operation control, an inverter can be stopped (X000), rotated forward (X001) and rotated
reverse (X002).
By changing the contents of D10*1, the speed can be changed.
The contents of D10*1 can be changed from a sequence program or display unit.
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-119
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
10.1 Practical Example 1
10.1.3 Program example
1. Writing parameters to an inverter while the PLC is in RUN mode
M8002
SET
Initial pulse
M10
The write
instruction is
driven
M10
Driving of
write
instruction
FNC271
IVDR
K0
H0FD
H9696
K1
The inverter is reset
FNC271
IVDR
K0
H0FB
H0*1
K1
Computer link
operation is
specified
FNC 12
MOV P
K1
D200
The maximum
frequency (Pr. 1) is
specified
FNC 12
MOV P
K12000
D201
The maximum
frequency (Pr. 1) is
set to "120 Hz"
FNC 12
MOV P
K2
D202
The minimum
frequency (Pr. 2) is
specified
FNC 12
MOV P
K500
D203
The minimum
frequency (Pr. 2) is
set to "5 Hz"
FNC 12
MOV P
K7
D204
The acceleration time
(Pr. 7) is specified
FNC 12
MOV P
K10
D205
The acceleration time
(Pr. 7) is set to "1 sec"
FNC 12
MOV P
K8
D206
The deceleration time
(Pr. 8) is specified
FNC 12
MOV P
K10
D207
The deceleration time
(Pr. 8) is set to "1 sec"
D200
K1
FNC274
IVBWR*2
K0
K4
M8029
Instruction execute
complete
*1.
*2.
E-120
RST
The parameters are written
all at once
D200 to D207
(Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 7 and Pr. 8)
M10
Driving of
write
instruction
When using an E500 Series inverter, use "H2" to specify computer link operation.
The FX3S, FX3G and FX3GC PLC does not support the IVBWR instruction. Use the IVWR instruction
instead.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
10.1 Practical Example 1
A
Common Items
2. Changing the speed using a sequence program
• When the IVMC instruction is not used
M8000
FNC 12
MOV P
RUN
monitor
K6000
D10
M17
FNC 12
MOV P
Command for
switching to
speed 1
D10
The operation speed
"40 Hz" is written
Operation
speed
M18
K2000
D10
C
The operation speed
"20 Hz" is written
Parallel Link
FNC 12
MOV P
Command for
switching to
speed 2
FNC271
IVDR
K4000
B
N:N Network
Operation
speed
"60 Hz" is written as
the initial value at
startup
Operation
speed
K0
H0ED
D10
K1
The preset frequency*1 is
written to the inverter
*1.
For the V500 Series inverter, write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just
before writing the set frequency in the program.
E
• When the IVMC instruction is used
FNC 12
MOV P
RUN
monitor
K6000
D11
Operation
speed
M17
M18
D11
F
The operation speed
"40 Hz" is written
Operation
speed
FNC 12
MOV P
K2000
D11
The operation speed
"20 Hz" is written
G
Operation
speed
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Command for
switching to
speed 2
K4000
"60 Hz" is written as
the initial value at
startup
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Command for
switching to
speed 1
FNC 12
MOV P
Inverter
Communication
M8000
D
Computer Link
Operation
speed
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-121
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
10.1 Practical Example 1
3. Controlling operations of an inverter
• When the IVMC instruction is not used
X000
SET
Operation stop
command input
X001
Forward
rotation
command
input
M15
H0FA is set to "00H"
Operation
stop
X000
RST
Operation stop
command input
M15
Operation stop is reset
by input X001 or X002
Operation
stop
X002
Reverse
rotation
command
input
M15
X001
Operation Forward
stop
rotation
command
input
X002
Reverse
rotation
command
input
M8000
X002
M21
Reverse
rotation
command
input
Forward rotation
command
X001
M22
Forward
rotation
command
input
FNC271
IVDR
RUN
monitor
b1 of H0FA is set to ON
b2 of H0FA is set to ON
Reverse rotation
command
K0
H0FA
K2M20
K1
Operation command is
written
M27 to M20H0FA
• When the IVMC instruction is used
X000
SET
Operation stop
command input
X001
Forward
rotation
command
input
M15
H0F9 is set to "0000H"
Operation
stop
X000
RST
Operation stop
command input
M15
Operation stop is reset
by input X001 or X002
Operation
stop
X002
Reverse
rotation
command
input
M15
X001
Operation Forward
stop
rotation
command
input
X002
Reverse
rotation
command
input
M8000
RUN
monitor
E-122
X002
M21
Reverse
rotation
command
input
b1 of H0F9 is set to ON
Forward rotation
command
X001
M22
Forward
rotation
command
input
b2 of H0F9 is set to ON
Reverse rotation
command
FNC 12
MOV
K4M20
D10
Operation
command
The run command is set
to the device for writing.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
10.1 Practical Example 1
A
Common Items
4. Monitoring operations of an inverter
• When the IVMC instruction is not used
M8000
FNC270
IVCK
RUN
monitor
K0
H079*1 K4M100
K1
Inverter status is read
H79M115 to M100
B
N:N Network
M100
Y000
Inverter is
operating
Indicator
lamp, etc.
C
M101
Forward
rotation
Parallel Link
Y001
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M102
Y002
Reverse
rotation
D
M103
Y003
Up to
frequency
Indicator
lamp, etc.
Contents of status
(according to necessity)
E
M104
Inverter
Communication
Y004
Overload
is applied
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M106
Y006
Frequency
is detected
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M107
Y007
Alarm
occurrence
Indicator
lamp, etc.
K0
H06F
D50
K1
G
Output frequency
monitor*2
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
FNC270
IVCK
Computer Link
Indicator
lamp, etc.
Frequency
monitor value
END
H
S500, E500, A500, F500 and V500 Series inverters do not support the command code H79 (Inverter
status monitor (extended)). Use the command code H7A (Inverter status monitor).
*2.
For the V500 Series inverter, write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just
before reading the output frequency monitor in the program.
Programming
Communication
*1.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-123
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
10.1 Practical Example 1
• When the IVMC instruction is used
M8000
FNC275
IVMC
RUN
monitor
K0
H0000
D10
FNC 12
MOV
D20
D20
K1
K4M100
The set frequency (RAM) and run command
(expansion) are written.
The inverter status monitor (expansion) and
output frequency (speed) are read.*1
The inverter status monitor (expansion) is
stored in bit devices.
M100
Y000
Inverter is
operating
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M101
Y001
Forward
rotation
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M102
Y002
Reverse
rotation
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M103
Y003
Up to
frequency
Indicator
lamp, etc.
Contents of status
(according to necessity)
M104
Y004
Overload
is applied
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M106
Y006
Frequency
is detected
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M107
Y007
Alarm
occurrence
Indicator
lamp, etc.
FNC 12
MOV
D21
D50
Output frequency (speed)
monitor
END
*1.
E-124
The IVMC instruction reads the inverter status at the time of communication with the inverter, and
stores it in D .
Accordingly, the inverter status written by the IVMC instruction can be read when the next reading
instruction (IVCK, IVMC, etc.) is executed.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
A
Practical Example 2
This program executes the same control as practical example 1 shown earlier from one communication port
(ch1) to two inverters (Station number: 0 and 1).
B
10.2.1 System configuration example
N:N Network
An FX PLC (ch1) is connected to two inverters (Station number: 0 and 1).
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
Common Items
10.2
10.2 Practical Example 2
Inverter A
(station number 0)
Inverter B
(station number 1)
C
Parallel Link
D
Terminal resistor
Computer Link
Distributor
Distributor
10.2.2 Contents of operation
E
Differences from the practical example 1 are the following three points:
• Status is not being read when a write to inverter command is given.
• The PLC only writes when it detects that contents to be written have changed since last being written.
Inverter
Communication
• The PLC executes communication from one communication port to two inverters.
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-125
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
10.2 Practical Example 2
10.2.3 Program example
1. Writing parameters to an inverter while the PLC is in RUN mode
M8002
Initial pulse
FNC 40
ZRST
M510
M607
Clearing devices backed up
against power interruption
FNC 40
ZRST
D510
D707
Clearing devices backed up
against power interruption
SET
M10
The write
instruction
is driven
(station number 0)
SET
The write
instruction
is driven
(station number 1)
*Inverter A (station number 0)
M10
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 0)
M510
FNC271
IVDR
K0
H0FD
H9696
K1
FNC271
IVDR
K0
H0FB
H0*1
K1
FNC 12
MOV P
K1
D200
FNC 12
MOV P
K12000
D201
FNC 12
MOV P
K2
D202
FNC 12
MOV P
K500
D203
FNC 12
MOV P
K7
D204
The acceleration time
(Pr. 7) is specified
(station number 0)
FNC 12
MOV P
K10
D205
The acceleration time
(Pr. 7) is set to "1 sec"
(station number 0)
FNC 12
MOV P
K8
D206
The deceleration time
(Pr. 8) is specified
(station number 0)
FNC 12
MOV P
K10
D207
The deceleration time
(Pr. 8) is set to "1 sec"
(station number 0)
D200
K1
FNC274
IVBWR*2
K0
K4
M8029
RST
Instruction execute
complete
E-126
M10
Driving of write
instruction
(station number 0)
The inverter is reset
(station number 0)
Computer link operation
is specified
(station number 0)
The maximum
frequency (Pr. 1) is
specified
(station number 0)
The maximum
frequency (Pr. 1) is
set to "120 Hz"
(station number 0)
The minimum
frequency (Pr. 2) is
specified
(station number 0)
The minimum
frequency (Pr. 2) is
set to "5 Hz"
(station number 0)
The parameters are written
all at once
D200 to D207
(Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 7 and Pr. 8)
(station number 0)
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
10.2 Practical Example 2
A
Common Items
*Inverter B
(station number 1)
M510
FNC271
IVDR
K1
H0FD
H9696
K1
FNC271
IVDR
K1
H0FB
H0*1
K1
FNC 12
MOV P
K1
D700
FNC 12
MOV P
K12000
D701
FNC 12
MOV P
K2
D702
FNC 12
MOV P
K500
D703
FNC 12
MOV P
K7
D704
The acceleration time
(Pr. 7) is specified
(station number 1)
FNC 12
MOV P
K10
D705
The acceleration time
(Pr. 7) is set to "1 sec"
(station number 1)
FNC 12
MOV P
K8
D706
The deceleration time
(Pr. 8) is specified
(station number 1)
FNC 12
MOV P
K10
D707
The deceleration time
(Pr. 8) is set to "1 sec"
(station number 1)
D700
K1
D
The minimum
frequency (Pr. 2) is
specified
(station number 1)
The minimum
frequency (Pr. 2) is
set to "5 Hz"
(station number 1)
Computer Link
RST
Instruction execute
complete
The maximum
frequency (Pr. 1) is
set to "120 Hz"
(station number 1)
E
F
The parameters are written
all at once
D700 to D707
(Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 7 and Pr. 8)
(station number 1)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
M8029
Parallel Link
K4
C
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
K1
The maximum
frequency (Pr. 1) is
specified
(station number 1)
Inverter
Communication
FNC274
IVBWR*2
B
The inverter is reset
(station number 1)
Computer link operation
is specified
(station number 1)
N:N Network
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 1)
M510
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 1)
H
When using an E500 Series inverter, use "H2" to specify computer link operation.
*2.
The FX3S, FX3G and FX3GC PLC does not support the IVBWR instruction. Use the IVWR instruction
instead.
Programming
Communication
*1.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-127
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
10.2 Practical Example 2
2. Changing the speed using a sequence program
*Inverter A
(station number 0)
M8000
FNC 12 K6000
MOV P
RUN
monitor
D10
Operation
speed
"60 Hz" is written as
the initial value at
startup.
(station
number 0)
M17
FNC 12 K4000
MOV P
Command for
switching to speed 1
D10
Operation
speed
(station number 0)
(station
number 0)
M18
FNC 12 K2000
MOV P
Command for
switching to speed 2
D10
Operation
speed
(station number 0)
The operation speed is
written as "20 Hz"
(station
number 0)
M8002
FNC 12
MOV
Initial pulse
D10
D80
Operation Operation
speed
speed is
(station withdrawn
number 0) (station
number 0)
FNC228
LD<>
The operation speed is
written as "40 Hz"
D10
D80
SET
The write
instruction
is driven
Operation Operation speed
speed
is withdrawn
(station
(station
number 0) number 0)
M11
FNC271
IVDR
The write
instruction
is driven
K0
M11
(station
number 0)
H0ED
D10
K1
Operation
speed
(station
number 0)
Change in the
operation speed
(D10) is
detected
The preset frequency*1
is written to the
inverter
(station
number 0)
M8029
Instruction execute
complete
RST
M11
The write
instruction
is driven
(station
number 0)
*1.
E-128
For the V500 Series inverter, write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just
before writing the set frequency in the program.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
10.2 Practical Example 2
A
Common Items
*Inverter B
(station number 1)
M8000
FNC 12 K6000
MOV P
D510
Operation
speed
B
"60 Hz" is written as
the initial value at
startup.
N:N Network
RUN
monitor
(station
number 1)
M517
FNC 12 K4000
MOV P
Command for
switching to speed 1
D510
(station
number 1)
M518
FNC 12 K2000
MOV P
Command for
switching to speed 2
D510
Operation
speed
(station number 1)
The operation speed is
written as "20 Hz"
D
FNC 12
MOV
Initial pulse
D510
Computer Link
(station
number 1)
M8002
D580
Operation Operation
speed
speed is
(station withdrawn
D510
D580
SET
The write
instruction
is driven
Operation Operation speed
speed
is withdrawn
(station
(station
number 1) number 1)
FNC271
IVDR
The write
instruction
is driven
K1
H0ED
D510
K1
Operation
speed
(station
number 1)
F
(station
number 1)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
M11
M511
E
Change in the
operation speed
(D510) is
detected
Inverter
Communication
number 1) (station
number 1)
FNC228
LD<>
C
Parallel Link
Operation
speed
(station number 1)
The operation speed is
written as "40 Hz"
The preset frequency*1
is written to the
inverter
G
(station
number 1)
Instruction execute
complete
RST
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
M8029
M511
The write
instruction
is driven
H
(station
number 1)
For the V500 Series inverter, write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just
before writing the set frequency in the program.
Programming
Communication
*1.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-129
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
10.2 Practical Example 2
3. Controlling operations of an inverter
* Inverter A
(station number 0)
X000
SET
M15
Operation stop
command input
(station number 0)
X001
H0FA is set to "00H"
Operation
stop
(station
number 0)
X000
RST
Forward
Operation stop
rotation
command input
command (station number 0)
input
(station
number 0)
M15
Operation
stop
(station
number 0)
Operation stop is reset
by input X001 or X002
X002
Reverse rotation
command input
(station number 0)
M15
Operation
stop
(station
number 0)
X001
X002
Forward
rotation
command
input
(station
number 0)
X002
M21
Reverse
rotation
command
input
(station
number 0)
Forward rotation
command
(station number 0)
X001
Reverse
rotation
command
input
(station
number 0)
M22
Forward
rotation
command
input
(station
number 0)
FNC 12
D81
MOV K2M20
Operation
command is
withdrawn
(station
number 0)
Initial pulse
D81
SET
Operation
command is
withdrawn
(station
number 0)
M12
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 0)
FNC271
IVDR
M8029
Instruction execute
complete
E-130
b2 of H0FA is set to ON
Reverse rotation
command
(station number 0)
M8002
FNC228
LD<> K2M20
b1 of H0FA is set to ON
Changes in the
operation
commands
(M27 to M20) are
detected
M12
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 0)
K0
H0FA
K2M20
K1
RST
M12
Driving of write
instruction
(station
number 0)
Operation commands
are written.
M27 to M20H0FA
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
10.2 Practical Example 2
A
Common Items
* Inverter B
(station number 1)
X010
SET
M515
Operation stop
(command input
station number 1)
B
X010
RST
M515
Operation
stop
(station
number 1)
Operation stop is reset
by input X011 or X012
C
Parallel Link
Forward
Operation stop
rotation
command input
command (station number 1)
input
(station
number 1)
N:N Network
X011
H0FA is set to "00H"
Operation
stop
(station
number 1)
X012
Reverse rotation
command input
(station number 1)
M515
(station
number 1)
X012
Forward
rotation
command
input
(station
number 1)
X012
M521
Reverse
rotation
command
input
(station
number 1)
Forward rotation
command
(station number 1)
X011
M522
Forward
rotation
command
input
(station
number 1)
Reverse rotation
command
(station number 1)
M8002
D581
SET
Operation
command is
withdrawn
(station
number 1)
M8029
Instruction execute
complete
G
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 1)
K1
H0FA
K2M520
K1
RST
M512
Operation commands
are written.
M527 to M520H0FA
H
Programming
Communication
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 1)
FNC271
IVDR
M512
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
M512
F
Changes in the
operation
commands
(M527 to M520) are
detected
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
FNC 12
MOV K2M520 D581
Operation
command is
withdrawn
(station
number 1)
Initial pulse
FNC228
LD<> K2M520
E
b2 of H0FA is set to ON
Inverter
Communication
Reverse
rotation
command
input
(station
number 1)
D
b1 of H0FA is set to ON
Computer Link
Operation
stop
X011
Driving of write
instruction
(station
number 1)
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-131
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
10.2 Practical Example 2
4. Monitoring operations of an inverter
* Inverter A
(station number 0)
M10
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 0)
N0
M11
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 0)
M12
MC
N0
M70
While data is not
written to an inverter,
the status is read
K1
Inverter status is read
(station number 0)
H79M115 to M100
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 0)
M70
M8000
FNC270
IVCK
RUN
monitor
K0
H079*1 K4M100
Inverter is
operating
(station number 0)
M100
Y000
Inverter
running
(station number 0)
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M101
Y001
Forward
rotation
(station number 0)
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M102
Y002
Reverse
rotation
(station number 0)
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M103
Y003
Up to
frequency
(station number 0)
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M104
Y004
Overload
is applied
(station number 0)
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M106
Y006
Frequency
is detected
(station number 0)
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M107
Y007
Alarm
occurrence
(station number 0)
Indicator
lamp, etc.
FNC270
IVCK
K0
H06F
D50
K1
Frequency
monitor value
(station number 0)
MCR
E-132
Contents of status
(according to necessity)
Output frequency monitor *2
(station number 0)
N0
*1.
S500, E500, A500, F500 and V500 Series inverters do not support the command code H79 (Inverter
status monitor (extended)). Use the command code H7A (Inverter status monitor).
*2.
For the V500 Series inverter, write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just
before reading the output frequency monitor in the program.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition 10 Practical Program Examples (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Inverter Communication
10.2 Practical Example 2
A
Common Items
* Inverter B
(station number 1)
M510
N0
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 1)
M512
MC
N0
M570
While data is not
written to an inverter,
the status is read
K1
Inverter status is read
(station number 1)
H79M615 to M600
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 1)
B
N:N Network
Driving of
write
instruction
(station
number 1)
M511
M570
M8000
RUN
monitor
K1
H079*1 K4M600
Inverter is
operating
(station number 1)
M600
C
Parallel Link
FNC270
IVCK
Y010
Inverter
running
(station number 1)
D
M601
Computer Link
Indicator
lamp, etc.
Y011
Forward
rotation
(station number 1)
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M602
E
Y012
Reverse
rotation
(station number 1)
M603
Y013
Up to
frequency
(station number 1)
Inverter
Communication
Indicator
lamp, etc.
Contents of status
(according to necessity)
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M604
F
Overload
is applied
(station number 1)
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Y014
Indicator
lamp, etc.
M606
Y016
Frequency
is detected
(station number 1)
G
M607
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Indicator
lamp, etc.
Y017
Alarm
occurrence
(station number 1)
Indicator
lamp, etc.
FNC270
IVCK
K1
H06F
D550
K1
MCR
Programming
Communication
Frequency
monitor value
(station number 1)
H
Output frequency monitor *2
(station number 1)
N0
I
*1.
S500, E500, A500, F500 and V500 Series inverters do not support the command code H79 (Inverter
status monitor (extended)). Use the command code H7A (Inverter status monitor).
*2.
For the V500 Series inverter, write "0" to instruction code HFF (Link parameter expansion setting) just
before reading the output frequency monitor in the program.
Remote
Maintenance
END
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-133
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
11 Troubleshooting
11.1 Checking FX PLC Version Applicability (FX2N and FX2NC Series)
11. Troubleshooting
This chapter explains troubleshooting and error codes.
11.1
Checking FX PLC Version Applicability (FX2N and FX2NC Series)
Verify that the FX PLC main unit is an applicable version for inverter communication.
For version applicability, refer to Section 1.3.
11.2
Checking Communication Status Based on LED Indication
Check the status of the "RD(RXD)" and "SD(TXD)" indicator LEDs provided in the optional equipment.
LED status
11.3
Operation status
RD
SD
Flashing
Flashing
Flashing
Off
Data is received, but is not sent.
Off
Flashing
Data is sent, but is not received
Off
Off
Data is being sent or received.
Data is not sent nor received.
Checking Installation
1. Mounting status
If the communication equipment is not securely connected to the PLC, communication is not possible.
For mounting method, refer to the respective communication equipment manual.
2. Power supply (for FX0N-485ADP)
The FX0N-485ADP requires a driving power supply. Verify that the power supply is provided correctly.
3. Wiring
Verify that the wiring to all communication equipment is correct. If the communication equipment is wired
incorrectly, communication is not possible.
For wiring method check, refer to Chapter 4.
11.4
Checking Sequence Program
1. Communication setting in the sequence program
Verify that N:N Network (D8173 to D8180) and parallel link (M8070 and M8071) are not set.
After changing any setting, make sure to turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.
2. Communication setting using parameters
Verify that the communication settings using parameters are correct. If the contents of the parameters do not
agree, communication will not function correctly.
After changing any parameters, make sure to turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.
3. Ethernet port setting (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the same channel is not used in the Ethernet port setting. Do not set the channel used in inverter
communication. After changing the setting, make sure to reboot the PLC's power.
E-134
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
11 Troubleshooting
11.4 Checking Sequence Program
A
1) Except FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.
C
Parallel Link
3) In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch1.
Use ch2, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, reboot the PLC's power.
B
N:N Network
2) In FX3G PLC
- In the case of the 14 points and 24-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used, delete them, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.
- In the case of the 40 points and 60-point type
Verify that the VRRD and VRSC instructions are not used in the program.
If these instructions are used in the program, the communication function is not available in ch2.
Use ch1, or delete these instructions.
After deleting these instructions, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.
Common Items
4. Presence of VRRD and VRSC instructions
D
Computer Link
5. Presence of RS instruction (in FX2N and FX2NC PLCs)
Verify that the RS instruction is not used in the program.
If this instruction is used, delete it, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the power ON again.
6. Presence of RS and RS2 instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
7. Presence of ADPRW instructions (in FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
Verify that the ADPRW instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, and reboot the PLC’s power.
E
Inverter
Communication
Verify that the RS and RS2 instructions are not being used for the same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, turn OFF the PLC power, and then turn the
power ON again.
F
Verify that the FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD and FLSTRD instructions are not being used for the
same channel.
If these instructions are used for the same channel, delete them, reboot the PLC’s power.
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
11.4.1 Checking inverter operation status
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
8. Presence of FLCRT, FLDEL, FLWR, FLRD, FLCMD, and FLSTRD instructions (in FX3U and
FX3UC PLCs)
1. When the operation mode of an inverter is not changed over to computer link mode
1) Verify that the inverter is set to the external operation mode.
H
2) Verify that no signal is being input to the external terminals STF and STR.
Programming
Communication
3) Verify that the correct operation mode changeover program is being executed.
2. When an inverter cannot be started even in computer link mode
1) Verify that the program for starting the inverter is executed correctly.
2) Verify that the operation command and speed command are set correctly.
I
3) Verify that the allowable communication time interval is set correctly.
1) Verify that a communication cable is connected correctly between the PLC and the inverter.
(Check for poor contact or wire breakage.)
3) Verify that the allowable communication time interval is set correctly.
4) Verify that terminal resistors are wired correctly.
E-135
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
2) Verify that a sequence program is created so that communication is executed with each inverter within a
constant cycle. Set the communication check time interval to a large value, and check the communication
status.
Remote
Maintenance
3. When an inverter is stopped by an alarm during operation due to defective communication
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
11 Troubleshooting
Inverter Communication
11.5
11.5 Checking Absence/Presence of Errors
Checking Absence/Presence of Errors
Verify that the error flag is not ON.
If the error flag is ON, check the error code and take proper countermeasures.
For error codes, refer to the next page.
11.6
Error Codes
When a communication error occurs, the error flag turns ON, and the error code is stored in the data register.
For error codes, refer to the table below.
1. Error storing devices
FX Series
Error flag
Data register for storing error code
FX2N,FX2NC
M8156
D8156
FX3S,FX3G,FX3GC,FX3U,FX3UC
ch1
ch2
ch1
ch2
M8152
M8157
D8152
D8157
2. Error code list
Error
code
(DEC)
E-136
Contents of error
0
Normal end
1

Inverter
operation
(No Errors)
Inverter did not give response.
2
Timeout error
Sending from inverter was aborted midway.
3
Station number error Unspecified station gave response.
4
Sum check error
The sum of data sent back by the inverter did not match.
5
Parameter number
specification error
In writing or reading a parameter, an improper parameter number
was specified.
At this time, error code (K6706) is set to D8067.
K6706: Out-of-range data value for operand in applied instruction.
6
Communication port
occupied by another
communication type
Because the port is being used for another communication type, it
cannot be used for communication with the inverter.
At this time, error code (K6762) is set to D8067.
K6762: The port specified in inverter communication instruction is
being used by another communication type.
7
A value outside the allowable range is set to the station number.
Station number
At this time, error code (K6706) is set to D8067.
outside setting range
K6706: Out-of-range data value for operand in applied instruction.
8
Sending timeout
error*1
9
Received data error*1 Wrong data was received from the inverter.

Sending to the inverter was not completed within the specified time.
256
Inverter sent the error code H0.
Computer NAK error The number of retries exceeded the allowable number because of an
error in the transfer request data.
257
Parity error
258
Sum check error
259
Protocol error
260
Framing error
When errors
have occurred
consecutively
Inverter sent the error code H2.
beyond the
The sum check code in the computer is different from the sum value
allowable
calculated from the data received by the inverter.
number of
Inverter sent the error code H3.
retries, inverter
Syntax error is included in the data received by the inverter,
is brought to an
receiving of data was not completed within the specified time, or CR/ alarm stop.
LF does not agree with the parameters.
Inverter sent the error code H1.
The contents are different from the specified parity.
Inverter sent the error code H4.
The stop bit length is different from the initial set value.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
11 Troubleshooting
11.6 Error Codes
A
Contents of error
Inverter
operation
262
Undefined
Inverter sent the error code H6.
Not defined currently in inverter.
Character error
Inverter does
not accept
Inverter sent the error code H7.
received data,
An unused character (other than 0 to 9, A to F and control codes)
but is not
was received.
brought to an
alarm stop.
263
Undefined
Inverter sent the error code H8.
Not defined currently in inverter.
265
Undefined
Inverter sent the error code H9.
Not defined currently in inverter.
266
268
Inverter sent the error code HA.
A parameter was written in a mode other than computer link mode, Inverter does
or while the inverter was operating.
not accept
received data,
Inverter sent the error code HB. Instruction code error.
Instruction code error
but is not
Non-existing instruction code was specified.
brought to an
Inverter sent the error code HC.
Data range error
In writing a parameter or operation frequency, data outside the alarm stop.
allowable range was specified.
Mode error
Undefined
270
Undefined
Inverter sent the error code HE.
Not defined currently in inverter.
271
Undefined
Inverter sent the error code HF.
Not defined currently in inverter.
F
G
This error code is supported only in FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
*1.

E
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
269
Inverter sent the error code HD.
Not defined currently in inverter.
D
Inverter
Communication
267

C
Computer Link
264

Parallel Link
Overrun error
B
N:N Network
261
When errors
have occurred
consecutively
Inverter sent the error code H5.
beyond the
Before receiving the completed data in the inverter, the computer allowable
sent the next set of data.
number of
retries, inverter
is brought to an
alarm stop.
Common Items
Error
code
(DEC)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-137
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
11 Troubleshooting
Inverter Communication
11.6 Error Codes
3. IVMC instruction error codes
When errors occur in the send data of the IVMC instruction, the following error codes are stored.
It is recommended to check error codes in hexadecimal.
Refer to the error code list earlier in this section for other errors.
Error code
(HEX)
IVMC
Send
Send
instruction
data2
data1
error
error
error
information information information
b15 to b8
b7 to b4
b3 to b0
H00
H0
H0
HA
H0
HB
HC
H02
HA
H0
HB
E-138
Contents of error
Inverter operation
No error has occurred in both send data 1 and
send data 2.
Normal end

The inverter sent error code HA to send data 1 of
the IVMC instruction.
A parameter was written in a mode other than
computer link mode or while the inverter was
The inverter accepts
operating. The inverter did not accept the
data corresponding to
received data, but was not stopped by alarm.
send data 2, and is not
The inverter sent error code HB to send data 1 of
brought to an alarm
the IVMC instruction.
stop.
Non-existing instruction code was specified.
The inverter sent error code HC to send data 1 of
the IVMC instruction.
Data outside the allowable range was specified.
The inverter sent error code HA to send data 2 of
the IVMC instruction.
A parameter was written in a mode other than
computer link mode or while inverter was
The inverter accepts
operating. The inverter did not accept the
data corresponding to
received data, but was not stopped by alarm.
send data 1, and is not
The inverter sent error code HB to send data 2 of
brought to an alarm
the IVMC instruction.
stop.
Non-existing instruction code was specified.
HC
The inverter sent error code HC to send data 2 of
the IVMC instruction.
Data outside the allowable range was specified.
HA to HC
The inverter sent error codes to both send data 1
and send data 2 of the IVMC instruction.
Refer to the contents of the error of the
corresponding error codes of send data 1 and
send data 2 for details of error codes.
HA to HC
The inverter does not
accept data
corresponding to send
data 1 and 2, but is not
brought to an alarm
stop.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.1 Related Device List (FX2N, FX2NC)
A
Common Items
12. Related Data
B
This chapter shows various technical information.
N:N Network
12.1
Related Device List (FX2N, FX2NC)
The tables below show special auxiliary relays and special data registers used in inverter communication
(EXTR K10 to EXTR K13).
Device No.
Name
Description
R/W
R
M8104
Extension ROM
cassette check
R
Remains ON while an extension ROM cassette is attached.

R
Remains ON while the communication port is used by an EXTR instruction.
R
Unused
M8155
Communication port
busy
M8156
Communication error
Turns ON when a communication error is caused by an EXTR instruction.
or parameter error
R
M8157
Communication error
Turns ON when a communication error is caused by an EXTR instruction.
latch*1
R
R: Read only (used as a contact in program)
*1.
F
Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.
Name
Description
R/W
Stores the type code of an extension ROM cassette (value: K1).
R
D8105
Extension ROM
cassette version
Stores the version of an extension ROM cassette
(value: K100 = Ver. 1.00).
R
D8154
Inverter response
waiting time
Sets the inverter response waiting time.
D8155
Step number of
instruction using the
communication port
Stores the step number of EXTR instruction using the communication port.
R
D8156
Error code*1
Stores an error code when a communication error is caused by an EXTR
instruction.
R
Stores the instruction step number in which a communication error has
occurred. (Stores K-1 when no error has occurred.)
R
D8157
Error occurrence
step number latch*1
R/W
H
I
Remote
Maintenance
R: Read only
W: Write only
R/W: Read or Write
*1.
G
Programming
Communication
Extension ROM
cassette type code
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
D8104
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
2. Word devices
Device No.
E
Inverter
Communication
M8154
D
Computer Link
M8029
Turns ON when execution of EXTR instruction is completed, and remains
Instruction execution ON for 1 scan.
complete
Turns ON also when execution of instruction is completed if M8156
(communication error or parameter error) turns ON.
Parallel Link
1. Bit devices
C
Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-139
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
12.2
12 Related Data
12.2 Details of Related Devices (FX2N, FX2NC)
Details of Related Devices (FX2N, FX2NC)
The following devices are special devices used in inverter communication.
12.2.1 Instruction execution complete [M8029]
When execution of an inverter communication instruction is completed, this device turns ON.
1. Detailed contents
When execution of an inverter communication instruction is completed, M8029 turns ON, and remains ON for
1 scan.
When an error occurs in an inverter communication instruction, M8029 turns ON.
2. Cautions on use
M8029 is used as the execution complete flag for other instructions (such as positioning instructions).
When using M8029, provide the contact just under the instruction whose execution completion is to be
checked.
12.2.2 Extension ROM cassette check [M8104]
This device remains ON while an extension ROM cassette is attached.
1. Detailed contents
M8104 remains ON while an extension ROM cassette is attached.
- FX2N . . . . . . FX2N-ROM-E1
- FX2NC . . . . . FX2NC-ROM-CE1
2. Cautions on use
While M8104 is OFF, EXTR instructions cannot be used.
12.2.3 Communication port busy [M8155]
This device remains ON while the communication port is being used by an EXTR instruction.
1. Detailed contents
M8155 remains ON while communication with an inverter is executed by an EXTR instruction.
When M8155 turns ON, D8155 stores the step number of an instruction using the communication port.
While M8155 is ON, another EXTR instruction cannot be executed.
12.2.4 Communication error or parameter error [M8156]
This device turns ON when an error is caused in communication with an inverter by an EXTR instruction.
1. Detailed contents
M8156 turns ON when an error is caused in communication with an inverter by an EXTR instruction.
When M8156 turns ON, D8156 stores the error code.
2. Cautions on use
M8156 is set to OFF by an EXTR instruction located in the next step in the program.
When using M8156, provide it just under the EXTR instruction whose error is to be checked.
E-140
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
12 Related Data
12.2 Details of Related Devices (FX2N, FX2NC)
A
Common Items
12.2.5 Communication error latch [M8157]
This device turns ON when the communication error flag M8156 turns ON.
1. Detailed contents
B
N:N Network
M8157 turns ON when a communication error occurs and M8156 turns ON.
When M8157 turns ON, D8157 stores the step number in which the error has occurred.
2. Cautions on use
M8157 remains ON until the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.
12.2.6 Extension ROM cassette type code [D8104]
C
Parallel Link
This device stores the type code of an extension ROM cassette.
1. Detailed contents
While the following ROM is attached to an FX PLC, D8104 stores its model code.
- FX2N . . . . . . FX2N-ROM-E1 (model code: K1)
- FX2NC . . . . . FX2NC-ROM-CE1 (model code: K1)
D
Computer Link
12.2.7 Extension ROM cassette version [D8105]
This device stores the version of an extension ROM cassette.
1. Detailed contents
E
Inverter
Communication
While an extension ROM is attached, D8105 stores its version information (K100 = Ver. 1.00).
12.2.8 Inverter response waiting time [D8154]
This device sets the response waiting time of an inverter.
F
1. Detailed contents
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
D8154 sets the response waiting time of an inverter.
Set a value within the range from "1 to 32767" (unit: 100 ms) to D8154.
When "0" or a negative value is set, it is handled as "100 ms".
12.2.9 Step number of instruction using communication port [D8155]
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
This device stores the step number of an instruction occupying the communication port.
1. Detailed contents
D8155 stores the step number of EXTR instruction using the communication port.
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-141
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
12 Related Data
12.2 Details of Related Devices (FX2N, FX2NC)
12.2.10 Error code [D8156]
This device stores the error code when an error is caused in communication with an inverter by an EXTR
instruction.
1. Detailed contents
D8156 stores one of the following error codes when an error is caused in communication with an inverter by
the EXTR instruction.
Error
code
(DEC)
0
Normal end (no error)
1
Inverter did not give response.
2
Timeout error. This code interlocks with M8156. Sending from inverter was aborted
midway through.
3
An unspecified station gave response.
4
The sum of data sent back by the inverter did not match.
5
In writing or reading a parameter, an improper parameter number was specified. At
this time, the error code K6706 is set to D8067.
6
Because the port is being used for another communication, it cannot be used for
communication with the inverter. At this time, the error code K6762 is set to D8067.
7
A value outside the allowable range is set to the station number.
At this time, error code (K6706) is set to D8067.
256
Inverter sent the error code H0. Computer NAK error.
An error was included in the transfer request data from the computer beyond the
allowable number of retries.
257
Inverter sent the error code H1. Parity error.
The contents are different from the specified parity.
258
259
E-142
Contents of error
Inverter operation

Inverter sent the error code H2. Sum check error.
When errors have
The sum check code in the computer is different from the sum value calculated from occurred
the data received by inverter.
consecutively beyond
the allowable number
Inverter sent the error code H3. Protocol error.
Syntax error is included in the data received by the inverter, and the receiving of of retries, inverter is
data has not been completed within the specified time, or CR/LF does not agree brought to an alarm
stop.
with the parameters.
260
Inverter sent the error code H4. Framing error.
The stop bit length is different from the initial set value.
261
Inverter sent the error code H5. Overrun error.
Before receiving the completed data in the inverter, the computer sent the next set
of data.
262
Inverter sent the error code H6.
Not defined currently in inverter.
263
Inverter sent the error code H7. Character error.
An unused character (other than 0 to 9, A to F and control codes) was received.
264
Inverter sent the error code H8.
Not defined currently in inverter.
265
Inverter sent the error code H9.
Not defined currently in inverter.

Inverter does not
accept the received
data, but is not
brought to an alarm
stop.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
12 Related Data
12.2 Details of Related Devices (FX2N, FX2NC)
A
266
268
Inverter operation
Inverter sent the error code HA. Mode error.
A parameter was written in a mode other than computer link mode, or while inverter
was operating. Inverter does not accept the received data, but is not stopped by Inverter does not
alarm.
accept the received
data, but is not
Inverter sent the error code HB. Instruction code error.
brought to an alarm
Non-existing instruction code was specified.
stop.
Inverter sent the error code HC. Data range error.
In writing a parameter or operation frequency, data outside the allowable range was
specified. Inverter does not accept the received data, but is not stopped by alarm.
Inverter sent the error code HD.
Not defined currently in inverter.
270
Inverter sent the error code HE.
Not defined currently in inverter.
271
Inverter sent the error code HF.
Not defined currently in inverter.
C
Parallel Link
269
B
N:N Network
267
Contents of error
Common Items
Error
code
(DEC)

D
Computer Link
12.2.11 Error occurrence step number latch [D8157]
This device stores the step number in which the communication error has occurred.
E
1. Detailed contents
Inverter
Communication
When M8157 turns ON, D8157 stores the step number in which communication error has occurred.
When errors have occurred in two or more instructions, D8157 holds the step number of the instruction in
which an error occurred first.
When no error has occurred, D8157 stores "-1".
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-143
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.3
12.3 Related Device List (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Related Device List (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
The tables below show special auxiliary relays and special data registers used in inverter communication
(FNC270 (IVCK) to FNC275 (IVMC)).
The FX3G PLC (14-point, 24-point type) and FX3S PLC does not support ch2.
1. Bit devices
Device No.
Description
R/W
Turns ON when the execution of inverter
communication instruction is completed, and remains
ON for 1 scan.
Turns ON also when the execution of instruction is
completed if inverter communication error flag
(M8152 or M8157) turns ON.
R
M8063 M8438 Serial communication error*1
Turns ON when an error occurs in any type of
communication.
R
M8151 M8156 Inverter communicating
Remains ON while inverter communication is being
executed.
R
M8152 M8157 Inverter communication error*2
Turns ON when an error occurs during
communication with an inverter.
R
M8153 M8158 Inverter communication error latch*2
Turns ON when an error occurs during
communication with an inverter.
R
M8154 M8159 IVBWR instruction error*2, *3
Turns ON when an error is caused by IVBWR
instruction.
R
ch1
Name
ch2
M8029
Instruction execution complete
R: Read only (used as a contact in program)
*1.
Cleared when PLC power supply is turned from OFF to ON.
*2.
Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.
*3.
The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
2. Word devices
Device No.
ch1
Name
ch2
Description
D8063 D8438 Error code for serial communication*4 Stores a communication error code.
R
D8150 D8155
Inverter communication response
waiting time*4
D8151 D8156
Step number of instruction executing Stores the step number of an instruction executing
inverter communication
inverter communication.
R
D8152 D8157
Error code for inverter
communication*5
Stores an inverter communication error code.
R
D8153 D8158
Inverter communication error
occurring step latch*5
Latches a step number in which an inverter
communication error has occurred.*7
R
Error parameter number of IVBWR
Stores a parameter number in which an IVBWR
instruction error has occurred.
R
Stores the communication type being used.
R
D8154 D8159
instruction*5*6
D8419 D8439 Operation mode display
Sets the response wait time of inverter
communication.
R: Read only
W: Write only
R/W: Read or Write
E-144
R/W
*4.
Cleared when PLC power supply is turned from OFF to ON.
*5.
Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN.
*6.
The IVBWR instruction is supported only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
*7.
Updated only for the first error occurrence, and not for the second error occurrence or later.
R/W
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
12.4 Details of Related Devices (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
A
Details of Related Devices (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Common Items
12.4
12 Related Data
The following devices are special devices used in inverter communications.
The FX3G PLC (14-point, 24-point type) and FX3S PLC does not support ch2.
B
12.4.1 Instruction execution complete [M8029]
N:N Network
When execution of an inverter communication instruction is completed, this device turns ON.
1. Detailed contents
2. Cautions on use
M8029 is used as the execution complete flag for other instructions (such as positioning instructions).
When using M8029, provide the contact just under the instruction whose execution completion is to be
checked.
C
Parallel Link
When execution of an inverter communication instruction is completed, M8029 turns ON, and remains ON for
1 scan.
When an error occurs in an inverter communication instruction, M8029 turns ON, and remains ON for 1 scan
in the same way.
D
Computer Link
12.4.2 Serial communication error [M8063 and M8438]
These devices turn ON when an error occurs during communication with an inverter.
1. Detailed contents
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
2. Cautions on use
E
Inverter
Communication
M8063 or M8438 turns ON when a parity error, overrun error or framing error occurs during communication
with inverters or when on inverter communication error occurs.
M8063 turns ON when an error occurs during communication using ch1. When M8063 turns ON, D8063
stores the error code.
M8438 turns ON when an error occurs during communication using ch2. When M8438 turns ON, D8438
stores the error code.
Serial communication errors are not cleared even when communication is restored.
Clear them by turning off and on the PLC.
12.4.3 Inverter communication ON [M8151 and M8156]
1. Detailed contents
2. Cautions on use
While M8151 or M8156 remains ON, another inverter communication instruction cannot be executed.
H
Programming
Communication
M8151 or M8156 remains ON while communication with an inverter is executed by an inverter communication
instruction.
M8151 remains ON while communication port ch1 is used. While M8151 remains ON, D8151 stores the step
number of an instruction using the communication port.
M8156 remains ON while communication port ch2 is used. While M8156 remains ON, D8156 stores the step
number of an instruction using the communication port.
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
These devices remain ON while the communication port is used by an inverter communication instruction.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-145
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
12 Related Data
12.4 Details of Related Devices (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
12.4.4 Inverter communication error [M8152, M8153, M8157 and M8158]
These devices turn ON when an error occurs in an inverter communication instruction.
1. Detailed contents
M8152 or M8157 turn ON when an error occurs in an inverter communication instruction.
M8152 turn ON when an error occurs during communication using communication port ch1. When M8152
turn ON, D8152 stores the error code and D8153 stores the error step number.
M8157 turn ON when an error occurs during communication using communication port ch2. When M8157
turn ON, D8157 stores the error code and D8158 stores the error step number.
To D8152, D8153, D8157 and D8158 are updated only for the first error occurrence, and not for the second
error occurrence or later.
2. Cautions on use
M8152 and M8157 do not turn OFF even if the communication recovers its normal status. Clear them by
switching the PLC mode from STOP to RUN.
12.4.5 IVBWR instruction error [M8154 and M8159] (only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
These devices turn ON when an error occurs in IVBWR instruction.
1. Detailed contents
M8154 or M8159 turns ON when a parameter number of set value specified in IVBWR instruction is outside
the allowable range.
M8154 turns ON when an error occurs in IVBWR instruction using communication port ch1. When M8154
turns ON, D8154 stores the rejected parameter number.
M8159 turns ON when an error occurs in IVBWR instruction using the communication port ch2. When M8159
turns ON, D8159 stores the rejected parameter number.
2. Cautions on use
IVBWR instruction errors are not cleared even when communication is restored.
Clear them by turning off and on the PLC.
12.4.6 Serial communication error code [D8063 and D8438]
These devices store the error code when the serial communication error flag turns ON.
1. Detailed contents
When an error occurs in an inverter communication instruction, D8063 or D8438 stores one of the following
error codes.
Error code
ch1
ch2
Contents
D8063
D8438
6301
3801
Parity error, framing error or overrun error
6320
3820
Inverter communication error
2. Cautions on use
Serial communication error codes are not cleared even when communication is restored.
Clear them by switching the PLC mode from STOP to RUN.
12.4.7 Inverter response waiting time [D8150 and D8155]
These devices set the response waiting time of the inverter.
1. Detailed contents
Set the response waiting time of an inverter.
When using communication port ch1, set a value to D8150.
When using communication port ch2, set a value to D8155.
Set a value within the range from "1 to 32767" (unit: 100 ms).
If "0" or negative value is set, it is handled as "100 ms".
E-146
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
12 Related Data
12.4 Details of Related Devices (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
A
Common Items
12.4.8 Step number of instruction using communication port [D8151 and D8156]
These devices store the step number of the instruction occupying the communication port.
1. Detailed contents.
2. Cautions on use
A decimal value without sign is stored as the step number in D8151 and D8156.
C
These devices store an error code when a communication error is caused by an inverter communication
instruction.
1. Detailed contents
• D8152 stores the error code of an error in communication using communication port ch1.
• D8157 stores the error code of an error in communication using communication port ch2.
D
Computer Link
Special data registers shown below respectively store inverter communication errors, depending on each
communication port.
Parallel Link
12.4.9 Inverter communication error code [D8152 and D8157]
E
2. Error codes
Contents of error
2
Timeout error. This code interlocks with M8156. Sending from inverter was
aborted midway through.
3
An unspecified station gave response.
4
The sum of data sent back by the inverter did not match.
5
In writing or reading a parameter, an improper parameter number was specified.
At this time, the error code K6706 is set to D8067.
6
Because the port is being used for another communication type, it cannot be
used for communication with the inverter. At this time, the error code K6762 is
set to D8067.
7
A value outside the allowable range is set to the station number.
At this time, error code (K6706) is set to D8067.
8
Sending to the inverter was not completed within the specified time.
9
Wrong data was received from the inverter.
F
G

H
Programming
Communication
Inverter did not give response.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Normal end (no error)
1
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
0
Inverter operation
Inverter
Communication
The following error codes are stored.
Error
code
(DEC)
B
N:N Network
D8151 or D8156 stores the step number of the inverter communication instruction using the communication
port.
D8151 stores the step number using communication port ch1.
D8156 stores the step number using communication port ch2.
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-147
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
12.4 Details of Related Devices (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
Error
code
(DEC)
Contents of error
256
Inverter sent the error code H0. Computer NAK error.
An error was included in the transfer request data from the computer beyond the
allowable number of retries.
257
Inverter sent the error code H1. Parity error.
The contents are different from the specified parity.
258
259
Inverter sent the error code H4. Framing error.
The stop bit length is different from the initial set value.
261
Inverter sent the error code H5. Overrun error.
Before receiving the completed data in the inverter, the computer sent the next
set of data.
262
Inverter sent the error code H6.
Not defined currently in inverter.
263
Inverter sent the error code H7. Character error.
An unused character (other than 0 to 9, A to F and control codes) is received.
264
Inverter sent the error code H8.
Not defined currently in inverter.
265
Inverter sent the error code H9.
Not defined currently in inverter.
267
268
Inverter operation
Inverter sent the error code H2. Sum check error.
The sum check code in the computer is different from the sum value calculated When errors have
occurred consecutively
from the data received by the inverter.
beyond the allowable
Inverter sent the error code H3. Protocol error.
number of retries, inverter
Syntax error is included in the data received by the inverter, and the receiving of is brought to an alarm
data was not completed within the specified time, or CR/LF does not agree with stop.
the parameters.
260
266
E-148
12 Related Data

Inverter does not accept
the received data, but is
not brought to an alarm
stop.

Inverter sent the error code HA. Mode error.
A parameter was written in a mode other than computer link mode or while
inverter was operating. Inverter does not accept the received data, but is not
stopped by alarm.
Inverter does not accept
the received data, but is
Inverter sent the error code HB. Instruction code error.
not brought to an alarm
Non-existing instruction code was specified.
stop.
Inverter sent the error code HC. Data range error.
In writing a parameter or operation frequency, data outside the allowable range
was specified. Inverter does not accept the received data, but is not stopped by
alarm.
269
Inverter sent the error code HD.
Not defined currently in inverter.
270
Inverter sent the error code HE.
Not defined currently in inverter.
271
Inverter sent the error code HF.
Not defined currently in inverter.

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
Inverter Communication
12 Related Data
12.4 Details of Related Devices (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
A
Common Items
3. IVMC instruction error codes
When errors occur in the send data of the IVMC instruction, the following error codes are stored.
It is recommended to check error codes in hexadecimal.
Refer to the error code list earlier in this section for other errors.
Error code
(HEX)
B
b7 to b4
b3 to b0
H00
H0
H0
HA
HB
HC
HA
HB
The inverter sent error code HA to send data 1 of
the IVMC instruction.
A parameter was written in a mode other than
computer link mode or while the inverter was
The inverter accepts
operating. The inverter did not accept the
data corresponding to
received data, but was not stopped by alarm.
send data 2, and is not
The inverter sent error code HB to send data 1 of
brought to an alarm
the IVMC instruction.
stop.
Non-existing instruction code was specified.
The inverter sent error code HC to send data 1 of
the IVMC instruction.
Data outside the allowable range was specified.
The inverter sent error code HA to send data 2 of
the IVMC instruction.
A parameter was written in a mode other than
computer link mode or while inverter was
The inverter accepts
operating. The inverter did not accept the
data corresponding to
received data, but was not stopped by alarm.
send data 1, and is not
The inverter sent error code HB to send data 2 of
brought to an alarm
the IVMC instruction.
stop.
Non-existing instruction code was specified.
F
G
The inverter does not
The inverter sent error codes to both send data 1
accept data
and send data 2 of the IVMC instruction.
corresponding to send
Refer to the contents of the error of the
data 1 and 2, but is not
corresponding error codes of send data 1 and
brought to an alarm
send data 2 for details of error codes.
stop.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
HA to HC
D
E
The inverter sent error code HC to send data 2 of
the IVMC instruction.
Data outside the allowable range was specified.
HC
HA to HC
C
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
H0

Inverter
Communication
H02
No error has occurred in both send data 1 and
send data 2.
Normal end
Computer Link
H0
Inverter operation
Parallel Link
b15 to b8
Contents of error
N:N Network
IVMC
Send
Send
instruction
data2
data1
error
error
error
information information information
H
Programming
Communication
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-149
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.4 Details of Related Devices (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC)
12.4.10 Inverter communication error occurrence step [D8153 and D8158]
These devices store the step number in which an inverter communication error has occurred.
1. Detailed contents
D8153 or D8158 stores the step number of the instruction causing an inverter communication error.
D8153 stores the step number in which an error has occurred in communication using communication port
ch1.
D8158 stores the step number in which an error has occurred in communication using communication port
ch2.
When errors that occurred in two or more instructions, D8153 or D8158 holds the step number in which the
error occurred first.
When no error has occurred, D8153 or D8158 stores "-1".
2. Cautions on use
A decimal value without the sign is stored as the step number in D8153 and D8158.
12.4.11 IVBWR instruction error parameter number [D8154 and D8159]
(only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs)
These devices store the parameter number in which an error has occurred when IVBWR instruction error flag
"M8154 or M8159" turns ON.
1. Detailed contents
D8154 or D8159 stores the parameter number which was not written by IVBWR instruction.
D8154 stores the parameter number which was not written in communication using communication port ch1.
D8159 stores the parameter number which was not written in communication using communication port ch2.
When errors that occurred in two or more IVBWR instructions, D8154 or D8159 holds the parameter number
in which the error occurred first.
12.4.12 Operation mode display [D8419 and D8439]
These devices store the communication type being used.
1. Detailed contents
These devices store the code of the communication type currently being used in the communication port.
When communication port ch1 is used, D8419 stores the communication type.
When communication port ch2 is used, D8439 stores the communication type.
The table below shows the contents of the communication type codes.
Code
0
E-150
Description
Programming communication
1
PP modem mode
2
Protocol dedicated to computer link
3
N:N Network
4
RS instruction
5
RS2 instruction
6
Parallel link
7
Inverter instruction
8
Variable analog potentiometer expansion board is used.
9
MODBUS communication
10
CF-ADP
11
ENET-ADP
12
Input/output expansion board is used.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
A
FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
This section shows the list of parameters provided in FREQROL F800, A800, F700, A700, E700, V500, F500,
A500, E500 and S500 Series inverters.
For details on each function, refer to the respective inverter manual.
The following parameters are provided in FREQROL inverters. (For details, make sure to refer to the
respective inverter manual.)
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
0
Torque boost
0
Torque boost*3
0
Torque boost*3
0
Torque boost*3
1
Maximum speed
(simple mode)
1
Maximum
frequency
1
Maximum
frequency
1
Maximum
frequency
1
Maximum
frequency
2
Minimum speed
(simple mode)
2
Minimum
frequency
2
Minimum
frequency
2
Minimum
frequency
2
Minimum
frequency
3
Base frequency
3
Base frequency
3
Base frequency
3
Base frequency*3
3
Base frequency*3
4
Multi-speed
setting
(high speed)
(simple mode)
4
Multi-speed
setting
(high speed)
4
Multi-speed
setting
(high speed)
4
Multi-speed
setting
(high speed)
4
Multi-speed
setting
(high speed)
5
Multi-speed
setting
(middle speed)
(simple mode)
5
Multi-speed
setting
(middle speed)
5
Multi-speed
setting
(middle speed)
5
Multi-speed
setting
(middle speed)
5
Multi-speed
setting
(middle speed)
6
Multi-speed
setting
(low speed)
(simple mode)
6
Multi-speed
setting
(low speed)
6
Multi-speed
setting
(low speed)
6
Multi-speed
setting
(low speed)
6
Multi-speed
setting
(low speed)
7
Acceleration time
(simple mode)
7
Acceleration time
7
Acceleration time
7
Acceleration time
7
Acceleration time
8
Deceleration time
(simple mode)
8
Deceleration time
8
Deceleration time
8
Deceleration time
8
Deceleration time
9
Electronic thermal
O/L relay
9
Electronic thermal
O/L relay
9
Electronic thermal
O/L relay
9
Electronic thermal
O/L relay
9
Electronic thermal
O/L relay
10
DC injection brake
operation speed
10
DC injection brake
operation
frequency
10
DC injection brake
operation
frequency
10
DC injection brake
operation
frequency
10
DC injection brake
operation
frequency
11
DC injection brake
operation time
11
DC injection brake
operation time
11
DC injection brake
operation time
11
DC injection brake
operation time
11
DC injection brake
operation time
12
DC injection brake
voltage
12
DC injection brake
voltage
12
DC injection brake
voltage
12
DC injection brake
voltage
12
DC injection brake
voltage
13
Starting speed
13
Starting frequency
13
Starting frequency
13
Starting frequency
13
Starting frequency
Load pattern
Load pattern
Load pattern

14
Load pattern
selection
14
15
Jog speed setting
15
Jog frequency
15
Jog frequency
15
Jog frequency
15
Jog frequency
16
Jog acceleration/
deceleration time
16
Jog acceleration/
deceleration time
16
Jog acceleration/
deceleration time
16
Jog acceleration/
deceleration time
16
Jog acceleration/
deceleration time
17
MRS input
selection
17
MRS input
selection
17
MRS input
selection


17
RUN key rotation
direction selection




18
High speed
maximum
frequency
18


19
Base frequency
voltage
19
Base frequency
voltage
19
selection*3
Base frequency
voltage*3
14
19
selection*3
High speed
maximum
frequency
Base frequency
voltage*3
14
19
selection*3
Base frequency
voltage*3
E
F
G
H
I
Remote
Maintenance

D
Programming
Communication
Torque boost
(manual)
Computer Link
0
C
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Standard
operation
function
(V500
Series
operation
selection
functions)
Pr
No.
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Standard
operation
functions
Name
Inverter
Communication
Basic
functions
Pr
No.
Parallel Link
Function
B
N:N Network
12.5.1 Parameters in V500, F500, A500, E500, and S500 Series
Common Items
12.5
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-151
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function
Pr
No.
E-152
Name
20
Acceleration/
deceleration time
increment
21
Torque restriction
level
20
21
22

Pr
No.
Name
20
Acceleration/
deceleration
reference
frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration time
increment
21
22
Stall prevention
operation level
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
20
Acceleration/
deceleration
reference
frequency
20
Acceleration/
deceleration
reference
frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration time
increment
21
Acceleration/
deceleration time
increment
21
Stall preventing
function selection
22
Stall prevention
operation level
22
Stall prevention
operation level
22
Stall prevention
operation level
23
Stall prevention
operation level
compensation
factor at double
speed
23
Stall prevention
operation level
compensation
factor at double
speed
23
Stall prevention
operation level
compensation
factor at double
speed
23
Stall prevention
operation level
compensation
factor at double
speed
24
Multi-speed
setting (speed 4)
24
Multi-speed
setting (speed 4)
24
Multi-speed
setting (speed 4)
24
Multi-speed
setting (speed 4)
24
Multi-speed
setting (speed 4)
25
Multi-speed
setting (speed 5)
25
Multi-speed
setting (speed 5)
25
Multi-speed
setting (speed 5)
25
Multi-speed
setting (speed 5)
25
Multi-speed
setting (speed 5)
26
Multi-speed
setting (speed 6)
26
Multi-speed
setting (speed 6)
26
Multi-speed
setting (speed 6)
26
Multi-speed
setting (speed 6)
26
Multi-speed
setting (speed 6)
27
Multi-speed
setting (speed 7)
27
Multi-speed
setting (speed 7)
27
Multi-speed
setting (speed 7)
27
Multi-speed
setting (speed 7)
27
Multi-speed
setting (speed 7)
28
Multi-speed input
compensation
28
Multi-speed input
compensation
28
Multi-speed input
compensation

28
Stall preventing
operation
reduction starting
frequency
29
Acceleration/
deceleration
pattern
29
Acceleration/
deceleration
pattern
29
Acceleration/
deceleration
pattern
29
Acceleration/
deceleration
pattern
29
Acceleration/
deceleration
pattern
30
Regenerative
function selection
30
Regenerative
function selection
30
Regenerative
function selection
30
Regenerative
function selection
30
Extended
function display
selection
31
Speed jump 1A
31
Frequency jump
1A
31
Frequency jump
1A
31
Frequency jump
1A
31
Frequency jump
1A
32
Speed jump 1B
32
Frequency jump
1B
32
Frequency jump
1B
32
Frequency jump
1B
32
Frequency jump
1B
33
Speed jump 2A
33
Frequency jump
2A
33
Frequency jump
2A
33
Frequency jump
2A
33
Frequency jump
2A
34
Speed jump 2B
34
Frequency jump
2B
34
Frequency jump
2B
34
Frequency jump
2B
34
Frequency jump
2B
35
Speed jump 3A
35
Frequency jump
3A
35
Frequency jump
3A
35
Frequency jump
3A
35
Frequency jump
3A
36
Speed jump 3B
36
Frequency jump
3B
36
Frequency jump
3B
36
Frequency jump
3B
36
Frequency jump
3B
37
Speed display
37
Speed display
37
Speed display
37
Speed display*8
37
Speed display*8
38
Automatic torque
boost
38
Frequency at 5V
(10V) input
38
Frequency setting
voltage gain
frequency
39
Automatic torque
boost operation
starting current
39
Frequency at
20mA input
39
Frequency setting
current gain
frequency


40
Start-time ground
fault detection
selection

Output
terminal
functions
Pr
No.
Acceleration/
deceleration
reference
frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration
reference speed

Standard
operation
function
(V500
Series
operation
selection
functions)
Name






41
Up-to-speed
sensitivity
41
Up-to-frequency
sensitivity
41
Up-to-frequency
sensitivity
41
Up-to-frequency
sensitivity
41
Up-to-frequency
sensitivity
42
Speed detection
42
Output frequency
detection
42
Output frequency
detection
42
Output frequency
detection
42
Output frequency
detection
43
Speed detection
for reverse
rotation
43
Output frequency
detection for
reverse rotation
43
Output frequency
detection for
reverse rotation
43
Output frequency
detection for
reverse rotation
43
Output frequency
detection for
reverse rotation
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
A
Function
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
44
Second
acceleration/
deceleration time
44
Second
acceleration/
deceleration time
44
Second
acceleration/
deceleration time
44
Second
acceleration/
deceleration time
44
Second
acceleration/
deceleration time
45
Second
deceleration time
45
Second
deceleration time
45
Second
deceleration time
45
Second
deceleration time
45
Second
deceleration time
46
Second torque
boost
46
47
Second V/F
(base frequency)
47
48
Second stall
prevention
operation current
48
Second stall
prevention
operation current
49
Second stall
prevention
operation
frequency
49
Second stall
prevention
operation
frequency
50
Second speed
detection
50
Second output
frequency
detection
50
Second output
frequency
detection
52
DU/PU main
display data
selection
52
DU/PU main
display data
selection
52
DU/PU main
display data
selection
52
53
PU level display
data selection
53
PU level display
data selection
53
PU level display
data selection

54
DA1 terminal
function selection
54
FM terminal
function selection
54
FM terminal
function selection
55
Speed monitoring
reference
55
Frequency
monitoring
reference
55
Frequency
monitoring
reference
56
Current
monitoring
reference
56
Current
monitoring
reference
57
Restart coasting
time
57
58
Restart cushion
time
59
Remote setting
function selection
60
Intelligent mode
selection
47
Second V/F
(base frequency)*3
Second electronic
thermal O/L relay


boost*3

D


53
Frequency setting
operation
selection
54
FM terminal
function selection
54
FM (AM) terminal
function selection
55
Frequency
monitoring
reference
55
Frequency
monitoring
reference
56
Current
monitoring
reference
56
Current
monitoring
reference
56
Current
monitoring
reference
Restart coasting
time
57
Restart coasting
time
57
Restart coasting
time
57
Restart coasting
time
58
Restart cushion
time
58
Restart cushion
time
58
Restart cushion
time
58
Restart cushion
time
G
59
Remote setting
function selection
59
Remote setting
function selection
59
Remote setting
function selection
59
Remote setting
function selection
60
Intelligent mode
selection
60
Intelligent mode
selection
60
Shortest
acceleration/
deceleration
mode
61
Reference I for
intelligent mode
61
Reference I for
intelligent mode
61
Reference current
62
Reference I for
intelligent mode
acceleration
62
Reference I for
intelligent mode
acceleration
62
Reference current
for acceleration
63
Reference I for
intelligent mode
deceleration
63
Reference I for
intelligent mode
deceleration
63
Reference current
for deceleration
64
Starting frequency
for elevator mode




I
65
Retry selection
65
Retry selection
66
66
Stall prevention
operation level
reduction starting
frequency
66
Stall prevention
operation level
reduction starting
frequency


67
Number of retries
at alarm
occurrence
67
Number of retries
at alarm
occurrence
67
Number of retries
at alarm
occurrence

66
67
Number of retries
at alarm
occurrence
67
Number of retries
at alarm
occurrence
Retry selection
E-153
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
Retry selection

F
H
65
Stall prevention
operation level
reduction starting
frequency
E
Remote
Maintenance

Operation panel/
PU main display
data selection
C
Programming
Communication
Retry selection
(base frequency)*3
Second torque
Control panel
display data
selection

65
48
Second V/F
46
52

Operation
selecting
functions
47
boost*3
Computer Link

(base frequency)*3
Second torque
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Additional
function
Second V/F
46
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Restart

boost*3
Parallel Link

Second torque
B
Inverter
Communication
Display
functions
Name
N:N Network
Second
functions
Pr
No.
Common Items
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function
Operation
selecting
functions
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
68
Retry waiting time
68
Retry waiting time
68
Retry waiting time
68
Retry waiting time
68
Retry waiting time
69
Retry count
display erasure
69
Retry count
display erasure
69
Retry count
display erase
69
Retry count
display erasure
69
Retry count
display erase
70
Special
regenerative
brake duty

70
Special
regenerative
brake duty
70
Special
regenerative
brake duty

71
Applied motor
71
Applied motor
71
Applied motor
71
Applied motor
71
Applied motor
72
PWM frequency
selection
(simple mode)
72
PWM frequency
selection
72
PWM frequency
selection
72
PWM frequency
selection
72
PWM frequency
selection
73
Speed setting
signal
73
0 to 5V/0 to 10V
selection
73
0 to 5V/0 to 10V
selection
73
0 to 5V/0 to 10V
selection
73
0 to 5V/0 to 10V
selection
74
Filter time
constant
74
Filter time
constant
74
Filter time
constant
74
Input filter time
constant
75
Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection
75
Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection
75
Reset selection/
PU stop selection





75
Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection
75
Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection


76
Alarm code output
selection
76
Alarm code output
selection

Parameter write
disable selection
(simple mode)
77
Parameter write
disable selection
77
Parameter write
disable selection
77
Parameter write
disable selection
77
Parameter write
disable selection
78
Reverse rotation
prevention
selection
78
Reverse rotation
prevention
selection
78
Reverse rotation
prevention
selection
78
Reverse rotation
prevention
selection
78
Reverse rotation
prevention
selection
79
Operation mode
selection
(simple mode)
79
Operation mode
selection
79
Operation mode
selection
79
Operation mode
selection
79
Operation mode
selection
80
Motor capacity
80
Motor capacity
80
Motor capacity
81
Number of motor
poles
81
Number of motor
poles

Motor excitation
current
(no load current)
82
*1
Motor excitation
current*5

82
Motor excitation
current
83
Rated motor
voltage
83
Rated motor
voltage
83
Rated motor
voltage
84
Rated motor
frequency
84
Rated motor
frequency
84
Rated motor
frequency
89
Speed control
gain


90
91
92
93
94
E-154

77
82
Motor
constant


Motor constant
R1*1
Motor constant
R2*1
Motor constant
L1*1
Motor constant
L2*1
Motor constant
X*1


90
91
92
93
94
Motor constant
(R1)*5
90

Motor constant
(R1)
Motor constant
(R2)*5
Motor constant
(L1)*5
Motor constant
(L2)*5


Motor constant
(X)*5
95
Online auto tuning
selection
(simple mode)
95
Online auto tuning
selection
96
Auto tuning
setting/status
96
Auto tuning
setting/status
96
Auto tuning
setting/status


FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
A
Function
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
100
Name
V/F 1
(first frequency)
102
V/F 2 (second
frequency)
V/F 2 (second
103 frequency
voltage)
104


V/F 3
(third frequency)
V/F 3
105 (third frequency
voltage)
V/F 4 (fourth
frequency)
V/F 4
107 (fourth frequency
voltage)
108
V/F 5 (fifth
frequency)
V/F 1
(first frequency)*3
102
frequency)*3
V/F 2 (second
103 frequency
voltage)*3
104
(third frequency)*3
V/F 3
105 (third frequency
voltage)*3
106



D
frequency)*3
V/F 4
107 (fourth frequency
voltage)*3
108
V/F 5 (fifth
E
frequency)*3
V/F 5
109 (fifth frequency
voltage)*3
111
Third deceleration
time
111
Third deceleration
time
113
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Third acceleration
/deceleration time


V/F 4 (fourth
110

C
V/F 3
Third acceleration
/deceleration time

B
V/F 2 (second
110

Name
V/F 1
101 (first frequency
voltage)*3
112
Third
functions
Pr
No.
Inverter
Communication
V/F 5
109 (fifth frequency
voltage)
Name
Computer Link
106
Pr
No.
Third torque
boost*3
Third V/F (base
frequency)*3




Third stall
prevention
115
operation
frequency
H
117
Communication
station number
117
Communication
station number
117
Communication
station number
117
Communication
station number
118
Communication
speed
118
Communication
speed
118
Communication
speed
118
Communication
speed
119
Stop bit length/
data length
119
Stop bit length/
data length
119
Stop bit length/
data length
119 Stop bit length
Parity check
120 presence/
absence
Parity check
120 presence/
absence
Number of
121 communication
retries
Number of
121 communication
retries
Number of
121 communication
retries
Number of
121 communication
retries
Communication
122 check time
interval
Communication
122 check time
interval
Communication
122 check time
interval
Communication
122 check time
interval


Apx.A
Discontinued
models
Parity check
120 presence/
absence
I
Remote
Maintenance
Third speed
detection
Programming
Communication
Third output
116 frequency
detection
116
CommuniParity check
cation
120 presence/
functions
absence
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Third stall
114 prevention
operation current
Parallel Link
5-point
flexible
V/F
characteristics
100
Name
N:N Network
V/F 1
101 (first frequency
voltage)
Pr
No.
Common Items
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
E-155
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Waiting time
Waiting time
Waiting time
Waiting time
123
123
123
123
setting
setting
setting
setting
Communication
CR and LF
CR and LF
CR and LF
CR and LF
functions
124 presence/absence 124 presence/absence 124 presence/absence 124 presence/absence
selection
selection
selection
selection
PID
control
Name


128
PID action
selection
128
PID action
selection
128
PID action
selection
128
PID action
selection
88
PID action
selection
129
PID proportional
band
129
PID proportional
band
129
PID proportional
band
129
PID proportional
band
89
PID proportional
band
PID integral time
130 PID integral time
130 PID integral time
130 PID integral time
130 PID integral time
90
131 Maximum
131 Maximum
131 Maximum
131 Maximum
91
PID maximum
132 Minimum
132 Minimum
132 Minimum
132 Minimum
92
PID minimum
PID action set
133 point for PU
operation
PID action set
133 point for PU
operation
PID action set
133 point for PU
operation
PID action set
133 point for PU
operation
93
PID action set
point for PU
operation
94
PID differential
time
134
PID differential
time
134
PID differential
time
Commercial
power supplyinverter switch135
over sequence
output terminal
selection
Commercial power
supplyinverter
switchover
Pr
No.
136


MC switch-over
interlock time
134
PID differential
time
134
PID differential
time
Commercial
power supplyinverter switch135
over sequence
output terminal
selection
136
MC switch-over
interlock time
137 Start waiting time
137 Start waiting time
Commercial
power supply138 inverter switchover selection at
alarm occurrence
Commercial
power supply138 inverter switchover selection at
alarm occurrence












Automatic
Automatic
inverterinverter139 commercial power 139 commercial power
supply switchsupply switchover frequency
over frequency
Backlash
140 acceleration
stopping speed
Backlash
Backlash
141 acceleration
stopping time
Backlash
142 deceleration
stopping speed
Backlash
143 deceleration
stopping time
144
Display
functions
E-156
Speed setting
switchover
PU display
145 language
selection
Backlash
acceleration
140 stopping
Backlash
acceleration
140 stopping
frequency*2
frequency*2
Backlash
141 acceleration
stopping time*2
Backlash
141 acceleration
stopping time*2
Backlash
deceleration
142 stopping
Backlash
deceleration
142 stopping
frequency*2
Backlash
143 deceleration
stopping time*2
144
Speed setting
switchover
PU display
145 language
selection
frequency*2
Backlash
143 deceleration
stopping time*2
144
Speed setting
switchover
PU display
145 language
selection
PU display
145 language
selection
n13 PU display
(145) language
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
A
Function

Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name




Stall prevention
148 operation level at
0 V input
Stall prevention
148 operation level at
0 V input
Stall prevention
149 operation level at
10 V input
Stall prevention
149 operation level at
10 V input
Output current
detection level
151
Output current
detection period
152
Zero current
detection level
152
153
Zero current
detection period
153



Output current
detection level
48
Output current
detection level
151
Output current
detection period
151
Output current
detection period
49
Output current
detection signal
delay time
Zero current
detection level
152
Zero current
detection level
152
Zero current
detection level
50
Zero current
detection level
Zero current
detection period
153
Zero current
detection period
153
Zero current
detection period
51
Zero current
detection time

RT activated
condition
Stall prevention
156 operation
selection
Stall prevention
156 operation
selection
157
OL signal waiting
time
158
DA2 terminal
function selection
158
AM terminal
function selection
158
AM terminal
function selection
Extended function
160 selection
(simple mode)
160
User group read
selection
160
User group read
selection
Automatic restart
after
162 instantaneous
power failure
selection
Automatic restart
after
162 instantaneous
power failure
selection
First cushion time
for restart
163
First cushion time
for restart
163
First cushion time
for restart
164
First cushion
voltage for restart
164
First cushion
voltage for restart
164
First cushion
voltage for restart
Restart current
restriction level
Restart stall
165 prevention
operation level
Actual operation
hour meter clear
Stall prevention
156 operation
selection

160


F

User group read
selection


G




H
170
Watt-hour meter
clear
170
Watt-hour meter
clear

171
Actual operation
hour meter clear
171
Actual operation
hour meter clear
171

Actual operation
hour meter clear


I
User group 1
173
registration
User group 1
deletion
174
User group 1
deletion
174
User group 1
deletion
175
User group 2
registration
175
User group 2
registration
175
User group 2
registration
176
User group 2
deletion
176
User group 2
deletion
176
User group 2
deletion


Apx.A
Discontinued
models
174

D
E
Restart stall
165 prevention
operation level
User group 1
173
registration
C
Remote
Maintenance


Automatic restart
after
162 instantaneous
power failure
selection
163
171

RT signal
155 activated
condition
OL signal output
waiting time
User group 1
173
registration
User
functions
Voltage reduction
selection during
154
stall prevention
operation
157


150
OL signal output
timer



Programming
Communication
Initial
monitor
value

Output current
detection level
157
165
B
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Restart
after
instantaneous
power
failure
Frequency setting
146 command
selection
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Additional
function
Stall prevention
156 operation
selection
Name
Inverter
Communication
Sub
functions
Pr
No.
150
Voltage reduction
selection during
154
stall prevention
operation
155
Name
Computer Link
150
Pr
No.
Parallel Link
Current
detection

Name
N:N Network
Additional
functions
Pr
No.
Common Items
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
E-157
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
180
DI1 terminal
function selection
180
RL terminal
function selection
180
RL terminal
function selection
180
RL terminal
function selection
60
RL terminal
function selection
181
DI2 terminal
function selection
181
RM terminal
function selection
181
RM terminal
function selection
181
RM terminal
function selection
61
RM terminal
function selection
182
DI3 terminal
function selection
182
RH terminal
function selection
182
RH terminal
function selection
182
RH terminal
function selection
62
RH terminal
function selection
183
DI4 terminal
function selection
183
RT terminal
function selection
183
RT terminal
function selection
183
MRS terminal
function selection
184
AU terminal
function selection
184
AU terminal
function selection
JOG terminal
function selection

185
JOG terminal
function selection

185


186
CS terminal
function selection
186
CS terminal
function selection

Terminal
assignment
functions
187
STR terminal
function selection






63
STR terminal
function selection
190
DO1 terminal
function selection
190
RUN terminal
function selection
190
RUN terminal
function selection
190
RUN terminal
function selection
64
RUN terminal
function selection
191
DO2 terminal
function selection
191
SU terminal
function selection
191
SU terminal
function selection
191
FU terminal
function selection


192
DO3 terminal
function selection
192
IPF terminal
function selection
192
IPF terminal
function selection
192
A/B/C terminal
function selection
65
A/B/C terminal
function selection
193
OL terminal
function selection
193
OL terminal
function selection
194
FU terminal
function selection
194
FU terminal
function selection













Additional
function


195
A/B/C terminal
function selection
195
A/B/C terminal
function selection
195
A/B/C terminal
function selection


199
User's initial value
setting
199
User's initial value
setting
Programmed
200 operation minute/
second selection
201 Program set 1
202 Program set 1
203 Program set 1
204 Program set 1
205 Program set 1
206 Program set 1
207 Program set 1
208 Program set 1
209 Program set 1
Programmed
operation




210 Program set 1
211 Program set 2
212 Program set 2
213 Program set 2
214 Program set 2
215 Program set 2
216 Program set 2
217 Program set 2
218 Program set 2
219 Program set 2
220 Program set 2
221 Program set 3
222 Program set 3
223 Program set 3
E-158
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
A
Function
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
224 Program set 3
225 Program set 3
B
226 Program set 3




227 Program set 3
228 Program set 3




229 Program set 3
230 Program set 3
231 Timer setting
Multi-speed
setting (speed 8)
232
Multi-speed
setting (speed 8)
80
Multi-speed
setting (speed 8)
233
Multi-speed
setting (speed 9)
233
Multi-speed
setting (speed 9)
233
Multi-speed
setting (speed 9)
81
Multi-speed
setting (speed 9)
234
Multi-speed
setting (speed 10)
234
Multi-speed
Multi-speed
234
setting (speed 10)
setting (speed 10)
82
Multi-speed
setting (speed 10)
235
Multi-speed
setting (speed 11)
235
Multi-speed
Multi-speed
235
setting (speed 11)
setting (speed 11)
83
Multi-speed
setting (speed 11)
236
Multi-speed
Multi-speed
236
setting (speed 12)
setting (speed 12)
84
Multi-speed
setting (speed 12)


Multi-speed
setting (speed 12)
237
Multi-speed
setting (speed 13)
237
Multi-speed
Multi-speed
237
setting (speed 13)
setting (speed 13)
85
Multi-speed
setting (speed 13)
238
Multi-speed
setting (speed 14)
238
Multi-speed
Multi-speed
238
setting (speed 14)
setting (speed 14)
86
Multi-speed
setting (speed 14)
Multi-speed
Multi-speed
239
239
setting (speed 15)
setting (speed 15)
87
Multi-speed
setting (speed 15)
Multi-speed
239
setting (speed 15)
240 Soft-PWM setting
240 Soft-PWM setting
240 Soft-PWM setting
240 Soft-PWM setting
70
Soft-PWM setting
Cooling fan
244 operation
selection
Cooling fan
244 operation
selection
Cooling fan
244 operation
selection
Cooling fan
244 operation
selection
76
Cooling fan
operation
selection
245 Rated motor slip
95
Rated motor slip
Slip compensation
time constant
247
Constant-output
region slip
compensation
selection
97
Constant-output
region slip
compensation
selection
98
Automatic torque
boost selection
(motor capacity)
Earth (ground)
249 fault detection at
start*6
99
Motor primary
resistance
250 Stop selection
250 Stop selection


Output phase
251 failure protection
selection


Sub
functions







Stop
selecting
function
Additional
functions
250 Stop selection

Output phase
251 failure protection
selection
Output phase
251 failure protection
selection
Output phase
251 failure protection
selection
252 Override bias
252 Override bias
252 Override bias
253 Override gain
253 Override gain
253 Override gain
Power failure stop
selection
Subtraction speed
262 at deceleration
start
264
Power-failure
deceleration time 1









Power failure stop
selection
Subtraction
262 frequency at
deceleration start
Apx.A
Subtraction
263
starting frequency
264
I
Discontinued
models
Subtraction
263
starting speed
261

H
Remote
Maintenance
261
Power
failure
stop
functions


G
Programming
Communication
96
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Slip compensation
response time
E
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
246
D
Inverter
Communication
236
C
Computer Link
232
Parallel Link
Multispeed
operation
Multi-speed
232
setting (speed 8)
N:N Network
Programmed
operation
Common Items
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Power-failure
deceleration time 1
E-159
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function
Power
failure
stop
functions
Function
selection
Pr
No.
Name
265
Power-failure
deceleration time 2
Power-failure
266 deceleration time
switchover speed


Pr
No.


Name


Pr
No.
Name
265
Power-failure
deceleration time 2
Power-failure
deceleration time
266
switchover
frequency
Stop-on-contact/
load torque high
270
speed frequency
control selection
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name




























High speed
271 setting maximum
current
High
speed
frequency
control
Stop-oncontact








12-bit
digital
input
E-160
Current averaging
range
274
Current averaging
filter constant
Stop-on-contact
exciting current
275
low speed
multiplying factor
278
Brake opening
speed
278
279
Brake opening
current
279
281
282
frequency*4
Brake opening
current*4
Brake opening
280 current detection
time*4
Brake operation
time at start
Brake operation
speed
Brake opening
281


282
Brake operation
time at start*4
Brake operation
*4
frequency
Brake operation
Brake operation
283
time at stop
283
Deceleration
284 detection function
selection
Deceleration
284 detection function
selection*4
285
Droop
control
functions
273
Stop-on-contact
276 PWM carrier
frequency
Brake opening
280 current detection
time
Brake
sequence
function
Middle speed
272 setting minimum
current
time at stop*4
Overspeed
285 detection
frequency
Overspeed
detection speed
286 Droop gain
286 Droop gain
Droop filter
287
constant
287
Droop function
288 activation
selection



Droop filter
constant

300 BCD input bias
300
BCD code input
bias
300
BCD code input
bias
301 BCD input gain
301
BCD code input
gain
301
BCD code input
gain
302 Binary input bias
302 Binary input bias
302 Binary input bias
303 Binary input gain
303 Binary input gain
303 Binary input gain
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
A
Function
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Digital input and
analog
304 compensation
input enable/
disable selection
Selection of
whether digital
input and analog
304
compensation
input are enabled
or disabled
Selection of
whether digital
input and analog
304
compensation
input are enabled
or disabled
Read timing
305 operation
selection
Data read timing
305 signal on/off
selection
Data read timing
305 signal on/off
selection
Analog output
signal selection
306
Analog output
signal selection
306
Analog output
signal selection
307
Setting for zero
analog output
307
Setting for zero
analog output
307
Setting for zero
analog output
Setting for
308 maximum analog
output
Setting for
308 maximum analog
output
Name
Pr
No.
Name
B




C
Parallel Link
306
Pr
No.
Setting for
308 maximum analog
output
D
Analog meter
310 voltage output
selection
Setting for zero
311 analog meter
voltage output
Setting for zero
311 analog meter
voltage output
Setting for zero
311 analog meter
voltage output
Setting for
maximum analog
312
meter voltage
output
Setting for
maximum analog
312
meter voltage
output
Setting for
maximum analog
312
meter voltage
output




313 Y0 output selection 313 Y0 output selection 313 Y0 output selection
F
314 Y1 output selection 314 Y1 output selection 314 Y1 output selection
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
315 Y2 output selection 315 Y2 output selection 315 Y2 output selection
316 Y3 output selection 316 Y3 output selection 316 Y3 output selection
317 Y4 output selection 317 Y4 output selection 317 Y4 output selection
318 Y5 output selection 318 Y5 output selection 318 Y5 output selection
319 Y6 output selection 319 Y6 output selection 319 Y6 output selection
320
RA1 output
selection
320
RA1 output
selection
321
RA2 output
selection
321
RA2 output
selection
321
RA2 output
selection
322
RA3 output
selection
322
RA3 output
selection
322
RA3 output
selection
Digital
input
329
Digital input unit
selection
Relay
output
330
RA output
selection
330
RA output
selection
331
Communication
station number
331
332
Relay
output









330
RA output
selection




Inverter station
number
331
Communication
station number
n1 Communication
(331) station number
Communication
speed
332
Communication
speed
n2 Communication
(332) speed
I
Stop bit length/
333
data length
Stop bit length/
333
data length
n3 Stop bit length/
(333) data length
Parity check yes/
334
no
Parity check yes/
334
no

335

335
Communication
retry count


Parity check
n4
presence/
(334)
absence
Number of
n5
communication
(335)
retries
E-161
H
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
Communication
retry count

Remote
Maintenance
Computer 332 Communication
speed
link
Stop bit length/
function
333
data length
(S500
Series
Parity check
communi- 334 presence/
cation
absence
parameter)
Number of
335 communication
retries
G
Programming
Communication
RA1 output
selection
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
320
E
Inverter
Communication
Analog
output/
digital
output
Analog meter
310 voltage output
selection
Computer Link
Analog output
Analog output
Analog output
309 signal voltage/
309 signal voltage/
309 signal voltage/
current switchover
current switchover
current switchover
Analog meter
310 voltage output
selection
N:N Network
12-bit
digital
input
Pr
No.
Common Items
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function
Pr
No.
Name
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Communication
336 check time
interval
Communication
336 check time
interval
Communication
336 check time
interval
Waiting time
337
setting
Waiting time
337
setting
Waiting time
337
setting
Computer
Operation
link
338
command source
function
Speed command
(S500
339
source
Series
communiLink startup mode
340
cation
selection
parameter)
CR and LF
341 presence/absence
selection
DeviceNet
communication
Pr
No.
Pr
No.

Name

Operation
command write
338
Operation
command right
338
Operation
command source
n8 Operation
(338) command write
339
Speed command
write
339
Speed command
write
339
Speed command
source
n9 Speed command
(339) write
340
Link startup mode
selection
340
Link startup mode
selection
340
Link startup mode n10 Link start mode
(340) selection
selection
341
CR and LF yes/no
selection
341
CR and LF yes/no
selection


2
342 E PROM write
selection
2
342 E PROM write
selection
DeviceNet
345 address
(lower)
DeviceNet
345 address startup
data (lower byte)
DeviceNet
345 address startup
data (lower byte)
DeviceNet
345 address startup
data (lower byte)
DeviceNet baud
346 rate startup data
(lower byte)
DeviceNet baud
346 rate startup data
(lower byte)
DeviceNet baud
346 rate startup data
(lower byte)
DeviceNet
347 address startup
data (higher byte)
DeviceNet
347 address startup
data (higher byte)
DeviceNet baud
348
rate (higher)
DeviceNet baud
348 rate startup data
(higher byte)
DeviceNet baud
348 rate startup data
(higher byte)
Stop position
350 command
selection
Stop position
350 command
selection
DeviceNet
347 address
(higher)
351
Communication
n6
check time
(336)
interval
338
2
342 E PROM write
selection
DeviceNet baud
rate (lower)
Name
n7
Wait time setting
(337)
2
342 E PROM write
selection
346
Pr
No.


Orientation
switchover speed
351
n11 CR and LF
(341) selection
n12 E2PROM write
(342) selection




Orientation
switchover speed
352 Creep speed
353



355
DC injection start
position
356
Internal stop
position command
357 In-position zone
358
Servo torque
selection
Orientation
359 encoder rotation
direction
359
Encoder rotation
direction
External position
360 command
selection
360
12-bit data
selection
361 Position shift
361 Position shift
Orientation
362
position loop gain
362 Position loop gain

E-162
Position loop
354 switchover
position

Orientation
control/
Internal stop
encoder
356
position command
feedback
control/
357 In-position zone
pulse train


input
Creep switch
position

363
Completion signal
output delay time


FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
A
Function
Pr
No.
Pr
No.
Name

Pr
No.
Name
364
Encoder stop
check time
365
Orientation
censored limit
366
Reconfirmation
time
367
Speed feedback
range
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
B
N:N Network

Name
368 Feedback gain
Control mode
selection
Torque
371 characteristic
selection
D
370


Speed control P
gain
373
Speed control I
gain
374
Over-speed
detection level




E
380
Acceleration S
pattern 1
380
Acceleration S
pattern 1
381
Deceleration S
pattern 1
381
Deceleration S
pattern 1
F
382
Acceleration S
pattern 2
382
Acceleration S
pattern 2
383
Deceleration S
pattern 2
383
Deceleration S
pattern 2
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
375 Servo lock gain
385
376
Disconnection
detection selection
Input pulse
384 division scaling
factor
Speed for zero
input pulse
385
Speed for
386 maximum input
pulse
Frequency for
zero input pulse
Frequency for
386 maximum input
pulse

388
Send time interval
at hart beat
388
Send time interval
at hart beat
389
Minimum sending
time at hart beat
389
Minimum sending
time at hart beat
Receive time
391 interval at heart
beat
392
Event-driven
detection width


% setting
390 reference
frequency


Receive time
391 interval at heart
beat
392
I
Remote
Maintenance
% setting
390 reference
frequency
H
Initial
387 communication
delay time
Programming
Communication
Initial
387 communication
delay time

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Input pulse
384 division scaling
factor
LONWORKS
communication

Computer Link

372
Inverter
Communication
Orientation
control/
encoder
feedback
Over-speed
control/
374
detection level
pulse train
input


C
Number of
369 orientation
encoder pulse
Parallel Link
Number of
369 orientation
encoder pulse
Common Items
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Event-driven
detection width
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-163
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function
Pr
No.
393
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
































Orientation
selection
Number of
394 machine side gear
teeth
395
Number of motor
side gear teeth
Orientation
Orientation speed
396
selection
gain (P term)
Extension
input
397
Orientation speed
integral time
398
Orientation speed
gain (D term)
399
Orientation
deceleration ratio
400
DI11 terminal
function selection
401
DI12 terminal
function selection
402
DI13 terminal
function selection
403
DI14 terminal
function selection
404
DI15 terminal
function selection
405
DI16 terminal
function selection
High resolution
406 analog input
selection
Motor
407 temperature
detection filter
Extension
output
410
DO11 terminal
function selection
411
DO12 terminal
function selection
412
DO13 terminal
function selection
Encoder pulse
413 output division
ratio
Position
419 command source
selection
Command pulse
420 scaling factor
numerator
Command pulse
421 scaling factor
Positioning
denominator
control
422 Position loop gain
423
Position feed
forward gain
Position
command
424 acceleration/
deceleration time
constant
E-164
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
A
Function
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Position feed
425 forward command
filter
B
427
Excessive level
error
428
Command pulse
selection
429
Clear signal
selection








C
432
Pulse train torque
command bias
433
Pulse train torque
command gain
Parallel Link
Pulse monitor
430
selection
Torque
command








D
Computer Link
434 IP address 1
435 IP address 2
436 IP address 3
437 IP address 4
438 Sub-net mask 1
439 Sub-net mask 2
440 Sub-net mask 3








441 Sub-net mask 4
442 Gateway address 1
443 Gateway address 2
444 Gateway address 3
F
445 Gateway address 4
448
Digital torque
command gain
450
Second applied
motor








G
Second motor
451 control method
selection
452
Second electronic
thermal O/L relay
453
Second motor
capacity
454
Number of second
motor poles
464
Digital position
control sudden
stop deceleration
time







H
I








First position feed
466 amount upper 4
digits
Remote
Maintenance
First position feed
465 amount lower 4
digits

Programming
Communication
Position
control
Digital torque
command bias
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Motor
constant
447
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
446 Password
Torque
command
E
Inverter
Communication
Position
control
N:N Network
426 In-position width
Positioning
control
Common Items
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
Second position
467 feed amount
lower 4 digits
E-165
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name








Second position
468 feed amount
upper 4 digits
Third position
469 feed amount
lower 4 digits
Third position
470 feed amount
upper 4 digits
Fourth position
471 feed amount
lower 4 digits
Fourth position
472 feed amount
upper 4 digits
Fifth position feed
473 amount lower 4
digits
Fifth position feed
474 amount upper 4
digits
Sixth position feed
475 amount lower 4
digits
Sixth position feed
476 amount upper 4
digits
Position
control
Seventh position
477 feed amount
lower 4 digits
Seventh position
478 feed amount
upper 4 digits
Eighth position
479 feed amount
lower 4 digits
Eighth position
480 feed amount
upper 4 digits
Ninth position
481 feed amount
lower 4 digits
Ninth position
482 feed amount
upper 4 digits
Tenth position
483 feed amount
lower 4 digits
Tenth position
484 feed amount
upper 4 digits
Eleventh position
485 feed amount
lower 4 digits
Eleventh position
486 feed amount
upper 4 digits
Twelfth position
487 feed amount
lower 4 digits
E-166
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
A
Function
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Twelfth position
488 feed amount
upper 4 digits
B
N:N Network
Thirteenth
position feed
489
amount lower 4
digits
Thirteenth
position feed
490
amount upper 4
digits
Fourteenth
position feed
491
amount lower 4
digits
492







Fourteenth
position feed
amount upper 4
digits
D
Fifteenth position
493 feed amount
lower 4 digits
Computer Link
Fifteenth position
494 feed amount
upper 4 digits
E
495
Remote output
selection
496
Remote output
data 1
497
Remote output
data 2







F






Auxiliary motor
operation
Communication
500 error recognition
waiting time
Communication
500 error recognition
waiting time
Motor switch-over
selection
Communication
501 error occurrence
count display
Communication
501 error occurrence
count display
MC switching
502
interlock time
Communication
502 error-time stop
mode selection
Stop mode
selection at
502
communication
error
503 Start waiting time
503
Auxiliary motor
504 connection-time
deceleration time
Capacitor life
504 alarm output
setting time
500
501


H
Programming
Communication
Capacitor life
timer
I

506
Output stop
detection time
507
Output stop
detection level






Apx.A
Discontinued
models
Output stop
508 cancel process
value level
509
Remote
Maintenance
Auxiliary motor
505 disconnection-time
acceleration time

G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
CommuniCommunication
cation
500 error recognition
(F500
waiting time
Series
Communication
Advanced
PID control 501 error occurrence
count display
functions)
Stop mode
selection at
502
communication
error

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Action selection at
SSCNET
499
communication
interruption
Capacitor
life
(F500
Series
Advanced
PID control
functions)

Inverter
Communication
Remote
output
C
Parallel Link
Position
control
Common Items
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Auxiliary motor 1
starting frequency
E-167
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function
Capacitor
life
(F500
Series
Advanced
PID control
functions)
Restart
after
instantaneous
power
failure
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
510
Auxiliary motor 2
starting frequency
511
Auxiliary motor 3
starting frequency
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name










Auxiliary motor 1
512 stopping
frequency


Auxiliary motor 2
513 stopping
frequency
Auxiliary motor 3
514 stopping
frequency


515
Auxiliary motor
start delay time
516
Auxiliary motor
start delay time
Restart
acceleration time


611
















Control system
800 selection
(simple mode)
Torque
801 characteristic
selection
Operation
selecting
function
802
Pre-excitation
selection
803
Constant output
region torque
characteristic
selection
804
Torque command
source selection
805
Torque command
source (RAM)
Torque command
806 source (RAM,
EEPROM)
807
Speed restriction
selection
808
Forward rotation
speed restriction
809
Reverse rotation
speed restriction
Torque restriction
810 input method
selection
Control
system
function
(A500
Series
vector
control)
Torque restriction
812 level
(regeneration)
Torque restriction
813 level (3rd
quadrant)
Torque restriction
814 level (4th
quadrant)
E-168
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
A
Function
Pr
No.
Name
815
Torque restriction
level 2
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name


Acceleration
816 torque restriction
level
Deceleration
817 torque restriction
level
Deceleration
817 torque restriction
level
818
Name
Pr
No.
Name
B
N:N Network
Acceleration
816 torque restriction
level
Pr
No.
Easy gain tuning
response level
setting (simple
mode)
C
Parallel Link
Easy gain tuning
819 selection (simple
mode)
820
Speed control P
gain 1
D
822
Speed setting
filter 1
823
Speed detection
filter 1
824
Torque control P
gain 1
825
Torque control
integral time 1
826
Torque setting
filter 1
827
Torque detection
filter 1
828
Model speed
control gain
830
Speed control P
gain 2
831
Speed control
integral time 2
G
Speed setting
832
filter 2
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Computer Link
Speed control
821
integral time 1
Torque control P
gain 2
835
Torque control
integral time 2
836
Torque setting
filter 2
837
Torque detection
filter 2
840
Torque bias
selection






F
H
I
841 Torque bias 1
Torque
biases
842 Torque bias 2
843 Torque bias 3








844 Torque bias filter
845
Remote
Maintenance
834

Programming
Communication
Speed detection
filter 2

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
833
E
Inverter
Communication
Control
system
function
(A500
Series
vector
control)
Common Items
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
Torque bias
operation time
E-169
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
































































Torque bias
846 balance
compensation
Torque
biases
847
Fall-time torque
bias No. 3 bias
Fall-time torque
848
bias No. 3 gain
849
Analog input
offset adjustment
851
Number of
encoder pulses
852
Encoder rotation
direction
854 Excitation ratio
Additional
functions
859 Torque current
862
Notch filter
frequency
863 Notch filter depth
864 Torque detection
Display
functions
Terminal
assignment
function
Protection
functions
865
Low speed
detection
866
Torque monitoring
reference
867 DA1 output filter
No. 1 terminal
868 function
assignment
870
Speed deviation
level
871
Speed deviation
time
873 Speed restriction
874 OLT level setting
Operation
selecting
functions
875 Fault definition
876
Thermal relay
protector input
Speed feed
forward/model
877
adaptive speed
control selection
Control
system
functions
878
Speed feed
forward filter
Speed feed
879 forward torque
restriction
880 Load inertia ratio
Maintenance
functions
E-170
881
Speed feed
forward gain
890
Maintenance
output setting time
891
Maintenance
output timer
892
Maintenance
output signal clear
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
A
Function
Pr
No.
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
FM terminal
calibration
DA1 terminal
calibration
900
FM terminal
calibration
900
FM terminal
calibration
900
901
DA2 terminal
calibration
901
AM terminal
calibration
901
AM terminal
calibration


Pr
No.
Name
C1
FM (AM) terminal
(900
calibration
(901))


902
Frequency setting
voltage bias
902
Frequency setting
voltage bias
903
Speed setting No.
2 gain
903
Frequency setting
voltage gain
903
Frequency setting
voltage gain
903
Frequency setting
current bias
Frequency setting
C5
current bias
Frequency setting (904) frequency
904
current bias
C6 Frequency setting
(904) current bias
Frequency setting
current gain
905
Torque command
No. 3 bias
904
905
Torque command
No. 3 gain
905


No. 1 terminal
bias (speed)
918
No. 1 terminal
gain (speed)
904
Frequency setting
current gain
905
Frequency setting C7 Frequency setting
(905) current gain
current gain
Parameter set by
C8
manufacturer. Do
(269)
not set.


F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
No. 1 terminal
920 gain (torque/
magnetic flux)
Built-in frequency
setting
922 potentiometer




bias*7



Motor
temperature
925
detection
calibration
No. 6 terminal
gain (speed)
928
No. 6 terminal
bias (torque)
929
No. 6 terminal
gain (torque)
990 PU buzzer control
Additional
functions
991


I
990 PU buzzer control
991

PU contrast
adjustment

990 PU Buzzer control 990 PU buzzer control
991

PU contrast
adjustment

991

PU contrast
adjustment

n14 PU buzzer sound
(990) control
n15 PU contrast
(991) adjustment
PU main display
n16
screen data
(992)
selection
E-171
Apx.A
Discontinued
models

PU contrast
adjustment

Remote
Maintenance
927
H
Programming
Communication
No. 6 terminal
bias (speed)
G
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Built-in frequency
setting
923 potentiometer
gain*7
926
D
E
No. 1 terminal
919 bias (torque/
magnetic flux)

C
Inverter
Communication
917
Frequency setting
current bias
Frequency setting C4 Frequency setting
voltage gain
(903) voltage gain
Computer Link
Speed setting No.
2 bias
Parallel Link
902
Frequency setting
C2
voltage bias
Frequency setting (902) frequency
902
voltage bias
C3 Frequency setting
(902) voltage bias
B
N:N Network
900
904
Calibration
functions
Name
Common Items
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
FREQROL V500 Series FREQROL F500 Series FREQROL A500 Series FREQROL E500 Series FREQROL S500 Series
Function
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Pr
No.
Name
Additional
functions








Pr
No.
Name
PU disconnection
n17
detection/PU
(993)
setting lock
The parameters Pr. 77 and Pr. 79 cannot be written in computer link operation using the FR-A5NR.
*1.
E-172
Can be read or written when the parameter Pr. 77 is set to "801".
*2.
Can be read or written when the parameter Pr. 29 is set to "3".
*3.
Indicates a parameter whose setting is ignored when the advanced magnetic flux vector control mode
is selected.
*4.
Can be set when the parameters Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 are not set to "9999" and the parameter Pr. 60 is
set to "7" or "8".
*5.
Can be read or written when the parameters Pr. 80 and Pr. 81 are not set to "9999" and the parameter
Pr. 77 is set to "801".
*6.
Can be set only in the 200 V/100 V class.
*7.
Cannot be used in inverter communication.
*8.
This inverter communication function cannot read or write Pr. 37.
Set Pr. 37 to "0" when setting or monitoring the frequency in the PLC.
If any value other than "0" is set to Pr. 37 and the instruction code HFF is set to "01", the frequency
may not be set or monitored normally (in the 400 V class of the E500 series and S500 series).
(In the 200 V and 100 V classes of the E500 series, the frequency may not be set or monitored
normally if any value other than "0" is set to Pr. 37 without regard to the setting of the instruction code
HFF.)
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
A
The following parameters are provided in the F700, A700, E700 and D700 Series inverters. (For details, make
sure to refer to the respective inverter manual.)
FREQROL F700 Series
Name
FREQROL D700 Series
Pr
No.
Name
Torque boost
0
Torque boost
0
Torque boost
0
Torque boost
1
Maximum frequency
1
Maximum frequency
1
Maximum frequency
1
Maximum frequency
2
Minimum frequency
2
Minimum frequency
2
Minimum frequency
2
Minimum frequency
3
Base frequency
3
Base frequency
3
Base frequency
3
Base frequency
4
Multispeed setting
(high speed)
4
Multi-speed setting
(high speed)
4
Multi-speed setting
(high speed)
4
Multi-speed setting
(high speed)
5
Multispeed setting
(middle speed)
5
Multi-speed setting
(middle speed)
5
Multi-speed setting
(middle speed)
5
Multi-speed setting
(middle speed)
6
Multispeed setting
(low speed)
6
Multi-speed setting
(low speed)
6
Multi-speed setting
(low speed)
6
Multi-speed setting
(low speed)
7
Acceleration time
7
Acceleration time
7
Acceleration time
7
Acceleration time
8
Deceleration time
8
Deceleration time
8
Deceleration time
8
Deceleration time
9
Electronic thermal
O/L relay
9
Electronic thermal
O/L relay
9
Electronic thermal
O/L relay
9
Electronic thermal
O/L relay
10
DC injection brake
operation frequency
10
DC injection brake
operation frequency
10
DC injection brake
operation frequency
10
DC injection brake
operation frequency
11
DC injection brake
operation time
11
DC injection brake
operation time
11
DC injection brake
operation time
11
DC injection brake
operation time
12
DC injection brake
operation voltage
12
DC injection brake
operation voltage
12
DC injection brake
operation voltage
12
DC injection brake
operation voltage

13 Starting frequency
13 Starting frequency
13 Starting frequency
13 Starting frequency

14 Load pattern selection
14 Load pattern selection
14 Load pattern selection
14 Load pattern selection
15 Jog frequency
15 Jog frequency
15 Jog frequency
15 Jog frequency
16
Jog acceleration/
deceleration time
16
Jog acceleration/
deceleration time
16
Jog acceleration/
deceleration time
16
Jog acceleration/
deceleration time
17 MRS input selection

18

19 Base frequency voltage
19 Base frequency voltage
19 Base frequency voltage
19 Base frequency voltage
Acceleration/
20 deceleration reference
frequency
Acceleration/
20 deceleration reference
frequency
Acceleration/
20 deceleration reference
frequency
Acceleration/
20 deceleration reference
frequency
Acceleration/
21 deceleration time
increments
Acceleration/
21 deceleration time
increments
Acceleration/
21 deceleration time
increments

22
Stall prevention
operation level
22
Stall prevention
operation level
23
Stall prevention
operation level
compensation factor at
double speed
23
Stall prevention
operation level
compensation factor at
double speed
Acceleration/
deceleration
times
High speed maximum
frequency
High speed maximum
frequency
Stall prevention
operation level
23
Stall prevention
operation level
compensation factor at
double speed
23
Stall prevention
operation level
compensation factor at
double speed
18
High speed maximum
frequency
Multi-speed setting
24
(speed 4)
17 MRS input selection
18
High speed maximum
frequency

H
Multi-speed setting
24
(speed 4)
Multi-speed setting
(speed 5)
25
Multi-speed setting
(speed 5)
25
Multi-speed setting
(speed 5)
25
Multi-speed setting
(speed 5)
26
Multi-speed setting
(speed 6)
26
Multi-speed setting
(speed 6)
26
Multi-speed setting
(speed 6)
26
Multi-speed setting
(speed 6)
27
Multi-speed setting
(speed 7)
27
Multi-speed setting
(speed 7)
27
Multi-speed setting
(speed 7)
27
Multi-speed setting
(speed 7)
28
Multi-speed input
compensation selection
28
Multi-speed input
compensation selection



E-173
I
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
25

G
Remote
Maintenance
Multi-speed setting
24
(speed 4)
17 MRS input selection
F
Programming
Communication
22
Multi-speed setting
24
(speed 4)

18
Stall prevention
22 operation level
(torque limit level )
Stall prevention
Multispeed
setting
17 MRS input selection
E
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)

D
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Jog operation
C
Computer Link
0
B
Inverter
Communication
DC injection
brake
Name
FREQROL E700 Series
Pr
No.
Parallel Link
Basic functions
Name
FREQROL A700 Series
Pr
No.
N:N Network
Function
Pr
No.
Common Items
12.5.2 Parameters in F700, A700, E700 and D700 Series
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
FREQROL F700 Series
Function
Pr
No.
Name

Acceleration/
29 deceleration pattern
selection

30
Regenerative function
selection
FREQROL A700 Series
Pr
No.
Name
Acceleration/
29 deceleration pattern
selection
30
Regenerative function
selection
FREQROL E700 Series
Pr
No.
Name
Acceleration/
29 deceleration pattern
selection
30
Regenerative function
selection
FREQROL D700 Series
Pr
No.
Name
Acceleration/
29 deceleration pattern
selection
30
Regenerative function
selection
31 Frequency jump 1A
31 Frequency jump 1A
31 Frequency jump 1A
31 Frequency jump 1A
32 Frequency jump 1B
32 Frequency jump 1B
32 Frequency jump 1B
32 Frequency jump 1B
33 Frequency jump 2A
33 Frequency jump 2A
33 Frequency jump 2A
33 Frequency jump 2A
34 Frequency jump 2B
34 Frequency jump 2B
34 Frequency jump 2B
34 Frequency jump 2B
35 Frequency jump 3A
35 Frequency jump 3A
35 Frequency jump 3A
35 Frequency jump 3A
36 Frequency jump 3B
36 Frequency jump 3B
36 Frequency jump 3B
36 Frequency jump 3B

37 Speed display
37 Speed display
37 Speed display*1
37 Speed display*1



40
RUN key rotation
direction selection
40
RUN key rotation
direction selection
Frequency jump
Frequency
detection
Second
functions
Monitor
functions
Automatic
restart functions


41
Uptofrequency
sensitivity
41
Up-to-frequency
sensitivity
41
Up-to-frequency
sensitivity
41
Up-to-frequency
sensitivity
42
Output frequency
detection
42
Output frequency
detection
42
Output frequency
detection
42
Output frequency
detection
Output frequency
43 detection for reverse
rotation
Output frequency
43 detection for reverse
rotation
Output frequency
43 detection for reverse
rotation
Output frequency
43 detection for reverse
rotation
44
Second acceleration/
deceleration time
44
Second acceleration/
deceleration time
44
Second acceleration/
deceleration time
44
Second acceleration/
deceleration time
45
Second deceleration
time
45
Second deceleration
time
45
Second deceleration
time
45
Second deceleration
time
46 Second torque boost
46 Second torque boost
46 Second torque boost
46 Second torque boost
Second V/F
47
(base frequency)
Second V/F
47
(base frequency)
Second V/F
47
(base frequency)
47
Second V/F
(base frequency)
48
Second stall prevention
operation current
48
Second stall prevention
operation current
48
Second stall prevention
operation current
48
Second stall prevention
operation current
49
Second stall prevention
operation frequency
49
Second stall prevention
operation frequency
50
Second output
frequency detection
50
Second output
frequency detection




51
Second electronic
thermal O/L relay
51
Second electronic
thermal O/L relay
51
Second electronic
thermal O/L relay
51
Second electronic
thermal O/L relay
52
DU/PU main display
data selection
52
DU/PU main display
data selection
52
DU/PU main display
data selection
52
DU/PU main display
data selection
54
FM terminal function
selection
54
FM terminal function
selection
54
FM terminal function
selection
54
FM terminal function
selection
55
Frequency monitoring
reference
55
Frequency monitoring
reference
55
Frequency monitoring
reference
55
Frequency monitoring
reference
56
Current monitoring
reference
56
Current monitoring
reference
56
Current monitoring
reference
56
Current monitoring
reference
57 Restart coasting time
57 Restart coasting time
57 Restart coasting time
57 Restart coasting time
58 Restart cushion time
58 Restart cushion time
58 Restart cushion time
58 Restart cushion time

59
Remote function
selection
59
Remote function
selection
59
Remote function
selection
59
Remote function
selection

60
Energy saving control
selection
60
Energy saving control
selection
60
Energy saving control
selection
60
Energy saving control
selection
E-174
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
A
Function


Name
FREQROL E700 Series
Pr
No.
Name
61 Reference current
61 Reference current
Reference value at
62
acceleration
62
Reference value at
63
deceleration
Reference value at
63
deceleration
64
Starting frequency for
elevator mode

FREQROL D700 Series
Pr
No.
Name


Reference value at
acceleration
B
N:N Network
Automatic
acceleration
/deceleration
Name
FREQROL A700 Series
Pr
No.

65 Retry selection
65 Retry selection
65 Retry selection
65 Retry selection

Stall prevention
66 operation reduction
starting frequency
Stall prevention
66 operation reduction
starting frequency
Stall prevention
66 operation reduction
starting frequency
Stall prevention
66 operation reduction
starting frequency
Retry
Number of retries at
alarm occurrence
67
Number of retries at
alarm occurrence
67
Number of retries at
fault occurrence
67
Number of retries at
fault occurrence
68 Retry waiting time
68 Retry waiting time
68 Retry waiting time
Retry count display
69
erase
Retry count display
69
erase
Retry count display
69
erase
69
Retry count display
erase
70
Special regenerative
brake duty
Special regenerative
brake duty
Special regenerative
brake duty
Special regenerative
brake duty
70

71 Applied motor
71 Applied motor
71 Applied motor
71 Applied motor

PWM frequency
72
selection
PWM frequency
72
selection
PWM frequency
72
selection
72

73 Analog input selection
73 Analog input selection
73 Analog input selection
73 Analog input selection

74 Input filter time constant
74 Input filter time constant
74 Input filter time constant
74 Input filter time constant

75
Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection
75
Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection
75

76
Alarm code output
selection
76
Alarm code output
selection


77
Parameter write
selection
77
Parameter write
selection
77
Parameter write
selection
77
Parameter write
selection

78
Reverse rotation
prevention selection
78
Reverse rotation
prevention selection
78
Reverse rotation
prevention selection
78
Reverse rotation
prevention selection

79
Operation mode
selection
79
Operation mode
selection
79
Operation mode
selection
79
Operation mode
selection



F

80 Motor capacity
81 Number of motor poles
81 Number of motor poles

82 Motor excitation current
82 Motor excitation current
82 Motor excitation current
83 Motor rated voltage
83 Motor rated voltage
83 Motor rated voltage
84 Rated motor frequency
84 Rated motor frequency
84 Rated motor frequency
Speed control gain
89 (advanced magnetic
flux vector)

90 Motor constant (R1)
90 Motor constant (R1)
90 Motor constant (R1)
91 Motor constant (R2)
91 Motor constant (R2)
92 Motor constant (L1)
92 Motor constant (L1)
93 Motor constant (L2)
93 Motor constant (L2)
94 Motor constant (X)
94 Motor constant (X)
Speed control gain
(magnetic flux vector)
Online auto tuning
selection

96
Auto tuning setting/
status
96


H
I



Auto tuning setting/
status
96
Auto tuning setting/
status
E-175
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
95
80 Motor capacity
G
Remote
Maintenance


Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection
80 Motor capacity
89
90 Motor constant (R1)

75
E
Programming
Communication

Reset selection/
disconnected PU
detection/PU stop
selection
PWM frequency
selection
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Simple
magnetic
flux vector
control
70
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Motor capacity
80 (simple magnetic flux
vector control)
70
Inverter
Communication

D
Computer Link
68 Retry waiting time
C
Parallel Link

67
Common Items
FREQROL F700 Series
Pr
No.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
FREQROL F700 Series
Function
Adjustable 5
points V/F
Pr
No.
Name
FREQROL A700 Series
Pr
No.
Name
100 V/F1 (first frequency)
100 V/F1(first frequency)
V/F1 (first frequency
101
voltage)
101
FREQROL E700 Series
Pr
No.

FREQROL D700 Series
Name
Pr
No.
Name



V/F1(first frequency
voltage)
102
V/F2 (second
frequency)
103
V/F2 (second frequency
V/F2(second frequency
103
voltage)
voltage)
102 V/F2(second frequency)
104 V/F3 (third frequency)
104 V/F3(third frequency)
V/F3 (third frequency
105
voltage)
105
106 V/F4 (fourth frequency)
106 V/F4(fourth frequency)
V/F4 (fourth frequency
107
voltage)
107
108 V/F5 (fifth frequency)
108 V/F5(fifth frequency)
V/F5 (fifth frequency
109
voltage)
109
V/F5(fifth frequency
voltage)
110
Third acceleration/
deceleration time
V/F3(third frequency
voltage)
V/F4(fourth frequency
voltage)
111 Third deceleration time
112 Third torque boost
Third
functions

113
Third V/F (base
frequency)
114
Third stall prevention
operation current
115
Third stall prevention
operation frequency
116
Third output frequency
detection

117
PU communication
station
117
PU communication
station number
117
PU communication
station number
117
PU communication
station number
118
PU communication
speed
118
PU communication
speed
118
PU communication
speed
118
PU communication
speed
119
PU communication stop
PU communication stop
PU communication stop
PU communication stop
119
119
119
bit length.
bit length
bit length
bit length
120
PU communication
parity check
PU connector
communication 121 Number of PU
communication retries
120
PU communication
parity check
120
PU communication
parity check
120
PU communication
parity check
121
Number of PU
communication retries
121
Number of PU
communication retries
121
Number of PU
communication retries
122
PU communication
check time interval
122
PU communication
check time interval
122
PU communication
check time interval
122
PU communication
check time interval
123
PU communication
waiting time setting
123
PU communication
waiting time setting
123
PU communication
waiting time setting
123
PU communication
waiting time setting
PU communication CR/
PU communication CR/
PU communication
124 LF presence/absence
124 LF presence/absence
124
CR/LF selection
selection
selection
124
PU communication
CR/LF selection

125
Terminal 2 frequency
Terminal 2 frequency
125
setting gain frequency
setting gain frequency
125
Terminal 2 frequency
setting gain frequency
125
Terminal 2 frequency
setting gain frequency

126
Terminal 4 frequency
Terminal 4 frequency
126
setting gain frequency
setting gain frequency
126
Terminal 4 frequency
setting gain frequency
126
Terminal 4 frequency
setting gain frequency
E-176
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
A
Function
127
PID control automatic
switchover frequency
127
Name
PID control automatic
switchover frequency
FREQROL E700 Series
Pr
No.
127
Name
PID control automatic
switchover frequency
FREQROL D700 Series
Pr
No.
127
Name
PID control automatic
switchover frequency
128 PID action selection
128 PID action selection
128 PID action selection
129 PID proportional band
129 PID proportional band
129 PID proportional band
129 PID proportional band
130 PID integral time
130 PID integral time
130 PID integral time
130 PID integral time
131 PID maximum
131 PID upper limit
131 PID upper limit
131 PID upper limit
132 PID minimum
132 PID lower limit
132 PID lower limit
132 PID lower limit
133 PID action set point
133 PID action set point
133 PID action set point
133 PID action set point
134 PID differential time
134 PID differential time
134 PID differential time
134 PID differential time
Commercial powersupply switchover
135
sequence output
terminal selection
135
136
Electronic bypass
sequence selection
MC switchover interlock
MC switchover interlock
136
time
time
D
137 Start waiting time
138
Bypass selection at an
alarm
139
Automatic switchover
Automatic switchover
frequency between
139 frequency from inverter
inverter and commercial
to bypass operation
power-supply operation
140
Backlash acceleration
stopping frequency
140
Backlash acceleration
stopping frequency
141
Backlash acceleration
stopping time
141
Backlash acceleration
stopping time
142
Backlash deceleration
stopping frequency
142
Backlash deceleration
stopping frequency
143
Backlash deceleration
stopping time
143
Backlash deceleration
stopping time

144
Speed setting
switchover
144
Speed setting
switchover
PU
145
PU display language
selection
145
PU display language
selection





148
Stall prevention level at
0V input.
148
Stall prevention level at
0V input
149
Stall prevention level at
10V input.
149
Stall prevention level at
10V input
150
Output current detection
Output current detection
Output current detection
Output current detection
150
150
150
level
level
level
level
151
Output current detection
Output current detection
Output current detection
Output current detection
151
151
151
signal delay time
signal delay time
signal delay time
signal delay time
152
Zero current detection
level

Voltage reduction
154 selection during stall
prevention operation
Voltage reduction
154 selection during stall
prevention operation

RT signal function
RT signal reflection time
155
155 validity condition
selection
selection

156
Stall prevention
operation selection
156
Stall prevention
operation selection
145
PU display language
selection
145
PU display language
selection
146
Built-in potentiometer
switching
146
Built-in potentiometer
switching

152

Zero current detection
level
Zero current detection
153
time

156

Stall prevention
operation selection

152

H
Zero current detection
level
Zero current detection
153
time

156
G

I
Apx.A
Stall prevention
operation selection
E-177
Discontinued
models
Zero current detection
153
time
F
Remote
Maintenance
Zero current detection
153
time
E

Programming
Communication
Zero current detection
level

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
152

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Current
detection

Inverter
Communication
Backlash
measures
C
Computer Link
Commercial
137 Waiting time at a start
power
Commercial powersupply-inverter
supply operation
switch-over
138
switchover selection at
an alarm
B
Parallel Link
128 PID action selection
N:N Network
PID operation
Name
FREQROL A700 Series
Pr
No.
Common Items
FREQROL F700 Series
Pr
No.
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
FREQROL F700 Series
Function
Pr
No.
Name
FREQROL A700 Series
Pr
No.
Name
FREQROL E700 Series
Pr
No.
Name
FREQROL D700 Series
Pr
No.
Name

157 OL signal output timer
157 OL signal output timer

AM terminal function
158
selection
AM terminal function
158
selection

Automatic switchover
ON range
159 between commercial
powersupply and
inverter operation
Automatic switchover
frequency range from
159
bypass to inverter
operation

160
User group read
selection

161
Frequency setting/key
Frequency setting/key
Frequency setting/key
Frequency setting/key
161
161
161
lock operation selection
lock operation selection
lock operation selection
lock operation selection
Automatic restart after
162 instantaneous power
failure selection
Automatic
restart functions
Cumulative
monitor clear
User group
Input terminal
function
assignment
E-178
User group read
selection
Automatic restart after
162 instantaneous power
failure selection
163
First cushion time for
restart
164
First cushion voltage for
First cushion voltage for
164
restart
restart
Stall prevention
165 operation level for
restart
Current
detection
160
163
First cushion time for
restart
Stall prevention
165 operation level for
restart
157 OL signal output timer

160

User group read
selection
Automatic restart after
162 instantaneous power
failure selection


Stall prevention
165 operation level for
restart
166
Output current detection
Output current detection
166
signal retention time
signal retention time
167
Output current detection
Output current detection
167
operation selection
operation selection
170
Cumulative power
meter clear
170 Watt-hour meter clear
171
Operation hour meter
clear
171
Operation hour meter
clear
171
Operation hour meter
clear
172
User group registered
display/batch clear
172
User group registered
display/batch clear
172
User group registered
display/batch clear

157 OL signal output timer

160
173 User group registration
173 User group registration
173 User group registration
174 User group clear
174 User group clear
174 User group clear
Extended function
display selection
Automatic restart after
162 instantaneous power
failure selection


Stall prevention
165 operation level for
restart
166
Output current detection
signal retention time
167
Output current detection
operation selection

170 Watt-hour meter clear

170 Watt-hour meter clear
171

Operation hour meter
clear

178
STF terminal function
selection
178
STF terminal function
selection
178
STF terminal function
selection
178
STF terminal function
selection
179
STR terminal function
selection
179
STR terminal function
selection
179
STR terminal function
selection
179
STR terminal function
selection
180
RL terminal function
selection
180
RL terminal function
selection
180
RL terminal function
selection
180
RL terminal function
selection
181
RM terminal function
selection
181
RM terminal function
selection
181
RM terminal function
selection
181
RM terminal function
selection
182
RH terminal function
selection
182
RH terminal function
selection
182
RH terminal function
selection
182
RH terminal function
selection
183
RT terminal function
selection
183
RT terminal function
selection
183
MRS terminal function
selection
184
AU terminal function
selection
184
AU terminal function
selection
184
RES terminal function
selection
185
JOG terminal function
selection
185
JOG terminal function
selection
186
CS terminal function
selection
186
CS terminal function
selection
187
MRS terminal function
selection
187
MRS terminal function
selection
188
STOP terminal function
selection
188
STOP terminal function
selection
189
RES terminal function
selection
189
RES terminal function
selection




FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
A
Function
Name
FREQROL A700 Series
Pr
No.
Name
FREQROL E700 Series
Pr
No.
Name
RUN terminal function
selection
190
RUN terminal function
selection
190
RUN terminal function
selection
191
SU terminal function
selection
191
SU terminal function
selection
191
FU terminal function
selection
192
IPF terminal function
selection
192
IPF terminal function
selection
192
193
OL terminal function
selection
194
FU terminal function
selection

Output terminal
OL terminal function
193
function
selection
assignment
FU terminal function
194
selection
ABC1 terminal function
selection
195
ABC1 terminal function
selection
196
ABC2 terminal function
selection
196
ABC2 terminal function
selection
232
Multispeed setting
(speed 8)
232
Multi-speed setting
(speed 8)
Multi-speed setting
233
(speed 9)


A,B,C terminal function
selection
192
A,B,C terminal function
selection



Multi-speed setting
(speed 8)
Multi-speed setting
233
(speed 9)
232
C
Multi-speed setting
(speed 8)
Multi-speed setting
233
(speed 9)
234
Multi-speed setting
(speed 10)
234
Multi-speed setting
(speed 10)
234
Multi-speed setting
(speed 10)
235
Multispeed setting
(speed 11)
235
Multi-speed setting
(speed 11)
235
Multi-speed setting
(speed 11)
235
Multi-speed setting
(speed 11)
236
Multispeed setting
(speed 12)
236
Multi-speed setting
(speed 12)
236
Multi-speed setting
(speed 12)
236
Multi-speed setting
(speed 12)
237
Multispeed setting
(speed 13)
237
Multi-speed setting
(speed 13)
237
Multi-speed setting
(speed 13)
237
Multi-speed setting
(speed 13)
238
Multispeed setting
(speed 14)
238
Multi-speed setting
(speed 14)
238
Multi-speed setting
(speed 14)
238
Multi-speed setting
(speed 14)
239
Multispeed setting
(speed 15)
239
Multi-speed setting
(speed 15)
239
Multi-speed setting
(speed 15)
239
Multi-speed setting
(speed 15)

240
SoftPWM operation
selection
240
Soft-PWM operation
selection
240
Soft-PWM operation
selection
240
Soft-PWM operation
selection

241
Analog input display
unit switchover
241
Analog input display
unit switchover
241
Analog input display
unit switchover
241
Analog input display
unit switchover

Terminal 1 added
242 compensation amount
(terminal 2)
Terminal 1 added
242 compensation amount
(terminal 2)

Terminal 1 added
243 compensation amount
(terminal 4)
Terminal 1 added
243 compensation amount
(terminal 4)

244
Slip
compensation
245 Rated slip
Slip compensation time
constant
Constant-power region
247 slip compensation
selection



250 Stop selection

251
Slip compensation time
constant

250 Stop selection
251
Cooling fan operation
selection
245 Rated slip
Constant-power region
247 slip compensation
selection

244

Output phase failure
protection selection
252 Override bias
252 Override bias
253 Override gain
253 Override gain
246
Slip compensation time
constant
Earth (ground) fault
detection at start
250 Stop selection
251

244

Cooling fan operation
selection
245 Rated slip
Constant-power region
247 slip compensation
selection
249

Output phase loss
protection selection

246
Slip compensation time
constant
Constant-power range
247 slip compensation
selection
249
Earth (ground) fault
detection at start
250 Stop selection
251

Output phase loss
protection selection
H
I
Apx.A

Discontinued
models
Frequency
compensation
function
Output phase failure
protection selection
246

Remote
Maintenance

246
Cooling fan operation
selection
G
Programming
Communication
245 Rated slip
244
F
Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Cooling fan operation
selection
E
Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
Multispeed setting
(speed 10)
D
Inverter
Communication
234
Multispeed
setting
B
Computer Link
Multispeed setting
233
(speed 9)
232
RUN terminal function
selection
Parallel Link
195
190
Name
N:N Network
190
FREQROL D700 Series
Pr
No.
Common Items
FREQROL F700 Series
Pr
No.
E-179
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
FREQROL F700 Series
Function
Pr
No.
Name
FREQROL A700 Series
Pr
No.
Name
FREQROL E700 Series
Pr
No.
Name
FREQROL D700 Series
Pr
No.
Name
255 Life alarm status display 255 Life alarm status display 255 Life alarm status display 255 Life alarm status display
Life check

Power failure
stop
256
Inrush current limit
circuit life display
257
Control circuit capacitor
Control circuit capacitor
Control circuit capacitor
Control circuit capacitor
257
257
257
life display
life display
life display
life display
258
Main circuit capacitor
life display
258
Main circuit capacitor
life display
258
Main circuit capacitor
life display
258
Main circuit capacitor
life display
259
Main circuit capacitor
life measuring
259
Main circuit capacitor
life measuring
259
Main circuit capacitor
life measuring
259
Main circuit capacitor
life measuring
260
PWM frequency
automatic switchover

260
PWM frequency
automatic switchover
261
Power failure stop
selection
261
Power failure stop
selection
262
Subtracted frequency at
Subtracted frequency at
262
deceleration start
deceleration start
263
Subtraction starting
frequency
263
Subtraction starting
frequency
264
Powerfailure
deceleration time 1
264
Power-failure
deceleration time 1
256
261
Inrush current limit
circuit life display

Power failure stop
selection
Powerfailure
265
deceleration time 2
Power-failure
265
deceleration time 2
Power failure
266 deceleration time
switchover frequency
Power failure
266 deceleration time
switchover frequency
256

261

Inrush current limit
circuit life display

Power failure stop
selection

256

Inrush current limit
circuit life display


267
Terminal 4 input
selection
267
Terminal 4 input
selection
267
Terminal 4 input
selection
267
Terminal 4 input
selection

268
Monitor decimal digits
selection
268
Monitor decimal digits
selection
268
Monitor decimal digits
selection
268
Monitor decimal digits
selection
270
Stop-on contact control
selection


Stop-on contact/load
torque high speed
270
frequency control
selection

Load torque
high speed frequency control

Stop-on contact control

E-180

271
High-speed setting
maximum current
272
Middle-speed setting
minimum current
273
Current averaging
range
274
Current averaging filter
time constant

Stop-on contact
Stop-on contact
excitation current
275 excitation current low
275
low speed multiplying
speed multiplying factor
factor
276
PWM carrier frequency
at stop-on contact


276
PWM carrier frequency
at stop-on contact
Stall prevention
277 operation current
switchover

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
A
Function
Name
278
Name
Name
Brake opening
frequency
278
Brake opening
frequency
279 Brake opening current
279 Brake opening current
Brake opening current
280
detection time
Brake opening current
280
detection time
Brake operation time at
start
281
Brake operation time at
start
282
Brake operation
frequency
282
Brake operation
frequency
283
Brake operation time at
stop
283
Brake operation time at
stop
284
Deceleration detection
function selection


Droop control
286 Droop gain
Droop filter time
287
constant
287
288
Droop function
activation selection

292

Acceleration/
293 deceleration separate
selection

294

UV avoidance voltage
gain



Rotation direction
299 detection selection at
restarting

Magnitude of frequency
Magnitude of frequency
295
change setting
change setting

Rotation direction
299 detection selection at
restarting
Rotation direction
299 detection selection at
restarting
301 BCD input gain
302 BIN input bias
302 BIN input bias
303 BIN input gain
303 BIN input gain
305
Read timing operation
selection
Digital input and analog
304 input compensation
enable/disable selection
305
G
H

Programming
Communication
300 BCD input bias

297 Password lock/unlock
298 Frequency search gain
301 BCD input gain

296 Password lock level
298 Frequency search gain
300 BCD input bias
Digital input and analog
304 input compensation
enable/disable selection
F

Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Digital input
Rotation direction
299 detection selection at
restarting
E

Acceleration/
293 deceleration separate
selection
295
Password
function
Droop filter time
constant
Automatic acceleration/
Automatic acceleration/
292
deceleration
deceleration



D

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
291 Pulse train I/O selection
C
Inverter
Communication

B

286 Droop gain
Name
Computer Link

FREQROL D700 Series
Pr
No.
Parallel Link
281
Overspeed detection
frequency (Speed
285
deviation excess
detection frequency)

FREQROL E700 Series
Pr
No.
N:N Network
Brake
sequence
function
FREQROL A700 Series
Pr
No.
Common Items
FREQROL F700 Series
Pr
No.

Read timing operation
selection
I
Remote
Maintenance
Apx.A
Discontinued
models
E-181
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
FREQROL F700 Series
Function
Analog output
Pr
No.
Name
Analog output

306
Analog output signal
selection
307
Setting for zero analog
output
307
Setting for zero analog
output
308
Setting for maximum
analog output
308
Setting for maximum
analog output
Analog output signal
309 voltage/current
switchover
FREQROL D700 Series
Pr
No.
Name


Analog output signal
309 voltage/current
switchover
310
Analog meter voltage
output selection
310
Analog meter voltage
output selection
311
Setting for zero analog
meter voltage output
311
Setting for zero analog
meter voltage output


Setting for maximum
312 analog meter voltage
output
313 DO0 output selection
314 DO1 output selection
314 DO1 output selection
315 DO2 output selection
315 DO2 output selection
316 DO3 output selection
316 DO3 output selection
317 DO4 output selection
317 DO4 output selection
318 DO5 output selection
318 DO5 output selection
319 DO6 output selection
319 DO6 output selection
320 RA1 output selection
320 RA1 output selection
321 RA2 output selection
321 RA2 output selection
322 RA3 output selection
322 RA3 output selection
323 AM0 0V adjustment
323 AM0 0V adjustment
324 AM1 0mA adjustment
324 AM1 0mA adjustment
Digital input unit
329
selection
329
331
RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
331
station
station number
332
RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
332
speed
speed
333
RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
333
stop bit length
stop bit length
RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
RS-485
334
334
parity check selection
parity check selection
communication
E-182
Name
Analog output signal
selection
313 DO0 output selection
Relay output
Name
FREQROL E700 Series
Pr
No.
306
Setting for maximum
312 analog meter voltage
output
Digital output
FREQROL A700 Series
Pr
No.
335
RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
335
number of retries
retry count
336
RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
336
check time interval
check time interval
337
RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
337
waiting time setting
waiting time setting

Digital input unit
selection

FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
A
Function
Name
Communication
338 operation command
source
Communication
338 operation command
source
Name
Communication
338 operation command
source
Communication speed
command source
339
Communication speed
command source
339
Communication speed
command source
339
Communication speed
command source
340
Communication startup
mode selection
340
Communication startup
mode selection
340
Communication startup
mode selection
340
Communication startup
mode selection
341
RS-485 communication
RS-485 communication
341
CR/LF selection
CR/LF selection




Communication error
count
Communication
342 EEPROM write
selection
343
Communication error
count
Communication
342 EEPROM write
selection
343
Communication error
count
Communication
342 EEPROM write
selection
343
Communication error
count
345 DeviceNet address
346 DeviceNet baud rate



D

380 Acceleration S-pattern 1
381
S-pattern
acceleration/
deceleration C
388
Send time interval at
heart beat
389
Minimum sending time
at heart beat
390
% setting reference
frequency
391
Receive time interval at
heart beat
392
Event driven detection
width
Frequency for 0 input
pulse
386
Frequency for
maximum input pulse


F

G



Non-Protocol
Communication
(FX2N-232IF)
Initial communication
delay time
385

Non-Protocol
Communication
(RS/RS2 Instruction)
387
Input pulse division
384
scaling factor
Inverter
Communication

Pulse train input
communication
E
382 Acceleration S-pattern 2

LONWORKS
Deceleration S-pattern
1
Deceleration S-pattern
383
2

H
450 Second applied motor
450 Second applied motor
Second motor control
451
method selection
453 Second motor capacity

Number of second
motor poles
455
Second motor excitation
current
456
Rated second motor
voltage
457
Rated second motor
frequency
I



Remote
Maintenance

454
Programming
Communication
450 Second applied motor
Second motor
constants
C
Computer Link
Communication reset
349
selection
B
Parallel Link
343
CCLink
Communication
338 operation command
source
Name
FREQROL D700 Series
Pr
No.
339
Communication
342 EEPROM write
selection
DeviceNet
Name
FREQROL E700 Series
Pr
No.
N:N Network
RS-485
communication
FREQROL A700 Series
Pr
No.
Common Items
FREQROL F700 Series
Pr
No.

Apx.A
Discontinued
models
Second motor constant
458
(R1)
E-183
FX Series PLC User's Manual - Data Communication Edition
12 Related Data
Inverter Communication
12.5 FREQROL Inverter Parameter List
FREQROL F700 Series
Function
Second motor
constants
Pr
No.

495
Remote output
Name

Remote output
selection
459
Second motor constant
(R2)
460
Second motor constant
(L1)
461
Second motor constant
(L2)
462
Second motor constant
(X)
463
Second motor auto
tuning setting/status
495
Remote output
selection

495
Name
Name



Remote output
selection
496 Remote output data 1
496 Remote output data 1
497 Remote output data 2
497 Remote output data 2
Communication error
execution waiting time
502


Stop mode selection at
communication error
503 Maintenance timer
504
500
Maintenance timer
alarm output set time
503 Maintenance timer
504
Maintenance timer
alarm output set time
516
S-pattern time at a start
of acceleration
S-pattern time at a
517 completion of
acceleration


518
S-pattern time at a start
of deceleration
Communication error
execution waiting time
Communication error
501 occurrence count
display
502
Stop mode selection at
communication error
503 Maintenance timer
504
FREQROL D700 Series
Pr
No.
497 Remote output data 2
Communication error
Communication
501 occurrence count
error
display
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration D
Name
FREQROL E700 Series
Pr
No.
496 Remote output data 1
500
Maintenance
FREQROL A700 Series
Pr
No.
Maintenance timer
alarm output set time


541
Frequency command
sign selection (CC-Link)
542
Communication station
number (CCLink)
543
Baud rate selection
(CC-Link)
544
CC-Link extended
setting
495
Remote output
selection
496 Remote output data 1


502
Stop mode selection at
communication error
503 Maintenance timer
504
Maintenance timer
alarm output set time
S-pattern time at a
519 completion of
deceleration
542
CCLink
Communication station
number (C